Document:

Exhibit 10.3

    

      

      AGREEMENT

      

      BETWEEN

      

      SIERRA
        PACIFIC POWER COMPANY

      RENO,
        NEVADA

      

      AND

      

      LOCAL
        UNION 1245

      OF
        THE

      INTERNATIONAL
        BROTHERHOOD

      OF
        ELECTRICAL WORKERS

      

      

      AFFILIATED
        WITH THE

      AMERICAN
        FEDERATION OF LABOR AND

      THE
        CONGRESS OF INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATIONS

      AFL-CIO

      

      

      JANUARY
        1, 2006 - DECEMBER 31, 2009

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      TABLE
        OF CONTENTS

      

      

      TITLE
        PAGE

      

      

      Agreement 1

      Preamble 1

      	1.  	
              Recognition1

            

      	2.  	
              Continuity
                of Service2

            

      	3.  	
              Definitions3

            

      	4.  	
              Wages5

            

      	5.  	
              Transportation7

            

      	6.  	
              Working
                Hours9

            

      	7.  	
              Shift
                Premium21

            

      	8.  	
              Leaves
                of Absence22

            

      	9.  	
              Inclement
                Weather Practice24

            

      	10.  	
              Overtime25

            

      	11.  	
              Holidays30

            

      	12.  	
              Vacations32

            

      	13.  	
              Safety35

            

      	14.  	
              Union
                Activity38

            

      	15.  	
              Sick
                Leave39

            

      	16.  	
              Seniority42

            

      	17.  	
              Expenses51

            

      	18.  	
              Apprenticeship57

            

      	19.  	
              Miscellaneous59

            

      	20.  	
              Supplemental
                Benefits for Industrial Injury66

            

      	21.  	
              Grievance
                Procedure66

            

      	22.  	
              Employee
                Benefit Program70

            

      	23.  	
              Demotion
                and Layoff Procedure80

            

      	24.  	
              Term
                of Agreement84

            

      

      

      

      

      

      

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      

      ATTACHMENTS
        PAGE

      

      

      	I.  	
              Exhibit
                A

            

      (1)
        Wage
        Schedules  91

      

      	II.  	
              Exhibit
                B

            

      (1)
        Classifications and Job Descriptions  108

      (2)
        Deleted Job Classifications  170

      

      	III.  	
              Letters
                of Understanding

            

      1.  Clerical
        Bidding Notes (See
        Attachment IV, Exhibit “C” (1)173

      2.  Sick
        Leave Payoff (See
        Title 15.9)173

      3.  Communications
        Technician, Telecommunications Dept (Deleted
        3/5/07)173

      4.  Equipment
        Op Evaluation Committee (Deleted
        1/1/98 - Reinstated 1/1/03)173

      5.  Equipment
        Operator Program174

      6.  Emergency
        Response Program (See
        Attachment VIII)174

      7.  Family
        Sick Leave Program (See
        Title 15.10)174

      8.  Telephone
        Allowance174

      9.  Departmental
        Seniority for Laborers (Deleted
        1/1/95)174

      10.  Yard
        Operator - Power Production175

      11.  Clerical
        Occupational Group-Changing Work Hours (See
        Title 6.15)175

      12.  Accident
        Prevention Board Business Representative As Member175

      E-Mail
        for Union Communications

      New
        Employee Orientation Participation By Union (See
        Title 14.6)

      13.  Joint
        Benefits Committee Established175

      Optional
        Life Insurance

      Long-Term
        Disability Bargaining Unit Insuring Plan (See
        Title 22)

      14.  Part-Time
        Employees Terms And Conditions
        (See
        Titles 3.5 & 22)175

      15.  Equipment
        Operator Progression Guidelines175

      16.  Work-At-Home
        Schedule for CSR’s (Business Office)176

      17.  Generation
        Work Schedules (Added
        1/1/03)177

      Exhibit
        A
        - Nine (9) Hour Schedule

      Exhibit
        B
        - Ten (10) Hour Schedule

      Exhibit
        C
        - Twelve (12) Hour Schedule

      18.  Department
        of Transportation Hours of Service (Added
        1/1/03)182

      19.  Neutrality
        Agreement (Added
        11/2/98)183

      20.  Hiring
        Hall Agreement (Added
        3/5/07)XXX

      

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      

      ATTACHMENTS
        (Continued) PAGE

      

      

      	IV.  	
              Exhibit
                C (1) Lines of Progression for Bidding &
                Demotional

            

      Purposes
        by Occupational Groups 187

      Definition
        of Occupational Groups 187

      Lines
        of
        Progression Fold-Out

      Bidding
        Notes 188

      

      	V.  	
              Exhibit
                D Bargaining
                Unit Medical/Dental/Vision192

            

      Options
        Comparison

      

      	VI.  	
              Out-of-Town
                Work Assignment Guidelines196

            

      

      	VII.  	
              Job
                Site Reporting (Cancelled
                by the Union on 10/24/02)199

            

      

      	VIII.  	
              Emergency
                Response Program200

            

      

      	IX.  	
              Company
                Statement202

            

      RE:
        Continuation of Post Retirement Medical Coverage

      

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      INDEX

      SPPCO-IBEW
        LOCAL UNION 1245 AGREEMENT

      

      PAGE

      

      AGREEMENT
        (INTRODUCTION & PREAMBLE) 1

      APPRENTICESHIP 57-59

      ARBITRATION
        PROCEDURE 69-70

      BANKRUPTCY
        CLAUSE 66

      BIDDING
        NOTES 188-191

      BULLETIN
        BOARDS, UNION 38

      CALL
        OUTS  25-30

      CHECK-OFF,
        UNION DUES 2,
        38

      CLERICAL
        BIDDING NOTES 190-191

      CLERICAL
        - CHANGE OF WORK HOURS 21

      COMMITTEES

      Accident
        Prevention Board 36

      Equipment
        Operator Evaluation 173-174

      Joint
        Apprenticeship Training 57-58

      Joint
        Benefits 80

      Joint
        Grievance 66-67

      Labor/Management 39

      COMPANY
        VEHICLE USE 7-9

      CONTINUITY
        OF SERVICE TO THE PUBLIC 2

      DAY
        EMPLOYEES 11-13

      DEFINITIONS
        OF EMPLOYEE STATUS 3-5

      DEMOTION
        PROCEDURE  80-84

      DISCRIMINATION,
        RACE, COLOR, ETC. 2

      DISQUALIFICATION
        OF PREFERRED BIDDER 70

      DOT
        HOURS
        OF SERVICE LETTER OF AGREEMENT 182

      DOUBLE
        TIME  25-30

      DRIVERS
        LICENSE REQUIREMENTS 7-9

      EMERGENCY
        RESPONSE PROGRAM 200-201

      EMPLOYEE
        BENEFIT PROGRAMS 70-80

      EMPLOYEE
        DISCOUNT 79

      EMPLOYEE
        PLACEMENT

      Disabled 50-51

      New
        Technologies 50-51

      Revision
        of Operations 50-51

      Return
        from Military Leave 50-51

      Temperamentally
        Unsuited 50-51

      ENHANCED
        SEVERANCE/RETIREMENT BRIDGE PROGRAM 61-65

      EQUIPMENT
        OPERATOR PROGRESSION GUIDELINES 175-176

      

      

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      

      

      

      INDEX
        (Continued)

      

      PAGE

      EXPENSES

      Meals 51-57

      Board/Lodging 51-57

      Subsistence 51-57

      Moving 51-57

      FAMILY
        SICK LEAVE PROGRAM 42

      FOREMAN
        SELECTION 47-48

      GENERATION
        WORK SCHEDULES 178-182

      GRIEVANCE
        PROCEDURE 66-70

      GROUP
        LIFE INSURANCE 78

      HIRING
        HALL  

      HOLIDAYS  30-32

      INCLEMENT
        WEATHER 24-25

      INTERIM
        NEGOTIATIONS 7

      JOB
        BIDDING  42-51

      JOB
        DEFINITIONS (EXHIBIT B) 108-169

      JOB
        FLEXIBILITY 60

      LAYOFF,
        LACK OF WORK 80-84

      LEAVES
        OF
        ABSENCE

      Military 22

      Union 22

      Personal 23

      Family
        and Medical 24

      LETTERS
        OF UNDERSTANDING 173-186

      LINES
        OF
        PROGRESSION Fold-Out

      LONG-TERM
        DISABILITY PLAN 79

      LUNCH
        PERIOD 10

      MANAGEMENT
        RIGHTS 59-60

      MEAL
        ALLOWANCES 52

      MEAL
        PERIODS 52

      MEDICAL/DENTAL/VISION 75-78

      MEMBERSHIP  2,
        38

      METER
        READER ALLOWANCE  7

      NEUTRALITY
        AGREEMENT 183-186

      NON-BARGAINING
        UNIT ASSIGNMENTS 43

      OCCUPATIONAL
        GROUP DEFINITIONS 187

      OFF
        SCHEDULE ASSIGNMENT 13-14

      OFFICE
        SERVICE EMPLOYEES 20-21

      ON
        CALL -
        STANDBY 59

      OPERATIONS
        CENTER EMPLOYEES 15

      OUT-OF-TOWN
        GUIDELINES 196-198

      OUT-OF-TOWN
        PREMIUM 56

      OVERTIME
        PAY 25-30

      

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      

      INDEX
        (Continued)

      

      PAGE

      

      PART-TIME
        EMPLOYEES’ BENEFITS 79-80

      PART-TIME
        EMPLOYEES’ DEFINITIONS 4-5

      PASS
        -
        UNION BUSINESS REPRESENTATIVE 38

      PAY
        PERIODS  5-6

      POST
        RETIREMENT MEDICAL 72-73

      PREARRANGED
        WORK 25-30

      PROMOTION
        (QUALIFYING PERIOD) 48

      PROVISIONAL
        (PEP) EMPLOYEES 3-5

      RECOGNITION  1-2

      RELOCATION
        ASSISTANCE 57

      REPORTING
        PLACE 9-21

      RESIDENTIAL
        REQUIREMENTS 2-3

      REST
        PERIOD  28-30

      RETIREMENT
        PLAN 71-72

      SAFETY  35-38

      SENIORITY  42-51

      SERVICE
        EMPLOYEES 18-20

      SEVERANCE
        PLAN 61

      SHIFT
        EMPLOYEES 16-18

      SHIFT
        PREMIUM 21-22

      SHORT
        TERM INCENTIVE PLAN (STIP) 88-90

      SICK
        LEAVE  39-42

      SICK
        LEAVE PAYOFF 40-41

      STRIKE
        AND LOCKOUT 2

      SUPPLEMENTAL
        BENEFITS FOR INDUSTRIAL INJURY 66

      TELEPHONE
        ALLOWANCE 174

      TEMPORARY
        ASSIGNMENTS 43

      TERM
        OF
        AGREEMENT 84-85

      TESTING
        REQUIREMENTS - POWER PRODUCTION Fold-Out

      TOOLS  60

      TRAVEL
        TIME  9-10

      UNION
        SECURITY 38

      UPGRADES  6

      VACATIONS  32-35

      VEBA
        TRUST FUNDING 

      VOLUNTARY
        INVESTMENT PLAN 73-75

      WAGE
        RATES (EXHIBIT A) 91-107

      WAGE
        STEPS WITHHELD 6

      WELLNESS
        PROGRAM 78

      WORK-AT-HOME
        SCHEDULE 176-177

      WORKING
        HOURS 9-21

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      

      AGREEMENT

      

      

      

      THIS
        AGREEMENT, made and entered into this first day of January, 2006, by and
        between
        SIERRA PACIFIC POWER COMPANY of Reno, Nevada, its successors or assigns,
        together with such other properties of a public utility character as may
        hereafter be acquired, hereinafter referred to as Company, and LOCAL UNION
        No.
        1245 of the INTERNATIONAL BROTHERHOOD OF ELECTRICAL WORKERS (affiliated with
        the
        American Federation of Labor-Congress of Industrial Organizations), hereinafter
        referred to as Union. (Amended 3/1/07)

      

      

      WITNESSETH
        that:

      

      WHEREAS,
        the parties hereto desire to facilitate the peaceful adjustment of differences
        that may from time to time arise between them, to promote harmony and efficiency
        to the end that Company, Union and the general public may benefit therefrom,
        and
        to establish wages, hours and working conditions for certain hereinafter
        designated employees of Company;

      

      WHEREAS,
        the parties hereby recognize that our industry is changing and will be faced
        with competitive threats, expanding customer requirements, and related
        implications that must be addressed. Both parties agree that the magnitude
        of
        the possible changes are currently unknown; however, the Union and Company
        both
        agree to meet these challenges jointly as committed partners with the end
        result
        being the Company and Union that the customers choose. (Amended
        1/1/03)

      

      NOW
        THEREFORE, the parties hereto do agree as follows:

      

      

      TITLE
        1

      RECOGNITION

      

      
        	
                1.1

              	
                For
                  the purpose of collective bargaining with respect to rates of pay,
                  wages,
                  hours of employment and other conditions of employment, Company
                  shall
                  recognize Union as the exclusive representative of those employees
                  for
                  whom the National Labor Relations Board certified Union as such
                  representative in Cases 20-R-1376 and 20-R-1403. It is agreed that
                  the
                  following specific classifications of employees shall be added
                  to those
                  classifications of employees which have previously been specifically
                  excluded from the Bargaining Unit by mutual
                  agreement.

              

      

      

      
        	
                1.2

              	
                Provisions
                  of this Agreement shall be limited in their application to employees
                  of
                  Company as described in Section 1.1 of this Title. When the words
                  "employee" and "employees" are used in this Agreement they shall
                  be
                  construed to refer only to employees described in said Section
                  1.1 unless
                  otherwise noted.

              

      

      

      
        	
                1.3

              	
                Company
                  shall deduct from their wages and pay over to the proper officers
                  of
                  Union, the membership dues of the members of the Union who individually
                  and voluntarily authorize such deductions in writing. The form
                  of
                  check-off authorization shall be approved by Company and
                  Union.

              

      

      

      
        	
                1.4

              	
                It
                  is the policy of the Company and the Union not to discriminate
                  against any
                  employee because of race, creed, religion, gender, age, pregnancy,
                  ethnicity, color, national origin, veteran status, sexual orientation,
                  mental or physical impairment provided the mental or physical impairment
                  does not render the employee incapable of performing the essential
                  functions of his position. It is further agreed that wherever in
                  this
                  Agreement the masculine term is used, it shall be considered applicable
                  to
                  both sexes. (Amended 3/1/07)

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        2

      CONTINUITY
        OF SERVICE

      

      
        	
                2.1

              	
                Company
                  is engaged in rendering public utility services to the public and
                  Union
                  and Company recognize that there is an obligation on each party
                  for the
                  continuous rendition and availability of such
                  services.

              

      

      

      
        	
                2.2

              	
                The
                  duties performed by employees of Company as part of their employment
                  pertain to and are essential in the operation of a public utility
                  and the
                  welfare of the public dependent thereon. During the term of this
                  Agreement, Union shall not call upon or authorize or permit employees
                  individually or collectively to cease or abstain from the performance
                  of
                  their duties for the Company, and Company shall not cause any
                  lockout.

              

      

      

      
        	
                2.3

              	
                Any
                  employee in a Bargaining Unit classification shall perform loyal
                  and
                  efficient work and service, and shall use their influence and best
                  efforts
                  to protect the properties of Company and its service to the public,
                  and
                  shall cooperate in promoting and advancing the welfare of Company
                  and in
                  preserving the continuity of its service to the public at all
                  times.

              

      

      

      
        	
                2.4

              	
                Consistent
                  with the Provisions of this Title, the parties recognize that Union,
                  Company, and all employees are mutually obligated to promote efficiency
                  and cooperation in Company's operations and harmony among Company's
                  employees. (Amended 1/1/03)

              

      

      

      
        	
                2.5

              	
                Consistent
                  with the provisions of this Title which pertain to continuity of
                  service
                  to the public and duties essential to the operation of the utility,
                  after
                  May 1, 1979 all employees shall be required by Company to either
                  report to
                  work on a call out basis within 45 minutes or reside within a thirty-five
                  (35) mile radius of the Company headquarters to which they regularly
                  report. An employee who is unable to report for work on a call-out
                  basis
                  within forty-five (45) minutes, will be exempt from the provisions
                  of
                  Section 10.3 of the Agreement. (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                Any
                  employee who must change his place of residence as provided herein
                  shall
                  be given a reasonable period of time to move in order to avoid
                  personal
                  hardship.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                Incumbent
                  employees who on May 1, 1979 reside within the present district
                  or
                  sub-district of the Company headquarters to which they regularly
                  report,
                  shall not be affected by the above provisions, until such time
                  as they
                  voluntarily change their residence, or job classification, or reporting
                  headquarters.

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        3

      DEFINITIONS

      

      
        	
                3.1

              	
                Employees
                  shall be known as "Regular," “Provisional”, "Temporary," "Part-Time" and
                  "Probationary." (Amended 5/18/99 by Letter of
                  Agreement)

              

      

      

      
        	
                3.2

              	
                For
                  the purpose of the contract, a regular employee is defined as an
                  employee
                  who has completed six (6) months of continuous service with the
                  Company,
                  excluding those hired as provisional employees. (Amended 5/18/99
                  by Letter
                  of Agreement)

              

      

      

      	3.3  	
              (a)A
                temporary employee is defined as an employee hired by the day for
                occasional or seasonal work, or for a limited time. A temporary employee
                shall not be eligible for sick pay, holiday pay, vacation pay, insurance
                coverage, pension coverage or items of similar nature, except as
                herein
                specifically provided. If a temporary employee should in the course
                of
                continuous employment, be reclassified to probationary or regular,
                he
                shall be credited with all continuous service in determining eligibility
                for such benefits that may accrue to him in his new status. A temporary
                employee shall receive not less than the minimum rate for the job
                except
                in the case of laborers. Temporary laborers, as defined in Exhibit
                A, may
                be hired for a period of not more than three (3) months at the special
                temporary labor rate. (Amended 5/18/99 by Letter of
                Agreement).

            

      

      (b) A
        provisional employee is defined as an employee whose employment is intended
        to
        last more than six (6) months but less than two (2) calendar years. The work
        performed is linked to specific projects or is in anticipation of future
        events
        with a specific date at which the position will be eliminated. The use of
        the
        provisional employee will not impede the opportunities of regular employees
        or
        bypass the bidding procedure as defined under Title 16 of the Collective
        Bargaining Agreement (CBA) and are not subject to Title 23 nor Sections 19.10
        and 19.11. Provisional employees will be required to remain in the position
        for
        the duration of their term with no bidding rights. They will accrue benefits
        equivalent to a regular employee for sick leave, vacation, medical insurance
        coverage, pension coverage and be subject to Section 3.6 of Title 3 for the
        duration of their assignment. They will be eligible for a Short Term Incentive
        Pay (STIP) payout as described in Attachment I, Exhibit “A”(1). For purposes of
        overtime work, preference will be extended to “regular” Sierra Pacific
        employees, and the company is under no obligation to balance overtime for
        provisional employees as specified under Section 10.3 of Title 10. A provisional
        employee will not receive less than the minimum rate for the job and will
        progress through the appropriate classification wage progression in accordance
        with the CBA. If employment of a provisional employee extends beyond two
        (2)
        calendar years, the employee will be reclassified to “regular” with a hire date
        and seniority date equivalent to the start date of his provisional term.
        (Added
        5/18/99 by Letter of Agreement)

      

      (c) A
        provisional employee who is offered and accepts a bargaining unit position
        as a
        probationary employee with no break in service shall be eligible for health
        and
        welfare benefits and vacation accrual based on their continuous service as
        a
        provisional and probationary employee. (Added 3/19/02 by Letter of
        Agreement)

      

      
        	
                3.4

              	
                A
                  probationary employee is defined as an employee hired for a position
                  that
                  has been regularly established and is of indeterminate duration.
                  A
                  probationary employee shall receive sick pay, vacation pay, insurance
                  coverage, pension coverage or items of a similar nature as he shall
                  become
                  eligible, but in all other respects shall be equivalent to a regular
                  employee, subject to the provision of 3.6 of this Title. A probationary
                  employee shall receive not less than the minimum rate for the
                  job.

              

      

      

      3.5 (a) A
        part-time employee is one scheduled to work less than five (5) days per week
        or
        less than eight (8) hours per day. A limited number of part-time employees
        may
        be assigned to work covered by the Bargaining Agreement, provided that such
        assignment shall not result in the loss of regular employment for regular
        employees, nor shall the employees so assigned affect the status of or impede
        the promotional opportunities of regular employees. Part-time employees shall
        be
        paid the wage rates established in Exhibit A for the work performed. In
        determining allowances for vacations, sick leave, and other benefits hereunder,
        such allowance shall be prorated in direct ratio that the number of hours
        worked
        per week bears to forty (40). (Amended 1/1/95)

      

      (b) The
        number of part-time employees in all "Clerical Department" classifications
        will
        not exceed 15% of the aggregate number of employees in all "Clerical Department"
        classifications. (Amended 1/1/98)

      

      
        	 	
                Schedules
                  will be established in full hour increments and the employee's
                  classification, i.e., one-half (1/2) time or three-quarter (3/4)
                  time will
                  be based on the established schedule at the time they are hired
                  and an
                  annual (payroll year) review of hours actually worked (excluding
                  non-productive time) thereafter. Status changes will apply prospectively
                  only. (Amended 1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	
                3.6

              	
                The
                  retention of temporary, provisional and probationary employees
                  is at the
                  sole discretion of the Company, and termination of employment of
                  such
                  employees shall not be subject to review through the grievance
                  procedure.
                  (Amended 5/18/99 by Letter of
                  Agreement)

              

      

      

      
        	
                3.7

              	
                Continuous
                  service with Company shall start with the date of employment and
                  consist
                  of the entire period of employment. Continuous service will be
                  broken when
                  (a) an employee is discharged for cause; (b) an employee voluntarily
                  terminates employment; (c) an employee has been laid off for more
                  than
                  twelve (12) consecutive months; (d) an employee has violated the
                  provisions of 8.4; (e) an employee has taken a leave of absence
                  of over
                  thirty (30) calendar days as defined in Section 8.1. (Amended
                  5/1/88)

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        4

      WAGES

      

      
        	
                4.1

              	
                The
                  wage to be paid employees of the Company covered by this Agreement
                  shall
                  be at the rates specified in the schedule hereto attached, numbered
                  Exhibit A, and made a part hereof.

              

      

      

      
        	
                4.2

              	
                All
                  employees shall be placed on an hourly rate of pay and shall be
                  paid on
                  alternate Fridays for all time worked during the two (2) week period
                  ending the previous Saturday midnight; exclusive of overtime worked
                  during
                  the second week of the two week period. Any such deferred payment
                  shall be
                  included with the paycheck for the payroll period next succeeding
                  the
                  period in which such overtime was worked. In order to spread the
                  payroll
                  work the Company reserves the right to divide the payroll into
                  two groups,
                  paying each group on alternate Fridays. If a payday falls on a
                  holiday,
                  the day next preceding such holiday shall be pay day. However,
                  if a payday
                  falls on the Day after Thanksgiving the following Monday shall
                  be payday.
                  Payroll deductions for employees shall occur semi-monthly (first
                  and
                  second paycheck each month) including, but not limited to,
                  Employee-only/Dependent Medical premium payments, Long-term Disability
                  Insurance premiums, Life Insurance premiums, Union Dues, and Credit
                  Union
                  deposits or payments. (Amended 4/11/00 by Letter of
                  Agreement)

              

      

      

      4.3        
        (a) An
        employee who temporarily assumes the duties and responsibilities of a
        classification having a higher minimum rate shall be paid not less than the
        minimum rate of the higher classification for the time worked, meal and travel
        time, as applicable, computed to the next quarter (1/4) hour. (Amended
        5/1/83)

      

      1.
         Any
        upgrade position, within a specific headquarters, lacking an incumbent employee
        and continuing for a cumulative period of 1500 straight-time hours in a 12-month
        period shall require posting of the position. This provision does not apply
        to
        those classifications designated as “upgrade only”. Exceptions to this provision
        can be made by mutual agreement between the Company and Union, i.e., training
        positions and special projects. (Amended 1/1/03)

      

      (b) When
        an
        employee is temporarily reassigned to work in a classification higher than
        his
        regular classification, he shall be paid, upon such reassignment, the rate
        of
        pay he last received in such higher classification, plus any general wage
        increase or adjustments subsequently made therein.

      

      (c) When
        an
        employee is temporarily assigned or reassigned to work in a classification
        lower
        than his regular classification, his rate of pay will not be
        reduced.

      

      (d) Where
        automatic progression between classification or within the pay rate range
        of a
        classification is provided by the Agreement, it is understood that the
        employee's performance must be satisfactory to qualify for advancement. Where
        an
        employee's performance is unsatisfactory and an automatic progression wage
        step
        has been withheld, the Investigating Committee, provided for in Section 21.2
        of
        the Agreement, may review the employee's performance.

      

      (e) Where
        automatic progression in any classification is provided by the Agreement,
        an
        automatic progression wage step will be withheld after an employee is off
        work
        for sixty (60) calendar days or more. (Amended 5/1/83)

      

      
        	
                4.4

              	
                Company
                  and Union may agree to additional classifications and/or revisions
                  of
                  existing classifications and wages and lines of progression with
                  respect
                  thereto, during the term of this Agreement. Pending negotiations
                  with
                  respect to such classifications, wage rates and lines of progression,
                  the
                  Company may establish temporary classifications and wage
                  rates.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                The
                  Company will promptly notify the Union of any such temporary
                  classifications and/or revisions and wage rates which are established.
                  When the Company and Union reach agreement on the wage rate for
                  the new
                  classification and/or revised classification, it shall be retroactive
                  to
                  the date when the classification was first temporarily established
                  or
                  revised.

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        5

      TRANSPORTATION

      

      
        	
                5.1

              	
                Company
                  or public transportation shall be furnished all employees requiring,
                  at
                  the discretion of the Company, transportation in the performance
                  of their
                  duties. In the event an employee is asked to use his own automobile
                  for
                  Company business, he shall be reimbursed at the current rate sanctioned
                  by
                  the Internal Revenue Code, Section 274, Treasury Regulations and
                  Administrative Interpretations. (Amended
                  1/1/95)

              

      

      

      
        	
                5.2

              	
                Regular
                  full-time Reno area Meter Readers shall be required to use their
                  personal
                  vehicles in the performance of their assigned duties within the
                  Reno/Sparks metropolitan area for which they shall be reimbursed
                  at the
                  rate of One Hundred Eighty Dollars ($180.00) effective 5/1/96 per
                  month
                  for each month personal vehicles are so used. An allowance has
                  been
                  included in the reimbursement for the difference in cost between
                  pleasure
                  and business vehicle insurance coverage. As a condition of employment,
                  personal vehicle insurance coverage shall be provided by the employee
                  in
                  an amount not less than the minimum state insurance requirements
                  for such
                  vehicle's use, and; a certificate of insurance with a thirty (30)
                  day
                  cancellation clause shall be required from each employee's insurance
                  Company naming Sierra Pacific Power Company as an "Additional Insured
                  Non-Owner" for each such vehicle used. Reno area Meter Readers
                  shall not
                  be required to use their personal vehicles outside the Reno/Sparks
                  Metropolitan area. (Amended 1/1/98)

              

      

      

      5.3       
        (a) Any
        employee who may be required to operate Company vehicles and/or equipment
        while
        performing duties pertinent to his job classification must possess and maintain
        the appropriate licenses or permits required by applicable laws and/or Company
        policy. (Amended 5/1/82)

      

       (b)
         An
        employee incumbent in any such job who is unable to maintain the necessary
        driver's license, shall be returned to his former classification and rate
        of pay
        or, by mutual agreement between the Company and Union, shall be placed in
        another classification. (Amended 5/1/82)

      

      
        	 	 	
                In
                  the specific event of where an employee is unable to maintain the
                  necessary driver’s license for driving under the influence or controlled
                  substance abuse, the following shall apply: (Added
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      1.
         Said
        employee for a 1st occurrence shall retain his rate of pay but may be required
        to work in another classification by mutual agreement between the Company
        and
        Union. However, a return to work agreement will be made between the Company,
        Union and employee specifically addressing terms and conditions of continued
        employment. (Added 1/1/98)

       

      2.
         In the event of a 2nd occurrence, within 5 years of the 1st, said employee
        will not be accommodated in existing position. The Company and Union will
        endeavor to place the employee; however, if no vacancies exist, this could
        result in termination. (Added 1/1/98)

       

      3.
         In
        the
        event of a 3rd occurrence, within 5 years of the 1st, the Company is not
        obligated for any reason whatsoever to accommodate said employee in any
        position. (Added 1/1/98)

      

      (c) A
        successful bidder on any job requiring vehicle and/or equipment operation
        will
        be given a thirty (30) day period beyond the date of the job award to obtain
        the
        proper licenses and/or permits. Additional training must be arranged through
        Department Management. Bidder must be trained and/or evaluated prior to
        receiving approval to operate Company vehicles and/or equipment. (Amended
        1/1/98)

      

      (d) Any
        employee who is considered for an upgrade to a position requiring the operation
        of Company vehicles or equipment must be qualified by training or experience
        prior to upgrade. Employee will be subject to the provisions of Section (a)
        and
        (b) above. (Added 5/1/83)

      

      (e) The
        provisions of Sections (a), (b) and (c) shall also apply to any employee
        operating a personal vehicle while being compensated by the Company for its
        use.
        (Added 5/1/82)

      

      
        	
                5.4

              	
                Employees
                  shall be authorized to utilize Company vehicles only for the purpose
                  of
                  performing their assigned duties. Use of such vehicles for personal
                  reasons is prohibited.

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        6

      WORKING
        HOURS

      

      
        	
                6.1

              	
                All
                  regular employees shall receive full-time employment for each work
                  week
                  employed provided they physically report for duty at their regularly
                  assigned reporting place in accordance with the terms and conditions
                  of
                  this Agreement and are in condition to perform their work. This
                  is not
                  interpreted to mean that the Company does not have the right to
                  lay off or
                  release employees on account of lack of work or any other valid
                  reason at
                  the end of the work week.

              

      

      

      6.2        
        (a) Each
        employee shall have a regular reporting place, a regularly established schedule
        of work hours and work days. Such schedule shall indicate the starting and
        quitting times, the regularly scheduled meal period and the scheduled non-work
        days. The arrangement of such schedule shall be in accordance with the
        provisions hereafter contained for the classification in which the employee
        is
        regularly employed. Schedules with work periods providing for starting times
        after 12:00 noon or before 6:00 a.m. shall provide eight (8) consecutive
        hours
        of work.

      

      By
        mutual
        agreement between the Company and Union, Generation employees may work under
        alternate Work Schedule Agreements as defined in Attachment III. (Amended
        1/1/03)

      

      (b) Employees
        who are assigned to work away from their regular assigned reporting place
        will
        be required to report to work at the established starting time and at the
        temporary reporting place designated by Company. When board and lodging are
        provided by Company, the reporting place will be the lodging designated by
        Company. It is understood that the temporary reporting place designated by
        the
        Company may change from time to time due to changes in Company's operational
        requirements. When necessary, Company shall provide water and sanitation
        facilities for the employee's use at the temporary reporting place. When
        the
        change of temporary reporting place occurs, the employee(s) will be notified
        as
        far in advance as practicable. (Amended 3/1/07)

      

      (c) When
        employees are scheduled for required training, the Company shall be responsible
        for all travel, training expenses and all out-of-town expenses, subject to
        Titles 6.2(a), 10 and 17.8.

      

      
        	 	
                When
                  employees are scheduled for volunteer training, the Company may
                  alter the
                  employees’ schedule, for the workweek, to match that of training. Overtime
                  will only be paid if said employee is required to attend training
                  and/or
                  perform work for more than eight (8) hours on any day or if his
                  total
                  workweek (training and work time) goes beyond 40 hours. No employee
                  will
                  be denied 40 hours of pay for said week, subject to Title 17.12.
                  (Added
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                6.3

              	
                The
                  work week shall be defined to be that period of 168 hours comprising
                  seven
                  (7) consecutive calendar days. For all employees but those in
                  classifications listed in Section 6.13 the work week shall be that
                  period
                  beginning one (1) minute after 11:59 p.m. Sunday and ending 168
                  hours
                  later.

              

      

      

      
        	
                6.4

              	
                A
                  change in the regularly scheduled lunch period for any reason shall
                  be
                  deemed to require the payment of overtime for work performed during
                  the
                  regular lunch period and the employees may eat their lunch on Company
                  time. Lunch periods may be advanced or delayed one-half (1/2) hour
                  without
                  the payment of overtime.

              

      

      

      
        	
                6.5

              	
                Employees,
                  including those on Out-of-Town assignment, who are required to
                  report for
                  work on their non-work days, or on holidays which they are entitled
                  to
                  have off, or outside their regular work hours on work days, shall
                  be paid
                  overtime compensation for the actual work time, commencing at the
                  time
                  they physically report at their regularly assigned reporting place,
                  and
                  travel time in the amount of fifteen (15) minutes each way in connection
                  therewith. An employee who is called out for such work shall be
                  paid
                  overtime compensation for travel time in the amount of thirty (30)
                  minutes
                  from his home and fifteen (15) minutes to return home. If an employee
                  who
                  is called out for such work outside of his regular work hours on
                  a work
                  day continues to work into or beyond his regular work hours, he
                  shall be
                  paid overtime compensation for actual travel time in the amount
                  of thirty
                  (30) minutes only from his home. (Amended
                  1/1/95)

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                In
                  applying this Section 6.5 to work to be performed at Tracy or Ft.
                  Churchill Steam Plants by those employees whose regularly established
                  headquarters are either the Frank A. Tracy or Fort Churchill Steam
                  Plants,
                  a travel time allowance of "30 minutes" shall be substituted for
                  "15
                  minutes" wherever it appears in the paragraph next
                  preceding.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                In
                  applying Section 6.5, employees whose regular established headquarters
                  is
                  North Valmy Steam Plant but who reside in Winnemucca, will be compensated
                  for "45 minutes" travel time each way and employees residing in
                  Battle
                  Mountain will be compensated for "30 minutes" each
                  way.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                The
                  portion of this Title relating to travel time shall not apply to
                  the
                  following situation:

              

      

      

      (a) Prearranged
        extended work schedules on regular work days. (Amended 5/1/81)

      

      6.6        
        (a) If
        an
        employee is instructed by his Supervisor to report for prearranged overtime
        on a
        non-work day, or on a holiday which he is entitled to take off with pay,
        and the
        employee reports for work as instructed, the employee shall be paid overtime
        compensation for a minimum of four (4) hours provided, however, this will
        not
        apply to cases in which the employee is prevented from completing the assignment
        or earning the minimum through no fault of the Company, for reasons such
        as
        inclement weather, accidents, illness, or other reasons beyond the control
        of
        the Company. In such cases the employee shall be paid overtime compensation
        for
        the actual time worked, but in no event less than the two (2) hour minimum.
        (Amended 5/1/81)

      

      (b) In
        the
        event an employee is instructed to report for prearranged overtime as provided
        in 6.6(a) above, and such work is canceled, the employee shall be paid overtime
        compensation for a minimum of four (4) hours, if he has not had notice of
        such
        cancellation at least eight (8) hours prior to the designated reporting time.
        (Amended 5/1/81)

      

      (c) If
        an
        employee is instructed by his Supervisor to report for prearranged overtime
        prior to his regular starting time on a scheduled work day, the employee
        reports
        for work as instructed and for any reason the work is canceled, the employee
        shall be paid overtime compensation for actual time worked, but in no event
        less
        than a two (2) hour minimum time. (Added 5/1/91)

      

      
        	
                6.7

              	
                For
                  the purposes of application of the provisions of this Title, all
                  employees
                  not specifically denoted by Sections 6.13, 6.14 and 6.15 shall
                  be
                  considered to be day employees. Sections 6.13, 6.14 and 6.15 shall
                  determine the designation of all
                  others.

              

      

      

      6.8         
        (a) Day
        employees' hours of work shall be regularly scheduled as either 7:00 a.m.
        to
        11:00 a.m. and 11:30 a.m. to 3:30 p.m. or 7:30 a.m. to 11:30 a.m. and 12:00
        noon
        to 4:00 p.m. or 8:00 a.m. to 12:00 noon and 12:30 to 4:30 p.m. or 8:00 a.m.
        to
        12:00 noon and 1:00 p.m. to 5:00 p.m. and the regular work days shall be
        Monday
        through Friday.

      

      
        	 	
                Working
                  hours will be the same for all employees within an occupational
                  group at
                  their specific reporting place. If Company desires to split starting
                  times
                  for employees within the same occupational group it shall be established
                  by mutual agreement between Company and
                  Union.

              

      

      

      (b) (Deleted
        3/1/07)

      

      
        	 	
                (c)

              	
                The
                  regular hours of work established herein may be changed by Company
                  at the
                  request or direction of public authorities, provided, however,
                  that before
                  any such change is made Company shall discuss it with Union. Company
                  shall
                  not be required to pay overtime compensation by reason of any change
                  made
                  as provided in this Section.

              

      

      

      6.9        
        (a) Company
        may schedule employees to work for periods equal in length to their normal
        work
        period and overtime, if necessary, at other than their regular hours in any
        of
        the following situations: (Amended 3/1/07)

      

      
        	 	 	
                1.

              	
                The
                  maintenance or repair of any generating plant or substations. (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                2.

              	
                Work
                  involving cleaning debris from the water intake of a power plant.
                  (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                3.

              	
                Restoration
                  of the Valley Road Gas Plant to operating condition and the production
                  of
                  gas.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                4.

              	
                To
                  provide relief in a regularly scheduled job which has been temporarily
                  vacated by absence of an incumbent.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                5.

              	
                To
                  provide public safety and the protection of Company facilities
                  underground
                  which may be exposed to possible damage by excavating operations
                  performed
                  by other than Company employees.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                6.

              	
                (Deleted
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      7. Infra-red
        inspections of outdoor electric facilities. (Added 1/1/98)

      

      
        	 	 	
                8.

              	
                At
                  the request of the customer, special project construction or unique
                  maintenance requirements of facilities where customer impacts must
                  be
                  minimized. (Added 1/1/98)

              

      

      

      (b) In
        the
        event such assignment is for four (4) regular work days or less, the employees
        shall be paid at the rate of one and one-half (1 1/2) times the applicable
        straight-time rate for all such work except that if the schedule continues
        beyond four (4) regular work days, the employee shall be paid one and one-half
        (1 1/2) times the applicable straight-time rate only for the first two (2)
        days
        of any such situation, and shall upon the third day, be paid at the
        straight-time rate for the duration of the assignment. Where the provisions
        of
        Title 10.1(a), (1), (2), (3), and (4) or the paragraph (c) next following
        are
        applicable, such day shall not be counted as one (1) of the premium days
        under
        this Section 6.9.

      

      (c) In
        the
        event the employee is required to begin work in a temporary "off schedule"
        assignment with less than forty-eight (48) hours notice he shall be paid
        at the
        applicable overtime rate for all work performed on the "off schedule" assignment
        between the time of notice and the expiration of the forty-eight (48) hour
        period. Wherever possible, assignment to an "off schedule" status and return
        to
        the regular schedule shall be made in such a manner as to provide the same
        number of hours off between work periods as is provided by the employee's
        regular schedule. Where this is not possible and a change is made with less
        than
        the required time interval, the difference between the amount of time off
        and
        the required time interval shall require the payment of an additional one-half
        (1/2) times the straight-time or overtime rate which may be
        applicable.

      

      (d) Upon
        completion of the temporary off schedule assignment, which may include scheduled
        days off, the employee shall be returned to his regular status and schedule.
        In
        all cases an assignment to an "off schedule" status shall not operate to
        deprive
        an employee of a forty (40) hour work week.

      

      (e) Except
        for operating employees who are assigned to supplement maintenance employees
        as
        provided in (a) above, and for employees who are assigned to relief as provided
        in (a) above, the employees' regular schedules of days of work shall not
        be
        changed.

      

      (f) If
        any
        such situation extends beyond four (4) weeks, Company and Union may agree
        to
        rotate the shift assignments without additional payment of overtime for such
        change.

      

      (g) The
        application of this Section shall in no way limit the right of the Company
        to
        establish schedules which would provide for work hours in excess of eight
        (8) on
        a work day, or more than five (5) days in a work week.

      

      6.10       
        "Operations
        Center" employees shall have work schedules as follows:

      

      (a) They
        may
        be regularly scheduled to work any eight (8) consecutive hours, exclusive
        of
        meal period, between 6:00 a.m. and 7:00 p.m., Monday through
        Friday.

      

      (b) Operations
        Center employees, other than those working hours as provided in Section 6.10(a)
        above, may be assigned to work any eight (8) consecutive hours between 1:00
        p.m.
        and 12 midnight.

      

      (c) Group
        schedules when required shall be developed to provide rotation of assignments
        and equalization of conditions. Schedules may be established or revised during
        the term of the Agreement, provided however that such arrangements shall
        be
        first mutually agreed upon by Company and Union.

      

      6.11       
        (a) This
        section means that except as noted below, there is a prohibition against
        requiring an employee to work more than twenty-one (21) consecutive days.
        (Amended 3/1/07)

      

      
        	 	
                If
                  an employee has performed any work on each of the twenty-one (21)
                  consecutive days, the employee must be granted the next two (2)
                  days off.
                  If either of the next two (2) days occur on regular work days for
                  that
                  employee, such employee shall, nonetheless, be granted the day(s)
                  off at
                  the straight-time rate of pay. (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      (b) Employees
        may work beyond the twenty-one (21) day limit only under the following
        condition:

      

      
        	 	 	
                1.

              	
                Any
                  work situation involving an immediate hazard to life or property.
                  This
                  does not include situations limited to a loss of money or revenue
                  only.
                  (Added 1/1/95)

              

      

      

      
        	
                6.12

              	
                The
                  work week and work hours of part-time employees shall be governed
                  by the
                  following rules:

              

      

      

      (a) Company
        shall notify Union of all part-time employees hired, the work being performed
        and the schedule of work hours and work days, if any, for such
        employees.

      

      (b) Schedules
        of work hours and work days for part-time employees which would fall within
        the
        regular work hours and work days established in Section 6.8(a) may be
        established at the convenience of the Company.

      

      (c) Schedules
        of work hours or work days for part-time employees which would fall wholly
        or in
        part outside the regular work hours and work days established in Section
        6.8(a)
        shall be established by mutual agreement between Company and Union.

       

    

    
      
        	
                6.13

              	
                "Shift"
                  employees are as listed
                  below:

              

      

       

      Building

        Services Worker, Lead

      Foreman,
        Scrubber, Working

      Foreman,
        Shift, Working

      Operator,
        Assistant, Control Room

      Operator,
        Assistant, Distribution System

      Operator,
        Clarifier

      Operator,
        Control Room

      Operator,
        Distribution System

      Operator,
        Emergency Relief (Grid)

      Operator,
        Emergency Relief (Scrubber)

      Operator,
        Emergency Relief (Steam)

      Operator,
        Grid Reliability

      Operator,
        Service Utility

      Operator,
        Scrubber Utility

      Operator,
        Transmission System

      Technician,
        Shift, Instrument & Control (Pinon)

      (Amended
        3/1/07)

      

      (a) The
        work
        week for shift employees shall be regularly scheduled but may be any seven
        (7)
        consecutive days. The normal work week of shift employees may start on any
        day
        of the week and at any hour of the day, and shall consist of one (1) eight
        (8)
        hour shift for five (5) days. The five (5) work days and two (2) non-work
        days
        may be arranged in one, two, three or four (4) week cycles. The shift employee's
        work day shall consist of eight (8) consecutive hours. The starting time
        of such
        shifts are presently established at 8:00 a.m., 4:00 p.m., and 12:00 midnight.
        During the term of the Agreement, present shifts may be changed or additional
        shifts added, provided however, that such arrangements shall be first mutually
        agreed upon by Company and Union. The term "shift" shall be defined as a
        schedule of employee's work days, non-work days, working hours, and the
        arrangement of work week cycles.

      

      (b) When
        generating plant operations personnel are not specifically assigned to
        operations duties, they may be temporarily assigned to other duties at the
        generating facilities of the Power Production Department subject to the
        provisions of Section 4.3. (Amended 3/1/07)

      

      
        	 	
                When
                  assigned to report to their regular generating facility, they may
                  be
                  reassigned to perform duties in any occupational group established
                  in that
                  facility.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                The
                  working days of operating personnel so assigned shall remain
                  unchanged.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                The
                  working hours of operating personnel so assigned may be changed
                  and
                  consist of the hours worked by the employees in the Power Production
                  Department Occupational Group to which
                  assigned.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                Such
                  change in working hours and the return to the regular operations
                  schedule
                  hours shall require, after proper notice of such change of hours
                  or return
                  to regular hours, twelve (12) hours off between change to temporary
                  hours
                  or return to regular operations schedule hours. Where this is not
                  possible
                  and a change is made with less than twelve (12) hours off after
                  proper
                  notice, the difference between the amount of time off and twelve
                  (12)
                  hours shall require the payment of an additional one-half (1/2)
                  times the
                  straight-time or overtime rate which may be applicable. The provisions
                  of
                  Section 6.9 will not apply.

              

      

      

      (c) When
        generating stations are operated on a 3 shift, 24 hour basis, the work periods
        of shift operating personnel shall be in accordance with Subsection (a)
        above.

      

      
        	 	
                When
                  generating stations are operating on less than a 3 shift, 24 hour
                  basis,
                  the normal work week shall be in accordance with (a) above and
                  the
                  starting time of such shifts shall begin between the hours of 5:00
                  a.m.
                  and 8:00 a.m. for the one shift, and between the hours of 1:00
                  p.m. and
                  4:00 p.m. for the other shift. Such schedules will be regularly
                  established and will only be used to meet peak load conditions
                  as they
                  exist.

              

      

      

      (d) An
        employee classified as Emergency Relief Operator shall be regularly scheduled
        and shall perform the regularly scheduled assignments for operators at
        substations and generating plants. He may be reassigned to any existing schedule
        for relief assignments in such plants without advance notice. Such employee
        shall not, as a result of such relief assignment, be entitled to overtime
        compensation for work performed during the regularly scheduled hours of such
        shift, except that, in the event he shall be required to report for work
        without
        having had twelve (12) hours off following the end of his last preceding
        work
        period, he shall be paid overtime compensation for any time worked in the
        twelve
        (12) hour period following the end of his last preceding work period. (Amended
        1/1/03)

      

      (e) (Deleted
        5/1/87)

      

      (f) Employees,
        when required by the Company to make relief, shall be compensated at the
        appropriate wage rate. (Added 3/1/07)

      

      
        	
                6.14

              	
                "Service"
                  employees are as listed below:

              

      

      

      Apprentice,
        Fabricator-Welder**

      Apprentice,
        Gas Pressure Operator

      Apprentice,
        Mechanic, Plant

      Apprentice,
        Serviceman, Customer

      Apprentice,
        Technician, Communications

      Apprentice,
        Technician, Electrical Plant

      Apprentice,
        Technician, Instrument

      Apprentice,
        Technician, Lab

      Coordinator,
        Fleet Repair/Licensing**

      Electrician,
        Plant

      Fabricator-Welder
        **

      Fabricator-Welder,
        Certified**

      Foreman,
        Communication Systems, Working

      Foreman,
        Gas Pressure, System Working

      Foreman,
        Lab, Working

      Foreman,
        Machinist, Working**

      Foreman,
        Maintenance, Working

      Foreman,
        Technical, Working

      Foreman,
        Utility Materials, Working***

      Foreman,
        Utility Materials, Working (Power Plants)

                    
        Foreman,
        Working**

      Foreman,
        Yard, Working

      Garageman**

      Helper
        **

      Helper
        (Power Production Maintenance)

      Janitor
        (Power Plant)

      Machinist-Tool
        Repair**

      Maintenanceman,
        Street Light

      Mechanic/Machinist,
        Plant

      Mechanic,
        Plant

      Mechanic,
        Utility Fleet**

      Mechanic/Welder,
        Plant

      Operator,
        Gas Pressure

      Operator,
        Yard

      Operator,
        Yard, Senior

      Parts
        Clerk**

      Senior
        Parts Specialist, Utility Fleet

      Serviceman,
        Customer

      Serviceman,
        Electric

      Serviceman,
        Equipment

      Technician,
        Communications

      Technician,
        Communication Systems

      Technician,
        Electrical Plant

      Technician,
        Instrument

      Technician,
        Lab

      Troubleman

      Utilityman,
        Gas

      Utility
        Materials Specialist***

      Utility
        Materials Specialist I***

      Utility
        Materials Specialist, Trainee***

      Utility
        Materials, Specialist (Power Plants)

      Utility
        Materials, Specialist I (Power Plants

      Utilityworker,
        Communications

      (Amended
        3/1/07)

      

      
        	 	
                **

              	
                No
                  current employee as of 5/1/91 will be affected unless he/she voluntarily
                  bids one (1) of these Service job classifications. (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                ***

              	
                No
                  current employee as of 1/1/98 will be affected unless he/she voluntarily
                  bids one (1) of these Service job classifications. (Added
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                Incumbent
                  employees specified by ** or *** are considered “Operations Center”
                  employees. (Added 3/1/07)

              

      

      

      (a) The
        normal work week for each Service Employee shall be regularly scheduled and
        may
        be any five (5) consecutive days, starting on any day of the week. The
        arrangement of work hours, work days, non-work days and work week cycles,
        where
        applicable, shall be considered as the employee's work schedule and shall
        be
        developed to provide rotation of assignments and equalization of
        conditions.

      

      (b) Working
        hours for Service Employees assigned to work schedules providing for one-shift
        operations shall be either 7:00 a.m. to 11:00 a.m. and 11:30 a.m. to 3:30
        p.m.,
        or 7:30 a.m. to 11:30 a.m. and 12:00 noon to 4:00 p.m. or 8:00 a.m. to 12:00
        noon and 12:30 p.m. to 4:30 p.m. or 8:00 a.m. to 12:00 noon and 1:00 p.m.
        to
        5:00 p.m.

      

      (c) Schedules
        for two-shift operations shall be as follows: First shift shall consist of
        any
        eight (8) consecutive hours between 7:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., exclusive of
        a
        thirty (30) minute meal period. Second shift shall consist of any eight (8)
        consecutive hours between 1:00 p.m. and 12 midnight. Employees assigned to
        the
        No. 2 shift shall be allowed necessary time to eat a meal on the job on Company
        time.

      

      
        	 	
                The
                  Company agrees to schedule Service Employees on the No. 1 shift
                  to take
                  lunch four (4) hours after his regular starting
                  time.

              

      

      

      (d) Group
        schedules when required shall be developed to provide rotation to assignments
        and equalization of conditions. Schedules may be established or revised during
        the term of the Agreement, provided however, that such arrangements shall
        be
        first mutually agreed upon by Company and Union.

      

      (e) New
        work
        schedules may be established and present schedules may be revised during
        the
        terms of the Agreement, provided, however, that such arrangements shall be
        first
        mutually agreed upon by Company and Union.

      

      6.15       
        (a) "Office
        Service" employees are listed below: These employees may be regularly scheduled
        to work any eight (8) consecutive hours, exclusive of a meal period, between
        6:00 a.m. and 12:00 midnight, Monday through Friday.

      

      Clerk

      Clerk,
        Print Shop

      Clerk,
        Remittance Processing, Senior

      Foreman,
        Customer Services, Working

      Foreman,
        Meter Reader, Working-Reno

      Foreman,
        Service Utilityman, Working

      Foreman,
        Support Services, Working

      Messenger,
        Outside

      Meter
        Reader-Collector

      Operator,
        Data Entry

      Operator,
        Data Entry, Trainee

      Operator,
        Data Entry, Senior

      Operator,
        Mail Inserter

      Operator,
        PBX

      Operator,
        Phototypeset

      Representative,
        Accounts Payable

      Representative,
        Accounts Payable, Senior

      Representative,
        Clerical

      Representative,
        Customer Services

      Representative,
        Customer Services, Senior

      Service
        Utilityman, Outside Clerical

      Specialist,
        Meter Data

      (Amended
        3/1/07)

      

      (b) The
        Company will schedule Office Service employees to take lunch during the period
        from three (3) hours after the employee's regular starting time to five (5)
        hours after his regular starting time. Office Service employees, with consent
        of
        the Supervisor, may exchange lunch periods on any given day.

      

      (c) The
        provisions of Section 6.4 shall not apply to employees covered by this section.
        Schedules of Office Service Employees may be established or revised during
        the
        term of the Agreement, provided, however, that such arrangements shall be
        first
        mutually agreed upon by Company and Union. (Amended 5/1/80)

      

      (d) Office
        Service employees may change their working hours and/or lunch period, with
        prior
        supervisory approval, by up to two (2) hours within the same work day with
        no
        penalty to the Company. This allows the employee to schedule personal time
        off
        while maintaining their regularly scheduled number of work hours, i.e. making
        time up within the same day of no more than two hours.

      

      A
        request
        to change an employee's work schedule must be arranged with the supervisor
        at
        least one day prior to the change, other than for emergency
        situations.

      

      When
        an
        employee has requested personal time off, the employee has the option to
        make up
        time within the same day by adjusting his or her work schedule, or may use
        vacation or floating holiday hours, or sick leave (under Title 15 or Family
        Sick
        Leave guidelines), or may elect time off without pay. A minimum of 1/2 hour
        lunch period must be taken in accordance with Section 6.15, unless required
        by
        operational needs.

      

      

      TITLE
        7

      SHIFT
        PREMIUM

      

      	7.1  	
              All
                eight (8) hour work periods regularly scheduled to begin at 4:00
                a.m. or
                thereafter, but before 12:00 noon shall be designated as first shifts.
                All
                eight (8) hour work periods regularly scheduled to begin at 12:00
                noon or
                thereafter, but before 8:00 p.m., shall be designated as second shifts.
                All eight (8) hour work periods regularly scheduled to begin at 8:00
                p.m.
                or thereafter, but before 4:00 a.m., shall be designated as third
                shifts.
                No shift premium shall be paid for the first shift. (Amended
                3/1/07)

            

      

      2007  2008  2009

      2nd
        Shift  $1.45  $1.60  $1.75

      3rd
        Shift  $1.65  $1.80  $1.95

      

      
        	
                7.2

              	
                When
                  a shift premium is applicable to time worked at the overtime rate
                  of pay,
                  the overtime rate shall be applied to the applicable shift
                  premium.

              

      

      

      
        	
                7.3

              	
                Shift
                  premiums shall be payable only for hours actually worked, and shall
                  not be
                  paid for non-work time such as holidays, sick leave, vacations,
                  etc.

              

      

      

      
        	
                7.4

              	
                Shift
                  premium shall be paid for meal and travel time at the applicable
                  overtime
                  rate. (Added 5/1/83)

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        8

      LEAVES
        OF ABSENCE

      

      
        	
                8.1

              	
                "Leaves
                  of Absence" and "Leaves" signify approved absence without pay.
                  A leave
                  shall commence on and include the first work day on which an employee
                  is
                  absent and shall terminate upon the agreed-to date of expiration
                  of the
                  leave of absence. An individual's seniority shall not be affected,
                  except
                  for personal leaves of thirty (30) or more calendar days. The employee's
                  status as a regular employee shall not be impaired by a leave of
                  absence
                  and the conditions of the leave shall be governed by the provisions
                  herein
                  applicable to the type of leave granted. Any demotion of an employee
                  caused by a reinstatement of an employee who has been absent on
                  an
                  approved leave of absence shall be governed by the Demotion and
                  Layoff
                  Procedure. (Amended 1/1/95)

              

      

      

      Military
        Leave

      

      
        	
                8.2

              	
                A
                  leave of absence shall be granted to employees who enter the Armed
                  Forces
                  of the United States, provided, however, that any such leave of
                  absence
                  and the reinstatement of any such employee shall be subject to
                  the terms
                  of any Act of Congress which provides for re-employment. The seniority
                  rights for employees who are members of the Armed Forces shall
                  accrue
                  while they are absent on military
                  duty.

              

      

      

      Union
        Leave

      

      
        	
                8.3

              	
                Company
                  shall, at the written request of Union, grant a leave of absence
                  without
                  pay to an employee who is appointed or elected to any office or
                  position
                  in the Union and whose services are required by the Union, provided
                  adequate arrangements can be made to take care of the employee's
                  duties,
                  without undue interference with the normal routine of work. Such
                  Union
                  leave shall be subject to the following
                  conditions:

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                1.

              	
                The
                  term shall be for a fixed period not to exceed three (3) years.
                  The period
                  shall be stated in the request for
                  leave.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                2.

              	
                The
                  employee shall be returned to employment in his same classification
                  held
                  at the time the leave was granted and at the same headquarters
                  at which he
                  was last employed, or at the nearest headquarters to that location
                  in
                  which a vacancy exists.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                3.

              	
                The
                  seniority of an employee who is granted a leave of absence under
                  the
                  provisions of this Title shall accrue during the period of such
                  leave.

              

      

      

      (Amended
        1/1/98)

      

      Personal
        Leave

      

      
        	
                8.4

              	
                Leaves
                  of absence for urgent, substantial personal reasons may be granted
                  to
                  regular employees provided that mutual agreement is reached thereon
                  by
                  Company and employee, and subject to the following
                  conditions:

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                1.

              	
                The
                  leave will not exceed a period of six (6) months, or a six (6)
                  month
                  extension thereof, but in no case shall any leave or extension
                  be granted
                  which extends the total leave of absence beyond a period of one
                  (1)
                  year.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                2.

              	
                The
                  purpose for which the leave is granted will not lead to the employee's
                  resignation.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                3.

              	
                If
                  an employee fails to return immediately on the expiration of the
                  leave of
                  absence, or if he makes application for unemployment benefits,
                  or if he
                  accepts other employment while on leave, he shall thereby forfeit
                  the
                  leave of absence and terminate his employment with the
                  Company.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                4.

              	
                An
                  employee returning from an authorized leave of six (6) months or
                  less
                  shall be reinstated to his former classification and headquarters
                  location.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                5.

              	
                An
                  employee returning from an authorized leave exceeding six (6) months
                  shall
                  be reinstated to his former classification and headquarters provided
                  a
                  vacancy exists in his former classification. If no such vacancy
                  exists,
                  the employee shall be reinstated in a lower classification thereto
                  in the
                  same Line of Progression. If such reinstatement in a lower classification
                  is required under this section, the employee will be given preferential
                  consideration over other employees in the filling of vacancies
                  in higher
                  classifications in the line of progression until such time as he
                  is
                  returned to his former classification or rate of pay. (Amended
                  5/1/82)

              

      

      

      
        	
                8.5

              	
                The
                  Company will not consider the bid of an employee on a leave of
                  absence.
                  (Added 5/1/87)

              

      

      

      Family
        and Medical Leave

      

      
        	
                8.6

              	
                Leaves
                  for care of child, spouse, parent or serious illness of employee
                  in
                  accordance with the Federal Family and Medical Leave
                  Act.

              

      

      

      (a) Employees
        are eligible if they have attained regular status and have at least six (6)
        months of continuous service with the Company when the leave begins. Part-time
        employees are eligible if they have attained regular status and have worked
        1040
        hours.

      

      (b) Eligible
        employees can take six (6) months unpaid leave of absence for a qualifying
        reason.

      

      (c) Employees
        should give thirty (30) days advance written notice of intent to take leave.
        The
        employee should make a reasonable effort to schedule his/her leave so as
        not to
        interrupt Company operations. If an unforeseeable event occurs, employees
        should
        give notice as soon as practicable.

      

      (d) An
        employee returning from an authorized leave under Section 8.6 will be reinstated
        to his/her former classification and headquarters location.

      

      (e) Employees
        may be required to provide medical certification from a qualified health
        care
        provider.

      

      (f) Leave
        may
        be denied if adequate notification or proper medical certification is not
        provided as required.

      

      (Added
        1/1/95)

      

      

      TITLE
        9

      INCLEMENT
        WEATHER PRACTICE

      

      
        	
                9.1

              	
                Regular
                  and probationary employees who are unable to work in the field
                  because of
                  inclement weather, "red" air quality days, as ordered by any air
                  quality
                  regulatory agency, or other similar causes, shall receive pay for
                  the full
                  day, provided they physically report for duty at their regularly
                  assigned
                  reporting place and are in condition to perform their work. However,
                  they
                  may be held pending emergency calls, and may be given first aid,
                  safety or
                  other instructions, or they may be required to perform miscellaneous
                  work
                  in the warehouses or other sheltered locations. Temporary employees
                  under
                  the same conditions shall receive pay for time they worked or are
                  held on
                  Company property, or ordered to stand-by. They shall not be paid
                  in any
                  event for less than four (4) hours.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                When
                  "red" air quality days occur, strenuous work activity shall cease
                  within
                  affected areas except when emergencies, and/or public safety or
                  welfare
                  are involved, and in those instances, the Company shall provide
                  appropriate respirators for those employees required to work. (Added
                  1/1/95)

              

      

      

      
        	
                9.2

              	
                The
                  employee in charge at the job site shall be responsible for determining
                  whether weather conditions warrant cessation of outside work. In
                  arriving
                  at a decision with respect to weather conditions, the following
                  shall be
                  taken into account: (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      1. Employee
        safety

      

      2. Operating
        requirements

      

      3. Undue
        hazards

      

      4. Service
        to the public

      

      5. Job
        site
        working conditions

      

      
        	 	
                6.

              	
                Anticipated
                  duration of time required to leave unfinished job in safe
                  condition

              

      

      

      7. Anticipated
        duration of inclement weather

      

      8. Distance
        from job site to operating headquarters

      

      
        	 	
                9.

              	
                Any
                  other pertinent factors which in his opinion should be taken into
                  account
                  in reaching his decision relative to stopping or continuing work.
                  (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        10

      OVERTIME

      

      10.1      
        (a) Overtime
        is defined as (1) time worked in excess of forty (40) hours in a work week,
        (2)
        time worked in excess of eight (8) hours on a scheduled work day, (3) time
        worked on a non-work day, (4) time worked on a holiday, and (5) time worked
        outside of regular work hours on a work day. Overtime shall be computed to
        the
        nearest quarter hour.

      

      (b) Prearranged
        overtime shall be defined as overtime for which notice has been given prior
        to
        the employee's release at the end of the last regularly scheduled work period
        or
        an extension thereof, of no more than two (2) hours on that work
        day.

      

      
        	 	 	
                1.

              	
                Company
                  may extend prearranged overtime as necessary. (Amended
                  5/1/81)

              

      

      

      (c) Callout
        overtime shall be defined as overtime for which prior notice has not been
        given
        the employee as per 10.1(b). (Added 5/1/81)

      

      (d) Overtime
        work should be assigned in accordance with the following principles, which
        are
        intended to guide the actions of both Supervisors and employees:

      

      
        	 	 	
                1.

              	
                The
                  nature of the utility business requires the working of overtime
                  and is
                  reflected in the language of this
                  Agreement.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                2.

              	
                The
                  right to determine the importance and necessity of any work assignment
                  rests within the rights of
                  Management.

              

      

      

      3. Refusal
        shall be supported by a valid reason.

      

      
        	 	 	
                4.

              	
                A
                  reasonable and sympathetic approach shall be taken by Supervision,
                  with
                  employees receiving as much advance notice as possible in order
                  to allow
                  them to alter their plans.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                5.

              	
                Extenuating
                  circumstances and health of the employees shall be
                  considered.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                6.

              	
                The
                  time necessary to complete the work assignment and the availability
                  and
                  practicability of the use of other employees shall be
                  considered.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                7.

              	
                Above
                  all, the rule of reason shall be used by employees and
                  Supervisors.

              

      

      

      
        	
                10.2

              	
                If
                  an employee is called out by a responsible authority of the Company
                  outside the employee's regularly scheduled hours and works less
                  than two
                  (2) hours, the employee shall receive not less than two (2) hours
                  to be
                  compensated at the applicable overtime rate, for each such call
                  out,
                  provided the employee has finished his first call out and has returned to
                  his home. If the employee is sent on another job or jobs prior
                  to
                  returning home from the initial call without a break in work time
                  it shall
                  be considered a single call out. It shall be the policy of the
                  Company to
                  avoid a second assignment except those of such urgency as would
                  ordinarily
                  warrant a call out, but the determination of such urgency shall
                  be
                  determined solely by the Company Representative dispatching the
                  call.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                Such
                  minimum call out pay provision shall not apply and the overtime
                  payment
                  shall be made only for actual work time outside regular hours
                  where:

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                1.

              	
                The
                  call-out is less than two (2) hours prior to his regular starting
                  time and
                  the work extends into the regular work
                  day.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                2.

              	
                The
                  call-out is an extension of the regular work day or the employee
                  has not
                  left the plant premises when called. Any employee required to keep
                  a
                  radio-equipped Company vehicle at home when off duty shall, upon
                  completion of a tour of duty, proceed directly to his home. Any
                  call-out
                  while in transit shall be considered an extension of the regular
                  day
                  without interruption in time. A call-out received after reaching
                  home and
                  signing off the radio shall be considered a separate call-out.
                  (Amended
                  5/1/81)

              

      

      

      10.3  (a) Overtime
        shall be divided as equally as is practicable over the course of the payroll
        year, among those employees qualified and available within a classification
        and
        headquarters. All overtime for individuals in each headquarters shall be
        posted
        every 30 days. Employees new to a classification or headquarters shall be
        averaged into that classification and headquarters’ year to date overtime list.
        (Amended 1/1/03)

      	(b)  	
              Deviation
                from the distribution of overtime as stated in Section 10.3 (a) must
                be
                established in writing and agreed to by both Company and Union. (Added
                1/1/98)

            

      	(c)  	
              Deviation
                from the distribution of overtime as stated in Section 10.3 (a) will
                be
                allowed in select cases where employees within classification possess
                special skills (certifications, licenses, or training) unique to
                that job
                requirement. (Added 1/1/98)

            

      	(d)  	
              Employees
                temporarily assigned to a new headquarters (excluding Special Project
                Agreements) for a period greater than five (5) days shall be placed
                on the
                temporary headquarters’ overtime list with one (1) hour more than the
                employee with the greatest amount of overtime within his
                classification.

            

      

      He
        shall
        work from his new headquarters’ overtime list and be removed from the list at
        his permanent headquarters.

      

      Once
        the
        employee returns to his permanent headquarters, he shall be placed on his
        permanent headquarters’ overtime list with all year-to-day overtime worked.
        (Added 1/1/03)

      

      	(e)  	
              First
                consideration will be given to the employee(s) within a headquarters
                and
                within the required job classification(s) for staffing a project
                within
                that headquarters. Second consideration will be given to employee(s)
                from
                other headquarters. If employees from other headquarters are used
                to staff
                a project and scheduled weekend overtime occurs, the employee(s)
                (or
                crew(s) of equal size) will be afforded the opportunity to work an
                equal
                amount of scheduled weekend overtime. (Added
                3/1/2007)

            

      

      
        	
                10.4

              	
                Nothing
                  contained herein shall be construed to require the payment of overtime
                  compensation under more than one (1) of the foregoing definitions
                  for a
                  single period of operation.

              

      

      

      10.5      
        (a) Overtime
        compensation at the rate of one and one-half (1 1/2) times the straight rate
        of
        pay shall be paid to employees for overtime as defined in Section 10.1 (a)
        (1),
        (2), (3), (4), and (5) and Section 10.1 (b). (Amended 5/1/81)

      

      (b) The
        time
        worked in excess of sixteen (16) consecutive hours (which includes unpaid
        meal
        period) and continuing until the employee is dismissed from such work shall
        be
        paid at the rate of two (2) times the employee's straight rate of pay. (Amended
        5/1/82)

      

      (c) Prearranged
        overtime worked in excess of twelve (12) consecutive hours and continuing
        until
        the employee is dismissed from such work shall be paid at the rate of two
        (2)
        times the employee's straight rate of pay. (Added 5/1/81)

      

      (d) If,
        following an employee's dismissal from work or on an employee's non-work
        day,
        the employee is called out for work, he shall be paid at two (2) times his
        straight rate of pay for all work performed outside his regular work hours
        or on
        a non-work day. (Added 5/1/81)

      

      (e) 
        (Deleted
        5/1/91)

      

      10.6      
        (a) Any
        regular or probationary employee who, as the result of a call out or a
        prearranged work assignment, has worked at overtime rates between his regular
        quitting time and his next regular starting time on regular work days, shall
        be
        entitled to a rest period under the following conditions:

      

      
        	 	 	
                1.

              	
                If
                  he has worked eight (8) hours or more at overtime rates, he shall
                  be
                  entitled to a rest period of nine and one-half (9-1/2) consecutive
                  hours
                  upon completion of such overtime work. (Amended
                  1/1/03)

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                2.

              	
                If
                  he has worked a minimum of two (2) hours at overtime rates and
                  such work
                  extends beyond nine and one-half (9 1/2) hours after his regular
                  quitting
                  time, he shall be entitled to a rest period of nine and one-half
                  (9-1/2)
                  consecutive hours upon completion of such overtime work. (Amended
                  1/1/03)

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                3.

              	
                If
                  he has worked a minimum of two (2) hours at overtime rates and
                  such work
                  commences later than nine and one-half (9 1/2) hours after his
                  regular
                  quitting time, he shall be entitled to a rest period of nine and
                  one-half
                  (9-1/2) consecutive hours upon completion of such overtime work.
                  The above
                  provisions shall not apply if such work commences later than four
                  (4)
                  hours before his next regular starting time. (Amended
                  1/1/03)

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                4.

              	
                Rest
                  periods, as provided above, shall commence upon completion of the
                  employee's overtime work or the start of his regular work hours,
                  whichever
                  occurs first.

              

      

      

      (b) The
        provisions of Section 10.6(a) shall apply to an employee who works at overtime
        rates on his regularly scheduled day off or on a holiday observed by the
        Company
        as follows:

      

      
        	 	 	
                1.

              	
                The
                  overtime must have been worked immediately preceding his regular
                  starting
                  time on the next regularly scheduled work day,
                  and

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                2.

              	
                During
                  the corresponding time period normally observed by him as off-duty
                  hours
                  on consecutive work days.

              

      

      

      (c) If
        the
        employee becomes eligible for a rest period in accordance with any of the
        conditions above, and the Company requires the employee to continue work
        into
        his regular work period, the employee shall be paid at two (2) times the
        standard rate of pay for all hours worked until he is given a rest period.
        If,
        however, the employee is not entitled to a rest period, the employee shall
        revert to the straight-time rate at the beginning of his regular work period
        irrespective of whether he continues to work at said overtime work or changes
        to
        regular duties.

      

      (d) If
        the
        employee becomes eligible for a rest period and is called back to work during
        his nine and one-half (9-1/2) hour rest period, the employee shall be paid
        overtime compensation at the rate of pay equivalent to two (2) times the
        standard rate of pay for all work performed until he has been relieved from
        duty
        for at least nine and one-half (9-1/2) consecutive hours, and a new rest
        period
        will commence at the conclusion of such work. (Amended 1/1/03)

      

      (e) Should
        a
        rest period provided for above extend into his regular work hours, the employee
        may be required to report for work at the end of said rest period for the
        remainder of that regular work period. The employee shall be paid at straight
        time for any portion of his regular work period which he is allowed to take
        as a
        rest period. He will in any event be paid at the straight-time rate for the
        said
        regular work period.

      

      

      TITLE
        11

      HOLIDAYS

      

      
        	
                11.1

              	
                It
                  shall be the policy of the Company to perform only necessary work
                  on any
                  of the holidays observed by the Company. The necessity for holiday
                  work
                  and the number and choice of employees required to work on the
                  holiday
                  shall be determined by the Company.

              

      

      

      
        	
                11.2

              	
                For
                  regular, provisional and probationary employees, "holiday" as used
                  herein
                  is defined as a day on which each of the following holidays is
                  observed by
                  the Company: (Amended 5/18/99 by Letter of
                  Agreement)

              

      

      

      New
        Year's Day

      Martin
        Luther King Day

      Memorial
        Day

      Independence
        Day

      *Floating
        Holiday #1

      *Floating
        Holiday #2

      *Floating
        Holiday #3

      Labor
        Day

      Veterans’
        Day

      Thanksgiving
        Day

      Day
        After
        Thanksgiving

      Christmas
        Day

      (Amended
        3/1/07)

      

      
        	 	
                *An
                  employee, during his first payroll year of employment, shall be
                  entitled
                  to Floating Holidays in accordance with the following table: (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      

      Hired
        From To
        Inclusive Floating
        Holidays

      

      Beginning
        of Payroll Year April
        30   3

      May
        1 August
        31   2

      September
        1 End
        of
        Payroll Year 1

      

      
        	 	
                Employees
                  shall observe their floating holidays on a workday before the end
                  of the
                  payroll year at the convenience of the Company and the Company
                  will not
                  pay in lieu of unused floating holidays. In the event an employee
                  is
                  prevented from taking his floating holidays due to operational
                  requirements, he shall be entitled to defer the floating holidays
                  into the
                  next ensuing payroll year. (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	
                11.3

              	
                If
                  a holiday is observed by Company on a regular or probationary employee's
                  non-working day, the employee shall, during the ensuing twelve
                  (12) months
                  be given a work day off with straight-time pay at the convenience
                  of the
                  Company. The employee may have the option of foregoing the work
                  day off
                  and accepting regular straight-time pay for the holiday if he so
                  desires.

              

      

      

      
        	
                11.4

              	
                If
                  a holiday is observed by Company on a regular or probationary employee's
                  scheduled non-work day and the employee works on that day, he shall
                  be
                  paid at the applicable overtime rate for all work performed plus
                  his
                  holiday allowance.

              

      

      

      
        	
                11.5

              	
                If
                  a holiday is observed by Company on a regularly scheduled work
                  day of a
                  regular or probationary employee and he performs no work that day,
                  he
                  shall be given a holiday allowance equal to his regular straight-time
                  pay
                  for the day.

              

      

      

      
        	
                11.6

              	
                If
                  a holiday is observed by Company on a regularly scheduled work
                  day of an
                  employee and he works that day, the employee shall have the option
                  to:

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                1.

              	
                be
                  paid the applicable overtime rate for all work performed plus his
                  holiday
                  allowance of eight (8) hours straight-time pay,
                  or

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                2.

              	
                be
                  paid the applicable overtime rate for all work performed and carry
                  over
                  the holiday, to be observed at another time, subject to the provisions
                  of
                  Section 11.3 of the Agreement . (Amended
                  5/1/83)

              

      

      

      11.7       (a) If
        a
        holiday falls on a Saturday, the Company shall observe the holiday on Friday.
        If
        a holiday falls on a Sunday, the Company shall observe the holiday on
        Monday.

      

      (b) If
        a
        holiday falls on a Saturday or Sunday, employees regularly scheduled to work
        that day shall observe the actual holiday rather than the Company observed
        holiday.

      

      
        	
                11.8

              	
                If
                  an employee takes off any of the days observed by the Company as
                  holidays
                  and is absent without bona fide reason on the work day either immediately
                  preceding or following such day observed by the Company as holiday,
                  he
                  shall not receive holiday pay.

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        12

      VACATIONS

      

      
        	
                12.1

              	
                All
                  active employees except temporary employees begin accumulating
                  vacation
                  time upon employment. Vacation time shall be computed from the
                  employee's
                  continuous service date and will be credited
                  bi-weekly.

              

      

      

      (a) An
        employee's continuous service date shall be his/her most recent date of hire
        which may be adjusted subject to the provisions of Title 8.

      

      (b) When
        an
        employee's accrual rate changes as stated in 12.2 below, the new accrual
        rate
        will be effective at the beginning of the pay period in which the continuous
        service date falls. (Amended 5/1/87; Effective 1/1/88)

      

      
        	
                12.2

              	
                Full-time
                  employees except temporary employees earn vacation time as follows
                  and
                  subject to the provisions of Title
                  20:

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                (a)

              	
                First
                  (1st) through Fifth (5th) year of continuous
                  service:

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                From
                  one (1) day through sixty (60) months from your continuous service
                  date
                  you begin accruing 3.076 hours biweekly for a total of ten (10)
                  days'
                  vacation per year.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                (b)

              	
                Sixth
                  (6th) through Twelfth (12th) year:

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                At
                  the completion of five (5) full years (60 months) from your continuous
                  service date you begin accruing 4.615 hours biweekly for a total
                  of
                  fifteen (15) days' vacation per
                  year.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                (c)

              	
                Thirteenth
                  (13th) through Nineteenth (19th)
                  year:

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                At
                  the completion of twelve (12) full years (144 months) from your
                  continuous
                  service date you begin accruing 6.153 hours biweekly for a total
                  of twenty
                  (20) days' vacation per year.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                (d)

              	
                Twentieth
                  (20th) through Twenty-sixth (26th)
                  year:

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                At
                  the completion of nineteen (19) full years (228 months) from your
                  continuous service date you begin accruing 7.692 hours biweekly
                  for a
                  total of twenty-five (25) days' vacation per
                  year.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                (e)

              	
                Twenty-seven
                  (27) or more years:

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                At
                  the completion of twenty-six (26) full years (312 months) from
                  your
                  continuous service date you begin accruing 9.230 hours biweekly
                  for a
                  total of thirty (30) days' vacation per
                  year.

              

      

      (Amended
        5/1/91; Effective 4/28/91)

      

      
        	
                12.3

              	
                Each
                  employee who has completed five (5), ten (10), fifteen (15), twenty
                  (20)
                  years, etc., of continuous service with the Company will be credited
                  with
                  five (5) days vacation (40 hours) in the pay period in which the
                  continuous service date falls. (Amended 5/1/87; Effective
                  1/1/88)

              

      

      

      
        	
                12.4

              	
                Part-time
                  employees except temporary employees shall earn vacation time as
                  stated in
                  Section 12.2 and 12.3, but adjusted as follows and subject to the
                  provisions of Title 20.

              

      

      

      (a) Vacation
        time credits shall be prorated as outlined in Section 3.5. (Amended
        5/1/87)

      

      
        	
                12.5

              	
                An
                  employee must complete six (6) months of continuous service to
                  be eligible
                  to take vacation. After completion of six (6) months of continuous
                  service, vacation may be taken as earned, subject to operational
                  needs of
                  the Company and by mutual agreement of Company and employee. (Amended
                  5/1/87)

              

      

      

      
        	
                12.6

              	
                Vacation
                  time shall be paid at the straight-time rate of pay. (Amended
                  5/1/87)

              

      

      

      
        	
                12.7

              	
                All
                  vacation shall be taken on consecutive days unless otherwise mutually
                  agreed upon between Company and the
                  employee.

              

      

      

      (a) An
        employee may, upon his request, and with the consent of his Supervisor, take
        a
        vacation of less than five (5) consecutive work days, providing
        that:

      

      
        	 	 	
                1.

              	
                Such
                  request is submitted as far in advance as is
                  possible.

              

      

      
        	 	 	
                2.

              	
                Such
                  request is no less than 1⁄4 hour. (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	
                12.8

              	
                Earned
                  vacation which is not used by an employee may be allowed to accumulate.
                  Such vacation may be carried over from one (1) payroll year to
                  the next
                  following payroll year provided that the carryover vacation does
                  not
                  exceed a maximum amount based on years of continuous service as
                  stated
                  below: (Amended 1/1/98)

              

      

      

      Years
        of Continuous Service Maximum
        Carryover Vacation

      1st
        through 5th year  20
        days
        or 160 hours

      6th
        through 12th year  30
        days
        or 240 hours

      13th
        through 19th year  40
        days
        or 320 hours

      20th
        through 26th year  50
        days
        or 400 hours

      27
        years
        or more  60
        days
        or 480 hours

      

      (a) All
        vacation carried over from one (1) payroll year to the next following payroll
        year in excess of the maximum as stated in 12.8 above will be forfeited.
        (Amended 1/1/98)

      

      
        	
                12.9

              	
                When
                  an employee is required to carry over a vacation from one (1) payroll
                  year
                  to the next payroll year due to an approved absence from work because
                  of
                  an extended illness or industrial injury, such vacation will be
                  taken at
                  the convenience of the Company and at such time as not to interfere
                  with
                  vacation schedules of other employees. Such vacation will not be
                  subject
                  to forfeiture as stated in 12.8(a). (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	
                12.10

              	
                When
                  an employee's approved scheduled vacation is canceled by the Company
                  due
                  to unforeseen emergency conditions, or an employee foregoes his/her
                  vacation for the convenience of the Company, the employee shall
                  be allowed
                  to reschedule his vacation by mutual agreement between Company
                  and the
                  employee. If such vacation must be carried over to the next following
                  payroll year, it shall not be subject to forfeiture as stated in
                  12.8(a).
                  (Amended 1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	
                12.11

              	
                If
                  a holiday is observed by the Company on a work day within an employee's
                  vacation period, the holiday shall not be considered a vacation
                  day.
                  (Amended 5/1/87)

              

      

      

      
        	
                12.12

              	
                Company
                  shall not require an employee to take his vacation in lieu of sick
                  leave
                  or leave of absence on account of illness. (Amended
                  5/1/87)

              

      

      

      
        	
                12.13

              	
                Regular,
                  provisional and probationary employees whose employment with the
                  Company
                  has been terminated for any reason shall receive vacation pay for
                  all
                  accrued vacation time in lieu of any vacation allowance. (Amended
                  5/18/99
                  by Letter of Agreement)

              

      

      

      
        	
                12.14

              	
                Before
                  April of each year, there will be a sign-up in each department
                  so that the
                  employees may designate their choice of vacation periods. The Company
                  shall prepare the annual vacation schedule on the basis of such
                  sign-up,
                  effecting whenever possible the selections of the employees within
                  each
                  classification in the order of Company
                  seniority.

              

      

      

      (a) If,
        in
        accordance with 12.7, an employee has arranged to take his vacation in two
        (2)
        or more periods the use of seniority as a factor in securing preferential
        consideration over other employees shall be limited to one (1) of such
        periods.

      

      (b) Service
        employees shall be allowed to include one (1) night shift in their first
        choice
        vacation period. (Amended 5/1/87)

      

      (c) Shift
        employees are front-loaded scheduled holidays. When these holidays are scheduled
        in blocks of two (2) days or more and subject to Title 12.14, the Company
        will
        cover with overtime, when necessary. (Added 3/1/07)

      

      
        	
                12.15

              	
                Vacation
                  lists shall be posted on or before April 15 of each year. Scheduled
                  vacation shall be taken as posted unless otherwise agreed to by
                  Company.
                  Any request for changes in scheduled vacation shall be submitted
                  by the
                  employee in writing and subject to written approval by Company.
                  Such
                  request shall include the alternate date(s) proposed by the employee.
                  (Amended 5/1/87)

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        13

      SAFETY

      

      Working
        SAFELY prevents suffering, loss of wages to ourselves and families, and damage
        to property and injury to others.

      

      An
        important part of everyone's acceptance of employment is to accept
        responsibility to do his work in accordance with the latest safety practices
        and
        to cooperate with other employees with whom he works to carry out safety
        rules
        and practices. Therefore, every employee of this Company is automatically
        pledged to study the safety rules and put them into effect for every applicable
        circumstance.

      

      Every
        employee must be familiar with the special safety rules and regulations
        pertaining to his particular classification, in addition to the general overall
        safety rules.

      

      
        	
                13.1

              	
                Company
                  shall make reasonable provisions for the safety of employees in
                  the
                  performance of their work. Union shall cooperate in promoting the
                  realization of the responsibility of the individual employee with
                  regard
                  to the prevention of accidents.

              

      

      

      
        	
                13.2

              	
                The
                  Company will draft reasonable safety rules for employees and it
                  will be
                  the responsibility of all employees to observe these rules. A copy
                  of the
                  rules will be furnished the Union.

              

      

      

      
        	
                13.3

              	
                The
                  Company shall hold not less than eight (8) safety meetings each
                  year at
                  practical points throughout the system. When practicable, such
                  meetings
                  shall be scheduled to permit as many employees as possible to attend.
                  Employees shall be required to attend safety meetings except for
                  good
                  cause. The programs of the safety meetings shall be arranged by
                  the
                  Company and in general will cover material appropriate to each
                  group.

              

      

      

      
        	
                13.4

              	
                The
                  Company will promptly notify the Union Business Representative
                  of any
                  accident resulting in death or serious injury to an employee. The
                  Union
                  Business Representative of Local 1245 shall be a member of the
                  Company
                  Accident Prevention Board. (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	
                13.5

              	
                The
                  Company and Union recognize the importance of timely, well-documented
                  investigative reports for any serious accident/incident determined
                  to be
                  worth investigating. To this end, the Company and Union agree that
                  a
                  Committee comprised of not more than twelve (12) members of the
                  Bargaining
                  Unit and twelve (12) members of Management will be selected by
                  their
                  respective parties to receive special training from the Safety
                  Department
                  in the appropriate methods of conducting accident investigations
                  -- such
                  training to be provided on Company time at Company
                  expense.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                Thus,
                  when an accident/incident occurs, there will be a trained group
                  of
                  personnel from who to select the Joint Accident Investigating Committee
                  members as described in the remainder of this section. Selection
                  to serve
                  as a member of the Joint Accident Investigating Committee shall
                  be based
                  on the knowledge and experience of the individual committee members
                  so
                  that, to the extent practicable, the Committee will be comprised
                  of
                  members experienced in the field of work in which the accident/incident
                  occurred. In no case shall the members of the Joint Accident Investigating
                  Committee be selected from the reporting place in which the
                  accident/incident has occurred, unless mutually agreed between
                  the Company
                  and Union. (Amended 1/1/03)

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                At
                  the request of either the Company or the Union, any accident/incident
                  of a
                  serious nature shall be investigated by a Joint Accident Investigating
                  Committee. The Joint Accident Investigating Committee shall consist
                  of not
                  more than four (4) employees, two (2) of whom shall be appointed
                  by the
                  Company and two (2) by the Union.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                If
                  such investigation is requested by the Company, the Company will
                  pay wages
                  at the appropriate hourly wage rate, for approved hours so worked
                  by the
                  Union committee members. Normal out of pocket expenses required
                  for the
                  proper conduct of the investigation will also be paid by the
                  Company.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                If
                  such investigation is requested by the Union, the Company will
                  not be
                  liable for any lost wages or expenses incurred resulting from the
                  Union
                  member’s participation in the
                  investigation.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                After
                  investigating a serious accident/incident, the Joint Committee
                  may, at its
                  discretion, file a joint or separate report or reports with the
                  Company
                  covering its recommendations for prevention of the recurrence of
                  accidents
                  of similar nature. It is understood and agreed that the Company
                  is not
                  obligated or required to accept the committee's recommendations.
                  If the
                  Company accepts or rejects any or all such recommendations, Company
                  will
                  give written explanation to the Joint Accident Investigating Committee
                  within 30 days. (Amended 1/1/03)

              

      

      

      
        	
                13.6

              	
                A
                  Department Safety Committee shall be established consisting of
                  three (3)
                  non-Supervisory employees. A "chairman", "co-chairman" and "member"
                  shall
                  be selected by the members of the committee. Each year the chairman
                  moves
                  off the committee, the co-chairman moves to chairman, and the member
                  becomes co-chairman, and a new member will be appointed. In establishing
                  said committee, it is specifically recognized and acknowledged
                  that the
                  employer is obligated to provide to the employees a safe and healthy
                  place
                  of employment and that the operation and/or establishment of the
                  aforementioned committee shall in no way relieve the employer of
                  that
                  obligation. The Department Safety Committee shall be established
                  to
                  function in the prevention of accidents by ascertaining unsafe
                  working
                  conditions and recommending measures to be taken for correction
                  thereof.
                  Such recommendations shall be in the form of written reports, copies
                  of
                  which will be sent to the appropriate Supervisors, Safety Manager
                  and each
                  member of the Safety Committee. Within ten (10) working days from
                  receipt
                  of such recommendations, a written reply from the Manager will
                  be returned
                  to the Chairman of the Committee with a copy to the Safety Manager.
                  There
                  shall be as many such Committees in each district as may be warranted
                  by
                  the extent of the territory of such district and the number of
                  employees
                  therein. District Supervisors and Department Heads shall make appointments
                  to the Safety Committees for their respective districts and departments.
                  Union shall have the right to suggest names for appointment to
                  such
                  committees. In April and October each Committee shall make inspections
                  of
                  Company's properties, vehicles, equipment, and activities in its
                  designated territory. Members of such committees will have time
                  off with
                  pay for the purpose of making said inspections and shall be reimbursed
                  by
                  Company for expenses incurred
                  therefore.

              

      

      

      
        	
                13.7

              	
                The
                  Company Safety Manager or their representative will meet with the
                  Department Safety Committee at such times and places as may mutually
                  be
                  agreed upon. At such meetings the Department Safety Committee may
                  submit
                  suggestions to Company concerning the revision and enforcement
                  of safety
                  rules. (Amended 1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	
                13.8
                  

              	
                If
                  the Company requires any employee to wear steel-toed safety shoes
                  (as
                  defined in ANSI Standard Z.41), the Company will provide the shoes.
                  The
                  employee is then required to wear in the performance of his duties,
                  steel-toed safety shoes recognized as such by ANSI Standard Z.41.
                  (Added
                  5/1/91)

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        14

      UNION
        ACTIVITY

      

      
        	
                14.1

              	
                The
                  Union will use one-half (1/2) of the Company's regular bulletin
                  boards and
                  Company shall designate by lettering the portion of the Board reserved
                  for
                  Union use.

              

      

      

      
        	
                14.2

              	
                The
                  Company shall not discriminate against an employee because of his
                  or her
                  membership in the Union or his or her legal activity on behalf
                  of the
                  Union, and the Union agrees not to discriminate against any employee
                  because of his non-affiliation with the Union. (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                14.3

              	
                The
                  Union's use of bulletin boards shall be limited to the posting
                  thereon of
                  official notices of meetings and similar matters relating to official
                  Union business, and Union shall not post thereon any matter relating
                  to
                  the solicitation of employees to join Union or the collection of
                  dues, or
                  any matter derogatory to Company.

              

      

      

      
        	
                14.4

              	
                At
                  the request of the Union, the Company shall issue a temporary pass,
                  renewable yearly, to any representative of the Union authorizing
                  him to
                  enter any Company property where any employee within the Bargaining
                  Unit
                  is employed.

              

      

      

      
        	
                14.5

              	
                All
                  employees hired by Company in the State of California after May
                  1, 1990
                  shall after thirty (30) days of employment (1) become a member
                  of the
                  Union; or (2) in the alternative, an employee must tender a registration
                  fee to the Union in such an amount as the Union may prescribe (but
                  in no
                  event to exceed the initiation fee required of Union members) and
                  shall
                  tender, monthly, an agency fee as established by the Union in an
                  amount
                  not to exceed the amount of the monthly dues and per capita fees
                  required
                  of BA members in his wage rate.

              

      

      

      
        	
                14.6

              	
                (a)

              	
                APB
                  Member:
                  It has been agreed that the I.B.E.W. Business Representative will
                  become a
                  member of the Accident Prevention Board (APB). (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                (b)

              	
                E-Mail:
                  E-Mail will be made available to the Union for Union
                  communications.

              

      

      

      	(c)  	
              New
                Employee Orientation:
                I.B.E.W. Business Representative will be allowed to participate in
                the New
                Employee Orientation.

            

      

      
        	 	
                (d)

              	
                Employee
                  Electronic Access to Information:
                  Company shall post on the Company Intranet and make available the
                  CBA,
                  Grievance Resolutions, Letters of Agreement and any other beneficial
                  communications unless excluded by mutual agreement between the
                  Company and
                  Union, to be fully implemented by 12/31/05. (Added
                  1/1/03)

              

      

      

      14.7   
        The
        Company and Union agree to hold Labor/Management Committee meetings to discuss
        matters which are covered by the Agreement and/or of importance to both parties.
        These meetings will be held on Company premises during work hours, at Company
        expense and shall be held in accordance with established Committee Charter.
        (Added 1/1/03)

      

      

      TITLE
        15

      SICK
        LEAVE

      

      
        	
                15.1

              	
                A
                  regular employee shall, in addition to any accumulated unused sick
                  leave
                  with pay to which he may be entitled as of May 1, 1968, also be
                  entitled
                  to accumulate further unused sick leave with pay at the rate of
                  one (1)
                  day of sick leave for each month worked subsequent to May 1, 1969,
                  and
                  calculated biweekly. An unlimited number of working days of sick
                  leave may
                  be accumulated in this manner, subject to the provisions of Section
                  20.1.
                  (Amended 5/1/86)

              

      

      

      
        	
                15.2

              	
                The
                  Company may require satisfactory evidence of an employee's illness
                  or
                  disability before sick leave will be granted. If it is found that
                  the
                  employee is using sick leave for reasons other than a bona fide
                  personal
                  sickness or disability, said employee shall forfeit all sick leave
                  accumulated up to that date. As soon as an employee determines
                  that he
                  will be unable to report for work, he must notify his Supervisor
                  or
                  arrange for his Supervisor to be so notified. Such notification
                  must be
                  provided prior to normal starting time. In the event an employee
                  is unable
                  to determine when he will be able to return to work, he must, on
                  each day
                  of his illness or disability, notify his Supervisor that he will be unable
                  to report for work. When the employee does become aware of the
                  date when
                  he will be capable of returning to work, he must give as much advance
                  notice of this fact as possible to the Supervisor. Lack of notification
                  will result in denial of sick pay
                  benefits.

              

      

      

      
        	
                15.3

              	
                If
                  a holiday is observed by the Company on a work day within the sick
                  leave
                  period of an employee who is entitled to holidays off with pay,
                  the
                  holiday shall not be charged to the employee's sick leave (see
                  11.5).

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                Except
                  as provided in Section 15.4, nothing in the foregoing Title shall
                  be
                  interpreted to entitle the employee to sick leave while on vacation,
                  temporarily laid off by the Company, upon severance of employment,
                  or
                  while receiving industrial
                  compensation.

              

      

      

      
        	
                15.4

              	
                If
                  an employee is confined to a hospital during his vacation period,
                  upon
                  request he will be granted sick leave for the period of
                  confinement.

              

      

      

      15.5 (Deleted
        5/1/83)

      

      15.6 (Deleted
        5/1/83)

      

      15.7 (Deleted
        5/1/83)

      

      	15.8  	
              Sick
                leave time may be granted in 1⁄4 hour increments.

            

      (Added
        1/1/98)

      

      
        	
                15.9

              	
                Sick
                  Leave Payoff

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                Pursuant
                  to the agreements reached during 1983 General Negotiations relative
                  to the
                  deletion of Sections 15.5, 15.6 and 15.7, Title 15, the following
                  applies
                  to payback of unused sick leave:

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                A.

              	
                The
                  eligibility requirements and future payoffs will be based on the
                  following
                  guidelines:

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                1.

              	
                An
                  employee whose years of continuous service plus age total sixty-five
                  (65)
                  or more shall upon retirement or death be paid for 40% of his unused
                  sick
                  leave.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                2.

              	
                An
                  employee who terminates his employment with the Company shall be
                  paid for
                  20% of his unused sick leave provided he has a minimum of ten (10)
                  years'
                  continuous service.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                3.

              	
                Any
                  employee who is terminated by the Company for disciplinary reasons
                  shall
                  receive NO pay for unused sick
                  leave.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                4.

              	
                In
                  the event an employee dies leaving unused sick leave, payback under
                  the
                  provisions of item 1 or 2 above shall be paid to the beneficiary
                  designated in the employee's Company sponsored Group Life Insurance
                  Policy, or if no such beneficiary is designated then to his or
                  her
                  estate.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                B.

              	
                The
                  hours accrued between date of hire and the date of ratification
                  will be
                  "frozen" and will be the only hours included in the payoff
                  calculation.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                C.

              	
                Payoffs
                  will be based on the provisions of Paragraph A, items 1 and 2
                  above.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                D.

              	
                The
                  rate to be used for unused sick leave payback in Paragraph A, items
                  1 and
                  2, shall be the employee's final average pay as outlined in the
                  terms of
                  the Retirement Plan.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                E.

              	
                Employees
                  who terminate prior to meeting the eligibility requirements of
                  Paragraph A
                  above will not receive any payback.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                F.

              	
                Employees
                  transferring out of the Bargaining Unit will not be eligible for
                  any
                  payback.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                G.

              	
                If
                  an employee uses any part of the "frozen" hours, the payoff calculation
                  will be based on the hours remaining at the time of retirement
                  or
                  termination.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                H.

              	
                An
                  employee may replace sick leave used from his "frozen" hours from
                  future
                  sick leave accumulation; however, under no circumstances will the
                  employee
                  be allowed to replace more than those sick leave hours originally
                  "frozen". In other words, the hours "frozen" as of September 6,
                  1983, will
                  never be increased.

              

      

      

      
        	
                15.10

              	
                Family
                  Sick Leave Program

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                The
                  parties, in an effort to meet the needs of employees while maintaining
                  sick leave usage at an acceptable level, hereby agree to the
                  following:

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                A.

              	
                Employees
                  may be granted up to thirty-two (32) hours sick leave per payroll
                  year
                  (assuming sufficient hours of accrued sick leave) for immediate
                  family
                  illness/emergency. The accrual rate remains unchanged. (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                B.

              	
                Family
                  illness/emergency is any situation involving the employee's immediate
                  (as
                  defined in the Company's funeral leave policy) family requiring
                  the
                  employee's personal attention which cannot be attended to outside
                  normal
                  work hours.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                C.

              	
                Family
                  sick leave time may be granted in 1⁄4 hour increments. (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                D.

              	
                Proven
                  abuse will be handled pursuant to the provisions of Section
                  15.2

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                E.

              	
                Employees
                  at any stage of progressive discipline for attendance related problems
                  are
                  not eligible.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                F.

              	
                It
                  is recognized that this program does not provide an additional
                  benefit to
                  employees. Time is provided, as described above, at the sole discretion
                  of
                  the Supervisor.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                G.

              	
                The
                  Company will communicate this program to Supervisors in a manner
                  designed
                  to foster consistency and understanding. (Amended
                  1/1/95)

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                H.

              	
                Family
                  sick leave usage will not be a consideration in employee performance
                  appraisals. (Added 1/1/98)

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        16

      SENIORITY

      

      
        	
                16.1

              	
                There
                  shall be two (2) types of seniority, namely, Occupational Group
                  Seniority
                  and Company Seniority. Company Seniority shall be defined as total
                  length
                  of continuous service with the Company as determined in accordance
                  with
                  3.7. Company Seniority shall be used as the basis for determining
                  such
                  benefits as sick leave, retirement, vacations and protection against
                  demotion and lay-off. Occupational Group Seniority shall be defined
                  as the
                  total length of service in one (1) of the occupational groups shown
                  in
                  Exhibit C attached hereto. Occupational Group Seniority shall be
                  used in
                  determining the preferred bidder within an occupational group and
                  line of
                  progression in the sequence outlined in 16.5. Attached hereto and
                  made a
                  part hereof is Exhibit C, an appendix outlining the "Occupational
                  Groups"
                  and "Lines of Progression" to be used for promotion and demotion.
                  It is
                  understood that the Occupational Groups have no relationship to
                  "departments" as used in prior contracts between the parties nor
                  shall
                  Exhibit C be construed to limit in any way the right of the Company
                  to
                  choose any form of organizational arrangement it
                  prefers.

              

      

      

      
        	
                16.2

              	
                Company
                  shall make up and post on bulletin boards, a Company seniority
                  list and an
                  occupational seniority list every six (6) months. If no opposition
                  shall
                  be made in writing within thirty (30) days after posting, the respective
                  seniorities shall be considered as correct as listed. A copy shall
                  be
                  furnished the Union.

              

      

      

      16.3      
        (a) The
        seniority status of employees as of July 1, 1959, shall be that shown on
        the
        personnel records of the Company, and seniority shall accumulate in the
        occupational group where then employed.

      

      (b) An
        employee who, after May 1, 1974, bids or is transferred from one occupational
        group to another or is transferred out of the Bargaining Unit shall, for
        a
        period of six (6) months following the date he is awarded his new job in
        the new
        occupational group, or out of the Bargaining Unit, be assumed to be continuing
        in the occupational group from which he transferred and shall have no seniority
        in the group to which he transferred. At the end of the six (6) month period
        specified, he shall be credited with six (6) months of seniority in the new
        group, and shall retain in the group from which he bid or was transferred,
        the
        seniority he had earned in that group as of the beginning of the six (6)
        month
        period specified.

      

      (c) An
        employee who is transferred out of the Bargaining Unit on a temporary assignment
        shall be considered to be continuing in the occupational group and
        classification from which he has been transferred. Assignments of a temporary
        nature which are expected to continue beyond twelve (12) months shall first
        be
        discussed with the Union.

      

      (d) Such
        employee may not use the previous group seniority for bidding on posted jobs
        in
        the previous group, but if he is re-transferred to the previous group he
        may use
        the seniority to re-establish himself in that group.

      

      (e) All
        non-Bargaining Unit employees who are used on the job for training purposes
        shall be exempt from the provisions of this Agreement.

      

      
        	 	
                They
                  shall be assigned to fully manned and supervised crews and for
                  periods not
                  to exceed ninety (90) calendar
                  days.

              

      

      

      
        	
                16.4

              	
                When
                  an employee is temporarily transferred from the occupational group
                  in
                  which he is regularly employed to another occupational group, his
                  seniority will continue to accumulate in his regular occupational
                  group
                  while he is temporarily working
                  elsewhere.

              

      

      

      
        	
                16.5

              	
                When
                  new jobs are created as provided in 4.4, additional jobs and vacant
                  jobs
                  will be posted on the bulletin boards by the Company for a period
                  of ten
                  (10) calendar days. It shall be the duty of the Company to set
                  forth in
                  said bulletin the date of postings, the nature of the job, its
                  duties,
                  qualifications required and the rate of pay. The Company shall
                  furnish the
                  Union with a list of bidders on all jobs and it shall be the duty
                  of the
                  Company within ten (10) working days of the close of the bidding
                  period to
                  post on bulletin boards the name of the applicant, if any, awarded
                  the
                  job, and mail a copy of such notice to the Union. If no bids are
                  received
                  for the job classification during the bidding period, the Company
                  may fill
                  the job from any source whatsoever. After a period of six (6) months,
                  if
                  Company has not hired an applicant to fill the posted vacancy,
                  Company
                  shall re-post the job vacancy if such vacancy still exists. If
                  a job is
                  filled and the job again becomes vacant within forty-five (45)
                  days from
                  the date the job was last filled, it shall not be necessary to
                  again post
                  the job. If the job was awarded to a qualified bidder and becomes
                  vacant
                  within forty-five (45) days from the date the job was last filled
                  it shall
                  be awarded to the next highest bidder. If the next highest bidder
                  has been
                  awarded another job, he shall have the option to accept either
                  job. The
                  vacant position shall be filled by the next highest bidder. (Amended
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                Attached
                  hereto and made a part hereof and numbered Exhibit B are the "Job
                  Descriptions and Qualifications" of those jobs coming within the
                  scope of
                  the bidding procedure. Bids to job vacancies will be given preferential
                  consideration in the following manner. Subject to 16.7 and 16.10,
                  the
                  employee with the greatest occupational group seniority shall be
                  awarded
                  the job, except under (c) and (e) below, the Company seniority
                  shall be
                  used:

              

      

      

      (a) Bids
        from
        employees within the same occupational group in the same classification or
        classifications higher than the existing vacancy.

      

      (b) If
        there
        are no bidders under (a), all bids from employees in the next lower
        classification within that occupational group.

      

      (c) Where
        no
        bids are received under (a) and (b), all bids from employees in another
        occupational group with the same classification.

      

      (d) If
        there
        are no bids received under (a), (b) or (c), all bids from employees within
        the
        occupational group in which the vacancies exist.

      

      (e) Should
        there be no bids from any employee under (a), (b), (c) or (d), all other
        bids
        from any employee in any occupational group, regardless of classification
        and
        subject to 16.7 and 16.10, the bidder with the greatest Company seniority
        shall
        be awarded the job. (Amended 5/1/87)

      

      
        	 	 	
                1.

              	
                Incumbents
                  are defined as those employees hired prior to January 1, 1995 and
                  listed
                  in classifications in Exhibit C both below the entry level line
                  and in
                  double-lined boxes above the entry level line. Incumbents shall
                  retain
                  their group seniority for bidding purposes subject to provisions
                  listed
                  below.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                2.

              	
                Employees
                  hired or who bid after January 1, 1995 in classifications below
                  the entry
                  level line listed as "E" bidders shall only accrue Company seniority
                  until
                  they are awarded a position above the entry level line, at which
                  time they
                  will also begin accruing occupational group seniority per Sections
                  16.1
                  and 16.3(a).

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                3.

              	
                All
                  bids to Apprentice classifications shall be considered "E" bids
                  (except
                  those incumbents hired before January 1, 1995 subject to Section
                  16.5(8).

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                4.

              	
                All
                  bids to classifications in the double-lined boxes except apprenticeships
                  shall be considered "E" bids unless group seniority as an "A",
                  "B", or "D"
                  bidder applies.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                5.

              	
                All
                  classifications listed below the entry level line shall not have
                  group
                  seniority and will be considered "E" bidders to all classifications
                  except
                  those incumbents designated under Section
                  16.5(1).

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                6.

              	
                Any
                  apprentice who does not complete his/her apprenticeship after January
                  1,
                  1995 shall not be considered an
                  incumbent.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                7.

              	
                An
                  incumbent will have one (1) opportunity to accept a bid using group
                  seniority per 16.5(1) for a double-lined classification, and will
                  then
                  continue to progress in his/her line of progression in accordance
                  with
                  Section 16.5.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                8.

              	
                If
                  incumbent above or below the entry level line bids a position within
                  his/her line of progression at any location but elects to turn
                  down such
                  position or fails to place a bid, he/she will lose the opportunity
                  to use
                  group seniority for that particular position and location. Future
                  bids to
                  that position and location, if posted again, shall be based on
                  Company
                  seniority only.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                Examples:
                  An Apprentice Lineman position is posted in
                  Yerington.

              

      

      

      
        	
                 

              	 	
                If
                  incumbent Field Clerk in Tonopah elects not to bid the above position
                  because he/she is waiting for an opportunity to bid an Apprentice
                  Lineman
                  in Tonopah, incumbent loses the opportunity to use group seniority
                  in
                  bidding a future Apprentice Lineman position in Yerington, should
                  it be
                  reposted, per Section 16.5(8).

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                If
                  incumbent bids the position in Yerington, but is not the senior
                  bidder,
                  he/she retains group seniority to bid the same position in Yerington,
                  should it be reposted.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                If
                  incumbent bids the position in Yerington, and is awarded the job,
                  he/she
                  no longer retains any preferential bidding rights to double-lined
                  classifications within that occupational group per Section 16.5(7).
                  (Added
                  1/1/95)

              

      

      

      16.6       
        (a) When
        the
        occupational group seniority is identical for two (2) or more employees whose
        bids are entitled to equal consideration under paragraph (a),(b), or (d)
        of
        Section 16.5, preferential consideration shall be given to the employee with
        the
        greatest Company seniority, subject to the provisions of Sections 16.7 and
        16.10. (Amended 4/6/00 by Letter of Agreement)

      

      (b) When
        there is a tie between two (2) bidders for the same job and it decided that
        to
        award the job, the tie must be broken. The person representing the Company
        and a
        representative of the Union will meet and have a coin toss. This will determine
        which of the bidders will be offered the position. Because in this case,
        there
        are only two (2) bidders tied, the Union representative will decide which
        side
        of the coin (heads or tails) will represent which employee. The Company
        representative will then toss the coin and which ever side (heads or tails)
        comes up that bidder will be offered the position.

      When
        there is a tie between more than two (2) bidders for the same job and it
        is
        decided that to award the job, the tie must be broken. The same process will
        be
        used as in the above paragraph only that after the first person is eliminated,
        the process will be repeated until there is only enough bidders left to award
        the position. (Added 4/6/00 by Letter of Agreement)

      

      16.7      
        (a) Nothing
        in this Agreement shall be construed as limiting the right of the Company
        to
        determine the number of employees required in each classification nor shall
        it
        be construed as limiting the right of the Company to determine whether a
        vacancy
        shall be filled. Except as provided in Section 16.7(b), awards to jobs posted
        for bid shall be made in accordance with Section 16.5. However, whenever
        a
        vacancy occurs in any job classification, Company may, in its discretion,
        temporarily fill such vacancy. Any such temporary appointment shall, if
        practicable, be given to an employee who would be eligible to bid therefore
        under the seniority and job bidding provisions of this Agreement, subject
        to the
        provisions of Sections 16.7(b) and 16.10(a).

      

      (b) In
        filling vacancies in jobs hereinafter collectively referred to in Subsection
        16.7(c) as "Working Foreman jobs," Company shall consider the appointment
        of
        employees to any such vacancy as herein provided, and where the Company
        determines that the following qualifications are relatively equal, seniority
        shall govern:

      

      	1.  	
              The
                quality of the employee's performance on his

            

      current
        job.

      

      
        	 	 	
                2.

              	
                His
                  background of education and experience in similar or related
                  work.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                3.

              	
                The
                  amount of special preparation for the new job, if any is necessary
                  or
                  pertinent, which the employee has completed at the time the bid
                  is
                  made.

              

      

      

      4.       
        His
        previous demonstrations of leadership and 

      progress.

      

      
        	 	
                It
                  is the intent of the parties that the Union shall not have the
                  right to
                  arbitrate the "judgment" of the Company, but that the Union shall
                  have the
                  right of appeal if it believes there was not a fair submission
                  of facts
                  upon which that judgment was made.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                After
                  selecting an applicant on the above basis, the Company shall notify
                  the
                  Union by letter. During a period of fifteen (15) calendar days
                  following
                  the receipt of such notification, the Union may investigate the
                  facts used
                  by the Company in making its selection. If, after such investigation,
                  the
                  Union feels that it would serve a useful purpose to further review
                  the
                  matter, the Union may request a meeting with an officer of the
                  Company or
                  his representative. The Union Representative at such meeting shall
                  not
                  have participated actively in the original investigation. The Union
                  and
                  Company representatives would review the facts used by the Company
                  in
                  making the selection. Company's initial decision will stand unless,
                  after
                  such review of the facts, Union and Company representatives agree
                  that the
                  decision was arbitrary. In any event, the Union and Company
                  representatives shall, within thirty (30) days, dispose of the
                  case and
                  their decision shall be final and binding upon the Company, the
                  Union, and
                  the employees involved.

              

      

      

      (c) The
        term
        "Working Foreman" as used in this Section 16.7 shall be construed to include
        any
        of the following: (Amended 5/1/86)

      

      1. Crew
        Chief

      2. Facilities
        Locator, Senior (LOA 05/30/03*)

      3. Foreman,
        Working (All Classifications)

      4. Inspector,
        Gas

      5. Inspector,
        Electric

      6. Inspector,
        Transmission (Traveling)

      7 Operator,
        Assistant Distribution System (LOA 06/16/03*)

      8. Operator,
        Distribution System (LOA 06/16/03*)

      9. Operator,
        Emergency Relief (All Classifications)

      10. Operator,
        Grid Reliability (LOA 06/16/03*)

      11. Operator,
        Transmission System (LOA 06/16/03*)

      12. Representative,
        Accounts Payable, Senior (LOA 04/25/05*)

      13. Representative,
        Customer Services, Senior 

      14. Specialist,
        Meter Data 

      15. Technician,
        Instruction/Standards

      16. Utilityman,
        Maintenance, Senior

      (Amended
        3/1/07) *LOA = Letter of Agreement

      

      16.8      
        (a) An
        employee promoted to a higher classification shall be given a qualifying
        period
        of not more than six (6) months. Such period shall be for determining whether
        he
        can meet the job requirements. If the employee fails to demonstrate his ability
        to perform the job or lacks the ability to progress during the six-month
        trial
        period, he shall be returned to his former job classification and rate of
        pay.

      

      (b) In
        the
        event it is necessary for the Company to demote a "Working Foreman," as defined
        in Subsection 16.7(c) for failure to discharge the duties of his position,
        the
        identical procedures of notice to Union, investigation and review procedure
        for
        appointment as outlined in Subsection 16.7(b), shall be used prior to completion
        of demotion.

      

      
        	
                16.9

              	
                All
                  bids shall be submitted by United States Mail to the Labor Relations
                  Offices at the Company at its general offices in Reno. The Company
                  will
                  not consider any bid postmarked later than the closing date on
                  the posted
                  bid form. (Amended 5/1/86)

              

      

      

      16.10     (a) Notwithstanding
        anything contained herein, Company need not consider the bid of any employee
        who
        does not possess the knowledge, skill, efficiency, adaptability and physical
        ability required for the job on which the bid is made.

      

      (b) Company
        need not consider the bid of any employee for a posted vacancy in another
        District or sub-District of the Company, if the employee has not worked for
        a
        minimum of six (6) months in his present classification within the District
        or
        sub-District in which he is currently employed. The provisions of Section
        16.10
        (b) are not to be construed as placing any time limitation upon the subsequent
        advancement of an employee within the line of progression in the District
        or
        sub-District to which he is qualified to bid.

      

      (c) Company
        need not consider the bid of any employee for a posted job vacancy in another
        occupational group, if the employee has not worked for a minimum of six (6)
        months in his present classification within the occupational group in which
        he
        is currently employed. The provisions of Section 16.10 (c) are not to be
        construed as placing any time limitation upon the subsequent advancement
        of any
        employee within the line of progression in the occupational group to which
        he is
        qualified to bid.

      

      (d) Company
        will not consider the bid of any employee in an Apprentice classification
        for a
        posted job vacancy in another Apprentice classification. (Amended
        1/1/95)

      

      (e) Company
        will not consider the bid of any employee for an apprenticeship who has not
        met
        the requirements of the Apprentice Pre-Qualification Pool Agreement. The
        requirements are described in the Supplementary Agreement titled, Administration
        of Apprenticeship Programs. (Added 5/1/83)

      

      (f) Company
        need not consider the bid of a Lineman, who has completed an apprenticeship
        in
        any district other then the Central District, for any other Lineman vacancy
        outside his district or sub-district for a period of one (1) year following
        his
        attainment of Journeyman status.

      

      
        	 	
                Company
                  need not consider the bid of a Journeyman Lineman hired from outside
                  the
                  Company for any other Lineman vacancy outside his district or sub-district
                  until he has worked for a period of one (1) year in his present
                  district.
                  (This Section will not apply to incumbents
                  [5/1/79])

              

      

      

      (g) Company
        need not consider the bid of a Service Employee for a posted non-service
        job
        vacancy in their present district, if the employee has not worked for a minimum
        of one (1) year in his/her present classification within the occupational
        group
        in which he/she is currently employed. The provisions of Section 16.10(g)
        are
        not to be construed as placing any time limitation upon the subsequent
        advancement of any employee within the line of progression in the occupational
        group to which he is qualified to bid.

      

      Note: All
        current incumbents that come under the Service Employee designation will
        not be
        affected by the above proposal. This section applies to the Electric Department
        Occupation Group only. (Added 5/1/91)

      

      (h) The
        Company will not consider the bid of an employee for any position if the
        employee has an overall unsatisfactory appraisal in their current
        classification. (Added 1/1/95)

      

      16.11 (Deleted
        5/1/82)

      

      
        	
                16.12

              	
                The
                  seniority rights of employees who are members of the Armed Forces
                  shall
                  accrue while they are absent on military
                  duty.

              

      

      

      
        	
                16.13
                  

              	
                Both
                  the Company and Union recognize that there will arise situations
                  with
                  respect to partially incapacitated employees, employees displaced
                  by new
                  technologies or revisions of operational procedures, employees
                  who are
                  temperamentally unsuited to their jobs, employees returning from
                  military
                  service (other than annual field training) or employees who are
                  displaced
                  either directly or indirectly by other employees returning from
                  military
                  service with the Armed Forces of the United States (other than
                  annual
                  field training) who have been granted leaves of absence by the
                  Company
                  under Section 8.2 of the Agreement, and that in such cases the
                  bidding
                  procedure may be waived by mutual agreement in order to properly
                  protect
                  the seniority of employees who have given long and faithful service.
                  The
                  Company will discuss such cases with the Union as far in advance
                  as
                  possible with the object of avoiding any inequitable situations
                  which
                  might result. Both parties will endeavor to provide for retention
                  of
                  employees in the Company, in jobs suitable to their capabilities,
                  first in
                  the areas where they are employed at the time, or secondly in other
                  areas
                  of the Company's operations. If after full discussion of such cases
                  and
                  survey of all possibilities available to the solution of the problem,
                  the
                  Union and the Company are unable to agree on a satisfactory solution,
                  the
                  Company shall have the right to make changes or layoffs as it may
                  deem
                  necessary, consistent with the provisions of the Agreement. Should
                  a
                  partially incapacitated employee, an employee displaced by new
                  technologies or revisions of operational procedures, or an employee
                  who is
                  temperamentally unsuited to his job, or employees returning from
                  military
                  service (other than annual field training) or employees who are
                  displaced
                  either directly or indirectly by another employee returning from
                  military
                  service with the Armed Forces of the United States (other than
                  annual
                  field training) who have been granted leaves of absence by the
                  Company
                  under Section 8.2 of the Agreement, agree to be transferred to
                  work
                  falling outside of the Bargaining Unit, and should the employee
                  not prove
                  to be satisfactory in this assignment, Company and Union may mutually
                  agree to waive the bidding procedure and return the employee to
                  a
                  Bargaining Unit job suitable to his capabilities, under the provisions
                  of
                  this Section.

              

      

       

      
        	 	
                Employees
                  requesting a limited duty assignment must first obtain a release
                  to do so
                  from their physician. The Company will make every reasonable effort
                  to
                  identify and make available, limited duty work assignments to employees
                  that cannot perform some or all of the essential functions of their
                  classification due to illness or injury. When possible, such work
                  will be
                  made available in the employee's own headquarters. (Added
                  1/1/03)

              

      

      

      
        	
                16.14
                  

              	
                After
                  attainment of journeyman status through the Apprenticeship Program,
                  the
                  Company need not consider the journeyman’s bid back into another
                  Apprentice Program for a period of one year. (Added
                  1/1/98)

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        17

      EXPENSES

      

      This
        Title is amended and restated as of 3/1/07.

      

      Overtime
        Meals (Titles 17.1 through 17.7)

      

      17.1         
        (a) The
        Company will provide adequate meals or a meal allowance and  allow
        employees to procure adequate meals when an employee has earned a meal according
        to Sections 17.1 through 17.6. Adequate meals are defined as  those
        which are appropriate at the time and adequate in quantity and quality.
 Nourishment
        provided by the Company, but not considered adequate shall not be considered
        as
        a meal taken.

      

      (b) The
        provisions of this Title shall be applied in a reasonable manner by the Company
        and the Union to conform to the intent of the parties, namely, that the Company
        will provide adequate meals when employees are prevented from observing their
        normal meal practices, and such other meals as provided for in this Title.
        Time
        necessary to consume the meals provided shall be considered as time worked.
        Union will cooperate with the Company to insure that the time necessary to
        consume meals will not be excessive. Company shall have right to consider
        excessive time taken to consume meals as time not worked.

      

      (c)
        “Normal Meal Practice":

      

      Breakfast:
        The two (2) hour period immediately preceding the time corresponding to an
        employee's regular starting time on regular work days.

      

      Lunch:
        From four (4) hours after the time corresponding to an employee's regular
        starting time on regular work days to five (5) hours after this starting
        time.

      

      Dinner:
        From one and one half (11⁄2) hours after the time corresponding to an employee's
        regular quitting time on regular work days to two and one half (21⁄2) hours after
        this quitting time.

      

      The
        meal
        practices observed on work days shall prevail on non-work days.

      

      (d) In
        connection with all assignments, except those designated as Out-Of-Town
        assignments, employees shall be paid a meal allowance for each meal earned
        and
        not provided by the Company. The meal allowance will be paid through the
        payroll
        system on the employee’s next paycheck. The meal allowance will be $24.96. All
        meal allowances include taxes and tip.

      

      The
        value
        of such allowance shall be reviewed an updated annually. The basis for such
        adjustment shall be the change in the appropriate Consumer Price Index for
        the
        preceding calendar year.

       

      (e)
        Meal
        cards may only be used when crews of 3 or more employees dine together. The
        amount of the meal allowance defined in 17.1(d) shall not be exceeded per
        employee. (Subject to Title 17.1(g))

      

      (f)  Any
        amounts exceeding the meal allowance will be billed to the employee whose
        card
        was used. When using a meal card, receipts must be attached to the timesheet
        of
        the employee using the meal card with the name(s) of each employee covered
        by
        the receipt. If the use of a meal card is not supported by a valid receipt,
        the
        entire amount will be billed to the employee who used the card. If such billings
        are not paid by the employee within thirty (30) calendar days after receipt
        of
        said billings, the Company shall have the right to deduct such amounts from
        the
        employee's paycheck.

      

      (g)  Upon
        prior approval of Management, meal allowance limits may be
        exceeded.

      

      (h) Parties
        recognize that certain meals may take more or less than thirty (30) minutes
        to
        consume. Any excessive time may be subject to justification.

      

      17.2 If
        the
        Company requires an employee to perform work for one and one-half (11⁄2) hours
        beyond regular work hours, the employee will earn a meal at that time and
        every
        four (4) hours thereafter for as long as the employee continues to
        work.

      

      17.3 (a) On
        callout overtime, outside of regular hours on work days, the employee will
        earn:

      	1)  	
              Breakfast,
                if callout work begins prior to two (2) hours before the time
                corresponding to the employee's regular starting time on regular
                work
                days. 

            

      	2)  	
              Lunch,
                if callout work begins prior to two (2) hours before the time
                corresponding to the employee's regular starting time on regular
                work days
                and he has qualified for a lunch through time worked.
                

            

      	3)  	
              Neither
                breakfast nor lunch, if callout work begins two (2) hours or less
                before
                the time corresponding to the employee's regular starting time on
                regular
                work days, unless the employee has not been allowed sufficient time
                by his
                Supervisor, at the Supervisor's discretion, to eat his breakfast
                and
                prepare his lunch before reporting for
                work.

            

      	4)  	
              Other
                meals at intervals of four (4) hours as long as the employee continues
                to
                work. Where any such work extends into regular work hours the normal
                meal
                practice as defined in Section 17.1(c) shall
                apply.

            

      

      (b) On
        callout overtime on non-work days, the employee will earn:

      

      A
        meal at
        intervals of four (4) hours as long as the employee continues to work. A
        meal as
        soon as the work time encroaches upon a meal period as defined in Section
        17.1(c), unless the employee has earned a meal in the preceding four (4)
        hours.

      

      Normal
        meal practice shall prevail for work performed during those hours described
        in
        Section 17.1. (Amended 5/1/81)

      

      17.4             
        (a) On
        prearranged overtime assignments, the employee will earn a meal if such work
        begins prior to two (2) hours before the time corresponding to the employee's
        regular starting time on work days and non-work days. If such work begins
        two
        (2) hours or less before the time corresponding to the employee's regular
        starting time on a work day or a non-work day the normal meal practice relating
        to work days shall prevail. If such work continues, the employee will earn
        meals
        in accordance with Section 17.2 for the duration of the assignment.

      

      (b) If
        such
        prearranged overtime is wholly outside of regularly scheduled work hours
        on work
        days or anytime on non-work days, the employee shall provide one (1) meal
        on the
        job and shall be allowed thirty (30) minutes for consumption of such meal,
        approximately four (4) but not more than five (5) hours after beginning work,
        to
        be considered as time worked. If such work continues, Section 17.2 or 17.3
        will
        be applicable. (Amended 6/18/04 by Letter of Agreement)

      

      17.5            
        An
        employee will earn a meal whenever an employee’s normal meal practice, as
        defined in 17.1(c), is disrupted.

      

      17.6            
        An
        employee who has earned a meal(s) based on Sections 17.1 through 17.5 but
        elects
        not to eat the meal(s) on Company time shall be compensated with thirty (30)
        minutes at the applicable overtime rate and one meal allowance for each meal
        missed. All thirty (30) minute periods will be considered as time worked
        and
        will count towards rest period eligibility. Rest period, if earned, will
        commence after all compensation for time worked and meals missed has
        ended.

      

      Out-Of-Town
        Expenses (Titles 17.7 through 17.12)

      

      	17.7  	
              Nothing
                in the preceding Sections of this Title shall be construed as altering
                in
                any way the lunch time provisions set forth in Title
                6.

            

      

      17.8 (a) Regular
        employees who are assigned to temporary work at such distance from their
        headquarters that it is impractical for them to return thereto, shall be
        allowed
        actual personal expense for meals and lodging for the duration of such
        assignment, provided they lodge at places to be designated by Company. Under
        such circumstances, the Company designated lodging will be the reporting
        place.

      

      (b) 
        An
        employee may elect to provide his own regular meals on an out-of-town work
        assignment requiring overnight stay. In such cases, employees will be paid
        a
        meal-only subsistence for providing their own meals. The daily meal subsistence
        will be:

      

      Service
        Territory areas not listed below $39 10/1/06
        to 9/30/07

      Washoe
        County (Reno/Sparks/Incline) $49 10/1/06
        to 9/30/07

      Douglas
        County (Carson City) $64 10/1/06
        to 9/30/07

      El
        Dorado
        County (South Lake Tahoe) $54 10/1/06
        to 9/30/07

      Nevada
        County (Truckee) $59 10/1/06
        to 9/30/07

      Placer
        County (Tahoe City) $59 10/1/06
        to 9/30/07

      

      Any
        overtime meals which occur while on an out-of-town assignment shall be subject
        to the provisions of Sections 17.1 through 17.7.

      

      (c) Upon
        the
        approval of the Company, an employee may elect to provide living accommodations
        and meals in lieu of those provided by the Company. In such cases, employees
        will be paid a meal and lodging subsistence allowance. The subsistence allowance
        for each day of the work assignment will be:

      

      Service
        Territory areas not listed below $99 10/1/06
        to 9/30/07

      Washoe
        County (Reno/Sparks/Incline) $150 10/1/06
        to 5/31/07

      $188 6/1/07
        to
        8/31/07

      $150 9/1/07
        to
        9/30/07

      Douglas
        County (Carson City/Stateline) $147 10/1/06
        to 9/30/07

      El
        Dorado
        County (South Lake) $176 10/1/06
        to 11/30/06

      $198 12/1/06
        to 3/31/07

      $160 4/1/07
        to
        6/30/07

      $176 7/1/07
        to
        9/30/07

      Nevada
        County (Truckee) $146 10/1/06
        to 9/30/07

      Placer
        County (Tahoe City) $157 10/1/06
        to 9/30/07

      

      On
        the
        last day of the whole aforementioned assignment, the subsistence allowance
        will
        be one half (1⁄2) of that provided above.

      

      The
        dollar amounts prescribed above in Sections 17.8(b) and 17.8(c) will be adjusted
        based on Section 274 of the Internal Revenue Code, Treasury Regulations and
        Administrative Interpretations. (Amended 1/1/95)

      

      Employees
        working a five (5) day work week and electing to remain within the project
        area
        on their two (2) non-work days will not be entitled to the meal and lodging
        subsistence allowance for the non-work days. If assigned to work six (6)
        days
        during the work week, the meal and lodging subsistence allowance will be
        granted
        for each of the seven (7) days in the work week. In this situation, an employee
        may elect not to take the extra day(s) of meal and lodging subsistence in
        lieu
        of traveling home and back in a Company vehicle and on Company time. (Amended
        1/1/03)

      

      An
        employee shall not be entitled to the meal and lodging subsistence allowance
        for
        any day he is absent from duty for personal reasons.

      

      In
        the
        event of the illness of an employee, meal and lodging subsistence allowance
        shall be granted only for the first regularly scheduled work day. If such
        illness exceeds one (1) regularly scheduled work day, employees shall be
        encouraged to seek proper medical attention at facilities properly equipped
        to
        render same.

      

      Transportation
        and allowances shall be provided to employees by the Company in accordance
        with
        the terms of Sections 17.8(a) and 17.9 of the Agreement, except that time
        spent
        by employees traveling in their personal vehicles to the project at the
        beginning of the employee's assignment and from the project at the end of
        the
        employee's assignment shall not be considered as time worked.

      

      A
        travel
        allowance equal to that provided for under Title 5, Section 5.1, for one
        (1)
        round trip, will be allowed each employee providing his own meals and lodging
        under the following conditions: (Amended 1/1/95)

      

      1.
        Travel
        to the project at the beginning of the employee's assignment and from the
        project at the end of the employee's assignment.

      

      2. 
        Travel
        from one (1) temporary reporting place designated by Company to another such
        Company designated temporary reporting place within the project for the purpose
        of relocating an employee's personal living accommodations.

      

      Employees
        will be required to report for work at the established starting time and
        at the
        temporary reporting place designated by Company. It is understood that the
        temporary reporting place designated by Company may change from time to time
        due
        to changes in Company's operational requirements. Such changes shall occur
        at
        Company's option.

      

      Employees
        receiving the meal and lodging subsistence allowance in accordance with the
        foregoing provisions shall report for work on the first scheduled work day
        of
        the work week, at the established starting time, at the temporary reporting
        place designated by Company.

      

      Employees
        providing their own meals and lodging shall accept full responsibility for
        the
        health, welfare and safety of any family members or personal property taken
        with
        them while on this job assignment. Employees shall hold the Company harmless
        of
        any and all liability involving family members, friends, personal property
        or
        equipment. (Amended 5/1/82)

      

      (d) Employees
        who are assigned to temporary out-of-town, overnight work assignments, as
        outlined in Sections 17.8(a), 17.8(b) and 17.8(c), shall be paid an additional
        $2.00 per hour out-of-town premium, commencing on departure the first work
        day
        and ending on the start of the last work day after the last night's stay.
        Such
        premium shall be paid for the duration of the assignment, excluding days
        not
        worked, even though such assignment may be interrupted by weekends or authorized
        days off during which the employee returns to his headquarters. (Amended
        1/1/95)

      

      When
        out-of-town premium is applicable to time worked at the overtime rate of
        pay,
        the overtime rate shall be applied to the out-of-town work premium.

      

      Out-of-town
        premium shall be applicable only for hours considered time worked and shall
        not
        be paid for non-work time such as sick leave, time off own accord, etc. (Added
        5/1/83; Effective 5/1/84)

      

      17.9       
        If
        on
        their non-work days any such employees remain at such designated places,
        their
        expenses for meals and lodging on such days shall be paid by Company, but
        if
        they go elsewhere for their personal convenience Company shall not reimburse
        them for any expense they incur thereby. If any such employees return to
        their
        headquarters on their non-work days, Company at its option shall (1) allow
        them
        the equivalent of any saving it realizes in their meals and lodging costs,
        or
        (2) reimburse them for the expenses of round-trip transportation by public
        carrier, or (3) provide round-trip transportation by Company vehicle, if
        such
        travel is at Company's request.

      

      17.10     An
        employee who is required to change his residence from one (1) locality to
        another for the Company's convenience, shall be eligible for authorized
        relocation expenses (Company reserves the right to select approved expenses)
        consistent with the current Company policy/procedure if the employee's place
        of
        residence is at least 50 miles from his/her new headquarters. This benefit
        does
        not apply if the move results from an employee exercising his/her rights
        under
        Title 16, except when there is only one qualified bidder for a journeyman
        or
        above job, qualified moving expenses, not to exceed $2,000 with a limit on
        availability to said bidder once every five years, will be available. (Amended
        1/1/98)

      

      17.11     
        Insofar
        as possible, the Company will give at least one (1) day's notice to an employee
        who is to be sent out of town for work in order that the employee may have
        time
        to prepare for the trip. The cost of Company provided meals for which the
        employee qualifies during each day of such assignments shall not exceed meal
        allowances specified in Section 17.8(b) for such meals.

      

      Meal
        cards may only be used when employees are given an out-of-town assignment
        and do
        not have sufficient time to request and receive the up-front meal allowance.
        The
        amount of the meals charged to the card will be limited to the appropriate
        per
        diem amount for the location of the assignment.

      

      17.12
         On
        optional or voluntary training related travel out of Sierra’s service territory,
        the following shall apply.

      	·  	
              Company
                to reimburse for actual expenses.

            

      	·  	
              Out-of-town
                premium will not be in effect.

            

      	·  	
              No
                overtime will be paid; however, Company Management to be sympathetic
                to
                travel connections and delays. (Added
                1/1/98)

            

      

      

      TITLE
        18

      APPRENTICESHIP

      

      18.1       
        (a)
        A
        committee, known as the Joint Apprenticeship Training Committee, shall be
        established for the purpose of working out apprenticeship problems.

      

      (b)
        The
        committee shall be composed of four (4) members appointed by the Company
        and
        four (4) members appointed by the Union. (Amended 1/1/95).

      

      (c)
        The
        committee members shall serve from the date of their appointment until their
        successors are duly selected.

      

      (d)
        The
        Project Administrator, Apprenticeships shall be the committee chairman and
        the
        secretary will be selected from the Union Representatives on the
        Committee.

      

      (e)
        The
        chairman will be responsible for an agenda of, and presiding over scheduled
        meetings. The secretary shall record the minutes of each meeting and distribute
        them to all appropriate persons.

      

      (f)
        Committee meetings shall be held once a month or as designated by the chairman.
        (Amended 5/1/82)

      

      
        	
                18.2

              	
                The
                  JATC shall have the responsibility for developing new apprenticeship
                  programs, amending existing apprenticeship programs, and investigating
                  problems related to such areas as entrance requirements, standards
                  of
                  progress, methods of testing and scoring, apprenticeship working
                  conditions, and procedures for removal or freezing when apprentices
                  fail
                  to meet established requirements. (Amended
                  5/1/82)

              

      

      

      
        	
                18.3

              	
                The
                  Company shall not be liable for lost time or expenses of the Union
                  appointed members of the Apprenticeship
                  Committee.

              

      

      

      
        	
                18.4

              	
                Any
                  programs or plans which may be agreed upon by the Committee with
                  reference
                  to items listed in 18.2 shall be reduced to writing and upon approval
                  and
                  acceptance by the President of the Company and the Business Manager
                  of the
                  Union, such supplemental agreements shall constitute an amendment
                  to this
                  Agreement as of the date specified in such supplementary
                  agreement.

              

      

      

      
        	
                18.5

              	
                The
                  Company may post and fill Apprentice Lineman job vacancies within
                  any
                  District of the Company, subject to the provisions of Title 16.
                  When an
                  Apprentice Lineman has completed six (6) months at the top step
                  of the
                  Lineman Apprentice wage progression and has successfully met all
                  requirements for advancement to Journeyman status, he shall automatically
                  be reclassified to the classification and wage rate of a Lineman
                  within
                  the Headquarters in which his apprenticeship has been served, and
                  the
                  Company shall not be required to post a Journeyman vacancy. When
                  an
                  Apprentice Lineman has reached the thirty-six (36) month step of
                  the
                  Lineman Apprentice wage progression and has successfully met all
                  requirements for advancement to Journeyman status, he may be, at
                  Company's
                  discretion, reclassified to the classification and wage of a Journeyman
                  Lineman within the Headquarters in which his apprenticeship has
                  been
                  served, and the Company shall not be required to post a Journeyman
                  vacancy. Apprentice Linemen shall be required to serve their entire
                  apprenticeship training period in one (1) Headquarters of the Company
                  unless otherwise agreed to by Company and Union. (Amended
                  5/1/91)

              

      

      

      
        	
                18.6

              	
                When
                  an apprentice in any formalized Apprenticeship Training Program
                  has
                  completed six (6) months at the top step of his apprentice wage
                  progression and has successfully met all requirements for advancement
                  to
                  Journeyman status, he shall automatically be reclassified to the
                  classification and wage rate of a Journeyman within the Department
                  in
                  which his apprenticeship has been served, and the Company shall
                  not be
                  required to post a Journeyman vacancy. When an apprentice has reached
                  the
                  top step of his wage progression and has successfully met all requirements
                  for advancement to Journeyman status, he may be, at Company's discretion,
                  reclassified to the classification and wage rate of Journeyman
                  within the
                  Department in which his apprenticeship has been served, and the
                  Company
                  shall not be required to post a Journeyman vacancy. (Amended
                  5/1/81)

              

      

      

      
        	
                18.7

              	
                All
                  apprenticeship job vacancies will be filled in accordance with
                  the
                  provisions of Section 16.10 of this Agreement. (Added
                  5/1/83)

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        19

      MISCELLANEOUS

      

      
        	
                19.1

              	
                No
                  employee shall be required to be "on call." An employee placed
                  on standby
                  duty shall be considered working and shall receive pay as such.
                  Provisions
                  to this section do not apply to the Emergency Response Program
                  (Attachment
                  VIII). (Amended 1/1/98)

              

      

      

      
        	
                19.2

              	
                (Deleted
                  5/1/80)

              

      

      

      
        	
                19.3

              	
                The
                  Company has the right to subcontract work. The Company agrees that
                  is will
                  not subcontract work normally performed by the bargaining unit
                  where as a
                  direct result of such subcontracting, bargaining unit employees
                  will be
                  laid off. 

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                If
                  due to lack of work, the Company chooses to reduce staffing levels
                  and it
                  has contract employees performing the same type of work normally
                  performed
                  by bargaining unit employees, the Company will lay off the contract
                  employees prior to bargaining unit employees; provided the bargaining
                  unit
                  employees are qualified to perform the work and willing to accept
                  reassignment. This paragraph and restriction will not apply to
                  subcontracts or contracts covering a defined scope of work or to
                  contracts
                  which are bid and accepted on a basis other than a per hour per
                  employee
                  cost.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                Upon
                  request of the Union, the Company will review on a quarterly basis,
                  in the
                  labor management committee, the status of the outside contracts.
                  (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                19.4

              	
                This
                  Agreement sets forth all benefits which the Company has agreed
                  to provide.
                  However, the Company shall not, by reason of the execution of this
                  Agreement, abrogate or reduce the scope of any present plan or
                  rule
                  providing a benefit to current employees if: 1) such benefit is
                  set forth
                  in a signed, written Agreement between the parties or is a binding
                  past
                  practice; and 2) is not inconsistent with this Agreement. All benefits
                  are
                  only agreed to be furnished during the term of this Agreement.
                  (Amended
                  3/5/07) 

              

      

      

      
        	
                19.5

              	
                Job
                  descriptions are not intended to be so restrictive as to prohibit
                  performance of work not specifically mentioned in the job descriptions
                  themselves. Such work assignments shall be in accordance with Section
                  4.3
                  of the Agreement.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                Employees
                  will perform any and all tasks for which they are properly trained
                  and can
                  competently and safely perform. The employee has discretion in
                  determining
                  his ability to perform the work safely. (Added
                  1/1/03)

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                When
                  the Company proposes that employee(s) perform tasks in another
                  job
                  description, the Company will provide task specific and related
                  safety
                  training. The Company will ask for volunteers for such training
                  and
                  periodic retraining. An employee’s decision not to volunteer will not
                  affect his performance evaluation or his opportunity to advance.
                  The
                  Company and Union will reach mutual agreement prior to implementation
                  of
                  such tasks or training. This training is not intended to replace
                  a
                  journeyman or qualified employee, nor shall it impact overtime.
                  (Added
                  1/1/03).

              

      

      

      
        	
                19.6

              	
                Nothing
                  herein contained shall be construed as to limit the right of the
                  Company
                  to determine the character, extent and methods of its operations,
                  the
                  amount of production, the number of employees required in total
                  and in the
                  specific classifications of work.

              

      

      

      
        	
                19.7

              	
                The
                  Company will furnish for use by employees all special tools it
                  deems
                  necessary that may be required by any classification in the performance
                  of
                  the job therein. The Company will replace all personal hand tools,
                  as
                  normally purchased by the Company, which are worn out in the service
                  of
                  the Company and are turned in to the Company for
                  replacement.

              

      

      

      
        	
                19.8

              	
                If
                  any part or portion of this contract should be invalid or be superseded
                  by
                  either state or Federal law, the remaining portions of the contract
                  shall,
                  nevertheless, remain in full force and
                  effect.

              

      

      

      19.9 (Deleted
        1/1/98)

      

      
        	
                19.10

              	
                Severance
                  benefits shall be provided pursuant to the Sierra Pacific Power
                  Company
                  Bargaining Unit Employees Severance Pay Plan, which became effective
                  January 1, 1995, for employees laid off through the application
                  of Title
                  23. (Added 1/1/95)

              

      

      

      

      BARGAINING
        UNIT EMPLOYEES SEVERANCE PAY PLAN

      

      Severance
        Provision (if laid off for lack of work):

       

      #
        of
        Weeks for Each

      Full
        Year
        of

      Continuous
        Service Minimum
        #
        of Weeks Maximum
        #
        of Weeks 

      (Max.
        17
        Years) +
        of
        Severance = 
        of
        Severance

      One
        (1) 
        One
        (1) 
        Eighteen
        (18)

      

      
        	 	
                For
                  the duration of the severance benefit period, employees will receive
                  medical/dental/vision benefits based on whatever plan they were
                  enrolled
                  in at the time of layoff provided that they make any required premium
                  contributions. (Amended 1/1/98)

              

      

      

      19.11 Enhanced
        Severance & Retirement Bridge Program

      

      Employees
        are eligible for “enhanced severance & retirement bridge program” options if
        they are determined to be no longer required due to displacement as a result
        of
        a sale, divestiture, merger, or any other significant business event (e.g.,
        the
        closing of an office or the termination of an operation). Affected employee
        is
        defined as an employee in a specific classification and location. (Amended
        3/1/07)

      

      (See
        19.11(g), Enhanced Severance & Retirement Bridge Program Flow
        Chart.)

      

      
        	 	
                A.

              	
                NOTIFICATION
                  OF INDIVIDUALS: Company will notify Union and employees affected
                  by an
                  event as soon as possible.

              

      

      
        	 	
                B.

              	
                PLACEMENT:
                  Company and Union will work to place affected employees in available
                  positions for which they are
                  qualified:

              

      

      
        	 	
                1.

              	
                Volunteers
                  will be requested and selected by company seniority. If there are
                  no
                  volunteers, reverse seniority will be used to select employees
                  for
                  enhanced severance and retirement bridge
                  program.

              

      

      
        	 	
                2.

              	
                Employee
                  offered comparable position [defined as the same headquarters location
                  (i.e., located within a 35-mile radius of the previous location)
                  and same
                  wage (i.e., comparable or higher wage if qualified)], it will be
                  offered
                  to the affected employee(s). The employee will have five (5) working
                  days
                  to notify the Company of their decision. If the employee accepts
                  the
                  position, it will be awarded to them at the appropriate wage rate.
                  If the
                  employee refuses the position, he/she will be terminated with no
                  severance. (Amended 3/1/07)

              

      

      
        	 	
                3.

              	
                Employee
                  offered non-comparable position (defined as a new headquarters
                  located
                  more than a 35-mile radius from the previous headquarters and/or
                  wage
                  reduction): (Amended 3/1/07)

              

      

      a)
         the
        employee will have five (5) days to notify the company of his/her decision
        to
        accept the offer at the appropriate wage rate.

      b)
         if
        employee accepts and is awarded the position, he/she will be eligible for
        retraining, if required, and up to $2000 relocation expense.

      c)
         if
        employee declines, he/she will be eligible for:

      1.
        Enhanced Severance defined as:

      	·  	
              two
                (2) weeks of pay for each year of service, with a maximum of 52
                weeks

            

      	·  	
              a
                lump sum payment of $4,500 for training or outplacement
                services

            

      	·  	
              six
                (6) months of company-paid COBRA

            

      OR

      2.
         Retirement
        Bridge Program options:

      
        	 	
                a)

              	
                An
                  affected employee who has achieved 80 (eighty) points in combination
                  of
                  age and credited service at the time they are affected will not
                  have to
                  reach the minimum age 55 requirement for retirement or post retirement
                  medical. The employee’s retirement benefit will be reduced by 4% per year
                  for each year under age 62. 

              

      

      _For
        example, an employee who is age 49 with 31 years of service (for a total
        of 80
        points) at the time they are affected would be eligible to “retire” and receive
        post retirement medical regardless of their minimum age and would receive
        the
        benefit of the 4% reduction for each year under age 62 rather than the previous
        6% reduction for each year under age 65.

      OR

      
        	 	
                b)

              	
                An
                  affected employee may add the following schedule of points to either
                  their
                  age or service or a combination thereof to affect their retirement
                  eligibility. The employee must achieve a minimum age of 55 (including
                  points) with at least 10 years of service to be eligible to retire
                  and
                  receive post retirement medical.

              

      

      

      Years
        of
        Service  Points

      0-9                                 
        0

      10-14                             
        3

      15-19                              4

      20+                                 5

      

      	·  	
              For
                example, an employee who is age 52 with 28 years of service at the
                time
                they are affected can add 3 points to their age and effectively become
                age
                55 and 2 points to service, which gives them 85 points, which qualifies
                them for full retirement at the time they
                retire.

            

      

      Retirement-bridge
        points can be applied to an employee’s age and/or years of credit service (or a
        combination thereof) to achieve eligibility for retirement and post-retirement
        medical and/or to improve an employee’s pension benefit:

      

      	·  	
              For
                example, an employee who is age 58 with 19 years of service at the
                time
                they are affected can add 4 points to his age to achieve age 62,
                which
                qualified him for an unreduced pension benefit, OR
                4
                points to his service to achieve 23 years of credited service, whichever
                combination provides the most advantage to the employee. (Added 4/11/00
                by
                Letter of Agreement)

            

      

      c) Employees
        can select only one option - either Severance OR
        Retirement Bridge.

      

      d)  If
        employee declines Enhanced Severance and Retirement Bridge Program options,
        they
        will be eligible for consideration under Title 23, Demotion and Layoff Procedure
        (bumping).

      

      e)  Title
        19.10 severance calculation will apply with one (1) week per year with a
        minimum
        of one (1) week of severance, i.e., a one year employee would receive two
        (2)
        weeks of severance pay. Rehire rights will be limited to one year. The IBEW
        1245
        will be responsible for monitoring the program. The Company will provide
        the
        list of affected employees and listings of job openings as they
        occur.

      f)  When
        an
        employee exercises Title 23, Demotion and Layoff Procedure (bumping), the
        affected employee (bumped employee) will start at the “placement” step of the
        enhanced severance and retirement bridge program options. (Added
        1/1/98)

      

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      

      Section
        19.11(g), Enhanced Severance & Retirement Bridge Program Flow
        Chart

      (this
        chart should only be used as a guide when reviewing Section 19.11)

      

      

      
        	
                19.12

              	
                In
                  the event Company seeks protection from bankruptcy, it shall as
                  soon as
                  practical thereafter file with the bankruptcy court a motion to
                  assume
                  this agreement, and it shall take every reasonable step in support
                  of the
                  motion. (Added 1/1/03)

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        20

      SUPPLEMENTAL
        BENEFITS FOR

      INDUSTRIAL
        INJURY

      

      
        	
                20.1

              	
                When
                  an employee is absent by reason of injury which comes within the
                  application of the Nevada Industrial Insurance Act, the Nevada
                  Occupational Diseases Act, or the Workman's Compensation and Insurance
                  Chapters of the State of California Labor Code, he shall be entitled
                  to
                  supplementary benefits for the duration of such temporary disability.
                  Benefits shall begin with the first work day of absence following
                  the day
                  of injury. The amount of Supplemental benefit payable for each
                  day of
                  absence shall be 85% of the employee's basic daily wage less the
                  sum of
                  any payments to which he may be entitled under the aforementioned
                  acts or
                  any other acts applying to the case. The Company will investigate
                  any
                  employee off work on industrial injury. If there is reason to believe
                  that
                  the intent and/or benefits of this section are being abused, the
                  supplemental benefit will be terminated. After six (6) months off
                  on
                  industrial injury the employee will no longer accrue vacation or
                  sick
                  leave until such time as he reports back to work. Reference is
                  hereby made
                  to Section 16.13, relative to employees permanently injured in
                  the
                  Company's services.

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        21

      GRIEVANCE
        PROCEDURE

      

      
        	
                21.1

              	
                Any
                  grievance which may arise between Union or any employee in a Bargaining
                  Unit classification and Company with respect to the interpretation
                  or
                  application of any of the terms of this Agreement and with respect
                  to such
                  matters as the alleged discriminatory or arbitrary discharge, discipline,
                  or demotion of an individual employee shall be processed through
                  the
                  procedure set forth in the following paragraphs of this
                  Title.

              

      

      

      
        	
                21.2

              	
                An
                  Investigating Committee shall be established and shall consist
                  of at least
                  two (2) members, one (1) appointed by Union and one (1) by Company.
                  The
                  Investigating Committee shall serve at the discretion of the Grievance
                  Committee. Time allotted for completion of an investigation and
                  resources
                  allowed shall be dictated by the Grievance Committee. (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                21.3

              	
                A
                  Joint Grievance Committee shall be established consisting of four
                  (4)
                  members appointed by Union, one (1) of which will be the Union
                  Business
                  Representative, and four (4) members appointed by Company. The
                  Grievance
                  Committee shall meet at a time and place to be designated by mutual
                  consent of the members thereof. The meetings shall be limited to
                  one (1)
                  per month but need not be held each month if there is a lack of
                  business
                  for the Committee to conduct.

              

      

      

      21.4 (a) STEP
        1 -
        As the initial step in the adjustment of an alleged grievance of an employee,
        the Union Shop Steward shall discuss same with the Supervisor in charge and
        the
        Union Shop Steward shall inform the Supervisor that this is the first step
        of
        the grievance procedure. The Supervisor shall have five (5) working days
        from
        date of notification to give his verbal response.

      

      (b) STEP
        2 -
        If they are unable to resolve the alleged grievance as provided in Subsection
        21.4(a), the Union Shop Steward shall present a written statement of the
        alleged
        grievance to the Supervisor in charge within five (5) working days after
        completion of the first step. Such grievance report form shall have been
        approved by Company and Union. The Supervisor shall present his answer in
        writing on grievance form to the Union Shop Steward as soon as possible,
        but in
        no event more than ten (10) working days from the date Union Shop Steward
        presents the written statement of the alleged grievance to the Supervisor
        in
        charge.

      (c) Discussions
        between Union Shop Steward and the Supervisor may be on Company time but
        shall
        be at such time and place as not to interfere with the work in
        progress.

      

      (d) Grievances
        shall be introduced at the initial step of the grievance procedure within
        the
        time limits specified in subsections (1) and (2) hereof:

      

      
        	 	 	
                1.

              	
                A
                  grievance involving the alleged discriminatory or arbitrary discharge
                  of
                  an employee shall be introduced at the initial step of the grievance
                  procedure not later than ten (10) working days after an employee
                  discharge
                  becomes effective. Company shall answer, in writing, within five
                  (5)
                  working days after receipt of Union's written
                  grievance.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                2.

              	
                Grievances
                  as described in Section 21.1 other than specified in (1) above
                  shall be
                  introduced at the initial step of the grievance procedure not later
                  than
                  thirty (30) calendar days after the date of the incident or action
                  complained of which is the basis of the grievance, or in a situation
                  beyond the control of the employee, thirty (30) calendar days after
                  the
                  date the employee became aware of said incident or
                  action.

              

      

      

      
        	
                21.5

              	
                STEP
                  3 - If the Union Shop Steward and Supervisor involved are not able
                  to
                  reach an agreement on the disposition of a grievance, or if the
                  Company
                  fails to answer within the time limit above, it may be referred
                  by the
                  Shop Steward to the Union's Business Representative. If the alleged
                  grievance is not presented to the third step of the grievance procedure
                  within ten (10) working days after receiving the Supervisor's answer
                  in
                  Step 2; the grievance shall be considered closed. The Union's Business
                  Representative may present such grievance in duplicate on the proper
                  form
                  to the Human Resources Business Partner or Labor Relations. The
                  form shall
                  be completed by the Company and returned to the Union's Committee
                  Chairman
                  within ten (10) working days from receipt thereof. Grievances may
                  be
                  extended before referring to the next step by mutual agreement
                  between the
                  Company and Union. (Amended 1/1/03)

              

      

      

      21.6 (a) STEP
        4 -
        If no settlement is reached at Step 3, or the Company fails to submit a written
        answer within the specified time limit, the Union may refer such alleged
        grievance to the next step of the grievance procedure which is the Joint
        Grievance Committee.

      

      (b) If
        the
        grievance is not settled as provided in Sections 21.4 and 21.5, it shall
        be
        discussed by the Joint Grievance Committee at its next regular meeting. The
        Committee shall consider grievances referred to it as provided in Section
        21.5
        and shall conscientiously endeavor to effect their settlement. The decision
        of
        this Committee shall be final and binding upon both parties. Minutes shall
        be
        kept of the Committee's proceedings and the disposition of all grievances
        shall
        be recorded.

      

      (c) All
        grievances will be processed in the manner prescribed in Sections 21.4 and
        21.5
        and 21.6(a) except those involving alleged discriminatory or arbitrary
        discharge, discipline, or demotion of an individual employee, which, if not
        settled in the manner prescribed in Sections 21.4 and 21.5 shall be referred
        directly to the Investigating Committee. The Investigating Committee shall
        make
        a complete investigation of all the facts pertinent to the grievance and
        shall
        strive to reach agreement on disposition of the grievance. Their agreement
        shall
        be recorded and shall be final and binding on Company, Union and the aggrieved
        employee. If the Committee is unable to reach agreement, it shall refer the
        grievance to the next regular meeting of the Joint Grievance Committee with
        a
        full and complete report of its investigation and the separate recommendations
        of the Investigating Committee members. Company and Union agree that they
        will
        attempt to settle grievances involving alleged discriminatory or arbitrary
        discharge of an individual employee as expeditiously as possible.

      

      
        	
                21.7

              	
                STEP
                  5 - If a satisfactory settlement cannot be reached by the Joint
                  Grievance
                  Committee in two (2) consecutive meetings (unless mutually otherwise
                  agreed), it shall be referred to the Review Committee, such committee
                  to
                  be composed of a Union Representative who was not involved in any
                  of the
                  preceding discussions and his appointee, and an Officer of the
                  Company
                  and/or his appointee. Only “Union Representative” and “Officer of the
                  Company” or his appointee shall have a vote in resolutions. This Committee
                  shall meet within thirty (30) working days after the date the case
                  is
                  referred to the Committee, and shall endeavor to make a decision
                  based on
                  the record referred to it. It may, in its discretion, return the
                  grievance
                  to the Joint Committee with a request for further investigation
                  and
                  consideration by that Committee. It may, at its discretion, conduct
                  a
                  hearing on any grievance submitted to it. This Committee shall
                  be
                  authorized to make a decision which shall be final and binding
                  on Company
                  and Union. If the members agree on the disposition of a grievance
                  a
                  statement to that effect shall be signed by the members. (Amended
                  3/5/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                21.8

              	
                STEP
                  6 - If a satisfactory settlement cannot be reached under the foregoing
                  procedure, either party may refer the case to arbitration by notifying
                  the
                  other in writing to that effect. The parties shall then agree upon
                  a
                  Neutral Arbitrator. In the event the parties are unable to agree
                  on a
                  person to act as a Neutral Arbitrator , within forty-eight (48)
                  hours they
                  shall jointly request the Director of Federal Mediation and Conciliation
                  Service to submit a list of five (5) persons qualified to act as
                  a third
                  member. After receipt of such list, the Union and Company shall
                  alternately challenge two (2) names, the party to have first choice
                  to be
                  determined by lot. The remaining name shall be accepted as the
                  Arbitrator.
                  The Arbitrator shall hear all evidence and arguments on the points
                  in
                  dispute and the written decision shall be final and binding upon
                  the
                  parties hereto. The Arbitrator shall have jurisdiction and authority
                  to
                  interpret and apply the provisions of this Agreement, insofar as
                  shall be
                  necessary to the determination of the grievance of complaint, but
                  it shall
                  not have jurisdiction or authority to alter in any way the provisions
                  of
                  this Agreement.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                The
                  Arbitrator may make such retroactive award, or settlement, of any
                  grievance or complaint as the equities of the case may demand,
                  but in no
                  event shall any award be retroactive beyond the date of the occurrence
                  of
                  the latest incident which gave rise to the grievance, nor shall
                  any award
                  be retroactive for more than one (1) year prior to date of submission
                  of
                  grievance at Step 3. The Company and the Union shall each bear
                  the expense
                  of its own representatives. The expense of the Arbitrator shall
                  be borne
                  equally by the Company and the Union. Either party may call any
                  employee
                  as a witness in any proceeding before the Arbitrator, and if the
                  employee
                  is on duty, the Company agrees to release such employee from duty
                  so he
                  may appear as a witness. If an employee is called to appear before
                  the
                  Arbitrator, the party calling the witness will reimburse him for
                  all
                  expenses including time lost. (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      	21.9  	
              The
                disqualification of a preferred bidder as provided in Section 16.5
                to a
                job classification listed in Exhibit C by reason of Company application
                of
                Section 16.10 shall be referred to Union's member of the Investigating
                Committee. The Union's member shall within fourteen (14) calendar
                days
                notify Company member that an investigation is desired. If no notification
                is made the award shall be made permanent. Where notification is
                given the
                Committee shall make a complete investigation of all the facts pertinent
                to the grievance and this investigation shall substitute as the initial
                step in the adjustment of a grievance provided in Section 21.4. Such
                investigation shall commence as soon as reasonably possible after
                referral
                and the Committee shall diligently carry on its investigation and
                shall
                strive to reach agreement on disposition of the grievance. Their
                agreement
                shall be recorded and shall be final and binding on Company, Union
                and the
                aggrieved employee. If the Committee is unable to reach agreement
                it shall
                refer the grievance to the next regular meeting of the Joint Grievance
                Committee with a full and complete report of its investigation and
                the
                separate recommendations of the Committee
                members.

            

      

      

      TITLE
        22

      EMPLOYEE
        BENEFIT PROGRAMS

      

      The
        Company maintains the right to make administrative changes to any benefit
        plan
        that will not adversely affect the employee’s benefit or cost of such benefit,
        but may reduce the Company’s obligation. These changes will be reviewed and
        discussed with the Joint Benefits Committee. (Amended 1/1/03)

      

      Except
        in
        the event of the election of a different funding medium by Sierra Pacific
        Power
        Company, if any Benefit Plan is terminated the Union or Company shall have
        the
        right to open negotiations for the purpose of negotiating a replacement plan
        or
        program but for no other purpose.

      

       

      Post
        Retirement Medical Options Summary:

      

      The
        following text box reflects the post retirement medical plan buy down payments
        for active employees.

      

      Post
        Retirement Medical Payment Scenario - Active Employees

      

      

      
        	
                Age

              	
                25-29

              	
                30-34

              	
                35-39

              	
                40-44

              	
                45-49

              	
                50-54

              	
                55-59

              	
                60+

              
	
                Payment

              	
                $6k

              	
                $10k

              	
                $19k

              	
                $30k

              	
                $40k

              	
                $50k

              	
                $52k

              	
                $46k

              

      

      

      

      	§  	
              Pre
                1998 employees who retire within 1 year of the date of ratification:
                Choice of current post retirement medical (including comparable Union
                Best
                plan design) or
                buy down payment and defined dollar post retirement medical(1)
                ($260/$130 up to 35 YOS, Advantage or HMO). However, any employee
                with
                less than 75 points that will be eligible to retire (i.e. 55 yrs
                of age
                and 10 years service ) within one year of the ratification date may,
                upon
                making their election, opt to refuse the buy down and maintain current
                retiree medical benefits.  However, such employee must actually
                retire within one year of ratification or they will be transitioned
                to the
                defined dollar benefit and receive the buy
                down.

            

      

      	§  	
              Pre
                1998 employees with 75 points as of 12/31/07 who retire after 1 year
                of
                the date of ratification: Choice of defined benefit post retirement
                medical (80% / 20% premiums Advantage or HMO) or
                buy down payment and defined dollar post retirement medical(1)
                ($260/$130 up to 35 YOS, Advantage or
                HMO).

            

      

      	§  	
              Pre
                1998 employees with less than 75 points as of 12/31/07 who retire
                after 1
                year of the date of ratification: Receive buy down payment and
                defined dollar post retirement medical(1)
                ($260/$130 up to 35 YOS, Advantage or
                HMO).

            

      

      	§  	
              Post
                1998 employees: Receive defined dollar post retirement medical(1)
                ($260/$130 up to 35 YOS, Advantage or
                HMO).

            

      

      	§  	
              Selections
                must be made within 90 days after contract ratification. The buy
                down
                payments will be contributed to the 401(k) plan as soon as
                administratively possible after selections are
                made.

            

      

      	§  	
              The
                company will make retiree medical buy down payments to affected employee’s
                401(k) plan up to the maximum annual amount subject to legal restrictions
                including IRS limitations and non-discrimination
                requirements.

            

      

      	§  	
              Any
                employee whose retiree medical buy down amount is in excess of the
                amount
                contributed by the Company (referenced in the paragraph above), will
                receive additional contributions in subsequent years subject to legal
                restrictions including IRS limitations and non-discrimination requirements
                until the excess amount is received.

            

      

      	§  	
              Retiree
                medical buy down amounts that have not been contributed to employee
                accounts will earn interest at the 30 year Treasury Rate as of the
                date of
                contract ratification. These funds will be segregated from the Company’s
                general fund in order to track appropriate
                earnings.

            

      

      	§  	
              If
                an employee separates from the Company for any reason after the initial
                contribution has been made to the 401(k) plan (other than gross
                misconduct) but prior to receiving the full buy down, the remaining
                amount
                will be paid out to the employee minus applicable taxes.
                

            

      

      (Note
        1) Explanation of defined dollar post retirement medical plan $260/$130 to
        35
        Years of Service:

      

      	·  	
              Employees
                must be 55 years of age and have 10 years of service to qualify for
                Post
                Retirement Medical. 

            

      

      	·  	
              This
                benefit is capped at 35 Years of service.

            

      

      	·  	
              The
                post-retirement calculation for the employer contribution is as
                follows:

            

      

      	a)  	
              For
                employees who retire from the Company prior to reaching age sixty-five
                (65), the Company will contribute $260 per year of service. If an
                employee
                retires prior to reaching age sixty-two (62) and has not obtained
                85
                points as outlined in the Retirement Plan, the $260 is reduced by
                5% for
                each year under age sixty-two (62). Upon reaching age sixty-five
                (65), the
                $260 is reduced to $130 per year of
                service.

            

      	b)  	
              For
                employees who retire from the Company on or after reaching age sixty-five
                (65), the Company will contribute $130 per year of
                service.

            

      

      	·  	
              Pre-age
                65 retirees could choose any medical plan offered under the Collective
                Bargaining Agreement between IBEW Local 1245 and Sierra Pacific Power
                Company.

            

      

      Examples:

      

      	·  	
              Employee
                retires at age 60 with 25 Years of Credited Service would receive
                $6500
                annually to purchase offered medical benefits.
                $260X25=$6500

            

      

      	·  	
              Employee
                retires on or after age 65 or subsequently becomes age 65 would receive
                $3250 annually to purchase offered medical benefits.
                $130X25=$3250.

            

      

      	·  	
              Employee
                retires with 35 years or more of service would receive $9100 annually
                if
                under age 65 and $4550 upon reaching age 65. $260X35=$9100 and
                $130X35=$4550. 

            

      

      	·  	
              Employee
                retires at age 60 with 22 years of service (did not reach 85 points)
                would
                receive $5148 annually and $2574 upon reaching age 65. ($260X22)-10%=$5148
                and ($130X22)-10%=$2574

            

      

      Active
        Medical Summary:

      

      	·  	
              All
                employees to pay 16% in 2007, 17% in 2008 and 18% in 2009 premium
                share.

            

      

      	·  	
              Available
                Medical plans: Union PPO (Advantage Plan) and HMOs. However, the
                Company
                reserves the right to discontinue HMO coverage if the HMO plan(s)
                lose
                their economic viability. If this occurs, the Company will substitute
                a
                substantially comparable plan, however the Company will not be required
                to
                contribute more money to the new plan than it contributes to the
                PPO
                (Advantage Plan).

            

      

      	·  	
              Additional
                Plan To Be Developed: High Deductible Health Plan (HDHP) or other
                catastrophic coverage.

            

      

      	·  	
              New
                employees will be eligible for medical coverage on the first day
                of the
                month following the date of hire.

            

      

      Employee
        Discount Options Summary:

      

      	·  	
              All
                Employees hired prior to the contract ratification date will have
                the
                option to exchange their present employee discount for an increased
                401(k)
                match.

            

      

      	·  	
              Employees
                who accept the option to exchange 401(k) improvement for their employee
                discount will receive a 401(k) match of 100% up to the first 6% of
                employee contributions.

            

      

      	·  	
              Employees
                hired after the ratification date will not receive an employee discount
                on
                electrical and gas services and will receive a 401(k) match of 100%
                up to
                the first 6% of employee contributions.

            

      

      22.1 Retirement
        Plan

      

      
        	
                1.

              	
                The
                  "Retirement Plan for Employees of Sierra Pacific Power Company",
                  hereinafter referred to as "Retirement Plan", which became effective
                  July
                  1, 1958, and last amended January 1, 1998, is the Plan Document
                  filed with
                  the Department of Labor. For more detailed information regarding
                  the
                  “Retirement Plan” refer to the formal Plan Document or Summary Plan
                  Description.

              

      

      

      
        	
                2.

              	
                While
                  this Contract is in effect, the Company will not change or discontinue
                  the
                  Retirement Plan unless terminated through the election of a different
                  funding medium by Sierra Pacific Power Company, or by operation
                  of law, in
                  which event the rights theretofore accruing to participants under
                  said
                  Retirement Plan shall not be adversely
                  affected.

              

      

      

      
        	
                3.

              	
                Retirement
                  Plan Document will be amended as follows effective July 1, 1998,
                  or other
                  dates as specified. Retirement Plan Summary Plan Description will
                  be
                  updated and distributed to all participants on or before December,
                  1998.

              

      

      
        	 	
                a)

              	
                Unreduced
                  retirement benefit available at age 62 with at least 10 years of
                  Service;
                  at age 65 with one year of Service; or upon achieving age 55 and
                  a total
                  of 85 points when age and Service are added together. All service
                  will be
                  counted toward the 85 points, including those years for which an
                  employee
                  did not make contributions. (Amended 4/11/00 by Letter of
                  Agreement)

              

      

      
        	 	
                b)

              	
                Reduced
                  early retirement benefit available upon attaining a minimum age
                  of 55 with
                  at least 10 years of Credited Service. Early Retirement benefits
                  are
                  reduced by 4% for each year under age
                  62.

              

      

      
        	 	
                c)

              	
                Credited
                  Service recognizes the first year of
                  Service.

              

      

      
        	 	
                d)

              	
                Credited
                  Service recognizes all Service prior to age 21, except for those
                  years
                  during which the participant did not make the necessary contributions
                  to
                  the Retirement Plan when the Plan was contributory. The first year
                  of
                  service, however, shall be considered as “credited”, whether the employee
                  was contributory or not as the employees were not eligible to contribute.
                  (Amended 4/11/00 by Letter of
                  Agreement)

              

      

      
        	 	
                e)

              	
                Covered
                  Compensation includes: 1) Base Pay; 2) Incentive Compensation;
                  3) Out of
                  Town Premium; 4) Upgrade; and 5) Shift
                  Pay.

              

      

      
        	 	
                f)

              	
                Effective
                  January 1, 2005, sick leave accrued at retirement (excluding frozen
                  sick
                  leave hours) will be added to years of Credited Service for vested
                  participants. Frozen sick leave under Title 15.9 remains unchanged.
                  (Amended 1/1/03)

              

      

      

      
        	
                4.

              	
                The
                  retirement benefit calculation is as follows: Final Average Earnings
                  X
                  Years of Credited Service X 1.5%. Please refer to the Plan Document
                  or the
                  Summary Plan Description for more detailed
                  explanation.

              

      

      

      22.2 Post
        Retirement Medical

      

      
        	
                1.

              	
                Employees
                  who “retire” under the qualified Retirement Plan (minimum age 55 with at
                  least 10 years of service), are eligible for Post Retirement Medical
                  benefits.

              

      

      

      
        	
                2.

              	
                Post
                  Retirement Medical benefit provisions are incorporated within the
                  Retirement Plan and the “Medical and Dental Benefit Plan for Bargaining
                  Unit Employees”.

              

      

      

      
        	
                3.

              	
                Employees
                  retiring on or after January 1, 1998, who are under age 65, will
                  be
                  eligible for the same medical, dental and vision plan options as
                  active
                  Bargaining Unit (“BU”) employees. 

              

      

      

      
        	
                4.

              	
                Employees
                  who do not transition into the defined dollar retiree medical plan
                  and who
                  are under age 65 and retire on or after July 1, 1998, will pay
                  20% of the
                  applicable Medical Plan premium (including Dental and Vision);
                  plus an
                  additional 4% of the applicable Medical Plan premium (including
                  Dental and
                  Vision) for each year less than 20 full years of Credited Service.
                  (Amended 3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                5.

              	
                Company
                  and Union agree to engage in ad hoc negotiations regarding post
                  65 retiree
                  medical plans beginning as soon as practical after ratification.
                  The
                  parties will negotiate to design post 65 retiree medical plans
                  which are
                  substantially comparable to or better than the current plan designs
                  of the
                  Advantage PPO plan, Union Best PPO plan, and HMO plans respectively.
                  Once
                  developed, all current retirees and employees who retired within
                  one year
                  of ratification will transition into these Medicare Enhancement
                  Plans upon
                  reaching age 65. All employees who retire after one year of ratification
                  will transition into the Medicare Enhancement plans which are
                  substantially comparable to or better than the Advantage PPO plan
                  and the
                  HMO plans respectively upon reaching age 65. The cost of the plans
                  will be
                  equal to or less than the cost of the current plans as adjusted
                  for
                  inflation.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                If
                  agreement cannot be reached, the Company reserves the right to
                  implement
                  the plans with the Union maintaining the right to challenge whether
                  the
                  plans are “substantially comparable or better” and “of equal or lesser
                  cost” through expedited arbitration. (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                6.

              	
                Employees
                  who do not transition into the defined dollar retiree medical plan
                  and who
                  are age 65 or over and retire on or after July 1, 1998, will pay
                  15% of
                  the applicable Medical Plan premium (including Dental and Vision);
                  plus an
                  additional 4% of the applicable Medical Plan premium (including
                  Dental and
                  Vision) for each year less than 20 full years of Credited Service.
                  In
                  additional, retirees age 65 or over are required to enroll in and
                  pay the
                  cost of Medicare Part “B” or Medicare Part “C”. (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                7.

              	
                Grandfathering:
                  Employees who are age 60 or greater with at least 10 years of service
                  as
                  of July 1, 1998, will not be required to pay 20% (or 15% if over
                  age 65)
                  of the applicable premium at the time they retire, but will be
                  required to
                  pay 4% for each year less than 20 full years of Credited Service.
                  For
                  example, an employee who turns 60 on May 1, 1998, but chooses to
                  retire
                  May 1, 2001, when he has 20 years of service, will not be required
                  to pay
                  20% of his applicable Medical Plan
                  premium.

              

      

      

      
        	
                8.

              	
                Retirees
                  may choose to waive their medical coverage at the time of retirement
                  or
                  any time thereafter. Retirees may re-join the plan, for any reason,
                  only
                  once. (Amended 3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                9.

              	
                Retirees
                  may change plans once each year during an annual open enrollment
                  period
                  without pre-existing exclusions. Retirees can change their coverage
                  level
                  (retiree only; retiree plus spouse; etc.) if they incur a family
                  status
                  change within the plan year.

              

      

      

      
        	
                10.

              	
                Medical
                  Plan premiums will be actuarially determined each plan year. Retirees
                  will
                  be rated separately from active employees for self-funded
                  plans.

              

      

      

      
        	
                11.

              	
                (Deleted
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                12.

              	
                Current
                  Retirees and Employees who retire within one year of ratification
                  will
                  have the option to remain in their current medical plan choices
                  including
                  the Union Best Plan. During open enrollment each year, Retirees
                  may choose
                  between any plan which was available to them at the time they retired,
                  or
                  any plan currently available to active employees. (Added
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      22.3 Voluntary
        Investment Plan [401(k) Plan]

      

      
        	
                1.
                  

              	
                The
                  "Voluntary Investment Plan for Bargaining Unit Employees of Sierra
                  Pacific
                  Power Company", hereinafter referred to as "VIP", which became
                  effective
                  January 1, 1987, and last amended January 1, 1998, is the Plan
                  in effect
                  during the term of this Contract. For more detailed information
                  regarding
                  “VIP” refer to the formal Plan Document or Summary Plan
                  Description.

              

      

      

      
        	
                2.
                  

              	
                The
                  Company will pay the normal administrative fee (excluding loan
                  and other
                  individual transaction costs) for all plan
                  participants.

              

      

      

      
        	
                3.
                  

              	
                Effective
                  January 1, 2003, the maximum contribution of employee earnings
                  is the IRS
                  limit. They are defined as:

              

      

      a) Base
        Pay

      b) Incentive
        Compensation

      c) Out
        of
        Town

      d) Upgrade

      e) Shift
        Premium

      f) Overtime

      g) Rest
        Period

      h) Pager
        Pay

      i)  Any
        other
        cash earnings.

      

      Employees
        hired after ratification will receive a Company match of $1 for each $1 up
        to 6%
        of qualified earnings. Automatic enrollment will increase to 6% of qualified
        earnings at ratification. Company match will begin the first full pay period
        following hire date. (Added 3/1/07)

      

      
        	
                4.

              	
                Effective
                  January 1, 1998 (May 2, 2000 for those indicated with an *), the
                  Company
                  will provide a match of fifty (50) cents for each dollar of employee
                  contributions up to six (6) percent of the following total
                  earnings:

              

      

      a) Base
        Pay

      b) Incentive
        compensation

      c)  
        Out-of-Town

      d)  
        Upgrade

      e)  
        Shift
        Premium

      f)  
        Overtime*

      g)  
        Rest
        Period*

      h)  
        Pager
        Pay*

      i)  
        Any
        other cash earnings*

      (Amended
        4/11/00 by Letter of Agreement)

      

      	5.  	
              If
                an employee reaches the IRS limit, at any time during the tax year,
                and
                their company match is negatively affected, their company match will
                be
                made whole within 30 days following the end of the plan
                year.

            

      

      	6.  	
              Please
                see the Summary Plan Description for Local 1245 or the Vanguard Website
                for the investment options available.

            

      

      	7.  	
              Effective
                January 1, 1998, changes to allocations, payroll deductions, etc.,
                and
                transfers among funds can be done on a monthly
                basis.

            

      

      
        	
                8.
                  

              	
                Effective
                  January 1, 1998, the following changes were made to the BU Voluntary
                  Investment Plan loan provisions:

              

      

      
        	 	
                a)

              	
                Loans
                  are available for any reason for up to 50% of the participants
                  total
                  account balance or $50,000; whichever is
                  less

              

      

      
        	 	
                b)

              	
                Limit
                  of two outstanding loans; (limit of one outstanding loan for Primary
                  Residence)

              

      

      	c)  	
              Loan
                interest rate is Prime plus one percent

            

      	d)  	
              10
                year loan term for Primary Residence, 5 year loan term for all
                others.

            

      

      	9.  	
              Maximum
                employee contributions for pre/post tax and catch-up contributions
                will be
                subject to IRS provisions. Company match will apply to all employee
                contributions to a maximum of 6% of qualified earnings. (Amended
                3/5/07)

            

      

      22.4 Medical,
        Dental, and Vision

      

      
        	
                1.

              	
                The
                  "Medical and Dental Benefit Plan for Bargaining Unit Employees",
                  hereinafter referred to as "Medical Plan", which became effective
                  January
                  1, 1993, and last amended January 1, 1998, is the Medical Plan
                  in effect
                  during the term of this Contract. For more detailed information
                  regarding
                  the “Medical Plan” refer to the formal Plan Document or Summary Plan
                  Description.

              

      

      

      
        	
                2.

              	
                While
                  this Contract is in effect the Company will not change or discontinue
                  the
                  Medical Plan, which is provided for through a Voluntary Employee
                  Benefits
                  Association (VEBA). If by operation of law the Medical Plan is
                  terminated
                  the rights accruing to participants shall not be adversely
                  affected.

              

      

      

      
        	
                3.

              	
                Effective
                  January 1, 1998, a Cafeteria Plan, as defined by Internal Revenue
                  Code
                  Section 125, is established to allow pre-tax premium contributions.
                  Health
                  Care and Dependent Care Flexible Spending Accounts (FSA’s) are also
                  available on a pre-tax basis. 

              

      

      

      
        	
                4.

              	
                The
                  Medical Plan provides the following five (5) options. The options
                  are
                  outlined in Exhibit D.

              

      

      

      a) Preferred
        Provider Organization at 80% (Local 1245 Union PPO Plan -
        Advantage)

      b) HealthFirst
        (HMO)

      c) Hometown
        Health Plan (HMO)

      d) High
        Deductible Health Plan (HDHP) or other catastrophic coverage

      e) No
        coverage, contingent upon proof of other insurance

      (Amended
        3/1/07)

      

      The
        Company reserves the right to discontinue HMO coverage if the HMO plan(s)
        lose
        their economic viability. If this occurs, the Company will substitute a
        substantially comparable plan; however, the Company will not be required
        to
        contribute more money to the new plan that it contributes to the PPO Plan
        (Advantage). (Added 3/1/07)

      

      New
        employees will be eligible for medical coverage on the first day of the month
        following the date of hire. (Added 3/1/07)

      

      
        	
                5.
                  

              	
                Elections
                  of medical plan options will be made each year during an open enrollment
                  period. The election remains in effect for the entire Plan Year,
                  unless
                  the employee incurs a "Family Status Change" as defined by Internal
                  Revenue Code Section 125, Cafeteria Plan. If an employee fails
                  to enroll,
                  he will default to previous year's coverage for himself and his
                  dependents.

              

      

      

      
        	
                6.
                  

              	
                Under
                  option (a), when services are rendered in a community where the
                  PPO is
                  available and there is more than one (1) PPO physician available
                  to
                  perform the services, the employee will be subject to PPO provisions.
                  (Amended 3/5/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                7.
                  

              	
                Under
                  option (a), employees and their dependents are eligible under the
                  provisions of the Preferred Provider Organization (PPO) to receive
                  payment
                  of 80% of usual, reasonable and customary charges
                  when:

              

      

      
        	 	
                a)

              	
                PPO
                  services are not available within thirty (30) miles of the community
                  in
                  which the employee and dependents reside
                  or;

              

      

      1. For
        employees residing in the communities of North Lake Tahoe, South Lake Tahoe,
        Minden and Carson City this provision shall be fifteen (15) miles. (Amended
        3/14/05 by Letter of Agreement)

      
        	 	
                b)

              	
                Employee
                  has an eligible dependent attending school away from home and there
                  is not
                  a PPO provider available or;

              

      

      
        	 	
                c)

              	
                Employee
                  or dependent is traveling away from home and PPO services are not
                  available or;

              

      

      
        	 	
                d)

              	
                Employee
                  is required to work away from their principle residence and PPO
                  services
                  are not available. 

              

      

      
        	 	 	
                (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                8.
                  

              	
                Self-funded
                  Dental and Vision benefits are included in options #4(a), (b),
                  (c) and
                  (d). (Amended 3/5/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                9.
                  

              	
                Within
                  options (b) and (c), employees and their dependents who live in
                  specified
                  zip code areas will be eligible under the Health Maintenance Organization
                  (HMO). (Amended 3/5/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                10.

              	
                (Deleted
                  3/5/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                11.

              	
                The
                  rate structure for the Medical Plan options shall consist of four-tiers:
                  employee only; employee plus spouse; employee plus children; and,
                  employee
                  plus spouse and children. Employee contributions will be made semi-monthly
                  on a pre-tax basis.

              

      

      

      
        	
                12.

              	
                The
                  rates for the self-funded Union PPO Plan will be actuarially determined
                  each plan year, based on previous year’s claims experience. The rates for
                  the HMO options will be as quoted by the respective insurance carriers.
                  The Company contributions to the HMO options will not exceed contributions
                  to self-funded options. (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                13.

              	
                Employees
                  will contribute the following percentages of premiums: 16% in 2007,
                  17% in
                  2008 and 18% in 2009. (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                14.

              	
                (Deleted
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                15.

              	
                (Deleted
                  3/1/07) 

              

      

      

      
        	
                16.

              	
                The
                  Joint Benefits Committee shall evaluate claims experience and actuarially
                  determined rates in each year of the Collective Bargaining Agreement.
                  (Amended 1/1/03)

              

      

      

      17.
        (Deleted 3/1/07)

      

      
        	
                18.

              	
                The
                  medical options, with the exception of the fully-insured HMO's,
                  will have
                  a $2,000,000 lifetime maximum benefit. The Company reserves the
                  right to
                  increase the specific stop-loss coverage or eliminate it by self-insuring
                  this provision. (Amended 3/1/07) 

              

      

      

      19.
        (Deleted 3/1/07)

      

      
        	
                20.

              	
                Coverage
                  under the Medical Plan for any participant shall immediately terminate
                  on
                  the earliest of the following
                  dates:

              

      

      
        	 	
                a)

              	
                The
                  last day of the calendar month during which the participant voluntarily
                  terminates or is dismissed from the employment of the Company,
                  or
                  otherwise ceases active work for the Company,
                  except:

              

      

      
        	 	
                1)

              	
                In
                  the event of retirement, the participant is eligible for continuance
                  of
                  coverage on the date of his retirement, provided he was covered
                  under the
                  Plan on the day prior to his retirement. However, a participant
                  who
                  terminates employment with the Company with vested retirement rights
                  in
                  the Company's Retirement Plan and later retires upon reaching normal
                  retirement age, is not eligible for coverage under this
                  Plan;

              

      

      b)
         The
        last
        day of the calendar month during which the participant enters full-time military
        service;

      c)
         The
        last
        day of the calendar month for which contributions were last paid;

      d)
         The
        date
        the Plan terminates.

      

      22.5 Wellness
        Program

      

      
        	
                1.

              	
                Bargaining
                  Unit employees, their spouses, retirees and their spouses shall
                  be
                  eligible to participate in the Company's Wellness Program. The
                  following
                  requirements shall apply:

              

      

      	a)  	
              Employee's
                participation shall be voluntary.

            

      	b)  	
              Employee's
                health care premiums shall not be, in any way, affected by their
                "Health
                Risk" category assessment.

            

      c) Entire
        cost of the Wellness Program paid by Company

      d) Spouses
        and retired employees may not be eligible for incentives or subsidies defined
        in
        the program for active employees.

      (Amended
        3/1/07)

      

      22.6 Group
        Term Life Insurance

      

      
        	
                1.

              	
                All
                  regular, full-time, Bargaining Unit employees shall have Group
                  Life
                  Insurance coverage with a basic benefit level of $50,000. Employees
                  who
                  “retire” under the qualified Retirement plan after 1/1/95 will receive a
                  life insurance benefit in the amount of
                  $10,000.

              

      

      

      
        	
                2.

              	
                Sierra
                  will provide Bargaining Unit employees the opportunity to purchase
                  optional life insurance (in excess of the base amount provided
                  at no cost
                  by Sierra) which will be portable at employee cost. This will be
                  in the
                  form of Group Term Life subject to any underwriting restrictions
                  and
                  premium schedules set by the insurance carrier. Employee contributions
                  will be made semi-monthly on a post-tax basis. If the Company changes
                  insurance carriers, it shall include full portability as a condition
                  of
                  coverage by any new carrier. 

              

      

      
        	 	
                (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      22.7 Employee
        Discount

      

      
        	
                1.

              	
                Regular
                  Bargaining Unit employees receive a 50% discount on electric service
                  and a
                  25% discount on natural gas service. These discounts apply only
                  to
                  services provided by Sierra Pacific Power Company. Employees will
                  pay any
                  applicable taxes levied by the Internal Revenue Service as established
                  each year for the following year. (Amended 8/3/01 by Letter of
                  Agreement)

              

      

      

      
        	
                2.

              	
                Employees
                  hired after ratification will not receive an employee discount.
                  (Added
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      22.8 Long-Term
        Disability Income Plan

      

      
        	
                1.

              	
                Sierra
                  will provide Bargaining Unit employees the opportunity to purchase
                  optional long-term disability income insurance at employee
                  cost.

              

      

      

      
        	
                2.

              	
                Bargaining
                  Unit employees will pay premiums in excess of the insurance rate
                  determined by the carrier until the funding shortfall associated
                  with the
                  conversion from self-insured to fully-insured is
                  repaid.

              

      

      

      
        	
                3.

              	
                Coverage
                  amount is equal to 60% of monthly base pay, effective February
                  1, 2003.
                  (Amended 1/1/03)

              

      

      

      
        	
                4.

              	
                Maximum
                  benefit amount is $10,000 per month, effective February 1, 2003.
                  (Amended
                  1/1/03)

              

      

      

      
        	
                5.

              	
                The
                  "own occupation" disability period is twenty-four (24)
                  months.

              

      

      

      
        	
                6.

              	
                The
                  option to enroll or terminate participation will be limited to
                  an annual
                  open enrollment "window".

              

      

      

      
        	
                7.

              	
                Premiums
                  will be paid on post-tax basis.

              

      

      

      
        	
                8.

              	
                At
                  such time as CIGNA verifies the funding shortfall has been eliminated,
                  thus permanently absolving Sierra Pacific Power Company of any
                  financial
                  responsibility for past, current, or future claims, the premiums
                  shall be
                  adjusted to those actuarially justified based on actual claims
                  experience.

              

      

      

      22.9 Benefits
        for Part-Time Employees

      

      
        	
                1.

              	
                The
                  following provisions apply to part-time employees hired on or after
                  January 1, 1995, and to part-time employees who assume full-time
                  status
                  and subsequently revert to part time on or after January 1, 1995,
                  and to
                  full-time employees who become part-time on or after January 1,
                  1995.

              

      

      
        	 	
                a)

              	
                Allowance
                  for vacation, sick leave, holidays and other nonproductive time
                  will be
                  prorated as described in Title
                  3.5(a).

              

      

      
        	 	
                b)

              	
                To
                  participate in the benefits programs, employees must work a minimum
                  of 20
                  hours per week.

              

      

      
        	 	
                c)

              	
                All
                  welfare benefits will have the appropriate premium allocation between
                  Company and the employee based on the following
                  formula:

              

      

      
        	 	
                1.

              	
                Twenty
                  (20) hours per week = one-half (1/2)
                  time.

              

      

      
        	 	
                2.

              	
                More
                  than twenty (20) but less than thirty-one (31) hours per week =
                  three-quarter (3/4) time.

              

      

      
        	 	
                3.

              	
                Thirty-one
                  (31) or more hours per week = full
                  time.

              

      

      

      22.10 Joint
        Benefits Committee

      

      
        	
                1.

              	
                A
                  Joint Benefits Committee was established as of January 1, 1995,
                  for the
                  purpose of reviewing Medical, Benefit and Dependent Care costs,
                  issues and
                  trends and to make non-binding recommendations for improving savings
                  and
                  enhancing Medical, Benefit and Dependent Care Programs/Policies
                  and to
                  assist employees in dealing with Child/Elder Care issues. The Joint
                  Benefits Committee meets at least quarterly unless mutually agreed
                  to meet
                  more often when necessary. Direct payroll costs for Bargaining
                  Unit
                  members are shared equally by Local #1245 and Sierra Pacific Power
                  Company. (Amended 1/1/03)

              

      

      

      	2.  	
              The
                Committee will consist of the Union Business Representative and four
                (4)
                Union members and the Representative of the Vice President-Human
                Resources
                and four (4) MPA employees assigned by the Vice President. The Committee
                will be chartered to review health and welfare plans, pension and
                401(k)
                plans during the term of the contract. (Amended
                1/1/03)

            

      

      3.  Deleted
        1/1/03

      

      

      TITLE
        23

      DEMOTION
        AND LAYOFF PROCEDURE

      

      23.1

      

      I. General
        Rules

      

      (a) Employees
        shall be given as much notice as practicable of Company's proposed action.
        Following such notice, and prior to the date of the actual layoff, employees
        to
        be affected by the procedure shall be considered as though they have already
        been demoted, and notwithstanding the provisions of Title 16, have their
        bids to
        fill vacancies in the normal line of progression considered under the provisions
        of VI below.

      

      (b) An
        employee's Company seniority, as defined in Sections 3.7 and 8.1 shall be
        determining factors in the application of this procedure.

      

      (c) Where
        a
        vacancy in an appropriate classification exists, the filling of such vacancy
        shall be in accordance with the appropriate provisions of this procedure.
        If
        such vacancies exist at more than one (1) headquarters, Company shall provide
        an
        employee with a list of such vacancies and the location thereof. Employee
        may
        then elect to fill any of such vacancies for which he has sufficient Company
        seniority [I(b)].

      

      (d) An
        employee may not elect to demote another employee whose Company seniority
        is
        equal to or greater than his own. An employee may not demote an employee
        in a
        classification having a wage rate higher than that of his own
        classification.

      

      (e) Employees
        scheduled for demotions under this procedure shall exercise one (1) of two
        (2)
        options:

      

      
        	 	 	
                1.

              	
                Employee
                  may demote a junior employee in the employee's present job classification
                  at another headquarters, or

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                2.

              	
                Employee
                  may demote within his occupational group at his present
                  headquarters.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                In
                  either of these options, the demoted employee shall be considered
                  to have
                  displaced the most junior employee in the
                  classification.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                If
                  the exercise of Options (e) 1) and/or (e) 2) would result in a
                  senior
                  employee being laid off, then, and only then, the employee may
                  exercise
                  Option 3). If exercise of this Option would still result in a senior
                  employee being laid off, the employee may then exercise Option
                  4).

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                3.

              	
                Employee
                  may demote a junior employee in any occupational group at his present
                  headquarters.

              

      

      

      
        	 	 	
                4.

              	
                Employee
                  may demote a junior employee in any occupational group at any
                  headquarters.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                Options
                  3) and 4) above are intended to protect employees whose job
                  classifications fall "below the entry level line", but who have
                  more
                  seniority than other employees in occupational groups and/or headquarters.
                  In either of these options, the demoted employee shall be considered
                  to
                  have displaced the most junior employee in the job classification
                  at that
                  headquarters location.

              

      

      

      (f) In
        the
        application of this procedure, an employee shall not be placed in a job unless
        qualified to perform the duties.

      

      II. Notices

      

      
        	 	
                The
                  following notices shall be given in connection with the demotion
                  and
                  layoff provisions of this
                  procedure.

              

      

      

      (a) Company
        will give an employee who is to be demoted as much notice thereof as possible,
        but not less than three (3) days, advising him of the classification to which
        he
        is to be demoted and whether there are any jobs with respect to which he
        may
        exercise an election by filling a vacancy or by demoting another
        employee.

      

      (b) Not
        more
        than three (3) days after receiving the notice provided for in Subsection
        (a),
        the employee shall advise the Company of his decision with respect to exercising
        the election. If he desires to exercise the election, Company shall, within
        two
        (2) days thereafter, provide him with a list of the jobs and the locations
        thereof to which the election may be applied.

      

      (c) Within
        three (3) days after receipt of the list described in Subsection (b), the
        employee shall notify Company of his election to transfer and indicate the
        job
        locations in the order of his preference. Preferential consideration shall
        be
        given to employees in the order of their Company seniority. While Company
        shall
        endeavor to give effect to an employee's preference in the order he has
        indicated, Company seniority shall be the determining factor where two (2)
        or
        more employees express a preference for a single job classification or
        headquarters location. Company shall notify an employee as to the specific
        location to which he will be transferred and the effective date of the
        transfer.

      

      (d) An
        employee's failure to give the notices prescribed in Subsections (b) and
        (c)
        will operate to forfeit his right of election.

      

      (e) Any
        transfer resulting from the application of this Section shall be effective
        not
        later than fifteen (15) days from the giving of the notice provided for in
        Subsection (a).

      

      
        	
                III.

              	
                When
                  a demotion is to be made in a job classification(s) at a Company
                  headquarters [see I(e)], the employee(s) with least Company seniority
                  in
                  such classification(s) shall have the option
                  to:

              

      

      

      (a) Elect
        to
        displace that employee in his same classification and occupational group
        within
        the Company who has less Company seniority than he.

      

      (b) Elect
        to
        demote to the next lower classification in the reverse order of the normal
        line
        of progression in his occupational group.

      

      
        	 	
                An
                  employee shall be demoted on a step by step basis; that is, he
                  shall first
                  be demoted in the reverse order of the normal line of progression
                  for his
                  classification to the next lower classification. If successive
                  demotions
                  must be made, the same procedure shall apply at each step until
                  the
                  employee is either placed in another job or is laid off. If more
                  than one
                  (1) demotion is to be made, the described procedure shall first
                  be applied
                  to the highest classification to be affected, and then to successively
                  lower classifications.

              

      

      

      (c) If
        an
        employee cannot for any reason effect an election in accordance with (a)
        or (b)
        above, he shall demote into the general demotional pool.

      

      (d) All
        jobs
        below dotted line, including Laborer in Exhibit C, shall be considered as
        a
        general demotional pool for demotion purposes. All demotions to be by Company
        seniority. (Amended 1/1/03)

      

      (e) In
        all
        demotions and/or layoffs, the employees demoting into a job must be able
        and
        willing to perform the duties of the job with a minimum of further training.
        Company shall make the determination of minimum training needed in all such
        cases.

      

      (f) Journeymen
        who can demote apprentices shall retain Journeyman status and the junior
        apprentice(s) shall be demoted.

      

      IV. Layoff

      

      
        	 	
                If
                  there is no job to which the employee can demote under III above,
                  he or
                  she will be laid off.

              

      

      

      V. Notice
        of
        Layoff

      

      
        	 	
                When
                  it is necessary for Company to lay off employees because of lack
                  of work,
                  Company shall give employees involved as much notice thereof as
                  practicable, but in no event shall an employee be given less than
                  thirty
                  (30) calendar days' notice of layoff, provided, however that notice
                  of
                  layoff need not be given to employees who are employed on a temporary
                  or
                  probationary basis.

              

      

      

      VI. Accelerated
        Promotion

      

      
        	 	
                For
                  the purpose of enabling employees who have been demoted or transferred
                  under the provisions of this procedure, Company will give preferential
                  consideration in the following sequence to the bids made by such
                  employees
                  on any job vacancy:

              

      

      

      (a) Bids
        made
        by employees who formerly worked in such job classification and headquarters;
        demoted from such classification from such headquarters. An employee's bid
        shall
        not be considered under this subsection if following his demotion or transfer
        he
        has not exercised each opportunity available to him to bid on a job in his
        former classification and headquarters;

      

      (b) Bids
        made
        by employees listed in Subsection (a) above who formerly worked in such job
        classification.

      

      
        	 	
                In
                  considering, under Subsection (a) or (b), bids received from two
                  (2) or
                  more employees on the same job, Company shall give preferential
                  consideration to the bid made by the employee who has the greatest
                  Company
                  seniority.

              

      

      

      
        	 	
                An
                  employee who has been demoted or transferred under the provisions
                  of this
                  procedure who thereafter voluntarily removes himself from the Line
                  of
                  Progression and occupational group to which he was previously transferred
                  or demoted shall not be given consideration under this
                  section.

              

      

      

      VII. Enabler

      

      
        	 	
                By
                  written agreement between Company and Union, special provisions
                  may be
                  substituted for the provisions of this procedure. (Added
                  5/1/82)

              

      

      

      

      TITLE
        24

      TERM
        OF AGREEMENT

      

      
        	
                24.1

              	
                This
                  Agreement shall take effect as of the date of execution of this
                  contract.
                  The term of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect
                  until
                  the first day of January 2010 and thereafter from year to year
                  unless
                  written notice of change or termination shall be given by either
                  party
                  ninety (90) days prior to the expiration date above or the expiration
                  date
                  of any year thereafter. (Amended
                  3/1/07)

              

      

      

      
        	
                24.2

              	
                Whenever
                  notice is given for changes, the nature of the changes desired
                  must be
                  specified in the notice, and until a satisfactory conclusion is
                  reached in
                  the matter of such changes, the original provision shall remain
                  in full
                  force and effect.

              

      

      

      
        	
                24.3

              	
                This
                  Agreement shall not be amended or supplemented except by agreement
                  of the
                  parties hereto, reduced to writing and duly signed by
                  each.

              

      

      

      
        	
                24.4

              	
                This
                  Agreement cancels and supersedes that certain Agreement and Exhibits
                  attached thereto, entered into on January 1, 2003, by the parties
                  hereto.
                  (Amended 3/1/07)

              

      

    

     

     

    
      
        
        

      

      
        
        

        
          

        

      

      
        
        

      

    

    

      AGREEMENT
        BETWEEN SIERRA PACIFIC POWER COMPANY

      AND
        LOCAL UNION 1245 OF THE

      INTERNATIONAL
        BROTHERHOOD OF ELECTRICAL WORKERS, AFL-CIO

      January
        1, 2006 through December 31, 2009

      

      

      IN
        WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the
        day
        and year first above written, acting by and through their duly authorized
        officers.

      

      

      SIERRA
        PACIFIC  LOCAL
        UNION 1245 OF THE

      POWER
        COMPANY  INTERNATIONAL
        BROTHERHOOD

      OF
        ELECTRICAL WORKERS, AFL-CIO

      

      

      

      ___________________________       
        __________________________

      Michael
        W
        Yackira               Tom
        Dalzell, Business Manager 

      President,
        Chief Operating Officer

      

      

                                  
        __________________________

              Michael
        Davis,
        President

      ___________________________

      Stephen
        R. Wood,

      Corporate
        Sr. Vice President 

      Administration

      

                               
        ______________________________

              Randy
        Osborn,
        Business Representative

      

      

      APPROVED:

      

      

      

                           

                          
        __________________________

      Edwin
        Hill

      International
        President

      

      

      2005
        NEGOTIATING COMMITTEE MEMBERS

      

      COMPANY  UNION

      

      

      R.
        Dick,
        Chair  D.
        Seyfer, Assistant Business Manager

      W.
        Barcellos  R.Osborn,
        Business Representative

      R.
        Connolly  G.
        Aramini

      T.
        Eggen  G.
        Bailey

      G.
        Kern  V.
        Borst

      F.
        Larger  T.
        Cornell

      C.
        McElwee  A.
        Dorman

      C.
        Pinneo  M.
        Grimm

      S.
        Prince  R.
        Gross

      D.
        Huntsman

      D.
        Lyday

      J.
        McAlister

      W.
        Paterson

      R.
        Weisshaar

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      

        ATTACHMENT
          I

        

        EXHIBIT
          "A" (1)

        (As
          Amended March 1, 2007)

        

        WAGES

        

        _ Annual
          increases

        _ 2007
           Base 8% Target
          Incentive 3.5%

        _ 2008 Base 4%
           Target
          Incentive 3.5%

        _ 2009
           Base 4% Target
          Incentive 3.5%

         

         

        _ Shift
          premium               
2007           2008              
          2009

        _ 2nd
          shift  $1.45  $1.60             
          $1.75

        _ 3rd
          shift  $1.65  $1.80             
          $1.95

        

        

        SHORT
          TERM INCENTIVE PLAN (STIP)

        

        Each
          contract year there will be up to a 3.5% Short Term Incentive Plan (STIP)
          bonus
          potential. The STIP will be paid upon achievement of corporate and business
          unit
          goals as defined by the Company. The corporate and business unit goals
          will be
          identical for all employees, including MPAT, and will change each year.
          If the
          corporate financial target is not achieved in a contract year, the STIP
          will not
          be funded. The financial target is the trigger. Extraordinary events affecting
          performance of a goal may be considered by the CEO in determining the size
          and
          existence of the award.

        

        Eligibility

        	-  	
                Must
                  be employed on the last day of the fiscal
                  year

              

        	-  	
                Regular
                  full-time or part-time employees

              

        	-  	
                Temporary
                  employees are not eligible

              

        	-  	
                Employees
                  must complete a six (6) month (and/or 1040 hours) probationary
                  period by
                  the last day of the year-end payroll
                  period.

              

        

        Calculation

        	-  	
                STIP
                  will be calculated using the employee’s hourly rate as of the end of the
                  payroll year, multiplied by the actual regular/straight time hours
                  worked,
                  not to exceed 2080 hours. Once earned, annual award will be paid
                  on or
                  before April 15th
                  for the prior year’s performance.

                 

              

        	-  	
                (Straight
                  time hours X base hourly wage) X Achievement Percentage. Achievement
                  Percentage = STIP Opportunity of 3.5% X Performance
                  Results.

              

        

        Proration

        The
          Company will prorate the STIP for the following reasons:

        	-  	
                Employee
                  retires

              

        	-  	
                Deceased

              

        	-  	
                Company
                  initiated severance

              

        

        The
          Company will also prorate the STIP if an employee transfers from one bargaining
          unit to another (i.e., from IBEW 1245 to IBEW 396, or vice versa), or from
          a
          MPAT position to a bargaining unit position or vice versa.

        

        The
          current STIP model for 2003 has a 40% weighting for financial (earnings
          per
          share or E.P.S.), a 40% weighting for Customer Satisfaction, and a 20%
          weighting
          for IBEW Local 1245 Performance. If these weightings or categories change,
          the
          Company and Union will meet to discuss the changes.

        

        (Amended
          1/1/03)

         

         

        
          
            
            

          

          
            
            

            
              

            

          

          
            
            

          

        

        

          Attachment
            I - Exhibit A (1)

          (As
            amended 3/1/2007 )

          Bargaining
            Unit Wage Rate

          *Upgrade
            Only

          

          INSERT
            WAGES HERE

           

           

          
            
              
              

            

            
              
              

              
                

              

            

            
              
              

            

          

          

            ATTACHMENT
              II

            

            EXHIBIT
              "B" (1)

            (as
              Amended 3/1/2007)

            

            CLASSIFICATIONS
              AND JOB DESCRIPTIONS

            

            Note: Classifications
              preceded by an (*) are subject to the provisions of Section 5.3(a),
              (b), (c),
              (d) and (e).

            

            7653 *APPRENTICE,
              TELECOMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to, or under
                        the general direction of, employees in higher classifications
                        within the
                        Telecommunications department while training for journeyman
                        Telecommunications Technician. In order to gain experience
                        for
                        advancement, he may be required to work alone, or under direct
                        supervision, on jobs for which he has been trained and instructed.
                        The
                        employee’s educational and general qualifications must be such that
                        he is
                        considered capable of attaining journeyman status. The employee
                        must
                        possess any one of the following, a FCC General Radio Telephone
                        Operator
                        License, National Association of Business and Educational
                        Radio (NABER)
                        certificate, or National Association of Radio and Telecommunications
                        Inc.
                        (NARTI) certificate.

                    

            

            

            7635 *APPRENTICE,
              CONSTRUCTION REPAIRMAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an Assistant
                        to, or under
                        the general direction of, employees in higher rated classifications
                        within
                        the Construction Department while training for a Journeyman.
                        In order to
                        gain experience for advancement, he may be required to work
                        alone or under
                        direct supervision on jobs for which he has been trained
                        and instructed.
                        The employee's educational and general qualifications must
                        be such that he
                        is considered capable of attaining Journeyman
                        status.

                    

            

            

            7684 *APPRENTICE,
              CUSTOMER SERVICEMAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to or under the
                        general direction of a Serviceman, Customer, while training
                        for a
                        Journeyman. In order to gain experience for advancement,
                        he may be
                        required to work alone or under direct supervision on jobs
                        for which he
                        has been trained and instructed. The employee's educational
                        and general
                        qualifications must be such that he is considered capable
                        of attaining
                        Journeyman status. Must be able to write legibly and maintain
                        a neat,
                        clean appearance and must be qualified to work with the
                        public.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        Apprentice, Customer Serviceman shall be required by Company
                        to reside
                        within a thirty-five (35) mile radius of the Company headquarters
                        to which
                        they regularly report.

                    

            

            

            7641 *APPRENTICE,
              ELECTRICIAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to or under the
                        general direction of employees in higher rated classifications
                        within the
                        general Measurement and Test Department Occupational Group
                        while training
                        for a Journeyman. In order to gain experience for advancement,
                        he may be
                        required to work alone or under direct supervision on jobs
                        for which he
                        has been trained and instructed. The employee's educational
                        and general
                        qualifications must be such that he is considered capable
                        of attaining
                        Journeyman status.

                    

            

            

            7645 *APPRENTICE,
              ELECTRICIAN, MAINTENANCE

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to, or under
                        the general supervision of, a Journeyman Maintenance Electrician.
                        In order
                        to gain experience for advancement, he may be required to
                        work alone or
                        under direct supervision on jobs for which he has been trained
                        and
                        instructed. His education and general qualifications must
                        be such that he
                        is considered capable of attaining Journeyman
                        status.

                    

            

            

            7642 *APPRENTICE,
              ELECTRICIAN, UNDERGROUND

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to, or under
                        the general direction of an Underground Electrician while
                        training for a
                        Journeyman. In order to gain experience for advancement,
                        he may be
                        required to work alone or under direct supervision on jobs
                        for which he
                        has been trained and instructed. Employee's education and
                        general
                        qualifications must be such that he is considered capable
                        of attaining
                        Journeyman status.

                    

            

            

            7681 *APPRENTICE,
              FABRICATOR/WELDER

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to or under the
                        general direction of a Fabricator/Welder while training for
                        a Journeyman.
                        In order to gain experience for advancement, the apprentice
                        may be
                        required to work alone or under direct supervision on jobs
                        for which the
                        employee has been trained and instructed. The general qualifications
                        and
                        educational experience must be such that the apprentice must
                        be considered
                        capable of Journeyman status.

                    

            

            

            7691 *APPRENTICE,
              FITTER

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who installs and maintains gas pipes, mains and
                        accessories under
                        the general direction of a Foreman, Fitter, or other experienced
                        and
                        qualified personnel while training for a Journeyman classification.
                        In
                        order to gain experience for advancement, he may be required
                        to work alone
                        or under direct supervision on jobs for which he has been
                        trained and
                        instructed. The employee's education and general qualifications
                        must be
                        such that he is considered capable of obtaining Journeyman
                        status. Before
                        obtaining Journeyman status, he must qualify by test and
                        demonstrate an
                        ability to handle tools and operate equipment, such as earth
                        boring
                        machines, line stopping and tapping machines, pipe locators,
                        gas leakage
                        detection equipment, holiday detectors, compressors and other
                        equipment
                        commonly used in the trade.

                    

            

            

            7692 *APPRENTICE,
              FITTER/WELDER

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who installs and maintains gas pipes, mains and
                        accessories under
                        the general direction of a Foreman, Fitter/Welder or other
                        experienced and
                        qualified personnel while training for a Journeyman. In order
                        to gain
                        experience for advancement, he may be required to work alone
                        or under
                        direct supervision on jobs for which he has been trained
                        and instructed.
                        The employee's education and general qualifications must
                        be such that he
                        is considered capable of attaining Journeyman status. Before
                        attaining
                        Journeyman status he must qualify by test under the requirements
                        for gas
                        and electric arc welding for certification in accordance
                        with Department
                        of Transportation regulations. Before obtaining Journeyman
                        status, he must
                        qualify by test and demonstrate an ability to handle tools
                        and operate
                        equipment, such as earth boring machines, line stopping and
                        tapping
                        machines, pipe locators, gas leakage detection equipment,
                        holiday
                        detectors, compressors and other equipment commonly used
                        in the trade.
                        Employees with one (1) year or more Company experience as
                        a Fitter
                        transferring into this classification will be given credit
                        for completion
                        of six (6) months time in the classification and shall not
                        suffer a wage
                        reduction.

                    

            

            

            7651 *APPRENTICE,
              INSTRUMENT TECHNICIAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to or under the
                        same general direction of an Instrument Technician while
                        training for a
                        Journeyman. In order to gain experience for advancement,
                        he may be
                        required to work alone or under direct supervision on jobs
                        for which he
                        has been trained and instructed. The employee's educational
                        and general
                        qualifications must be such that he is considered capable
                        of attaining
                        Journeyman status.

                    

            

            

            7631 *APPRENTICE,
              LINEMAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to or under the
                        general direction of a Lineman while training for a Journeyman.
                        In order
                        to gain experience for advancement, he may be required to
                        work alone or
                        under direct supervision on jobs for which he has been trained
                        and
                        instructed. The employee's education and general qualifications
                        must be
                        such that he is considered capable of attaining Journeyman
                        status.

                    

            

            

            7685 *APPRENTICE,
              MACHINIST

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to or under the
                        general direction of a Machinist while training for a Journeyman.
                        In order
                        to gain experience for advancement, he may be required to
                        work alone or
                        under direct supervision on jobs for which he has been trained
                        and
                        instructed. The employee's educational and general qualifications
                        must be
                        such that he is considered capable of attaining Journeyman
                        status.

                    

            

            

            7680 *APPRENTICE,
              MECHANIC

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to or under the
                        general direction of a Mechanic, while training for a Journeyman.
                        In order
                        to gain experience for advancement, he may be required to
                        work alone or
                        under direct supervision on jobs for which he has been trained
                        and
                        instructed. The employee's educational and general qualifications
                        must be
                        such that he is considered capable of attaining Journeyman
                        status.

                    

            

            

            7652 *APPRENTICE,
              MECHANIC, DIESEL/TURBINE

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to or under the
                        general direction of a Diesel-Turbine Mechanic while training
                        for a
                        Journeyman. In order to gain experience for advancement he
                        may be required
                        to work alone or under direct supervision on jobs for which
                        he has been
                        trained and instructed. The employee's educational and general
                        qualifications must be such that he is considered capable
                        of attaining
                        Journeyman status.

                    

            

            

            7687 *APPRENTICE,
              METERMAN, GAS

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to or under the
                        general direction of a Meterman, Gas while training for a
                        Journeyman. In
                        order to gain experience for advancement, he may be required
                        to work alone
                        or under direct supervision on jobs for which he has been
                        trained and
                        instructed. The employee's educational and general qualifications
                        must be
                        such that he is considered capable of attaining Journeyman
                        status.

                    

            

            

            7693 *APPRENTICE,
              OPERATOR, GAS PRESSURE

            An
              employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant to or under
              the
              general direction of employees in higher classifications within the
              general Gas
              Production Occupational Group while training for Gas Pressure Operator.
              In order
              to gain experience for advancement, he may be required to work alone
              or under
              the direct supervision on jobs for which he has been trained and instructed.
              May
              be assigned to other duties as required to assure safe and reliable
              gas supply
              throughout the system. This position is a “shift” employee.

            

            7689 *APPRENTICE,
              PLANT MECHANIC

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to, or under
                        the direction of a Plant Mechanic or Mechanic/Machinist or
                        Mechanic/Welder
                        while training for Plant Mechanic. In order to gain experience
                        for
                        advancement, he may be required to work alone or under general
                        supervision
                        on jobs for which he has been trained and instructed. His
                        education and
                        general qualifications must be such that he is considered
                        capable of
                        attaining Journeyman status.

                    

            

            

            7632 *APPRENTICE,
              TECHNICIAN, ELECTRICAL, PLANT

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to, or under
                        the general supervision of a Journeyman Plant Electrical
                        Technician. In
                        order to gain experience for advancement, he may be required
                        to work alone
                        or under direct supervision on jobs for which he has been
                        trained and
                        instructed. His education and general qualification must
                        be such that he
                        is considered capable of attaining Journeyman
                        status.

                    

            

            

            7690 *APPRENTICE,
              TECHNICIAN, LAB

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to or under the
                        same general direction of a Laboratory Technician while training
                        for a
                        Journeyman. In order to gain experience for advancement,
                        he may be
                        required to work alone or under direct supervision on jobs
                        for which he
                        has been trained or instructed. The employee's educational
                        and general
                        qualifications must be such that he is considered capable
                        of attaining
                        Journeyman status.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      7673

                    	
                      *APPRENTICE,
                        TECHNICIAN, METER

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in performing work as an assistant
                        to or under the
                        general direction of employees in higher rated classifications,
                        within the
                        Electric Metering Department, while training for Technician,
                        Meter I. In
                        order to gain experience for advancement, he/she will be
                        required to work
                        alone or under direct supervision on jobs for which he/she
                        has been
                        trained and instructed. The employee's educational and general
                        qualifications must be such that he is considered capable
                        of attaining
                        Technician I status. Applicants will be expected to prove
                        possession of
                        these qualifications by successfully passing a test with
                        a score of 75% or
                        better.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      8051

                    	
                      *CHIEF,
                        CREW

                    

            

            Directs
              the work and activities of the Survey Crew in the performance of measurements
              upon the land of features and fixtures of Company-owned land and land
              rights,
              construction layout and staking of improvements and facilities, and
              other survey
              related activities in support of Company objectives. Maintains and
              operates all
              survey and survey related equipment. Checks plans for accuracy, performs
              research, calculations and other field checks to insure correctness,
              maintains
              data collector files, and oversees survey crew to make sure correct
              survey
              procedures and safety requirements are met. Possesses fundamental knowledge
              of
              land Survey principles and practices and actively pursues performance
              excellence. The Crew Chief shall be responsible for the survey crew’s activities
              in the performance of their duties. Performs such other duties in the
              field or
              office as may be assigned. Upon obtaining a Professional Land Surveyor’s
              license, employee shall automatically progress to Surveyor.

            

            9893 *CLERK

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee not required to have prior experience and generally
                        is a trainee
                        for more advanced clerical positions. Duties may include
                        but shall not be
                        limited to, operation of various office machines; collecting,
                        sorting,
                        opening and receiving mail including pick up from and delivery
                        to the post
                        office; running errands to outside locations; summarizing
                        checks and cash
                        stubs and performing a variety of office duties not requiring
                        prolonged
                        periods of training.

                    

            

            

            9730 CLERK,
              REMITTANCE PROCESSING, SENIOR

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has demonstrated to the satisfaction of the
                        Company, a
                        thorough knowledge of remittance processing system by training
                        and working
                        in the remittance processing unit. Will perform a variety
                        of skilled tasks
                        dealing with the orderly flow of work within the remittance
                        processing
                        unit. Such employees will be responsible
                        for:

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      1)

                    	
                      The
                        timely and accurate processing of customer payments, preparation
                        of bank
                        deposits, electronic transmittal of daily customer revenue
                        transactions,
                        and the submittal of daily reports and records as
                        assigned,

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      2)

                    	
                      Training
                        remittance processing equipment operators and clerical representatives,
                        

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      3)

                    	
                      Review
                        and edit of work processed,

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      4)

                    	
                      Operation
                        of all remittance processing equipment including data management
                        computer
                        and various office machines, and

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      5)

                    	
                      Other
                        assigned clerical functions as required. Directs the activities
                        of other
                        departmental personnel as required.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Required
                        to be effective when working with the public and responding
                        to customer
                        requests and inquiries, as well as have other qualifications
                        and qualities
                        generally accepted as being desirable in a customer services
                        classification. Required to make independent decisions as
                        necessary to
                        satisfy customer needs and provide quality customer
                        service.

                    

            

            

            9590 *CLERK,
              FIELD

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee assigned to the Electric Department who performs
                        field work such
                        as reading and computing demand meters, collection of delinquent
                        accounts,
                        electric cut-ins and cut-outs. May be required to make up
                        blanket work and
                        job orders in connection with local crew operations. May
                        also be required
                        to perform various Stores Department duties in the local
                        warehouse, and
                        other miscellaneous duties as required by the Electric Department
                        Supervisor.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Note:
                        It is intended this classification be used only in the areas
                        where Company
                        may not need the full-time services of certain Bargaining
                        Unit
                        classifications, and to perform various other semi-skilled
                        duties.

                    

            

            

            An
              employee shall possess (within 30 days) and maintain a Commercial Drivers
              License (CDL). As of January 1, 2003, incumbents, if capable, will
              be required
              to possess a CDL within 90 days.

            

            9624 *CLERK,
              PARTS

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is familiar with automotive parts & supplies and is
                        qualified to perform, without direct supervision, and subordinate
                        to the
                        Supervisor in charge, duties relating to the ordering, receiving,
                        shipping, handling, storing and disbursing of automotive
                        and equipment
                        related materials and supplies. Shall be required to take
                        physical
                        inventories, update a perpetual inventory system and perform
                        related
                        clerical duties as necessary. The employee shall become familiar
                        with the
                        Department's accounting and data processing procedures and
                        other
                        applicable rules. May be required to update and operate a
                        data entry
                        system for parts inventory control. Shall be required to
                        operate Company
                        vehicles within the scope of foregoing duties. May be required
                        to provide
                        general direction to any classification assigned him in performing
                        the
                        work herein defined. May be assigned to perform other work
                        as occasions
                        arise.

                    

            

            

            9875 *CLERK,
              PRINT SHOP

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who may be assigned to perform any and all routine
                        or advanced
                        print shop functions and any other miscellaneous duties as
                        required. Must
                        be qualified to operate various types of print shop finishing
                        equipment,
                        such as a hydraulic paper cutter, high speed folder, book
                        binding machine,
                        automatic collator, three-hole punch and copying equipment
                        through
                        training or experience. Must be qualified through training
                        to assist the
                        print shop in the absence of an Offset Press Operator. Must
                        be able to
                        meet deadlines and produce top quality work, and be capable
                        of heavy
                        lifting.

                    

            

            

            8640 *COORDINATOR,
              FLEET REPAIR/LICENSING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is responsible for entering vehicle repair order
                        data into
                        the Transportation Management Information System. These functions
                        shall be
                        performed cost effectively, accurately, and in accordance
                        with
                        departmental and Company guidelines, policies and procedures.
                        Also
                        responsible for verification of all labor parts and commercial
                        (outside
                        shop) costs for the fleet by direct computer input into the
                        Transportation
                        Management System.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      This
                        position will also be responsible for performing all duties
                        related to
                        licensing the fleet, both in Nevada and California. This
                        shall include any
                        special permits that may be required. This entails preparation
                        of the
                        necessary paperwork, securing the funds, obtaining the license
                        plates,
                        registration, renewal tags and titles, either personally
                        or by mail, as
                        required. Will be responsible for the maintenance of all
                        data and
                        documents into the fleet vehicle
                        files.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Requires
                        comprehensive knowledge of overall fleet operations. Possess
                        good
                        knowledge related to automotive maintenance terminology,
                        practices, parts,
                        and licensing. Ability to communicate effectively and courteously
                        with
                        Company and non-Company personnel. Possess experience of
                        direct computer
                        data entry and comprehensive knowledge of Fleet Services
                        Department shop
                        policies and procedures.

                    

            

            

            8944 *DRAFTSMAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is training for advancement to Senior Draftsman
                        and under
                        general direction uses computer-aided drafting skills to
                        prepare sketches,
                        diagrams, single line job drawings, job maps and when required,
                        makes
                        field checks in connection with such maps. Interprets and
                        maps verbal and
                        written instructions, rough sketches, and data collected
                        by Engineers,
                        Planners, Estimators or Surveyors. Consults standard maps
                        of cities,
                        subdivision plats, railroads and highways in connection with
                        the
                        preparation of new maps for plotting distribution lines and
                        facilities.
                        Reproduces maps and revises maps as changes occur and maintains
                        up-to-date
                        distribution maps of Electric and Gas systems. From data
                        provided,
                        prepares base maps for job drawings. May engage in the operation
                        and care
                        of printers, plotters, copy machines and miscellaneous minor
                        maintenance
                        of equipment. May assist in occasional reducing of field
                        survey notes and
                        field checking. May be required to make mechanical and architectural
                        drawings. May perform clerical work related to the Drafting
                        Department.
                        Performs other related duties as may be required by the Supervisor.
                        The
                        employee must possess an aptitude for the work, a working
                        knowledge of
                        Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) and mathematics, including
                        geometry. Some
                        knowledge of utility operation is desirable. May be required
                        to pass an
                        oral or written examination or performance test covering
                        these
                        qualifications.

                    

            

            

            8380 *DRAFTSMAN,
              LAND

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under the supervisor, assembles preliminary
                        information and
                        does automated drafting, and general mapping work in connection
                        with the
                        acquisition of Rights-of-Way, composes legal descriptions,,
                        searches
                        County records, and processes other necessary forms for the
                        granting and
                        procuring of easements, rights-of-way, highway and railroad
                        crossing
                        permits, government permits, and other land documents. Plots
                        profiles,
                        makes routine calculations, and reduces field notes. Training
                        and/or
                        experience, in mapping, drafting and mathematics will be
                        required. May be
                        required to take an oral or written examination or performance
                        test
                        covering these qualifications.

                    

            

            

            8390 *DRAFTSMAN,
              SENIOR

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under the supervision of the Drafting Supervisor,
                        uses
                        computer aided drafting skills to prepare sketches, diagrams,
                        single line
                        job drawings, job maps and when required, makes field checks
                        in connection
                        with such maps. Interprets and maps verbal and written instructions,
                        rough
                        sketches, and data collected by Engineers, Planners, Estimators
                        or
                        Surveyors. Consults standard maps of cities, subdivision
                        plots, railroads,
                        and highways in connection with the preparation of new maps
                        for plotting
                        distribution lines and facilities. Reproduces maps and revises
                        maps as
                        changes occur and maintains up-to-date distribution maps
                        of Electric and
                        Gas systems. From data provided, prepares base maps for job
                        drawings. May
                        engage in the operation and care of printers, plotters, copy
                        machines and
                        miscellaneous minor maintenance of equipment. May do occasional
                        reducing
                        of field survey notes and field checking. May be required
                        to make
                        mechanical and architectural drawings. May perform clerical
                        work related
                        to the Drafting Department. Performs other related duties
                        as may be
                        required by the Supervisor. The employee must possess an
                        aptitude for the
                        work, a working knowledge of Computer Aided Drafting (CAD)
                        and
                        mathematics, including geometry. Some knowledge of utility
                        operation is
                        desirable. May be required to pass an oral or written examination
                        or
                        performance test covering these
                        qualifications.

                    

            

            

            8770 *DRIVER,
              TRANSPORT

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who drives truck transporting supplies and equipment;
                        loads and
                        unloads trucks; may act as Field Clerk, taking care of timesheets
                        and
                        material records; responsible for keeping tools in good order;
                        assists
                        crews with work. Will be selected on the basis of qualifications,
                        experience and performance to operate a fifth-wheel tractor
                        with 2 or 3
                        axles which tows a trailer or
                        semi-trailer.

                    

            

            

            6385 *DRIVER,
              TRANSPORT, HEAVY

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who drives truck transporting men, supplies and
                        equipment, often
                        in remote areas and without direct supervision; loads and
                        unloads trucks;
                        operates fixed and attached equipment; may act as Field Clerk,
                        taking care
                        of time cards and material records; responsible for keeping
                        tools in good
                        order; assists crews with work; must be familiar with loading
                        and tie-down
                        procedures, permits, routes, clearances. Will be selected
                        on the basis of
                        qualifications, experience and performance to operate a fifth-wheel
                        tractor with 2 or 3 axles which tows a semi-trailer or trailer
                        or multiple
                        trailers for standard loads or special permit loads which
                        may be loaded
                        with a variety of cargoes of supplies or equipment. Must
                        be qualified to
                        load and unload power-operated construction
                        equipment.

                    

            

            

            8970 *DRIVER,
              TRUCK

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who drives truck transporting men, supplies and
                        equipment; loads
                        and unloads truck; operates fixed and attached equipment;
                        may act as Field
                        Clerk taking care of time cards and material records; responsible
                        for
                        keeping tools in good order; assists crews with work; may
                        not tow trailers
                        rated at 6,000 pounds gross vehicle weight or more. May not
                        operate truck
                        having more than two (2) axles.

                    

            

            

            8845 *DRIVER,
              TRUCK, HEAVY

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who drives truck transporting men, supplies and
                        equipment; loads
                        and unloads truck; operates fixed and attached equipment;
                        may act as Field
                        Clerk taking care of time cards and material records; responsible
                        for
                        keeping tools in good order; assists crews with work; must
                        be familiar
                        with loading and tie-down procedures. Will be selected on
                        basis of
                        qualifications, experience and performance to operate a truck
                        with three
                        (3) or more axles such as a dump truck, winch truck, boom
                        truck, flat
                        rack, or a similar truck or a two (2) axle truck towing a
                        trailer rated at
                        6,000 pounds gross vehicle weight or
                        more.

                    

            

            

            7340 *ELECTRICIAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified by training and knowledge to construct,
                        erect,
                        and maintain substations. Must be qualified by training and
                        knowledge to
                        install, maintain, test, and repair substation, generating
                        station and
                        distribution equipment including but not limited to transformers,
                        regulators, tap changing devices, circuit breakers, switchboards,
                        generators, and other rotary equipment. Must be qualified
                        to perform
                        switching. Must be able to lay out, assemble, install, test,
                        and maintain
                        electrical fixtures, apparatus and wiring. When under direct
                        supervision
                        may be required to perform work on protective relaying, communications
                        equipment, Supervisory control and related equipment. Must
                        have
                        successfully completed the Electrician Apprentice training
                        program or
                        equivalent.

                    

            

            

            7338 *ELECTRICIAN,
              FACILITIES

            An
              employee who is a journeyman Electrician and is engaged in building
              maintenance
              testing, repairing, maintaining and installing all types of electrical
              equipment
              in Company buildings. Must be licensed by city and state agencies as
              journeyman
              electrician. Must have extensive knowledge of versa-trak systems,
              Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems, building management systems,
              lighting systems, fire alarm and security systems. Will be required
              to inspect
              work of contract electricians. Must have extensive knowledge of commercial
              building electrical systems. Will be required to instruct or advise
              operating
              personnel on problems relating to electrical equipment. Must have a
              thorough
              knowledge with the Company’s electrical and mechanical tagging and safety rules
              and be able to render first aid. Will be required to drive company
              vehicles.

            

            7310 *ELECTRICIAN,
              MAINTENANCE

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a Journeyman and is engaged in testing, repairing,
                        maintaining and installing all types of electric equipment
                        in generating
                        stations. May be required to do plant and plant substation
                        switching. May
                        be required to do incidental welding, such as tack hangers
                        and test
                        welding machines after repair, etc. Must be qualified to
                        operate station
                        crane. His background of apprenticeship and experience must
                        be such as to
                        qualify him to perform these duties with skill and efficiency.
                        He may also
                        be required to instruct or advise operating personnel on
                        problems
                        pertaining to electrical equipment. He must be thoroughly
                        familiar with
                        Company's electrical and mechanical tagging and safety rules
                        and be able
                        to render first aid. May at times be required to drive light
                        and heavy
                        vehicles.

                    

            

            

            7325 *ELECTRICIAN,
              PLANT

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a Journeyman and is engaged in testing, repairing,
                        maintaining and installing all types of electric equipment
                        in generating
                        stations. May be required to do plant and plant substation
                        switching. May
                        be required to do incidental welding, such as tack hangers
                        and test
                        welding machines after repair, etc. His background of apprenticeship
                        and
                        experience must be such as to qualify him to perform these
                        duties with
                        skill and efficiency. He may also be required to instruct
                        or advise
                        operating personnel on problems pertaining to electrical
                        equipment. He
                        must be thoroughly familiar with Company's electrical and
                        mechanical
                        tagging and safety rules and be able to render first
                        aid.

                    

            

            

            7345 *ELECTRICIAN,
              UNDERGROUND

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a Journeyman qualified by training and knowledge
                        of
                        underground circuits, substations and apparatus to test,
                        maintain and
                        install duct line, cable, conduits, risers, Company-owned
                        customer outdoor
                        lighting equipment, circuit breakers, transformers and associated
                        equipment. Must be able to climb and perform Lineman's work
                        such as making
                        underground connections on customer services and substation
                        feeder
                        installations. Is required to drive truck and operate the
                        fixed and
                        attached equipment. May be required to keep time cards and
                        material
                        records.

                    

            

            

            7615 *FABRICATOR/WELDER

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee engaged in making and repairing parts of equipment
                        and tools. The
                        forge and trip hammer are used for sharpening and tempering
                        of tools. Must
                        read and interpret drawings and layouts that are given as
                        guides for the
                        desired end product. Performs basic metal working such as
                        sheet metal
                        layout, threading bolts and pipe, cutting and fitting of
                        large pipes and
                        culverts, layout and fitting of all types of structural shapes.
                        Must be
                        knowledgeable in the use of electric welding and cutting,
                        including metal
                        inert gas (MIG), heliarc (TIG) welding, hard surfacing, and
                        all aspects of
                        acetylene welding including cutting and
                        brazing.

                    

            

            

            7543 *FABRICATOR/WELDER,
              CERTIFIED

            
              	 	
                      A
                        Journeyman employee engaged primarily in the repair and maintenance
                        of
                        light and heavy equipment. Performs basic metal working such
                        as sheet
                        metal layout and forming, threading of bolts and pipe, cutting
                        and fitting
                        of large pipes and culverts, layout and fitting of all types
                        of structural
                        shapes. Performs specialty work that is not available from
                        outside
                        suppliers, such as, construction of trailers, meter manifolds,
                        and
                        associated piping, meter sets, access gates, platforms, valve
                        tools/keys,
                        rebar fabrication, and special engineering designs. Performs
                        welding on
                        man-related equipment such as manlifts and derricks. Fabricates,
                        repairs,
                        sharpens, and tempers tools and equipment using a forge,
                        anvil and trip
                        hammer.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Field
                        work performed includes substation modification and erection,
                        aluminum
                        buss bar welding, hydro power penstocks, gates and component
                        fabrication,
                        aerial welding and repair. Emergency repair of gas and electrical
                        systems,
                        as well as vehicle and equipment repair may also be
                        required.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Must
                        be able to read and interpret drawings and layouts that are
                        given as
                        guidelines for the desired end product, as well as listening
                        to a verbal
                        description of a desired product or problem and come up with
                        an acceptable
                        solution. Must have a working knowledge of math to perform
                        layouts as well
                        as being informed as to the types of materials available
                        from suppliers to
                        do the various jobs. Must be knowledgeable in the use of
                        electric welding
                        and cutting, including metal inert gas (MIG), heliarc (TIG)
                        welding, hard
                        surfacing, and all aspects of acetylene welding including
                        cutting,
                        brazing, and silver soldering. Must also have a working knowledge
                        of
                        plumbing, both pressure and non-pressure
                        systems.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Requires
                        certification in ASME Schedule 40, 6-inch pipe in the 6G
                        (45°angle)
                        position, and structural ASME1 plate using E7018 weld rod
                        in the vertical
                        and overhead position.

                    

            

            

            8620 *FACILITIES
              LOCATOR

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has had at least one (1) year's experience as
                        either an
                        Apprentice Lineman, Apprentice Fitter, or equivalent experience.
                        The
                        employee's educational and general qualifications must be
                        such that he is
                        considered capable of attaining knowledge of gas, or electrical
                        facilities
                        and capable of learning the application of pipe and cable
                        locator
                        equipment to locate these facilities. When it is necessary
                        to connect to
                        live electrical circuits with locating equipment or to enter
                        vaults,
                        containing live circuits, only an employee with one (1) year's
                        experience
                        as Apprentice Lineman or equivalent experience will be qualified
                        to do so.
                        May be required to investigate and report on damage to Company
                        facilities.
                        Must be able to write legibly and maintain a neat, clean
                        appearance and
                        must be qualified to work with the
                        public.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      8625

                    	
                      *FACILITIES
                        LOCATOR, SENIOR

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      Must
                        have a minimum of five (5) years as a Facilities Locator.
                        The employee
                        shall have a comprehensive understanding and the ability
                        to locate both
                        electric and gas utilities. Must be able to demonstrate educational
                        and
                        general knowledge of gas and electrical facilities. Must
                        have past
                        knowledge/experience in the application of pipe and cable
                        locator
                        equipment. Required to make independent decisions as necessary
                        to satisfy
                        customers’ needs and provide on-the-job training. Shall work with contract
                        locating personnel on a daily basis and educate them as necessary
                        on
                        Company specific and peculiar gas and electric systems, installations
                        and
                        facilities. Will answer questions, perform quality control
                        locating of and
                        with contract locating personnel, and perform problem locates
                        when
                        required. Employee must have completed visual inspection
                        permit training.
                        Will be required and trained, to visually look into vaults,
                        transformers,
                        boxes or any other appurtenances, necessary to physically
                        see where
                        electric and gas facilities are present. May be required
                        to assist Company
                        Claims personnel with investigations of damage to Company
                        facilities. Must
                        be able t write legibly and maintain a neat, clean appearance
                        and must be
                        qualified to work with the public.

                    

            

            

            7620 *FITTER

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a Journeyman and is qualified by training
                        and knowledge to
                        install and repair gas services, mains and appurtenances,
                        locate and
                        repair leaks, do miscellaneous pipe fitting and operate equipment
                        such as
                        earth boring machines, line stopping and tapping machines,
                        pipe locators,
                        gas leakage detection equipment, holiday detectors, and compressors.
                        Understands the use of tools in connection with pipe work
                        and the
                        installation of all types of pipe. May be required to prepare
                        ground for
                        installation of mains and services and restore ground to
                        required
                        condition. May be assigned to other work as the occasion
                        arises, including
                        the installation of meters and regulators; may be required
                        to relight gas
                        appliances during seasonal relighting program or in times
                        of emergency.
                        May be required to complete job related clerical work and
                        assist in
                        training.

                    

            

            

            7460 *FITTER/WELDER

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a Journeyman and is qualified by training
                        and knowledge to
                        install and repair gas services, mains and appurtenances,
                        locate and
                        repair leaks, do miscellaneous pipe fitting and operate equipment
                        such as
                        earth boring machines, line stopping and tapping machines,
                        pipe locators,
                        gas leakage detection equipment, holiday detectors, and compressors.
                        Does
                        gas and electric welding and is required to be certified
                        by testing in
                        accordance with the Department of Transportation regulations
                        and repair
                        work on gas lines and their accessories. Will be required
                        to prepare
                        ground for the installation of mains and services and restore
                        ground to
                        required condition. May be assigned to other work as the
                        occasion arises,
                        including the installation of meters and regulators and may
                        be required to
                        relight gas appliances during seasonal relighting program
                        or in times of
                        emergency. May be required to complete job related clerical
                        work and
                        assist in training.

                    

            

            

            6022 *FOREMAN,
              COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee, who possesses the necessary knowledge and skills
                        through
                        experience and training to work and direct the activities
                        of
                        Telecommunications Technicians and other personnel assigned
                        to the
                        Telecommunications Department. The employee must be capable
                        of directing
                        personnel and planning work in a safe and efficient manner.
                        Coordination
                        of work with other departments including: ESCC, SCAT, ITT
                        and others is a
                        primary responsibility of this position. This position will
                        be required to
                        keep time for the personnel assigned to the group supervised
                        by this
                        position; this will include responsibility for scheduling
                        normal and
                        overtime work. The person in these positions must be qualified
                        by training
                        and knowledge to install, maintain, repair, adjust or program
                        various
                        types of telecommunication voice and data transmission equipment.
                        Must
                        have a thorough knowledge of the SCADA system and be capable
                        of performing
                        maintenance and repair on that equipment or any peripheral
                        equipment
                        associated with the system. Other equipment skills may include,
                        but not
                        limited to, the EMS computer various SCADA RTU’s, UPS, digital and analog
                        microwave radios, fiber optic SONET multiplexers, digital
                        T1 multiplexers,
                        digital cross connect switches, automatic telephone PBX,
                        key systems and
                        telephones, electric and gas system telemetering equipment,
                        transfer trip
                        equip, power line carrier RF equip, trunked radio system,
                        spread spectrum
                        and two-way radios, and other telecommunications and electronic
                        work as
                        may be required. The employee may be required to assist Telecommunications
                        Engineers with system circuit design and project planning.
                        The employee
                        must have a working knowledge of laptop computers. The employee
                        may be
                        required to assist in the training of department
                        personnel.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Prerequisites:

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      a)
                        Must have completed a minimum of two (2) years as a Communication
                        Systems
                        Technician.

                    

            

            

            6281 *FOREMAN,
              CONSTRUCTION, WORKING, HEAVY

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified to work with, direct, and coordinate
                        the daily
                        activities of a crew engaged in heavy construction, maintenance,
                        and/or
                        repair of all civil/structural portions of utility facilities.
                        Must be
                        thoroughly qualified by training, knowledge, and experience
                        as to the
                        proper methods and procedures required to perform tasks typically
                        classified as carpentry, masonry, concrete work, ironwork,
                        sitework, and
                        earthwork, in a safe and efficient manner. May be required
                        to direct and
                        coordinate activities of Laborers, Apprentice Construction
                        Repairmen,
                        Construction Repairmen, Powdermen, Construction Inspectors,
                        Truck Drivers,
                        Transport Drivers, and Equipment Operators, although crew
                        size will not be
                        limited in number or by classification. Must have a comprehensive
                        working
                        knowledge of mathematics, basic surveying techniques, construction
                        materials, methods, and equipment, and the use of hand and
                        power tools.
                        Must be able to interpret drawings, prints, sketches, specifications,
                        and
                        other written documents. Must have effective oral and written
                        communication skills. Will be required to prepare proper
                        notes, records,
                        and other documentation as required for all daily job activities.
                        Must be
                        a Journeyman Construction Repairman with not less than two
                        (2) years'
                        experience as such or equivalent.

                    

            

            

            6394 *FOREMAN,
              CONSTRUCTION, WORKING, LIGHT

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified to work with, direct, and coordinate
                        the daily
                        activities of a crew engaged in light construction, maintenance,
                        and/or
                        repair of all civil portions of utility facilities. Must
                        be thoroughly
                        qualified by training, knowledge, and experience as to the
                        proper methods
                        and procedures required to perform tasks, typically routine
                        in nature,
                        classified as carpentry, masonry, concrete work, and earthwork,
                        in a safe
                        and efficient manner. May be required to direct and coordinate
                        activities
                        of Laborers, Apprentice Construction Repairmen, Construction
                        Repairmen,
                        Construction Inspectors, Truck Drivers, Transport Drivers,
                        and Equipment
                        Operators, although crew size will not be limited in number
                        or by
                        classification. Must have a comprehensive working knowledge
                        of
                        mathematics, basic surveying techniques, construction materials,
                        methods,
                        and equipment, and the use of hand and power tools. Must
                        be able to
                        interpret drawings, prints, sketches, specifications, and
                        other written
                        documentation. Must have effective oral and written communication
                        skills.
                        Will be required to prepare proper notes, records, and other
                        documentation
                        as required for all daily job activities. Must be a Journeyman
                        Construction Repairman with not less than one (1) year's
                        experience as
                        such or equivalent.

                    

            

            

            6031 *FOREMAN,
              CONTROL, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee engaged in the installation, maintenance, repair
                        and adjustment
                        of substation equipment including transformers, regulators,
                        circuit
                        breakers, switches, relaying, power line carrier, substation
                        metering,
                        telemetering and other work as required. Must be capable
                        of directing men
                        and planning work. Must be qualified to perform switching.
                        Must have at
                        least two (2) years' experience as a Substation Technician.
                        Must be
                        proficient in using a personal
                        computer.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      6825

                    	
                      *FOREMAN,
                        CUSTOMER SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE,
                        WORKING

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is directly in charge of and directs a crew
                        of Customer
                        Services Representatives in the day-to-day operations of
                        the Phone Center,
                        Customer Lobby, Customer Billing, Customer Systems Controls,
                        Credit and
                        Collections, Service Center and/or District Office operations.
                        Will also
                        be in charge of and direct the work of meter reader/collectors.
                        Will be
                        responsible for scheduling, logging attendance, maintaining
                        daily work
                        schedules, time sheets and monitoring Customer Services Representatives
                        and Meter Readers/Collectors to assure quality in their transactions
                        with
                        customers. Also prepare their performance appraisals and
                        be thoroughly
                        familiar with the work procedures and methods for the area
                        of work
                        assigned and skilled in all areas of the Customer Service
                        Representative
                        position. They may be required to assist representatives
                        in on-the-job
                        training and answer questions as they arise. They will also
                        handle those
                        customers who wish to have their questions or complaints
                        answered on a
                        higher level. Required to make independent decisions as necessary
                        to
                        satisfy customer needs. Also required to perform tasks as
                        delegated by
                        their Supervisor. Must have successfully performed as a Customer
                        Service
                        Representative for at least three (3)
                        years.

                    

            

            

            6820 *FOREMAN,
              SUPPORT SERVICES, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision, is directly in charge
                        of and when
                        needed performs the day-to-day operations of the internal
                        and external
                        mail distribution services, information and record management,
                        copy
                        center, and the corporate switchboard. Will be responsible
                        for scheduling,
                        logging attendance, training, preparing reports and maintaining
                        daily work
                        schedules. May be required to complete other job related
                        clerical duties.
                        

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Must
                        be able to communicate effectively and possess skills to
                        make independent
                        decisions. Must be thoroughly familiar with work procedures
                        and skilled in
                        all areas of operations.

                    

            

            

            6277 *FOREMAN,
              GAS PRESSURE SYSTEM, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is engaged in the operation and maintenance
                        of Gas System
                        Pressure facilities and equipment who possesses the necessary
                        knowledge
                        and skill through experience and training to work with and
                        direct the
                        activities of Gas System Pressure
                        employees.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Must
                        be familiar with equipment, instruments, and procedures used
                        in pressure
                        regulation, custody transfer measurement, forecasting daily
                        gas system
                        requirements, gas analysis, gas odorization, and the gas
                        leak survey
                        program. Must be capable of directing personnel and planning
                        work. Must
                        have two (2) years' experience as Gas Pressure Operator or
                        equivalent.
                        Must be familiar with federal and state regulations and recordkeeping
                        requirements as related to the safe and reliable distribution
                        of gas
                        within the system. Will be required to assist in training
                        personnel in all
                        phases of Gas System Pressure activities. Must be capable
                        of testing and
                        calibrating various instruments used in Gas System Pressure
                        operation.
                        Will be subject to on-call assignments as required and may
                        be required to
                        carry a pager or other type of remote notification
                        system.

                    

            

            

            6275 *FOREMAN,
              GAS, METER SHOP, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee working with and directing the activity of Gas Meter
                        Shop
                        employees. May be required to field test gas meters, water
                        meters and
                        devices. Must be capable of directing men and planning work.
                        Must have a
                        total of two (2) years as Gas Meterman or equivalent
                        knowledge.

                    

            

            

            6025 *FOREMAN,
              GAS, WELDING, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      To
                        be filled on a upgrade basis, only, when an employee who
                        is incumbent in
                        the classification of Foreman, Electric, Gas, Construction,
                        Working, is
                        required to do qualified gas and electric welding on gas
                        lines and their
                        accessories.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      6004

                    	
                      *FOREMAN,
                        GENERAL, CONTROL, WORKING

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision
                        will:

                    

            

            	-  	
                    direct
                      operations and coordinate all aspects of installation, maintenance,
                      repair
                      and adjustment of substation equipment. Will aid in the design
                      of
                      facilities and also participate in the planning stages of such
                      projects.

                  

            	-  	
                    be
                      the first point of contact in the absence of or under the direction
                      of a
                      supervisor,

                  

            	-  	
                    direct
                      the work of other foreman and their crews (foreman over foreman),
                      

                  

            	-  	
                    assume
                      other duties as deemed appropriate by management except for
                      the
                      following:

                  

            	1.  	
                    time
                      sheet approval

                  

            	2.  	
                    vacation
                      approval

                  

            	3.  	
                    completing
                      performance appraisals (may give input)

                  

            	4.  	
                    approving
                      meal tickets and credit card receipts

                  

            	5.  	
                    approving
                      accounts payable items

                  

            An
              employee must have been a journeyman in their occupation for a minimum
              of six
              (6) years or a foreman equivalent for at least two (2) years. Will
              be required
              to communicate effectively and contribute to a positive team environment
              to
              provide quality service to both external and internal customers.

            

            NOTE:
              This is NOT an upgrade only position. Please refer to the Foreman,
              General,
              Working (Upgrade Only) for upgrades.

            (Per
              Settlement Agreement dated 9/27/01 and Letter of Agreement dated
              3/21/02)

            

            
              	
                      6042

                    	
                      *FOREMAN,
                        GENERAL, HEAVY, WORKING (GAS)

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision
                        will:

                    

            

            	-  	
                    direct
                      operations and coordinate all aspects of installation, maintenance,
                      repair
                      and adjustment of gas facilities. Will aid in the design of
                      facilities and
                      also participate in the planning stages of such
                      projects.

                  

            	-  	
                    be
                      the first point of contact in the absence of or under the direction
                      of a
                      supervisor,

                  

            	-  	
                    direct
                      the work of other foreman and their crews (foreman over foreman),
                      

                  

            	-  	
                    assume
                      other duties as deemed appropriate by management except for
                      the
                      following:

                  

            	1.  	
                    time
                      sheet approval

                  

            	2.  	
                    vacation
                      approval

                  

            	3.  	
                    completing
                      performance appraisals (may give input)

                  

            	4.  	
                    approving
                      meal tickets and credit card receipts

                  

            	5.  	
                    approving
                      accounts payable items

                  

            An
              employee must have been a journeyman in their occupation for a minimum
              of six
              (6) years or a foreman equivalent for at least two (2) years. Will
              be required
              to communicate effectively and contribute to a positive team environment
              to
              provide quality service to both external and internal customers.

            

            NOTE:
              This is NOT an upgrade only position. Please refer to the Foreman,
              General,
              Working (Upgrade Only) for upgrades.

            (Per
              Settlement Agreement dated 9/27/01 and Letter of Agreement dated
              3/21/02)

            

            
              	
                      6013

                    	
                      *FOREMAN,
                        GENERAL, LINE, WORKING

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision
                        will:

                    

            

            	-  	
                    direct
                      operations and coordinate all aspects of overhead and underground
                      transmission and distribution line work and all aspects of
                      construction,
                      maintenance and repair of company facilities. Will aid in the
                      design of
                      facilities and also participate in the planning stages of such
                      projects.

                  

            	-  	
                    be
                      the first point of contact in the absence of or under the direction
                      of a
                      supervisor,

                  

            	-  	
                    direct
                      the work of other foreman and their crews (foreman over foreman),
                      

                  

            	-  	
                    assume
                      other duties as deemed appropriate by management except for
                      the
                      following:

                  

            1.
              time
              sheet approval

            2.
              vacation approval

            3.
              completing performance appraisals (may give input)

            4.
              approving meal tickets and credit card receipts

            5.
              approving accounts payable items

            An
              employee must have been a journeyman in their occupation for a minimum
              of six
              (6) years or a foreman equivalent for at least two (2) years. Will
              be required
              to communicate effectively and contribute to a positive team environment
              to
              provide quality service to both external and internal customers.

            

            NOTE:
              This is NOT an upgrade only position. Please refer to the Foreman,
              General,
              Working (Upgrade Only) for upgrades.

            (Per
              Settlement Agreement dated 9/27/01 and Letter of Agreement dated
              3/21/02)

            

            ®  *FOREMAN,
              GENERAL, WORKING (UPGRADE ONLY)

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee assigned on an upgrade basis only at the Company’s discretion, to
                        assume a leadership role under any combination of the following
                        circumstances:

                    

            

            _ on
              special projects when required to direct crew operations and coordinate
              all
              aspects of construction, maintenance and repair of company facilities.
              Will aid
              in the design of facilities and also participate in the planning stages
              of such
              projects,

            _ replace
              a
              supervisor who will be absent from their duties for an extended time
              period,

            _ when
              directing the work of other foremen and their crews (foreman over
              foreman),

            _ other
              circumstances as deemed appropriate by management.

            An
              employee assigned to this upgrade must have been a journeyman in their
              occupation for a minimum of six (6) years or a foreman or equivalent
              for at
              least two years. Will be required to communicate effectively and contribute
              to a
              positive team environment to provide quality service to both external
              and
              internal customers.

            

            ® See
              Wage
              Table for appropriate job class upgrade number.

            

            6283 *FOREMAN,
              HEAVY, EQUIPMENT, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who possesses the necessary knowledge and skill
                        through
                        experience and training to work with and direct the activities
                        of
                        equipment operators, heavy equipment operators, heavy truck
                        drivers and
                        transport drivers engaged in heavy construction, maintenance
                        or
                        replacement of facilities. Must have demonstrated satisfactory
                        performance
                        as a Senior Equipment Operator for at least one (1) year
                        or have
                        equivalent experience. May be required to assist in training.
                        Must be
                        familiar with all Company and governmental agency policies,
                        procedures and
                        requirements relative to operating, maintaining, licensing
                        and/or
                        permitting of heavy equipment. Must be able to interpret
                        plans, sketches,
                        specifications and written instructions. Will be required
                        to keep time for
                        himself, as well as for those under his supervision. Will
                        be required to
                        keep proper notes and records associated with daily activities,
                        equipment
                        maintenance schedules, safety inspections, and operator training
                        schedules. Must be able to write with clarity in a neat and
                        legible
                        fashion.

                    

            

            

            6041 *FOREMAN,
              LAB, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision, is directly in charge
                        of and
                        supervises all aspects of power station water treatment and
                        the operation
                        of water and fuel laboratories. Must be capable of analyzing
                        data from
                        analyses and recommending proper courses of action. Will
                        train operators
                        and technicians in chemical analyses and operation of water
                        treatment
                        equipment as required. He must have not less than two (2)
                        years of prior
                        experience as a laboratory technician or chemist and completed
                        formal
                        courses in general chemistry, qualitative analysis, quantitative
                        analysis,
                        organic chemistry or Company-approved
                        equivalents.

                    

            

            

            6051 *FOREMAN,
              LINE, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee engaged in performing all classes of overhead and
                        underground
                        transmission and distribution line work and construction,
                        erection and
                        maintenance of substations,** having full charge of and directing
                        entire
                        crew. Must be a Journeyman Lineman with not less than two
                        (2) years of
                        experience as such.*** Must be qualified to perform switching.
                        Is required
                        to drive line truck and operate the fixed and attached equipment.
                        Will
                        keep time cards and material
                        records.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      **

                    	
                      See
                        Letter of Understanding dated July 13, 1967, as amended by
                        Supplementary
                        Agreement dated May 10, 1973.

                    

            

            
              	
                      ***

                    	
                      See
                        Supplementary Agreement dated May 10, 1973, concerning qualification
                        of
                        Underground Electricians for advancement within the Electric
                        Overhead Line
                        of Progression.

                    

            

            

            6375 *FOREMAN,
              MACHINIST, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee engaged in performing all classes of Machinist's
                        work, having
                        full charge of and directing an entire crew. Must be a Journeyman
                        Machinist and/or Fabricator/Welder with not less than two
                        (2) years'
                        experience as such or its equivalent. Is responsible for
                        scheduling of the
                        shop work, has a working knowledge of the

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      computer
                        controlled work order and procurement system, inspects completed
                        work to
                        maintain quality and reviews jobs as they come in to make
                        sure material
                        and/or equipment is available so the work is performed
                        efficiently.

                    

            

            

            6061 *FOREMAN,
              MAINTENANCE, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision, is engaged in performing
                        all
                        classes of maintenance work, having full charge of and directing
                        entire
                        crew. Must be a Plant Mechanic and/or Journeyman Mechanic/Machinist
                        and/or
                        Mechanic/Welder, with not less than two (2) years' experience
                        as such or
                        its equivalent.

                    

            

            

            6071 *FOREMAN,
              MECHANIC, DIESEL/TURBINE, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision, is engaged in performing
                        all
                        types of diesel and turbine maintenance having full charge
                        of and
                        directing entire crew. Must be a Journeyman Diesel Mechanic
                        or Maintenance
                        Electrician with at least two (2) years' experience as such
                        or its
                        equivalent.

                    

            

            

            6813 *FOREMAN,
              METER READER, WORKING-RENO

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is in charge of and directs the work of meter
                        reader/collectors in day-to-day operations. Is required to
                        effectively
                        contribute to positive working relationships and job performance
                        of the
                        employees under his direction and provide and encourage quality
                        customer
                        service. Is required to communicate effectively with employees
                        and
                        customers both orally and in writing. Is responsible for
                        scheduling,
                        logging attendance, maintaining daily work schedules, monitoring
                        work
                        quality, evaluating performance, and performing other duties
                        as assigned.
                        Must be thoroughly familiar with all work procedures, related
                        equipment
                        operation and is required to assist other department personnel
                        as
                        required. Will provide training to new employees and be responsible
                        for
                        temporary employees assigned to gas/water demand studies.
                        Will be required
                        to make independent decisions as necessary to satisfy customer
                        needs and
                        ensure employee safety. Is required to perform tasks as delegated
                        by
                        management.

                    

            

            

            6290 *FOREMAN,
              SCRUBBER, SHIFT, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision, is in charge of
                        and operates the
                        scrubber and other related equipment. He shall direct and
                        train
                        subordinates and may be required to make temporary repairs
                        of equipment in
                        an emergency. Must be thoroughly familiar with the Company's
                        plant tagging
                        and safety rules and be qualified to issue clearances and
                        perform
                        switching within the scrubber. May be required to perform
                        other related
                        duties as required and be qualified to render first
                        aid.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      6815

                    	
                      *FOREMAN,
                        SERVICE UTILITYMAN, WORKING

                    

            

            An
              employee who possesses the knowledge and skill through experience and
              training
              to work with and direct the activities of the Service Utilityman that
              perform
              electric cut-ins and make electric and gas cut-outs. Must have performed
              satisfactory field credit work for at least two (2) years or have equivalent
              experience before consideration will be given to promotion for this
              classification. Must be skilled in the craft for which he works and
              possess
              sufficient knowledge of all tools and equipment that will be used under
              his
              guidance. Must be thoroughly familiar with the work procedures and
              methods for
              the area of responsibility assigned. Must be capable of writing with
              clarity in
              a neat and legible fashion. Must be thoroughly familiar with Company
              Safety
              Rules. Is responsible for scheduling, logging attendance, maintaining
              daily work
              schedules, monitoring work quality, and performing other duties as
              assigned.
              Will be required to make independent decisions.

             

            6091 *FOREMAN,
              SHIFT, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision, is directly in charge
                        of and
                        responsible for the operation of the plant during his shift.
                        He shall
                        direct, perform, or assist in the performance of all duties
                        related to the
                        light-off and securing of boilers, the start and securing
                        of turbines,
                        generators, and auxiliaries, perform and direct switching,
                        handle
                        communications, tend equipment, keep records, make temporary
                        repairs of
                        equipment in emergency, and other related work as required.
                        He shall
                        relieve in subordinate capacities when required and direct
                        the work of
                        others assisting him, including the training of plant personnel.
                        He shall
                        be thoroughly familiar with Company's dispatching and clearance
                        rules,
                        electrical and mechanical tagging and safety rules, and be
                        qualified to
                        render first aid.

                    

            

            

            6082 *FOREMAN,
              TECHNICIAN, METER, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a journeyman engaged in installing, servicing,
                        testing,
                        repairing meters, electrical equipment and devices and having
                        charge of
                        crew assigned to him/her and in general engaged in work associated
                        with
                        metering. Must be capable of directing the work of others
                        and planning
                        work. Must have a minimum of two (2) years' experience as
                        Technician,
                        Meter II or equivalent.

                    

            

            

            6101 *FOREMAN,
              TECHNICAL, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision, is engaged in performing
                        all
                        types of electrical and instrumentation work, having full
                        charge and
                        directing an entire crew. Must be an Instrument Technician
                        or a Plant
                        Electrical Technician with no less than two (2) years' experience
                        in a
                        power plant as a Journeyman or its
                        equivalent.

                    

            

            

            6053 *FOREMAN,
              TRANSMISSION LINE, WORKING (TRAVELING)

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee engaged in performing all classes of overhead and
                        underground
                        transmission line work on energized circuits of 110KV or
                        greater. Also
                        performs construction, erection and maintenance of transmission
                        lines and
                        associated structures having full charge of and directing
                        entire crew.
                        Must be qualified to perform switching. Must have served
                        as a Transmission
                        Lineman for at least two (2) years. Is required to drive
                        line truck and
                        operate the fixed and attached equipment. Will keep time
                        cards and
                        material records. May be required to spend a significant
                        amount of time on
                        out-of-town projects.

                    

            

            

            6054 *FOREMAN,
              UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee engaged in performing all classes of underground
                        distribution
                        line work, having full charge of and directing entire crew.
                        Must be a
                        Journeyman Electrician Underground with not less than two
                        (2) years'
                        experience as such. Is required to drive truck and operate
                        the fixed and
                        attached equipment. Will keep time cards and material
                        records.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      6020

                    	
                      *FOREMAN,
                        UTILITY FLEET, WORKING

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is directly in charge of and leads all aspects
                        of utility
                        fleet maintenance and repair operations during his shift.
                        Coordinates
                        vehicle and equipment availability and scheduling for repairs
                        and
                        maintenance with internal customers. Prioritizes and coordinates
                        the daily
                        work assignments for Utility Fleet Mechanics, Garagemen,
                        and other
                        subordinate department personnel. Ensure safe and efficient
                        work practices
                        on each job as it is being performed. Identifies repairs
                        or maintenance to
                        be assigned to outside service providers and arranges for
                        such work to be
                        performed promptly and cost effectively. Tracks and communicates
                        progress
                        and completion of each job with internal customers and Fleet
                        Department
                        staff. Is required to effectively contribute to positive
                        working
                        relationships and job performance of the employees under
                        his direction and
                        to provide and encourage quality customer service. Must be
                        a journeyman
                        Utility Fleet Mechanic with three (3) years experience as
                        such. Must
                        possess and maintain a valid Commercial Driver’s License (CDL) and all
                        applicable endorsements.

                    

            

            6450 *FOREMAN,
              UTILITY MATERIALS, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified to perform, without direct supervision,
                        and
                        engaged in performing subordinate to the Supervisor in charge,
                        both
                        Supervisory and routine duties in the Reno area Stores Department
                        facilities relating to the ordering, receiving, shipping,
                        handling,
                        storing, disbursing and salvaging of materials and supplies
                        and the taking
                        of physical inventories. Must have at least two (2) years'
                        experience as a
                        Utility Materials Specialist and/or Storekeeper, including
                        a minimum of
                        two (2) years of Stores Department experience involving such
                        processing of
                        materials and supplies other than those normally stocked
                        within the
                        districts. The employee shall be familiar with Company's
                        Stores and
                        Accounting procedures and other applicable rules. May be
                        required to
                        perform all related clerical
                        duties.

                    

            

            

            6280 *FOREMAN,
              WORKING, HEAVY (GAS )

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who possesses the necessary knowledge and skill
                        through
                        experience and training to work with and direct the activities
                        of a crew
                        engaged in heavy construction, maintenance or replacement
                        of facilities.
                        Must have demonstrated satisfactory performance as a light
                        Foreman for at
                        least one (1) year or possess two (2) years as a journeyman
                        Fitter/Fitter
                        Welder or equivalent experience before consideration will
                        be given for
                        promotion to this classification. Crew size will not be limited
                        in number
                        or skilled classifications under direction by this classification.
                        Must be
                        skilled in the crafts in which he works and possess sufficient
                        knowledge
                        of all tools and equipment which he may have occasion to
                        use or to be used
                        under his direction and guidance. He must be able to interpret
                        plans,
                        sketches, specifications, and written instructions. Must
                        be thoroughly
                        familiar with the work procedures and methods for the area
                        of
                        responsibility assigned. Must possess sufficient familiarity
                        with symbols
                        and dimensions as related to plans. Will be required to keep
                        time for
                        himself, as well as the crew under his supervision and prepare
                        proper
                        notes and records, as well as other clerical work associated
                        with his job
                        and crew. Must be capable of writing with clarity in a neat
                        and legible
                        fashion.

                    

            

            

            6284 *FOREMAN,
              WORKING, HEAVY (BUILDING AND GROUNDS)

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who possesses the necessary knowledge and skill
                        through
                        experience and training to work with and direct the activities
                        of a crew
                        engaged in heavy construction, maintenance or replacement
                        of facilities.
                        Must have demonstrated satisfactory performance as a light
                        Foreman for at
                        least one (1) year or have equivalent experience before consideration
                        will
                        be given for promotion to this classification. Crew size
                        will not be
                        limited in number or skilled classifications under direction
                        by this
                        classification. Must be skilled in the crafts in which he
                        works and
                        possess sufficient knowledge of all tools and equipment which
                        he may have
                        occasion to use or to be used under his direction and guidance.
                        He must be
                        able to interpret plans, sketches, specifications, and written
                        instructions. Must be thoroughly familiar with the work procedures
                        and
                        methods for the area of responsibility assigned. Must possess
                        sufficient
                        familiarity with symbols and dimensions as related to plans.
                        Will be
                        required to keep time for himself, as well as the crew under
                        his
                        supervision and prepare proper notes and records, as well
                        as other
                        clerical work associated with his job and crew. Must be capable
                        of writing
                        with clarity in a neat and legible
                        fashion.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      6395

                    	
                      *FOREMAN
                        , WORKING, LIGHT (GAS)

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who possesses the necessary knowledge and skill
                        through
                        experience and training to work with and direct the activities
                        of a crew
                        engaged in light construction, maintenance or replacement
                        of facilities.
                        Must have completed a minimum of one (1) year as a journeyman
                        Fitter/Fitter Welder or equivalent. Must be skilled in the
                        crafts in which
                        he works and possess sufficient knowledge of all tools and
                        equipment which
                        he may have occasion to use or to be used under his direction
                        and
                        guidance. He must be able to interpret plans, sketches, specifications
                        and
                        written instruction. Must be thoroughly familiar with the
                        work procedures
                        and methods for the area of responsibility assigned. Must
                        possess
                        sufficient familiarity with symbols and dimensions as related
                        to plans.
                        Will be required to keep time for himself, as well as the
                        crew under his
                        supervision and prepare proper notes and records, as well
                        as other
                        clerical work associated with his job and crew. Must be capable
                        of writing
                        with clarity in a neat and legible
                        fashion.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      6398

                    	
                      *FOREMAN,
                        WORKING, LIGHT (BUILDINGS AND
                        GROUNDS)

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who possesses the necessary knowledge and skill
                        through
                        experience and training to work with and direct the activities
                        of
                        semi-skilled personnel engaged in light construction, maintenance
                        or
                        replacement of facilities. Must be skilled in the crafts
                        in which he works
                        and possess sufficient knowledge of all tools and equipment
                        which he may
                        have occasion to use or to be used under his direction and
                        guidance. He
                        must be able to interpret plans, sketches, specifications
                        and written
                        instruction. Must be thoroughly familiar with the work procedures
                        and
                        methods for the area of responsibility assigned. Must possess
                        sufficient
                        familiarity with symbols and dimensions as related to plans.
                        Will be
                        required to keep time for himself, as well as the crew under
                        his
                        supervision and prepare proper notes and records, as well
                        as other
                        clerical work associated with his job and crew. Must be capable
                        of writing
                        with clarity in a neat and legible
                        fashion.

                    

            

            

            6397 *FOREMAN,
              YARD, WORKING

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision is directly in charge
                        of and
                        directs an entire crew in the operation, service, and maintenance
                        of, but
                        not limited to coal, ash, lime, and other bulk material handling
                        equipment.

                    

            

            

            8956 *GARAGEMAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee, who acts as a helper for a Mechanic or, under indirect
                        supervision, does all types of automotive service work relating
                        to a
                        utility equipment fleet. This includes all phases of preventative
                        maintenance (PM) work such as visual inspections, operational
                        checks, oil
                        and filter changes, equipment lubrication, fluid level checking
                        and
                        filling coolant system checks and servicing, battery servicing,
                        and
                        related incidental minor maintenance and repairs (such as
                        fan belt
                        replacements and adjustments, spark plug, shock absorber,
                        and radiator
                        hose replacements). Additional service work may include dispensing
                        fuel
                        and oil, tire repairs, cleaning, washing, and other janitorial
                        work. May
                        pick up and deliver fleet equipment, parts, and accessories
                        as required.
                        Shall be required to perform minimal clerical tasks such
                        as completing PM
                        check sheets, repair orders, parts requests and other related
                        documents.

                    

            

            

            8709 *GROUNDS
              MAINTENANCEMAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified to perform, without direct supervision,
                        all work
                        associated with grounds and building maintenance, to all
                        Company property
                        as required, including but not limited to, painting, glazing,
                        carpentry,
                        fence repair, sprinkler systems, pruning and planting trees
                        and shrubs,
                        mowing lawns, fertilizing, etc. Must acquire a current certification
                        as
                        pesticide applicator within six (6) months of the job award,
                        and will be
                        required to operate equipment and/or Company vehicles. May
                        be required to
                        provide general direction to any classifications assigned
                        to him in
                        performing work as defined.

                    

            

            

            	9239  	
                    *HELPER

                  

            Must
              have
              sufficient knowledge and adaptability to understand and carry on duties
              as
              assigned; must be semi-skilled laborer, or equivalent with past experience
              as
              such, capable of handling ordinary tools safely in accordance with
              Company
              safety rules. Assist skilled workman or apprentice or work under their
              direction
              at various classes of work which may be assigned in any location.

            

            	9240  	
                    *HELPER
                      (BUILDING & GROUNDS)

                  

            
              	 	
                      Must
                        have sufficient knowledge and adaptability to understand
                        and carry on
                        duties as assigned; must be semi-skilled laborer, or equivalent
                        with past
                        experience as such, capable of handling ordinary tools safely
                        in
                        accordance with Company safety rules. Assist skilled workman
                        or apprentice
                        or work under their direction at various classes of work
                        which may be
                        assigned in any location.

                    

            

            

            7405 *INSPECTOR,
              GAS

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who possesses knowledge and skill as obtained by
                        experience and
                        training to direct the efforts of contractors doing work
                        for the Company
                        in the installation of Gas facilities. Must possess in-depth
                        knowledge of
                        material and construction standards, procedures and specifications
                        and
                        have the capability of interpreting plans and sketches depicting
                        the
                        required work associated with gas installations. Must have
                        completed a
                        minimum of one (1) year as a journeyman Fitter/Fitter Welder/Equipment
                        Operator III or equivalent. Will be required to keep records
                        as necessary
                        to complete as-built drawings, including materials installed,
                        as well as
                        the dimensions of the installation. Will be required to complete
                        main and
                        service cards in a neat and legible fashion as related to
                        the facilities
                        he inspects. Must be able to use pipe locator, Holiday detector,
                        Gas
                        Explosive Meter, pressure recorders and other instruments
                        and equipment
                        common to gas installations.

                    

            

            

            7410 *INSPECTOR,
              CONSTRUCTION

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has sufficient knowledge of Construction to
                        inspect
                        contractors' and/or Company work. Will be required to perform
                        such duties
                        as coordinating work between contractors and Company crews,
                        scheduling and
                        coordinating delivery of materials, preparing and maintaining
                        construction
                        records and verifying that work is done in accordance with
                        plans and
                        specifications. Must be familiar with all phases of substation
                        construction including site work, excavation, carpentry,
                        concrete work,
                        steel work, fencing, buildings, grounding, installation of
                        both metallic
                        and non-metallic conduit, and their underground facilities.
                        Must be able
                        to read and understand drawings and specifications, have
                        knowledge of
                        surveying, and be able to work with all other departments.
                        May be assigned
                        to work as a member of a construction crew. Requires two
                        (2) years'
                        experience as a Repairman or
                        equivalent.

                    

            

            

            7210 *INSPECTOR,
              ELECTRIC

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has sufficient knowledge of the specifications
                        and
                        installation of electric overhead and underground lines to
                        check
                        contractors and/or Company work. Will be required to perform
                        such duties
                        as scheduling and coordinating work between subdividers and
                        Company crews,
                        providing information on locations of underground facilities,
                        conducting
                        periodic checks of underground and overhead installations
                        and doing
                        necessary work to maintain such installations. Must be qualified
                        to
                        perform switching. Will be required to perform other related
                        duties as
                        required including the maintenance of records pertaining
                        to plant
                        construction and operations. Must be qualified to work with
                        the public.
                        May be assigned to work as a member of a line crew or an
                        underground crew.
                        Requires a minimum of one (1) year of experience as a Lineman
                        and/or
                        Underground Electrician.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      7200

                    	
                      *INSPECTOR,
                        TRANSMISSION (TRAVELING)

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has sufficient knowledge of specifications and
                        installation
                        of transmission overhead and underground lines to check contractors
                        and/or
                        company work. Will be required to perform such duties as
                        scheduling and
                        coordinating work between contractors and company crews,
                        providing
                        information on locations of underground facilities, conducting
                        periodic
                        checks of underground and overhead installations and doing
                        necessary work
                        to maintain such installations. Must be qualified to perform
                        switching.
                        Will be required to perform other related duties as required
                        including the
                        maintenance of records pertaining to plant construction and
                        operations.
                        May be assigned to work as a member of a Transmission Line
                        Crew. Must have
                        at least two years of Transmission Lineman
                        experience.

                    

            

            

            7130 *INSPECTOR,
              SUBSTATION, ELECTRIC

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has sufficient knowledge of the specifications,
                        installation
                        and operation of electric substations to check contractors
                        and/or Company
                        work. Will be required to perform various duties necessary
                        to properly
                        coordinate and inspect substation electric equipment installations.
                        Must
                        be qualified to perform switching. Will be required to perform
                        other
                        related duties including the preparation and maintenance
                        of records
                        pertaining to substation operation and maintenance. May be
                        assigned work
                        as a member of a substation construction or maintenance crew.
                        Requires a
                        minimum of two (2) years' of experience as an Electrician
                        (control).

                    

            

            

            8395 *INSTRUMENTMAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee engaged in survey work, in the field or office as
                        required, such
                        as operating with skill and efficiency, all survey instruments
                        normally
                        utilized by the Company. Assisting surveyors and Engineers
                        preparing
                        calculations, construction staking, boundary and topographic
                        surveys and
                        other surveying related tasks. Training and/or experience
                        in mapping,
                        drafting and mathematics will be required. May be required
                        to pass an oral
                        or written examination or performance test covering these
                        qualifications.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      7050

                    	
                      *INVESTIGATOR,
                        REVENUE PROTECTION

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      Performs
                        assignments relating to tampered, diverted, vandalized and
                        dead
                        single-phase meters, as reported by appropriate departments
                        and field
                        employees. Performs field investigations with the appropriate
                        departments
                        using established procedures. Required to assist appropriate
                        personnel and
                        perform investigations of intentional diversions, tampers,
                        and vandalized
                        meters as needed. Required to ensure that all back bills
                        dealing with
                        tampered, diverted, vandalized and dead meters are processed
                        in a timely
                        fashion. Required to drive a Company vehicle. Required to
                        become a
                        Certified Utility Theft Investigator with an appropriate
                        time frame.
                        Required to take photographs and process any and all forms
                        and other
                        paperwork relating to the investigations. Required to keep
                        current on
                        diversion techniques. Must be familiar with associated office
                        equipment.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      8610

                    	
                      *JANITOR
                        (POWER PROD)

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who under general supervision has the primary duties
                        of
                        maintaining assigned areas in a clean and sanitary condition.
                        Janitorial
                        duties will include but not limited to: cleaning restrooms
                        on a daily
                        basis, washing and waxing floors, cleaning windows, collecting
                        and
                        disposing of trash, and maintaining housekeeping supplies.
                        Other assigned
                        duties will include but not limited to: running errands,
                        gassing vehicles,
                        distributing mail to appropriate locations, setting up and
                        taking down
                        meeting rooms, and other duties as assigned. When not specifically
                        assigned to janitorial duties may be assigned duties in other
                        plant
                        location.

                    

            

            

            	9378  	
                    *LABORER

                  

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who performs manual work such as digging ditches,
                        digging holes
                        and clearing rights-of-way and other repetitive unskilled
                        work as
                        required.

                    

            

            

            	9379  	
                    *LABORER
                      (BUILDING & GROUNDS)

                  

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who performs manual work such as digging ditches,
                        digging holes
                        and clearing rights-of-way and other repetitive unskilled
                        work as
                        required.

                    

            

            

            9450 *LABORER,
              TEMPORARY

            
              	 	
                      (Note:
                        A "Laborer, Temporary" is a student hired during vacations
                        and others
                        hired for a limited period of time for seasonal or emergency
                        work.
                        Employees under this classification shall only be hired as
                        needed to
                        supplement the regular work force and shall normally be assigned
                        only such
                        work as falls within the Laborer
                        definition.)

                    

            

            

            7330 *LINEMAN,
              ELECTRIC

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a Journeyman and who performs all classes
                        of overhead and
                        underground transmission and distribution line work and the
                        construction,
                        erection and maintenance of substations** when assigned to
                        a crew under
                        the direction of a Working Foreman or Supervisor of higher
                        grade, and who
                        is qualified by training and knowledge of underground circuits,
                        substations, and apparatus to test, maintain, and install
                        duct line,
                        cable, conduits, risers, Company-owned customer outdoor lighting
                        equipment, circuit breakers, transformers, and associated
                        equipment,
                        substation equipment and circuits.** Must be qualified to
                        perform
                        switching.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Will
                        make connections to underground circuits and substation feeder
                        installations as well as making underground connections on
                        customer
                        services.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      His
                        background of apprenticeship training and experience must
                        be such as to
                        qualify him to perform these duties with skill and efficiency.
                        He may be
                        assigned to work with and under general direction of a Troubleman
                        and when
                        so assigned, the type of work he performs and the method
                        of supervision
                        shall be governed by the rules with respect to the Troubleman
                        classification. A Lineman may be assigned temporarily to
                        work apart from a
                        crew either alone or as a member of a two-man unit without
                        supervision,
                        doing work which shall include:

                    

            

            

            1. Framing
              poles.

            2. Preassembling
              material.

            3. Patrolling
              and inspecting pole and tower lines.

            4. Testing
              and inspecting poles.

            5. Repairing
              risers and ground mouldings.

            6. Pulling
              slack in anchor guys.

            7. Replacing
              guy guards.

            	8.  	
                    Splicing
                      and terminating non-leaded and leaded underground
                      cables.

                  

            	9.  	
                    Install
                      and splice fiber optic cable and
                      communications.

                  

            

            
              	 	
                      A
                        Lineman may be assigned temporarily to work apart from a
                        crew as a member
                        of a two-man unit, without supervision, when the second man
                        in such unit
                        is a one-year Apprentice Lineman or higher, doing work which
                        shall
                        include:

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      **

                    	
                      See
                        Letter of Understanding dated July 13, 1967, as amended by
                        Supplementary
                        Agreement dated May 10, 1973.

                    

            

            

            1. Taking
              primary distribution voltage readings.

            
              	 	
                      2.

                    	
                      Installing
                        Company-owned customer outdoor lighting service equipment
                        and street
                        fixtures, including making connections on circuits with voltage
                        below 750
                        volts.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      3.

                    	
                      Installing
                        all types of customer's services, complete with setting self-contained
                        meters.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Using
                        special design lift equipment, or an aerial bucket, a Lineman
                        may work
                        apart from a crew as a two-man unit, without supervision,
                        when the second
                        man in such unit is a one-year Apprentice Lineman or higher,
                        doing work
                        which shall include:

                    

            

            

            1. Setting
              and replacing service poles.

            
              	 	
                      2.

                    	
                      Setting
                        street light poles and outdoor lighting service poles not
                        to exceed 40
                        feet in length.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      3.

                    	
                      Washing
                        insulators on lines energized up to 60
                        KV.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      When
                        it is necessary to climb through live circuits of 750 volts
                        or more, the
                        other employee in the two-man unit shall be a Journeyman
                        Lineman. Is
                        required to drive the line truck and operate the fixed and
                        attached
                        equipment. May be required to keep time cards and material
                        records.

                    

            

            

            7332 *LINEMAN,
              TRANSMISSION (TRAVELING)

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee with at least two (2) years' experience as a Lineman
                        who is
                        qualified by training and on-the-job experience to perform
                        work on
                        energized circuits of 110KV or greater. Must be qualified
                        to perform
                        switching. His background and training must qualify him to
                        perform all
                        duties associated with Lineman work at normal distribution
                        voltages as
                        well as work on 110KV, 230KV, 345KV, or higher transmission
                        line voltages.
                        May be required to spend a significant amount of time on
                        out-of-town
                        projects.

                    

            

            

            7580 *MACHINIST/TOOL
              REPAIR

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified to perform precision work with
                        a lathe and
                        milling machine, who is capable of skillfully and efficiently
                        installing,
                        repairing and maintaining all types of mechanical equipment
                        and tools. The
                        machinist performs the machining, gauging and production
                        of parts; also
                        repairs tools, valves, pumps and compressors; and also does
                        the major
                        maintenance and overhaul of the CNG facility. Must have a
                        working
                        knowledge of hydraulics. Must be capable of reading and interpreting
                        sketches and drawings, making setups, and have a good working
                        knowledge of
                        shop math and properties of materials. Must be qualified
                        to do all types
                        of welding and brazing using the forge, acetylene and electric
                        methods.

                    

            

            

            8690 *MAINTENANCEMAN,
              STREET LIGHT

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee whose main duties will be, but not limited to, maintaining
                        street
                        lights and luminaries, installation and removal of company
                        outdoor
                        lighting equipment and other miscellaneous work on street
                        lights and
                        street light circuits. Other duties may require the employee
                        to assist a
                        Troubleman in the performance of their duties, as long as
                        he has been
                        certified through training and experience. This employee
                        can be utilized
                        as a qualified observer while hot primary work is in progress
                        and may be
                        requested to relay switching information as per the qualified
                        person
                        directing the work. These employees must have completed an
                        I.B.E.W.
                        Apprentice Lineman program at or above the 24-month
                        level.

                    

            

            

            7350 *MECHANIC,
              DIESEL/TURBINE

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified and regularly engaged in performing
                        all types of
                        diesel and turbine maintenance, including maintenance of
                        engines, turbo
                        chargers, oil systems, cooling systems, etc. He shall do
                        mechanical and
                        electrical repairs, tune-ups and adjustments and incidental
                        welding or
                        brazing in connection with the
                        above.

                    

            

            

            7360 *MECHANIC,
              MACHINIST

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has completed a minimum of two (2) years as
                        a Maintenance
                        Mechanic and is qualified to perform precision work with
                        all machine shop
                        equipment, read and work from drawings and sketches, read
                        precision
                        instruments and gauges, make own set-ups and has knowledge
                        of shop math,
                        properties of materials, and Company's electrical and mechanic
                        tagging and
                        safety rules.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Job
                        duties include all types of precision work on machine shop
                        equipment,
                        mechanical repairs to boilers, turbines, auxiliaries and
                        other rotating
                        equipment aligning motors and mechanical equipment, truing
                        and balancing,
                        rotating equipment, incidental welding, brazing and soldering,
                        rigging,
                        operation of the station crane and work of lower classifications
                        as
                        required.

                    

            

            

            7496 *MECHANIC,
              PLANT

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has completed his apprenticeship, or equivalent,
                        and is in
                        the process of acquiring the experience and skills required
                        for
                        advancement to Mechanic/Machinist or Mechanic Welder. Job
                        duties include
                        the performance of general machine shop practices such as
                        making parts for
                        mechanical equipment, turning shafts, turning down commutators,
                        rebabbitting bearings, fitting gears, etc., truing, aligning
                        and balancing
                        rotating equipment, incidental welding and brazing, soldering
                        and
                        metalizing, making mechanical repairs to boilers, turbines,
                        generators,
                        and all related auxiliaries. As a part of his training to
                        qualify for
                        advancement, may work as an assistant to and under the supervision
                        of a
                        Mechanic/Machinist and/or Mechanic Welder and/or Maintenance
                        Working
                        Foreman. The Plant Mechanic will be reclassified to Mechanic
                        Welder when
                        the following three (3) conditions are
                        satisfied:

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      1.

                    	
                      Has
                        completed the SPPCO 30-month Apprentice Plant Mechanic program
                        or has
                        worked as a Plant Mechanic at SPPCO for one (1) year. NOTE:
                        The one (1)
                        year Plant Mechanic requirement may be waived by the Plant
                        Manager.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      2.

                    	
                      Has
                        passed the certified Welders test as outlined in Plant Mechanic/Welder
                        classification.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      3,

                    	
                      The
                        employee has passed the ICS portion of the Apprentice Plant
                        Mechanic
                        training program.

                    

            

            

            7600 *MECHANIC,
              UTILITY FLEET

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has completed an accredited Apprentice Mechanic
                        program, or
                        who has worked for two (2) or more consecutive years as an
                        automotive/heavy equipment Journeyman Mechanic, and is capable
                        of
                        performing all maintenance, service, and directly related
                        functions
                        involved with the hands-on maintenance of a large modern
                        utility-type
                        fleet of vehicles and equipment. The person shall possess
                        and maintain a
                        Commercial Drivers License (CDL) with air brake and combination
                        vehicle
                        endorsements and a DOT physical card. At one (1) year, the
                        employee shall
                        possess and maintain all CDL endorsements and Nevada Emissions
                        Inspector
                        Certificate(s) as applicable in the employee's responsibility
                        area. The
                        employee shall, during the first year, become familiar with
                        and following,
                        under indirect supervision, department, Company, automotive
                        and utility
                        industry job standards and practices as directed. May be
                        required to
                        assist in related safety and training
                        functions.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Employees
                        are eligible for a $500 bonus incentive for ASE Master Mechanic
                        certification (one every five years). Additional certification
                        bonuses as
                        approved by management.

                    

            

            

            9889 *MESSENGER,
              OUTSIDE

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who performs various errands between different divisions
                        of the
                        Company in the Reno-Sparks area, such as delivering messages,
                        written
                        material, supplies and equipment. Shall also be required
                        to pick up and
                        deliver mail to the Post Office. Will be required to do heavy
                        lifting.

                    

            

            

            7370 *METERMAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a journeyman and has served successfully
                        his
                        apprenticeship or equivalent for a Meterman. Must have the
                        necessary
                        knowledge to install, test, and repair all electrical instruments,
                        meters
                          and metering equipment and sufficient working knowledge
                        of electricity to
                        be able by the use of instruments, to determine power, volt
                        amperes, power
                        factor and reactive component in an electric
                        circuit.

                    

            

            

            7605 *METERMAN,
              GAS

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who performs all classes of shop work on gas meters
                        and
                        regulators, including testing, repairing and adjusting. Must
                        be familiar
                        with gas fittings and system
                        pressures.

                    

            

            

            9162 *METER
              READER-COLLECTOR

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has satisfactorily progressed through the Meter
                        Reader-Collector Trainee classification and is required to
                        obtain actual
                        meter readings for any meter as assigned, including exchanging
                        tapes on
                        magnetic recorders. This employee must verify the accuracy
                        of meter
                        numbers, meter locations, meter reading instruction codes,
                        sequence
                        numbers, and must record meter readings on forms/devices
                        as required. This
                        employee must report damaged or missing meters, metering
                        equipment, and
                        unusual or abnormal meter and metering equipment conditions,
                        to
                        supervision. Those employees required to read gas meters,
                        must, on a
                        regular basis do visual checks of the meters and report to
                        supervision any
                        conditions, such as atmospheric corrosion, environmentally
                        caused
                        movement, encroachments, or any other conditions for which
                        they are
                        trained. Must accurately and legibly complete all Company
                        and departmental
                        documents and forms related to meter reading. In addition
                        to the
                        performance of routine office duties and collection of bills,
                        may be
                        required to connect, disconnect, seal and insulate (OBM)
                        meters. Must
                        maintain a neat and clean appearance. Must be qualified to
                        meet and talk
                        to customers and provide customers with quality customer
                        service and be
                        courteous and effective when responding to customer requests
                        and inquiries
                        as well as have other qualifications generally accepted as
                        being desirable
                        to work with the public.

                    

            

            

            7525 *OPERATOR,
              ASSISTANT CONTROL ROOM

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under direct supervision, will assist the Control
                        Room
                        Operator in the operation of the Plant during his shift including
                        all
                        duties related to the light-off and securing of boilers,
                        starting,
                        operating and securing turbines, generators, and auxiliaries,
                        and make
                        temporary emergency repairs, keep records, keep his station
                        clean, perform
                        other related work as required. When not assigned to operations
                        duties, he
                        may be assigned work in accordance with Section 6.13(b).
                        He shall relieve
                        the Service Utility Operator, and when qualified, shall relieve
                        the
                        Control Room Operator. He shall be thoroughly familiar with
                        the Company's
                        mechanical and electrical tagging and safety rules, and be
                        qualified to
                        render first aid. He may be required to assist in the training
                        of plant
                        personnel.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Once
                        the Assistant Control Room Operator is upgradeable to Control
                        Room
                        Operator, he shall be placed at the upgradeable
                        rate.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Assistant
                        Control Room Operators who have completed 24 months as an
                        Assistant
                        Control Room Operator and fail to achieve the requirements
                        to be
                        upgradeable to the Control Room Operator position shall be
                        demoted to the
                        Service Utility Operator position and that position’s top rate of pay. The
                        Company need not consider the bid of that employee for an
                        Assistant
                        Control Room Operator positions for six (6)
                        months.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      7510

                    	
                      OPERATOR,
                        ASSISTANT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee under the direct guidance of, and who assists, either
                        the
                        Distribution System Operator or the Transmission System Operator
                        to
                        perform duties in connection with all electrical lines and
                        apparatus
                        pertaining to power system operations. Become proficient
                        in the use of all
                        communication equipment, computer systems, and operation
                        diagrams
                        available in System Control. Familiarize with both NERC and
                        WECC
                        procedures and standards as well as SPPC safety and switching
                        procedures
                        and policies. Will be required to pass oral and/or written
                        examinations
                        and performance tests. After a minimum of two (2) years,
                        automatic
                        progression to System Distribution Operator will occur upon
                        successful
                        completion of progression testing.

                    

            

            

            8740 *OPERATOR,
              CLARIFIER

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has completed U.O. II training and under general
                        supervision,
                        operates the station sidestream softening clarifiers. The
                        employee secures
                        and analyzes clarifier, clarifier filter and circulating
                        water samples.
                        Makes the necessary chemical calculations to adjust the chemical
                        feed
                        rates, flows or mechanical equipment to assure efficient,
                        economical
                        clarifier operation and maintenance of circulating water
                        chemistry
                        operating parameters. Must be familiar with standard lab
                        safety procedures
                        and the Company's safety rules, and must be able to render
                        first aid. The
                        employee, during his shift, assists with the operations and
                        service of the
                        cooling tower de-icing when necessary. Performs tagging of
                        equipment as
                        required.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Monitors
                        and maintains log of all pertinent operating data. Assists
                        in the
                        unloading and storage of all chemicals used in the clarifier
                        or cooling
                        towers and maintains the chemical burn station in the clarifier
                        building.
                        Is responsible for the cleanliness of the clarifier area.
                        Will be required
                        to successfully complete the Center for Occupational Research
                        and
                        Development Fossil-Fuel Power Plant Technology series chemistry
                        technician
                        course. Will be required to maintain an OJT card for documentation
                        by the
                        JATC. When not assigned to operations duties, he/she may
                        be assigned to
                        work in accordance with Section 6.13(b) and may be required
                        to assist with
                        training of plant personnel.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      If
                        the employee has completed twenty-four (24) months as a Clarifier
                        Operator
                        and is a successful bidder to an Apprentice Lab Technician
                        position, the
                        JATC may place that employee at an appropriate step level
                        (up to one (1)
                        year) based on the documented formal and OJT training with
                        the approval of
                        the plant manager with no wage reduction. See Bidding Note
                        #26.

                    

            

            

            7090 *OPERATOR,
              CONTROL ROOM

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee, under the supervision of the Shift Team Leader
                        or Shift Foreman,
                        Working, whose duties include the operation of equipment
                        in the plant,
                        together with their related controls, particularly the equipment
                        and
                        switch gear which have their controls in the control room.
                        Is in charge of
                        the control room and generally assists the Shift Team Leader
                        or Shift
                        Foreman, Working, in the operation of the plant. Must keep
                        his station
                        clean. Must be familiar with system operating orders, clearance
                        procedures, and other necessary transactions with the Power
                        System
                        Dispatcher. When required, he shall relieve subordinates,
                        and may be
                        required, in an emergency, to relieve the Shift Team Leader
                        of Shift
                        Foreman, Working, he shall assume their duties, when qualified,
                        on a
                        temporary basis, i.e., less than one full shift or the time
                        required to
                        call out a replacement. When not assigned to operations duties,
                        he may be
                        assigned work in accordance with Section 6.13(b). He shall
                        be qualified to
                        render first aid, and be thoroughly familiar with the Company's
                        electrical
                        and mechanical tagging and safety rules. He may be required
                        to assist in
                        the training of plant personnel.

                    

            

            

            9785 OPERATOR,
              DATA ENTRY

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a proficient data entry operator. This employee
                        will be
                        required to pass a data entry operator test to determine
                        his/ her data
                        entry ability before being considered qualified to be awarded
                        a data entry
                        operator job, and must have completed eighteen (18) months
                        as a data entry
                        operator trainee, or the equivalent in data entry experience.
                        Will be
                        required to data entry punch and type information from source
                        documents
                        into tabulating cards or other input formats. Information
                        recorded from
                        these source documents may be interpreted as required. Will
                        be required to
                        operate, but will not be limited to key-to-disk/tape machines,
                        key punch
                        machines, verifiers, 1050 teleprocessing units, or other
                        data processing
                        source input equipment that may become available, or perform
                        duties of a
                        comparable nature as assigned by the data entry department
                        Supervisor.

                    

            

            

            9535 OPERATOR,
              DATA ENTRY, SENIOR

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has progressed through the Operator, Data Entry
                        Trainee and
                        Operator, Data Entry classification or who has completed
                        equal training in
                        a data entry shop of comparable size and
                        complexity.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee under the supervision of the Data Entry Supervisor,
                        who performs
                        such duties as receiving, reviewing and logging all incoming
                        work to
                        insure completeness and clarity of input documents, resolve
                        any potential
                        problems with the user, prepare batch tags for work and assign
                        work to the
                        Data Entry Operators. Perform transfer functions of data
                        from disk to tape
                        for submission to computer operations, perform cold starts,
                        disk saves and
                        prepare operator statistic tapes as required, assist Supervisor
                        in
                        preparing new application formats. Keys information from
                        various source
                        documents. Assist in training Data Entry Operators. Performs
                        other related
                        clerical duties as required.

                    

            

            

            9910 OPERATOR,
              DATA ENTRY, TRAINEE

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee not required to have prior experience as a data
                        entry operator.
                        This employee must have average typing ability (50-60 words
                        per minute)
                        and will be required to pass a data entry operator aptitude
                        test before
                        being considered qualified to be awarded a data entry operator
                        trainee
                        job. In the course of training may be assigned to any of
                        the duties
                        performed by a data entry operator. Six (6) months after
                        progressing to
                        the top of the trainee classification, will automatically
                        be reclassified
                        to the classification of, and beginning wage rate of data
                        entry
                        operator.

                    

            

            

            7575 *OPERATOR,
              DIESEL/TURBINE

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision, operates and performs
                        routine
                        operational maintenance of diesel and turbine driven generating
                        equipment
                        and auxiliaries, during his shift. Routine operational maintenance
                        includes such functions as replacement of lubricating and
                        fuel oil
                        filters, addition of lubricating oil and anti-freeze and
                        other minor
                        repairs not requiring the services of a qualified Journeyman
                        Mechanic.
                        When not on shift, he may assist Journeyman maintenance personnel.
                        He will
                        keep records, and maintain the plants where he is assigned
                        to work in a
                        neat and clean manner.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      He
                        shall be thoroughly familiar with the Company's dispatching
                        and clearance
                        rules and shall be qualified to perform switching in conjunction
                        with the
                        operation of diesel and turbine generating facilities. He
                        shall be
                        familiar with the Company's mechanical and electrical tagging
                        rules and
                        shall be able to render first aid.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      7220

                    	
                      OPERATOR,
                        DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee, under the guidance of the Transmission Operator
                        or the
                        Transmission and Distribution Supervisor who performs such
                        duties as; the
                        safe switching of distribution lines, distribution substations,
                        communication of switching instructions, granting or releasing
                        approved
                        clearances in connection with electric lines, or apparatus
                        between power
                        supply points, substations, and the terminus of distribution
                        lines,
                        underground feeders and other related duties as assigned.
                        Prepares written
                        switching orders and may review and approve the switching
                        orders prepared
                        by other Operators. Monitors distribution system operating
                        parameters,
                        controls distribution system voltage and conducts load dispatching
                        and
                        other related operating duties during assigned shift. May
                        conduct certain
                        transmission system operations in assistance to and at the
                        request of the
                        Transmission Operator. Must be proficient with all Sierra
                        Pacific safety
                        rules and switching procedures. Shall maintain certain designated
                        switching records and operation logs, and maintain system
                        operating
                        diagrams and related documentation during shift. Is required
                        to use all
                        types of communication equipment with proficiency as available
                        in the
                        System Control Center. May be required to perform the above
                        functions
                        without direct supervision, including assisting in the training
                        of System
                        Control Center personnel. Will be required to pass oral and/or
                        written
                        examinations and/or performance tests covering these duties
                        to progress
                        through wage steps.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      7222

                    	
                      OPERATOR,
                        EMERGENCY RELIEF (GRID)

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        operator whose primary duty is to stand shift as assigned
                        and relieve any
                        of the other operators in System Control. Must be proficient
                        in all
                        aspects of power system operations, including all Sierra
                        Pacific safety
                        rules and procedures. Must be proficient in the use of all
                        types of
                        communication equipment as it is available in System Control.
                        When not
                        assigned to shift, may be required to prepare written switching
                        orders,
                        maintain operating diagrams and perform other duties associated
                        with
                        control center operations. Will be required to use own judgment
                        in order
                        to maintain or restore electric service and will have direct
                        authority to
                        shed customer load. Will be required to pass oral and/or
                        written
                        examinations and performance tests covering these duties.
                        Requires NERC
                        certification and compliance with NERC/WECC Operating Policies
                        and/or
                        Standards. 

                    

            

            

            7213 *OPERATOR,
              EMERGENCY RELIEF (SCRUBBER)

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee qualified to relieve in any operating capacity at
                        the Scrubber,
                        including Shift Foreman, Scrubber, whose primary duties are
                        to stand shift
                        as assigned, and to relieve Scrubber Operators as required.
                        When not
                        assigned to relief duties, he may be required to perform
                        other related
                        duties. In addition, when not assigned to a watch or when
                        not assigned to
                        operations duties, he may be assigned work in accordance
                        with Section
                        6.13(b). He must be qualified to render first aid. He must
                        be thoroughly
                        familiar with the Company's plant tagging and safety rules
                        and be
                        qualified to issue clearances and perform switching for and
                        within the
                        Scrubber. He shall assist in the training of Scrubber personnel.
                        Scrubber
                        Foreman bidding to ERO (Scrubber) will maintain foreman wage
                        rate.

                    

            

            

            7260 *OPERATOR,
              EMERGENCY RELIEF (STEAM)

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee qualified to relieve in any operating capacity,
                        including Shift
                        Foreman, Working, whose primary duties are to stand shift
                        as assigned, and
                        to relieve Plant Operators as required. When not assigned
                        to relief
                        duties, he may be required to perform other related duties.
                        In addition,
                        when not assigned to a watch or when not assigned to operations
                        duties, he
                        may be assigned work in accordance with Section 6.13(b).
                        Must be qualified
                        to perform switching. He shall assist in the training of
                        plant personnel.
                        

                    

            

            

            8776 *OPERATOR,
              EQUIPMENT I

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is under direct supervision and assists an experienced
                        Operator,, or equivalent, and is in the process of acquiring
                        the
                        experience and skills required to advance to Equipment Operator
                        II. Will
                        be required to operate pavement breakers, rubber-tired excavation
                        equipment such as loaders, and combination back-hoe/loaders
                        with rated
                        capacities not exceeding one and one-half (1 1/2) cubic yards
                        for loader
                        buckets and one half (1/2) cubic yard for back-hoe
                        buckets.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      After
                        one (1) year, automatic progression to Equipment Operator
                        II
                        classification will occur upon successful completion of the
                        Equipment
                        Operator I Performance Test. Refer to Equipment Operator
                        Progression
                        Guidelines. 

                    

            

            

            	8774  	
                    *OPERATOR,
                      EQUIPMENT II

                  

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has progressed through the Equipment Operator
                        I
                        classification, or has equivalent experience and is qualified
                        by training
                        and operating experience to perform special construction
                        work using
                        rubber-tired excavation equipment such as loaders, and combination
                        back-hoe/loaders with rated capacities not exceeding one
                        and one-half (1
                        1/2) cubic yards for loader buckets and one half (1/2) cubic
                        yard for
                        back-hoe buckets boom trucks, forklifts, etc. (type of equipment
                        may vary
                        by department). May be required to complete job-related clerical
                        work and
                        assist in training.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      After
                        two (2) years of Equipment Operator II, progression to Equipment
                        Operator
                        III classification will occur upon successful demonstration
                        of Equipment
                        Operator II skills and department specific skills during
                        two (2) years of
                        Equipment Operator II classification. Refer to Equipment
                        Operator
                        Progression Guidelines.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Bidding
                        note 16 applies: Bidder must pass a skills proficiency
                        evaluation.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      8771

                    	
                      *
                        OPERATOR,
                        EQUIPMENT II, SERVICE

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has progressed through the Equipment Operator
                        I
                        classification, or has equivalent experience and is qualified
                        by training
                        and operating experience to perform special construction
                        work using
                        rubber-tired excavation equipment such as loaders, and combination
                        back-hoe/loaders with rated capacities not exceeding one
                        and one-half (1
                        1/2) cubic yards for loader buckets and one half (1/2) cubic
                        yard for
                        back-hoe buckets boom trucks, forklifts, etc. (type of equipment
                        may vary
                        by department). May be required to complete job-related clerical
                        work and
                        assist in training.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      After
                        two (2) years of Equipment Operator II, progression to Equipment
                        Operator
                        III classification will occur upon successful demonstration
                        of Equipment
                        Operator II skills and department specific skills during
                        two (2) years of
                        Equipment Operator II classification. Refer to Equipment
                        Operator
                        Progression Guidelines.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Bidding
                        note 16 applies: Bidder must pass a skills proficiency
                        evaluation.

                    

            

            

            8773 *OPERATOR,
              EQUIPMENT III

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has progressed through the Equipment Operator
                        II
                        classification and is qualified by training and operating
                        experience to
                        perform special construction work using rubber tired equipment
                        such as
                        loaders, and combination backhoe-loaders with rated capacities
                        exceeding
                        1-1/2 cubic yard for loader buckets and 1-1/2 cubic yard
                        for backhoe
                        buckets, boom trucks, forklifts, etc. (Type of equipment
                        may vary by
                        department). May be required to complete job related clerical
                        work and
                        assist in training. Is additionally qualified by training
                        and experience
                        to perform a variety of department specific tasks. Refer
                        to the Equipment
                        Operator Progression Guidelines.

                    

            

            

            8772 *OPERATOR,
              EQUIPMENT, HEAVY

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has completed a minimum of three (3) years as
                        an Equipment
                        Operator II and/or a combination of two (2) years as an Equipment
                        Operator
                        II and one (1) year as an Equipment Operator III, or has
                        equivalent
                        experience and is qualified by training and operating experience
                        to
                        perform special construction work using various rubber-tire
                        and track-
                        mounted or heavy equipment (type of equipment may vary by
                        department) such
                        as bulldozers, cranes, road graders and excavators or other
                        similar
                        equipment.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      May
                        be required to complete job-related clerical work and assist
                        in
                        training.

                    

            

            

            8466 *OPERATOR,
              EQUIPMENT, HEAVY (TRAVELING)

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a qualified equipment and vehicle Mechanic
                        and also
                        qualified as a heavy equipment operator. Must be familiar
                        with
                        transmission crew operations. Employee must have a good working
                        knowledge
                        of the operation of the transmission crew. May be assigned
                        other
                        miscellaneous duties such as ground work, etc. May be required
                        to spend a
                        significant amount of time on out-of-town
                        projects.

                    

            

            

            8115 *OPERATOR,
              GAS PRESSURE

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee with knowledge and experience of the operation and
                        maintenance of
                        gas distribution systems whose responsibilities and duties
                        include the
                        control of pressure and maintenance of the gas flow in the
                        distribution
                        lines. Shall include the operation and maintenance of gas
                        regulator
                        stations, changing various pressure and/or flow meters or
                        volume charts
                        and reading or computing gas usage. Shall be required to
                        test, calibrate
                        and maintain various pieces of equipment, instruments and
                        devices as used
                        in the industry. Shall be responsible for all odorant injections
                        and
                        odorant testing of the system gas. Responsible for the regulation
                        of all
                        gas received from our supplier at the City Gate Stations
                        and must be
                        capable of forecasting daily gas requirements. Will be required
                        to assist
                        in training personnel in all phases of operation and regulation
                        of system
                        gas. May be assigned to other duties as required to assure
                        delivery of
                        safe and reliable gas supply throughout the system. Shall
                        be responsible
                        for recording all maintenance and inspection records as required
                        by
                        Department of Transportation
                        regulations.

                    

            

            

            7221 OPERATOR,
              GRID RELIABILITY

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is responsible for the safe, efficient and reliable
                        operation
                        of the interconnected transmission and control area generation
                        system for
                        the Sierra Pacific and Nevada Power Control Areas during
                        assigned shift.
                        Ensures power system integrity by continuously monitoring
                        such items as
                        ACE, frequency, operating reserves, load, tie-line loading,
                        control area
                        and system load, inadvertent interchange, and time error.
                        Responsible for
                        AGC control, plant loading, and associated control performance
                        criteria.
                        Performs curtailments of transmission, load and generation
                        for system
                        reliability purposes. Interfaces with the reserve sharing
                        systems and
                        applicable Security Coordinators in WECC. May perform hourly
                        and midnight
                        check-outs of tie-line quantities with neighboring control
                        areas.
                        Maintains required records and operational logs during shift.
                        Will be
                        required to use own judgment in order to maintain or restore
                        electric
                        service and will have direct authority to shed customer load.
                        Shall direct
                        the work of others, including the training of Control Center
                        personnel.
                        Will assist the System Transmission Operator in the performance
                        of duties.
                        Will be required to pass oral and/or written examinations
                        and/or
                        performance tests covering these duties to progress through
                        wage steps.
                        Requires NERC certification and compliance with NERC/WECC
                        Operating
                        Policies and/or Standards.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      9840

                    	
                      OPERATOR,
                        MAIL INSERTER

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee, who, under direct supervision, operates and maintains
                        according
                        to manufacturer's specification, the mail inserter and various
                        mail room
                        equipment. Must be able to understand written and oral instructions
                        to
                        ensure proper postaging and handling of customer billing
                        and shareholder
                        mailings in a timely manner. Must be physically capable of
                        heavy
                        lifting.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      9818

                    	
                      OPERATOR,
                        PBX

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who operates a manual or automatic switchboard to
                        handle
                        incoming, outgoing and intra-office calls. In addition, while
                        at
                        switchboard acts as receptionist. Must have pleasing personality
                        and
                        pleasing telephone voice. Also performs routine clerical
                        work as part of
                        regular duties.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      8900

                    	
                      *OPERATOR,
                        PHOTO-TYPESET

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee, who under general supervision and who has completed
                        training,
                        operates a photo-typesetter machine, and is proficient in
                        producing a
                        proof-ready copy for printing or reproduction. Must be experienced
                        in
                        photo-typesetting techniques, type size, styles and formats.
                        Must be
                        knowledgeable of printing terminology and requirements, read
                        job design
                        specifications, and produce camera-ready, accurate proofs
                        of charts,
                        forms, tables, graphs and test, from drafts and paste-ups.
                        Must be able to
                        use tools of the trade in producing copy. Must be able to
                        maintain
                        detailed job costs data and perform daily recordkeeping
                        duties.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      8743

                    	
                      *OPERATOR,
                        SCRUBBER UTILITY

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under direct supervision, shall assist in the
                        operation and
                        service of the scrubber and related equipment. The employee
                        will perform
                        routine tests on water and slurries and shall keep his station
                        clean. The
                        employee will be qualified to change atomizer wheels on spray
                        machines and
                        make temporary repairs of scrubber equipment in an emergency.
                        When
                        qualified, he shall relieve the Scrubber Working Foreman
                        and assist in the
                        training of scrubber personnel. He shall be thoroughly familiar
                        with
                        Company safety rules and be qualified to render first aid.
                        May be required
                        to perform other related duties as
                        required.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Scrubber
                        Utility Operators who are upgradeable to Scrubber Working
                        Foreman shall be
                        placed at the upgradeable wage step after completing 24-months
                        as a
                        Scrubber Utility Operator.

                    

            

            

            8750 *OPERATOR,
              SERVICE UTILITY

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under direct supervision, shall during shift,
                        assist in the
                        operation of generating equipment, and operate auxiliary
                        equipment
                        including pumps, fans, air compressors, and demineralizers,
                        water treating
                        and chemical feed equipment, fuel metering and transfer equipment,
                        screen
                        wells, cooling towers and chemical disposal system. Shall
                        have a good
                        working knowledge of plant equipment and its lubrication
                        needs. Will
                        service plant auxiliary equipment, change filters, maintain
                        records,
                        adjust packings, tighten safety guards, remove pipe couplings,
                        lubricate
                        plant equipment and maintain lubrication equipment and inventory.
                        When the
                        lab technician is not on duty, the Service Utility Operator
                        may be
                        required to perform simple routine tests on water, such as
                        silica, pH and
                        conductivity. When qualified, he shall be required to relieve
                        the
                        Assistant Control Room Operator. When not assigned to operations
                        duties,
                        may be assigned work in accordance with Section 6.13(b).
                        Must keep any
                        assigned work area clean and be thoroughly familiar with
                        Company safety
                        rules and be able to render first aid. May be required to
                        assist in the
                        training of plant personnel.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Service
                        Utility Operators who are upgradeable to Assistant Control
                        Room Operator
                        shall be placed at the upgradeable wage step after completing
                        24-months as
                        a Service Utility Operator.

                    

            

            

            7220 OPERATOR,
              TRANSMISSION SYSTEM

            An
              employee, under the guidance of the Transmission and Distribution Supervisor
              who
              performs such duties as; the safe switching of tie lines, transmission
              lines and
              distribution lines, distribution substations, communication of switching
              instructions, granting or releasing approved clearances in connection
              with
              electric lines, or apparatus between power supply points, substations,
              and the
              terminus of transmission and distribution lines, underground feeders
              and other
              related duties as assigned. Prepares written switching orders and reviews
              and
              approves the switching orders prepared by other Operators. Monitors
              transmission
              system operating parameters, controls system voltage and conducts load
              dispatching and other related operating duties during assigned shift.
              Must be
              proficient with all Sierra Pacific safety rules and switching procedures.
              Shall
              maintain certain designated switching records and operation logs, and
              maintain
              system operating diagrams and related documentation during shift. Is
              required to
              use all types of communication equipment with proficiency as available
              in the
              System Control Center. Will be required to use own judgment in order
              to maintain
              or restore electric service and will have direct authority to shed
              customer
              load. Will be required to perform the above functions without direct
              supervision, including assisting in the training of System Control
              Center
              personnel. Will be required to pass oral and/or written examinations
              and/or
              performance tests covering these duties to progress through wage steps.
              Requires
              NERC certification and compliance with NERC/WECC Operating Policies
              and/or
              Standards.

            

            8870 *OPERATOR,
              YARD

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision, operates and maintains
                        coal and
                        ash handling equipment. Will be required to operate any equipment
                        in the
                        handling of coal, ash dewatering systems, fly ash conditioning,
                        and
                        unloading systems in the handling of ash. Shall be required
                        to perform
                        mechanical maintenance duties on coal handling systems. Will
                        assist the
                        mechanical maintenance department in the maintenance of all
                        plant
                        equipment when required. Performs preventative maintenance
                        duties such as
                        lubricating, oil and filter changing, etc., on all equipment
                        used for coal
                        and ash handling. Must keep his assigned area clean. Must
                        be familiar with
                        plant equipment tagging rules. Shall perform other related
                        duties as
                        assigned by Supervisor or Foreman. Shall be qualified to
                        render first aid.
                        When not assigned to coal handling duties, may be assigned
                        to work in
                        accordance with Section 6.13(b). Processes and delivers coal
                        samples to
                        coal lab as required.

                    

            

            

            8511 *OPERATOR,
              YARD, SENIOR

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision, will operate and
                        maintain coal
                        and ash handling equipment. Will be required to operate a
                        rubber-tired
                        dozer and any other equipment used in the handling of coal,
                        ash dewatering
                        systems, fly ash systems, and unloading systems used in the
                        handling of
                        ash. Will be required to perform routine maintenance duties
                        on coal
                        handling systems and coal handling equipment, such as lubricating,
                        oil and
                        filter changing, etc. Will be required to keep maintenance
                        logs on
                        equipment and schedule the necessary maintenance. Will be
                        required to
                        train Yard Operators in the performance of their duties.
                        Shall be
                        responsible for the cleanliness of the equipment involved
                        in the coal
                        handling process, coal storage area, and the plant outside
                        area in
                        general. Must be thoroughly familiar with the work procedures
                        in the area
                        of responsibility assigned. Must be thoroughly familiar with
                        plant
                        equipment tagging procedures. During outages or emergency
                        situations, may
                        be assigned to work in accordance with Section 6.13(b). Communications
                        as
                        necessary with railroad and mine.

                    

            

            

            8885 *PATROLMAN,
              LINE

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified by training, experience and knowledge
                        to perform
                        on temporary assignment without direct supervision the responsibility
                        of
                        patrolling overhead electric transmission lines, overhead
                        electric
                        distribution lines and other electric system plant
                        facilities.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      The
                        primary duties of this position are to patrol, observe and
                        recognize any
                        damaged structures or equipment or physical irregularities
                        in the
                        aforesaid facilities. Will not be required to climb, perform
                        switching, or
                        repair electrical equipment, perform work from an aerial
                        lift or elevated
                        platform. A record must be made of all irregularities or
                        damages and
                        appropriate reports completed for follow-up repairs by others.
                        Must have
                        one (1) year of experience in the Electric Department and
                        have worked with
                        a line crew a minimum two (2) months on overhead line construction
                        and
                        have received a minimum of 80 hours pertinent training under
                        a qualified
                        instructor. May assist skilled workman or apprentice or work
                        under their
                        direction on various classes of work which may be
                        performed.

                    

            

            

            7595 *PATROLMAN,
              LINE, ELECTRIC

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a Journeyman Lineman and who is qualified
                        by training,
                        experience and knowledge to perform without direct supervision
                        the
                        responsibility of patrolling/inspecting overhead and underground
                        electric
                        transmission lines, overhead and underground electric distribution
                        lines,
                        and other electric system plant
                        facilities.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      The
                        primary duties of this position are to patrol/inspect, observe,
                        recognize
                        and report any damaged structures or equipment or physical
                        irregularities
                        in the aforesaid facilities. May be required, based on qualifications,
                        to
                        perform switching and minor electrical repairs and incidental
                        climbing.
                        May be required to operate infra-red scanning devices or
                        other detection
                        instruments. A record must be made of all irregularities
                        or damages and
                        appropriate reports completed for follow-up repairs by others.
                        May assist
                        skilled workman or apprentice, or work under their direction,
                        on various
                        classes of work which may be
                        performed.

                    

            

            

            7420 *POWDERMAN

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has successfully completed a Company-provided
                        course in the
                        handling and use of explosives, and currently holds a valid
                        license to
                        purchase, transport and use explosives in the state in which
                        the employee
                        will be performing blasting operations. Duties include loosening
                        of
                        materials to be excavated, opening of holes for utility poles
                        and anchors,
                        and demolition of concrete footings and foundations. This
                        position is for
                        upgrade only.

                    

            

            

            8716 *REPAIRMAN,
              CONSTRUCTION

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified to lay out, install, erect, construct,
                        maintain
                        and/or repair all civil/structural portions of utility facilities.
                        Must be
                        qualified by training, knowledge and experience to perform
                        tasks typically
                        classified as carpentry, masonry, concrete work, ironwork,
                        sitework and
                        earthwork, including but not limited to general carpentry,
                        basic framing
                        and forming, heavy timber construction, concrete placement,
                        finishing and
                        curing, trenching and excavation, fencing, grounding, conduit
                        installation, rigging, structural steel erection, hazardous
                        waste handling
                        and the interpretation of drawings and prints associated
                        therewith. Must
                        have a working knowledge of mathematics, basic surveying
                        techniques,
                        construction materials, construction equipment and the use
                        of hand and
                        power tools. Must have successfully completed the Construction
                        Repairman
                        Apprentice Training Program or
                        equivalent.

                    

            

            

            8530 *REPAIRMAN,
              TOOL

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified to perform, without direct supervision,
                        and
                        subordinate to the Working Foreman or Supervisor in the duties
                        required to
                        receive, store, issue, maintain records, repair, maintain
                        and distribute
                        tools related to all Company operations. Will not be required
                        to repair
                        internal combustion engines or electric motors. May be required
                        to operate
                        equipment and/or Company vehicles within the scope of the
                        foregoing
                        duties. May be required to provide general direction to any
                        classifications assigned to him in performing work herein
                        defined.

                    

            

            

            8535 *REPAIRMAN,
              TOOL (POWER PRODUCTION)

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is familiar with mechanical tools and equipment
                        used to
                        maintain apparatus in power plant operations. Shall issue,
                        receive, store,
                        inventory, maintain records and tools related to power plant
                        mechanical
                        maintenance operations. May be required to assist Journeyman
                        maintenance
                        personnel as required.

                    

            

            

            9777 REPRESENTATIVE,
              ACCOUNTS PAYABLE

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee not required to have prior accounts payable experience,
                        but who
                        must, prior to award, pass the clerical battery test and
                        a typing
                        proficiency test (45 w.p.m.). Will receive formal training
                        in order to
                        perform the duties of an Accounts Payable Representative.
                        Works alone and
                        makes independent decisions as necessary on such duties for
                        which the
                        employee has been trained and instructed, including accounting
                        and data
                        entry functions in the Peoplesoft, and SPPC legacy Accounts
                        Payable/Purchasing/Inventory Systems. Required to be effective
                        when
                        working with their customers and responding to vendor requests
                        and
                        inquiries, as well as having other qualifications generally
                        accepted as
                        being desirable in an Accounts Payable Representative classification.
                        Once
                        trained, employee will be responsible for a) timely processing
                        of
                        invoices, expense reports, and credit card transactions for
                        payment in the
                        applicable Accounts Payable computer system for all SPR business
                        units, b)
                        analyzing and verifying consistency, completeness, and accuracy
                        of items
                        to be entered into the accounting records, c) preparing simple
                        journal
                        entries and reconciliations for review and approval, d) researching
                        and
                        resolving errors or discrepancies in invoices and account
                        activity, e)
                        maintaining subsidiary ledgers, f) preparing manual checks,
                        cash reports,
                        balancing, and general ledger edits, and g) all aspects of
                        vendor set-up
                        and maintenance, all in accordance and compliance with established
                        corporate policies. Will automatically progress through the
                        wage rate
                        scale provided the employee’s performance is satisfactory to qualify for
                        advancement. May be required by Company to pass written and/or
                        proficiency
                        tests covering any of the following qualifications prior
                        to job
                        award:

                    

            

            	1.  	
                    Aptitude
                      for routine accounting operations and bookkeeping
                      entries.

                  

            	2.  	
                    Aptitude
                      for more complex arithmetical
                      calculations.

                  

            	3.  	
                    Ability
                      to effectively operate a computer for data entry and use of
                      Accounts
                      Payable specific software applications.

                  

            	4.  	
                    Balancing
                      and preparation of daily balance sheets and
                      reports.

                  

            	5.  	
                    Ability
                      to operate various complex office
                      machines/equipment.

                  

            

            9725 REPRESENTATIVE,
              ACCOUNTS PAYABLE, SENIOR

            An
              employee who by training and having worked in the Accounts Payable
              Department
              has demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Company a thorough knowledge
              and
              detailed understanding of SPR’s Accounts Payable business processes and computer
              accounting systems, including Peoplesoft, Indus Passport, and SPPC’s legacy
              Accounts Payable/Purchasing/Inventory System. Requires leadership qualities
              and
              excellent verbal and written communication skills. Performs a variety
              of skilled
              and unskilled tasks dealing with the orderly flow of work within the
              department.
              Such employee will be responsible for a) analyzing and verifying consistency,
              completeness, and accuracy of items to be entered into the accounting
              records,
              b) preparing simple recurring journal entries and reconciliations,
              c)
              researching and resolving errors or discrepancies in invoices and account
              activity, d) maintaining subsidiary ledgers, e) preparing manual checks,
              cash
              reports, balancing, and general ledger edits, f) timely processing
              of invoices,
              expense reports, and credit card transactions for payment in the applicable
              Accounts Payable computer system for all SPR business units, and g)
              all aspects
              of vendor set-up and maintenance, all in accordance and compliance
              with
              established corporate policies. Provides on-the-job training and directs
              the
              activities of other department personnel as required, performs other
              assigned
              clerical functions as needed, and provides instruction/interpretation
              of
              corporate policies.

            Required
              to be effective when working with and responding to customer and vendor
              requests
              and inquiries, as well as have other qualifications and qualities generally
              accepted as being desirable in an accounts payable classification.
              Required to
              make independent decisions as necessary to provide quality service.

            

            9861 REPRESENTATIVE,
              CLERICAL

            An
              employee who after passing a clerical aptitude test, may be assigned
              to perform
              any and all advanced clerical or secretarial functions which require
              greater
              judgment and initiative in non-routine situations. Performs any other
              miscellaneous duties as required by Supervisory personnel in the department
              to
              which assigned, including bookkeeping and entering functions, as well
              as
              customer contacts either in person or by telephone. May be required
              by the
              Company to pass written and/or proficiency test covering any of the
              following
              qualifications. (Only those qualifications as specified in points one
              through
              six below, which are considered by Company for a particular Clerical
              Representative vacancy, shall be posted):

            

            
              	 	
                      1.

                    	
                      Typing
                        with acceptable speed and accuracy (45 w.p.m. or 60 w.p.m.
                        as
                        required).

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      2.

                    	
                      Aptitude
                        for more complex arithmetical
                        calculations.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      3.

                    	
                      Ability
                        to operate various complex office
                        machines/equipment.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      4.

                    	
                      Aptitude
                        for routine accounting clerical operations and bookkeeping
                        entries.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      5.

                    	
                      Receive
                        cash payments, balance and prepare daily cash
                        reports.

                    

            

            

            9776 *REPRESENTATIVE,
              CUSTOMER SERVICES

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee not required to have prior customer services experience
                        and who,
                        after passing a clerical aptitude test, will receive formal
                        training in
                        order to perform the duties of Customer Services Representative.
                        Upon
                        satisfactory completion of the minimum requirements of the
                        Sierra Customer
                        Information System Training Program, and while receiving
                        on-the-job
                        training, may be assigned to any of the duties performed
                        by the Customer
                        Services Representative in the Customer Business Office,
                        Meter Reading,
                        Cash Operations, Energy Diversion, Service Center or District
                        Offices.
                        Shall be required by Company to pass the Customer Information
                        System
                        training proficiency test. Required to be effective when
                        working with the
                        public and responding to customer requests and inquiries,
                        as well as have
                        other qualifications and qualities generally accepted as
                        being desirable
                        in a customer services classification. Works alone on duties
                        for which
                        employee has been trained and instructed and makes independent
                        decisions
                        as necessary to satisfy customer needs and provide quality
                        customer
                        service. Will automatically progress through the wage rate
                        scale provided
                        the employee's performance is satisfactory to qualify for
                        advancement. May
                        be required by Company to pass written and/or proficiency
                        tests covering
                        any of the following
                        qualifications:

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      1.

                    	
                      Typing
                        with acceptable speed and accuracy (45 w.p.m.)/keyboard
                        skills.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      2.

                    	
                      Aptitude
                        for arithmetical calculations.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      3.

                    	
                      Ability
                        to operate various office machines and personal computers
                        as
                        required.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      4.

                    	
                      Spanish
                        speaking skills.

                    

            

            

            9735 *REPRESENTATIVE,
              CUSTOMER SERVICES, SENIOR

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has demonstrated to the satisfaction of the
                        Company, through
                        a minimum of three (3) years' experience as a Customer Services
                        Representative, that he/she is qualified to perform, with
                        a minimal amount
                        of supervision, all functions relating to Customer Services;
                        Customer
                        Billing; Credit and Collections; Service Center operations
                        and/or;
                        District Office operations. Required to be effective when
                        working with the
                        public and responding to customer requests and inquiries,
                        as well as
                        having other qualifications and qualities generally accepted
                        as being
                        desirable in customer services classifications. Required
                        to make
                        independent decisions as necessary to satisfy customer needs
                        and provide
                        on-the-job training. Able to validate and approve cash drawers.
                        (Only
                        those qualifications as specified in points 1 through 6 below,
                        which are
                        considered by Company for a particular Customer Services
                        Representative
                        Senior vacancy, shall be posted.)

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      1.

                    	
                      Skilled
                        in the use of the Automatic Call Distributor telephone system
                        as well as
                        the on-line inquiry and order entry Customer Information
                        System
                        (SCIS).

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      2.

                    	
                      Performs
                        all clerical functions related to computer printed edit lists,
                        revenue
                        adjustments, corrected bills and other related off-line functions
                        as
                        required.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      3.

                    	
                      Understands
                        service bills, billing rates, deposit requirements, termination
                        of service
                        rules and the use of various computer reports prepared for
                        credit and
                        collection work.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      4.

                    	
                      Performs
                        all clerical functions related to the Service Center
                        operation.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      5.

                    	
                      Performs
                        all clerical functions pertaining to the meter inventory
                        system and other
                        related activities using the Customer Information
                        System.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      6.

                    	
                      Performs
                        all clerical functions related to District Office
                        operations.

                    

            

            

            7485 *SERVICEMAN,
              CUSTOMER

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has completed his apprenticeship and does such
                        work as
                        checking operations of gas meters, installing and altering
                        gas meter and
                        regulator installations; will make adjustments and repairs
                        of domestic,
                        commercial, industrial, and Company rental gas equipment
                        and appliances.
                        Will set or replace electric meters and inspect tampered
                        gas and electric
                        meters, inverted and switched electric meters and investigate
                        all types of
                        broken meter seals. Will make electric, gas cut-ins and cut-outs,
                        seal or
                        O.B.M. meters and in conjunction with the aforementioned
                        duties will
                        collect delinquent payments and deposits at the customers'
                        premises. Will
                        investigate gas customer complaints, make service checks
                        on customers'
                        premises and must be able to discuss service problems and
                        advise both
                        existing and prospective customers. Must be able to learn
                        the application
                        of pipe locator equipment, determine leak locations in regard
                        to Company
                        or customer side of water curb cock and investigate water
                        customer
                        complaints. May be required to change periodic clock charts
                        at various
                        locations. Must be able to write legibly and maintain a neat,
                        clean
                        appearance and must be qualified to work with the
                        public.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      A
                        Serviceman, Customer shall be required by Company to reside
                        within a
                        thirty-five (35) mile radius of the Company headquarters
                        to which they
                        regularly report.

                    

            

            

            8730 *SERVICEMAN,
              ELECTRIC

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee engaged in setting electric meters and making electric
                        and water
                        cut-ins and making electric, water and gas cut-outs; making
                        electric
                        connections at the weatherhead and assisting the Troubleman.
                        An employee
                        who has had at least one (1) year's experience as either
                        an Apprentice
                        Lineman, Apprentice Fitter, or equivalent experience shall
                        be given an
                        experience rating to the one (1) year wage
                        step.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee shall possess (within 30 days) and maintain a Commercial
                        Drivers
                        License (CDL). As of January 1, 2003, incumbents, if capable,
                        will be
                        required to possess a CDL within 90
                        days.

                    

            

            

            8720 *SERVICEMAN,
              EQUIPMENT

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has a strong mechanical background and good
                        knowledge of
                        plant equipment and its lubrication needs. Duties will include
                        equipment
                        lubrication, changing filters, recordkeeping, and minor repairs,
                        such as
                        adjustment of packing, drive belts, tightening of safety
                        guards and repair
                        of minor leaks noticed during normal lubrication duties.
                        Will be
                        responsible for keeping his assigned area clean, maintaining
                        lubrication
                        equipment, and maintaining proper lubricant inventory. Will
                        work under
                        general supervision and have a good knowledge of plant safety
                        and tagging
                        procedures.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      9745

                    	
                      *SPECIALIST,
                        METER DATA

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who possesses the necessary knowledge and skill
                        through
                        experience and training to provide a high level of technical
                        data
                        processing and support to ensure all meter reading data for
                        billing is
                        complete and accurate. Employee is responsible for using
                        his/her knowledge
                        to support the electronic meter reading system for billing
                        through daily
                        processing of collected data. Maintains existing computer
                        application
                        software through trouble-shooting and installation of new
                        software in all
                        personal computers associated with the electronic meter reading
                        system.
                        Provides district offices with technical support for the
                        electronic meter
                        reading system including trouble-shooting and
                        training.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Provides
                        procedural instructions for use of computer software packages.
                        Must
                        understand the mainframe-p.c. link software to upload and
                        download
                        sensitive billing data through the electronic meter reading
                        system.
                        Maintains inventory of electronic handheld devices and ensures
                        adequate
                        equipment is available to all district offices through coordination
                        and
                        distribution.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Employee
                        must have a thorough understanding of the fundamentals and
                        have a
                        practical understanding of data processing techniques, data
                        collection
                        procedures and meter read preparation. Must have comprehensive
                        knowledge
                        of personal computers, system hardware, communication devices
                        and
                        application software. Must have considerable knowledge of
                        the electronic
                        meter reading system and data acquisition. Must possess the
                        ability to
                        analyze and document the operations of the electronic meter
                        reading
                        system. Must be able to communicate effectively, both orally
                        and in
                        writing.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      6035

                    	
                      *SPECIALIST,
                        PARTS SENIOR, UTILITY FLEET

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision, is responsible for
                        Fleet-wide
                        parts operations, including inventory and stocking levels,
                        purchase card
                        functions, and the performance of duties relating to the
                        ordering,
                        receiving, shipping, handling, taking inventory, storing
                        and disbursing of
                        Fleet automotive and equipment-related materials and supplies.
                        Provides
                        input to management regarding vendor selection, evaluation
                        and
                        performance. Must possess the knowledge and skill, through
                        training,
                        certification or experience obtained by having spent a minimum
                        of five (5)
                        years as a Utility Fleet Parts Clerk (or similar experience),
                        to operate
                        and maintain (1) the Fleet/Corporate computer systems to
                        handle all
                        aspects of shop repair orders relating to issuing and receiving
                        parts, and
                        (2) the ordering and invoicing system. Must possess a comprehensive
                        knowledge of overall Fleet parts operations, including terminology,
                        practices, Fleet equipment, and automotive parts. Must possess
                        good
                        communication skills, both oral and written. Will be required
                        to train
                        personnel when required and to perform other duties as
                        assigned.

                    

            

            

            8847 *STOREKEEPER

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee with no less than two (2) years' experience as a
                        Warehouseman,
                        who has charge of a District Stores facility (outside the
                        Reno area) and
                        who is qualified to perform and direct, without direct supervision,
                        and
                        subordinate to the Supervisor in charge, all work relating
                        to the
                        ordering, receiving, shipping, handling, storing, disbursing
                        and salvaging
                        of materials and supplies, and the taking of inventories.
                        The employee
                        shall be familiar with the Company's Stores and Accounting
                        procedures and
                        other applicable rules. Shall be required to perform all
                        related clerical
                        duties and to operate equipment and/or Company vehicles within
                        the scope
                        of the foregoing duties. Shall provide general direction
                        to any
                        classifications assigned to assist him in performing stores
                        work herein
                        defined. May be assigned to perform other work as occasions
                        arise.

                    

            

            

            8848 *STOREKEEPER/BUYER/PLANNER
              (FT. CHURCHILL ONLY)

              Has
              charge of a District Stores facility and who is qualified to perform
              and direct
              all work relating to the ordering, receiving, shipping, handling, storing,
              disbursing and salvaging of materials and supplies, and the taking
              of
              inventories. The employee shall be familiar with the Company’s Stores and
              Accounting procedures and other applicable rules. Shall be required
              to perform
              all related clerical duties and to operate equipment and/or Company
              vehicles
              within the scope of the foregoing duties.

            

            Provide
              all material and inventory support for the Generating Facility. Plans,
              directs,
              controls procurement or required materials, equipment and supplies.
              Consults
              with the customers to maintain appropriate stock levels. Build customer
              relationships and acts as one point of contract for all supply chain
              needs for
              their customer’s organization. Maintains a high level of customer
              satisfaction.

            

            Responsible
              for qualifying vendors, preparing and issuing formal bids, evaluating
              bids,
              establishing long-term blanket supply agreements and strategic alliance
              agreements that support service goals by obtaining the best combination
              of
              delivery, quality, quantity and price. Establishes and maintains communications
              with the suppliers to support the supply chain. Coordinates supplier
              evaluations
              periodically in concert with the customer/user group. payments.

            

            8055 *SURVEYOR

            Directs
              the work and activities of the Survey Crew in the performance of measurements
              upon the land of features and fixtures of Company-owned land and land
              rights,
              construction layout and staking of improvements and facilities, and
              other survey
              related activities in support of Company objectives. Maintains and
              operates all
              survey and survey related equipment. Checks plans for accuracy, performs
              research, calculations and other field checks to insure correctness,
              maintains
              data collector files and oversees survey crew to make sure correct
              survey
              procedures and safety requirements are met. Possesses fundamental knowledge
              of
              Land Survey principles and practices and actively pursues performance
              excellence. The Surveyor shall be responsible for the survey crew’s activities
              in the performance of their duties. Must possess a valid Professional
              Land
              Surveyor’s license. Performs such other duties in the field or office as may
              be
              assigned.

            

            8780 *SURVEYOR,
              LEAK

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee with background and experience in Gas Operations
                        with training in
                        leak surveying or fitting or other related equivalent fields.
                        Must have a
                        good knowledge of and be capable of operating and performing
                        minor
                        maintenance and care of equipment, such as: combustible gas
                        indicator,
                        flame ionization leak detector, odorometer, pipe locator
                        and any other
                        equipment that may be required by regulation for use in locating
                        and
                        pinpointing gas leaks in underground or above-ground installations
                        of the
                        gas system. Will be required to test for gas in basements,
                        vaults,
                        manholes and other areas where gas may accumulate as part
                        of the
                        continuing gas leak survey program and assist in the annual
                        system leak
                        survey program. Will be required to repair minor leaks on
                        above-ground
                        facilities. May be assigned to grease and operate gas valves
                        throughout
                        the system and to clean out and/or raise valve road boxes.
                        May also be
                        required to assist the Gas Pressure Operator in the control
                        of gas
                        pressure throughout the distribution system. May be required
                        to pick up
                        and change pressure and/or volume flow charts from gate and
                        regulator
                        stations and commercial customers. May be assigned other
                        duties as
                        required in the operation of the gas distribution system
                        during peak loads
                        or emergencies under the direction of a higher classified
                        person. Must be
                        able to write legibly and keep accurate records. Will be
                        required to make
                        out daily and monthly reports.

                    

            

            

            7146 *TECHNICIAN,
              TELECOMMUNICATIONS 
              An
              employee, who is qualified by training and knowledge, may be required
              to
              install, maintain, repair, adjust or program various types of telecommunication
              voice and data transmission equipment. Equipment may include, but not
              limited
              to, various SCADA RTU’s, digital and analog microwave radios, fiber optic SONET
              multiplexers, digital T1 multiplexers, digital cross connect switches,
              automatic
              telephone PBX, key systems and telephones, electric and gas system
              telemeter
              equipment, transfer trip equip, power line carrier RF equip, trunked
              radio
              system, spread spectrum and two-way radios, and other telecommunications
              and
              electronic work as may be required. The employee may be required to
              assist
              Telecommunications Engineers with system circuit design and project
              planning.
              The employee must have a working knowledge of laptop computers. The
              employee may
              be required to assist in the training of department personnel.

             

            Prerequisites:

            a)
              Must
              hold a Federal Communications Commission General Radio Telephone Operator
              License, National Association of Business and Educational Radio (NABER)
              certificate, or National Association of Radio and Telecommunications
              Inc.
              (NARTI) certificate prior to completion of six (6) months of
              employment.

            b)
              Must
              have completed the Telecommunications apprenticeship or have prior
              telecommunications related work experience.

            

            7133 *TECHNICIAN,
              TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee, who is qualified by training and knowledge, may
                        be required to
                        install, maintain, repair, adjust or program various types
                        of
                        telecommunication voice and data transmission equipment.
                        Must have a
                        thorough knowledge of the SCADA system and be capable of
                        performing
                        maintenance and repair on that equipment or any peripheral
                        equipment
                        associated with the system. Other equipment skills may include,
                        but not
                        limited to,
                        the EMS computer
                        various RTU’s, UPS,
                        digital and analog microwave radios, fiber optic SONET multiplexers,
                        digital T1 multiplexers, digital cross connect switches,
                        automatic
                        telephone PBX, key systems and telephones, electric and gas
                        system
                        telemeter equipment, transfer trip equip, power line carrier
                        RF equip,
                        trunked radio system, spread spectrum and two-way radios,
                        and other
                        telecommunications and electronic work as may be required.
                        The employee
                        may be required to assist Telecommunications Engineers with
                        system circuit
                        design and project planning. The employee must have a working
                        knowledge of
                        laptop computers. The employee may be required to assist
                        in the training
                        of department personnel.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Prerequisites:

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      Must
                        have completed a minimum of two years as a Telecommunications
                        Technician
                        and successfully completed and passed the Telecommunication
                        Systems
                        Technician course of instruction and required
                        tests.

                    

            

            

            7075 *TECHNICIAN,
              CONTROL

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has been a Journeyman Electrician for at least
                        two (2) years
                        and has successfully completed the Control Technician course.
                        He/she will
                        be further qualified by training and knowledge to install,
                        maintain, test,
                        repair and adjust protective relays, substation control equipment,
                        substation equipment, substation metering and other work
                        as required. Must
                        be qualified to perform switching. Must be able to analyze
                        and
                        troubleshoot complex substation equipment and record test
                        data and prepare
                        detailed test reports and analytical graphs or data tables.
                        Must be
                        capable of work planning.

                    

            

            

            7015 *TECHNICIAN,
              RELAY CONTROL, SENIOR

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is presently a Control Technician and has been
                        a Control
                        Technician for at least two years (if no bidders other sources
                        may be
                        considered). After acceptance of position, employee will
                        be further
                        qualified by serving an internship working under the direction
                        of a Senior
                        Relay Control Technician. Upon completion of internship,
                        the intern Senior
                        Relay Control Technician will be given a comprehensive written
                        and
                        hands-on examination by Senior Relay Control Technicians
                        to prove himself
                        competent to work with and to understand the following: Must
                        be fully
                        qualified to install, maintain, test, repair, and adjust
                        both the normal
                        and most complex types of microprocessors, solid state, and
                        electro-mechanical relays and relay packages. Must be qualified
                        to perform
                        switching. Must have the capability to analyze and troubleshoot
                        all types
                        of complex substation relay, control and disturbance analysis
                        circuits and
                        devices. Will be required to do work planning and assist
                        in the training
                        of Control Technicians. Must have the capability to prepare
                        and analyze
                        detailed test reports, graphs, and tables. Must be able to
                        assume a lead
                        role in the installation start-up and testing of new protection/control
                        equipment for substations.

                    

            

            

            7110 *TECHNICIAN,
              ELECTRICAL, PLANT

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a Journeyman and is engaged in testing, repairing,
                        maintaining and installing all types of electric and electronic
                        equipment
                        and related components in generating stations. May be required
                        to do plant
                        and plant substation switching. May be required to do incidental
                        welding,
                        such as tack hangers and test welding machines after repair,
                        etc. Must be
                        qualified to operate station crane. His background of apprenticeship
                        and
                        experience must be such as to qualify him to perform these
                        duties with
                        skill and efficiency. He may also be required to instruct
                        or advise
                        operating personnel on problems pertaining to electrical
                        equipment. He
                        must be thoroughly familiar with Company's electrical and
                        mechanical
                        tagging and safety rules and be able to render first
                        aid.

                    

            

            

            7073 *TECHNICIAN,
              INSTRUCTION/STANDARDS

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who possesses the necessary knowledge and skill
                        through
                        experience and training to prepare, direct and schedule training
                        for
                        Apprentice and Journeymen Electricians and other Company
                        personnel who may
                        be required to work in or around electric substations. Must
                        have been a
                        Journeyman Electrician for at least four (4) years. Must
                        be able to
                        demonstrate complete knowledge of current installation and
                        maintenance
                        procedures for all substation equipment to include, but not
                        restricted to
                        gas, oil, air and vacuum circuit breakers; transformers,
                        tap changers and
                        regulators and all ancillary equipment involved with same.
                        Must have a
                        basic knowledge of transmission and distribution relay protection
                        schemes
                        including transformer and bus protection. Must be able to
                        read, comprehend
                        and interpret all electric blueprints such as one (1) line,
                        three (3)
                        lines, wiring diagrams, schematics and erection drawings
                        and plot plans.
                        Must be familiar with all safety standards (i.e. IEEE, ANSI,
                        OSHA and
                        SPPCo.). Will have successfully completed substation and
                        overhead
                        switching training. Must have ability to read and comprehend
                        technical
                        material, instruction manuals and textbooks for the purpose
                        of training
                        other personnel in the maintenance and installation of new
                        and existing
                        equipment. Must have a thorough knowledge of, and the ability
                        to train
                        others in electrical test procedures and overhead substation
                        switching
                        procedures. Must have a thorough knowledge of and the ability
                        to
                        administer the Electrician Apprenticeship Agreement between
                        SPPCo. and
                        IBEW Local 1245. Will be required to organize and maintain
                        training files
                        and records, prepare and present both written and oral reports,
                        and
                        conduct training for large and small groups in both classroom
                        and field
                        settings. Will act as SCAT apprenticeship liaison to SPPCo.
                        Joint
                        Apprenticeship Committee and the State of Nevada Apprenticeship
                        Council.
                        When not engaged in instruction and standards, may be assigned
                        to work as
                        an Electrician. Will be subject to overtime assignments when
                        working as an
                        Electrician and averaged into the year to date overtime
                        list.

                    

            

            

            7150 *TECHNICIAN,
              INSTRUMENT

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a graduate of an accredited two-year technical
                        educational
                        institution in a field related to one (1) of the engineering
                        sciences, or
                        possesses the equivalent knowledge, and is qualified by training
                        to
                        install, calibrate and test instruments and meters used in
                        steam, hydro,
                        diesel and gas turbine power plants, and who has further
                        qualified himself
                        by training and education to install, calibrate, test and
                        service complex
                        automatic control systems such as combustion controls, chlorination
                        equipment, etc., in order to obtain efficient operation.
                        May perform,
                        under direction, corrective measures to improve the performance
                        of
                        equipment. Must be able to understand relatively complex
                        technical
                        problems and perform a wide variety of non-routine tasks
                        where only
                        general methods of procedure are available. Must be able
                        to plan and
                        conduct tests on various power plant equipment, perform test
                        calculations,
                        interpret the results and prepare detailed test reports,
                        graphs, etc. May
                        perform other related duties as
                        required.

                    

            

            

            7515 *TECHNICIAN,
              LAB

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who, under general supervision, operates station
                        water treating
                        equipment, secures and analyzes fuel, water and air samples
                        and maintains
                        proper chemical treatment for the plant water, fuel and steam
                        systems.
                        Must be proficient with standard laboratory techniques and
                        equipment for
                        analyzing fuel, water and air samples. Makes necessary chemical
                        calculations and prescribes required feed rates and correction
                        procedures
                        to maintain established chemical control limits and practices.
                        Monitors
                        and maintains proper calibration on station chemical instrumentation
                        and
                        performs minor servicing as required. Maintains filing system
                        and log of
                        all data pertinent to station water and fuel treatment. Prepares
                        written
                        reports and performs statistical work and other related duties
                        as
                        required. Assists, if required, in unloading and storage
                        of all chemicals,
                        and will maintain chemical burn and eyewash stations. Will
                        train operators
                        and other personnel in chemical analysis and operation of
                        water treatment
                        as required. Is responsible for cleanliness of chemical laboratory,
                        water
                        treatment equipment areas and for maintaining proper stock
                        of water
                        treatment chemicals. Must be familiar with Company's safety
                        rules and be
                        able to render first aid. May be required to work shift work.
                        When not
                        assigned to laboratory duties, may be assigned to work in
                        accordance with
                        Section 6.13(b).

                    

            

            

            7165 *TECHNICIAN,
              METER I

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a journeyman and has served successfully
                        his
                        apprenticeship or equivalent for Technician, Meter I. Must
                        have sufficient
                        working knowledge of electricity to be able, by the use of
                        instruments, to
                        determine power, volt amperes, power factor and reactive
                        component in an
                        electric circuit. Must be able to program, test, read, and
                        troubleshoot
                        demand, reactive, and TOU meters, both induction and solid
                        state types,
                        and solid state recorders, using computers where needed.
                        Applicants will
                        be expected to prove possession of these qualifications by
                        successfully
                        passing a test with a score of 75% or
                        better.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      7170
                        

                    	
                      *TECHNICIAN,
                        METER II

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a journeyman and has been a Technician, Meter
                        I for at
                        least two (2) years and who, in addition, has successfully
                        completed the
                        Technician, Meter I course plan. Must be able to perform
                        all the tasks as
                        specified for Technician, Meter I, plus be able to program,
                        read, test,
                        and troubleshoot multi-tariff four-quadrant meters and specialized
                        test
                        equipment and metering systems. Applicants will be expected
                        to demonstrate
                        their competence in these fields by passing a written test
                        with a score of
                        75% or better.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      7175

                    	
                      *TECHNICIAN,
                        METER, SENIOR

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a journeyman and has two (2) years of job
                        experience as a
                        Technician, Meter II and
                        who, in addition, has successfully completed the Technician,
                        Meter II
                        course plan. Must be able to perform all the tasks as specified
                        for the
                        Technician, Meter II, plus be able to troubleshoot Itron
                        Hardware and
                        resolve billing translation and mainline billing problems,
                        using load
                        graphs or other computer listings as needed. Will be required
                        to do work
                        planning and assist in developing and presenting training
                        programs for
                        Apprentices and Meter Technicians. This position is promotional
                        only.
                        Successful candidate will report to the Working Foreman,
                        Meter
                        Technician.

                    

            

            

            7125 *TECHNICIAN,
              REGULATOR, GAS

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee under the supervision of the Gas Meter Shop Foreman
                        whose
                        responsibilities and duties include the repair, maintenance,
                        and
                        calibration of gas control and measuring devices within the
                        distribution
                        system including gas regulator stations and meter stations.
                        Must be
                        capable of working alone when
                        required.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Shall
                        be required to test, calibrate, and maintain maintenance
                        schedules of gas
                        meters and various equipment, instruments, large house regulators
                        where
                        pounds pressure is delivered, pressure and temperature compensating
                        devices, scallop recorders, combination meters with regulators,
                        3" and
                        larger water meters with strainers. Must have experience
                        on all mechanical
                        and electronic correcting devices used in Company's system.
                        Will be
                        required to assist in training personnel in all phases of
                        gas control and
                        regulation. May be assigned to other duties as required to
                        assure safe and
                        reliable gas supply and service throughout the system. Must
                        be capable of
                        analyzing the gas equipment of Company's commercial and industrial
                        customers and provide pertinent information in relation to
                        their natural
                        gas facilities. Shall be responsible for recording all maintenance
                        and
                        inspection records as required by Department of Transportation
                        regulations.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Must
                        have completed two (2) years' experience as Journeyman Meterman-Gas,
                        or
                        equivalent.

                    

            

            

            7155 *TECHNICIAN,
              SHIFT, INSTRUMENT & CONTROL, PINON

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is a graduate of an accredited two-year technician
                        educational institution in a field related to one of the
                        engineering
                        sciences, or possesses the equivalent knowledge, and is qualified
                        by
                        training to install, calibrate, and test instruments and
                        meters used in
                        steam, hydro, diesel and gas turbine power plants, and who
                        is further
                        qualified by training and education to install, calibrate,
                        test and
                        service complex automatic control systems such as combustion
                        controls,
                        chlorination equipment, distributive control systems, etc.,
                        in order to
                        obtain efficient operation. May perform, under direction,
                        corrective
                        measure to improve the performance of equipment. Must be
                        able to
                        understand relatively complex technical problems and perform
                        a wide
                        variety of non-routine tasks where only general methods of
                        procedure are
                        available. Must be able to plan and conduct tests on various
                        power plant
                        equipment, perform test calculations, interpret the results
                        and prepare
                        detailed test reports, graphs, etc. May perform other related
                        duties as
                        required including plant operating duties that he has been
                        trained to
                        perform. (This position is a shift employee and is subject
                        to the current
                        12-hour shift scheduled agreement and/or applicable sections
                        of Title 6 in
                        the Collective Bargaining
                        Agreement.)

                    

            

            

            7052 *TECHNICIAN,
              SUBSTATION

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has been a Control Technician for at least two
                        (2) years and
                        has successfully completed the Substation Technician training
                        course. Must
                        be fully qualified to install, maintain, test, repair, and
                        adjust some
                        solid state relays and electro-mechanical relays and relay
                        packages. Must
                        have an advanced knowledge of substation equipment and their
                        mechanical
                        function and the ability to repair, test, adjust, and maintain
                        this
                        equipment. Must be qualified to perform switching. Must have
                        the
                        capability to analyze and troubleshoot all types of complex
                        substations,
                        controls, and disturbance analysis circuits and devices.
                        Will be required
                        to do work planning and have a good working knowledge on
                        substation
                        construction and maintenance
                        problems.

                    

            

            

            7225 *TROUBLEMAN,
              ELECTRIC

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee with at least two (2) years of experience as a Lineman,
                        engaged
                        in performing any overhead and underground work in connection
                        with
                        maintaining electric service to the public, including the
                        installation of
                        all types of customer services, including risers and terminal
                        connections
                        when the service is to be underground, meters and materials,
                        replacing
                        line and transformer fuses; patrolling, switching, restoring
                        service on
                        "no light" and "no power" calls and operating unattended
                        substations. Must
                        be qualified to perform switching. May install Company-owned
                        customer
                        outdoor lighting service equipment, may make short secondary
                        extension
                        using bundle conductors and may perform emergency maintenance
                        and/or
                        repairs to overhead and underground secondary and primary
                        circuits which
                        he is equipped to handle. May do minor repairing on customer's
                        equipment.
                        Must be qualified to work with the public.

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      A
                        Troubleman may work alone or may have additional personnel
                        assigned to
                        assist him. Troubleman when working in a two-man unit performing
                        work as
                        outlined above may have any one (1) of the following as an
                        assistant:
                        another Troubleman, a Lineman, or an Electric Serviceman.
                        When installing
                        services the assistant may be an Apprentice Lineman assigned
                        for training
                        as provided under the apprentice training
                        program.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      When
                        working on work as outlined above in a three-man unit the
                        Troubleman may
                        be assisted by another Troubleman and one (1) Electric Serviceman
                        or by
                        two (2) Electric Servicemen.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      If
                        any other combination of three (3) or more persons is used
                        or work is
                        performed other than outlined above, the unit shall constitute
                        a crew and
                        will require a Working Foreman as part of the
                        complement.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      A
                        Troubleman shall be required by Company to reside within
                        a thirty-five
                        (35) mile radius of the Company headquarters to which they
                        regularly
                        report.

                    

            

            

            	9115  	
                    *UTILITY
                      MATERIALS SPECIALIST

                  

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified to perform, without direct supervision,
                        and
                        subordinate to the Working Foreman or Supervisor in charge,
                        duties
                        relating to the ordering, receiving, shipping, handling,
                        storing,
                        disbursing and salvaging of materials and supplies, and the
                        taking of
                        inventories. Shall be required to perform related clerical
                        duties. May be
                        required to operate equipment and/or Company vehicles within
                        the scope of
                        the foregoing duties. May be required to provide general
                        direction to any
                        classifications assigned him in performing work herein
                        defined.

                    

            

            

            
              	
                      9116

                    	
                      *UTILITY
                        MATERIALS SPECIALIST (GENERATION
                        ONLY)

                    

            

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified to perform, without direct supervision,
                        and
                        subordinate to the Working Foreman or Supervisor in charge,
                        duties
                        relating to the ordering, receiving, shipping, handling,
                        storing,
                        disbursing and salvaging of materials and supplies, and the
                        taking of
                        inventories. Shall be required to perform related clerical
                        duties. May be
                        required to operate equipment and/or Company vehicles within
                        the scope of
                        the foregoing duties. May be required to provide general
                        direction to any
                        classifications assigned him in performing work herein
                        defined.

                    

            

            

            
              	 	
                      Employee
                        shall automatically progress to the first step of Utility
                        Materials
                        Specialist I after three (3) years in this
                        classification.

                    

            

            

            8842 *UTILITY
              MATERIALS SPECIALIST I

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee with at least two (2) years of experience as a Utility
                        Materials
                        Specialist and who is qualified to perform, without direct
                        supervision,
                        and subordinate to the Working Foreman, or Supervisor in
                        charge, duties
                        relating to the ordering, receiving, shipping, handling,
                        storing,
                        disbursing and salvaging of materials and supplies, and the
                        taking of
                        inventories. Shall be required to transport supplies and
                        equipment; load
                        and unload truck, maneuver truck and operate fixed and attached
                        equipment;
                        responsible for keeping tools in good order. Will also be
                        required to
                        operate other equipment and/or Company vehicles in connection
                        with
                        foregoing duties. Will be required to perform related clerical
                        duties. May
                        be required to provide general direction to any classifications
                        assigned
                        him in performing work herein
                        defined.

                    

            

            

            GENERATION
              ONLY: An employee with at least three (3) years of experience as a
              Utility
              Materials Specialist.

            

            9118 *UTILITY
              MATERIALS SPECIALIST, TRAINEE

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee not required to have prior warehouse experience
                        and who, after
                        passing a clerical battery and physical abilities test, will
                        receive
                        formal training in order to perform the duties of Utility
                        Materials
                        Specialist. Performs work as an assistant to or under direct
                        supervision
                        on jobs for which he has been trained and instructed. The
                        employee must
                        satisfactorily complete classroom training on basic inventory
                        management,
                        on-the-job training in computer operation, equipment operation,
                        general
                        material classification and become familiar with inventory
                        management
                        policies and procedures. Will be required to perform duties
                        relating to
                        the ordering, receiving, shipping, handling, storing, disbursing
                        and
                        salvaging of materials and supplies, and the taking of inventories.
                        Shall
                        be required to perform related clerical duties. Will be automatically
                        reclassified to the title and beginning rate of Utility Materials
                        Specialist after six (6) months of satisfactory job performance
                        in the
                        trainee classification.

                    

            

            

            8655 *UTILITYMAN,
              GAS

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee with knowledge and experience of the operation and
                        maintenance of
                        gas distribution systems. This employee will be under the
                        general
                        supervision of a person in a higher classification and shall
                        be required
                        to perform duties which include the control of pressure and
                        maintenance of
                        the gas flow in the distribution system and operation and
                        maintenance of
                        the gas regulator stations. Must be able to operate, test
                        and/or calibrate
                        and perform scheduled maintenance on all equipment or instruments
                        used in
                        gas measurement and heating value of the gas. Will be required
                        to change
                        pressure and volume charts from various recorders and take
                        readings and
                        compute gas usage. May be assigned other duties as required
                        to insure the
                        safe and reliable operation of the gas system during peak
                        loads or
                        emergencies. Under supervision, will be required to perform
                        all of the
                        duties of the Gas Pressure Operator during his absence. Must
                        be able to
                        write legibly.

                    

            

            

            8420 *UTILITYMAN,
              MAINTENANCE, SENIOR

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who performs all types of skilled maintenance associated
                        with
                        building maintenance, including but not limited to, repairs
                        and upkeep of
                        mechanical equipment, electrical systems, changing filters,
                        chemical
                        treatment, plumbing, etc. He shall direct and train the work
                        of others
                        assisting him. Will be required to perform other related
                        duties as
                        necessary. Must have two (2) years' experience in working
                        with
                        mechanical/building equipment, or equivalent work experience
                        with air
                        handling system.

                    

            

            

            8888 *UTILITYMAN,
              SERVICE

            An
              employee who is qualified to perform within a six-month period and
              without
              direct supervision, electric cut-ins and make electric and gas cut-outs
              and
              single-phase meter exchanges. Must be skilled in the craft for which
              he works.
              Must be qualified as a meter reader. May be asked to perform meter-reading
              duties. Will be required to inspect and report on tampered, inverted
              and
              switched electric meters and to report broken meter seals. Must be
              thoroughly
              familiar with Company Safety Rules.

            

            7601 *UTILITYMAN,
              SUBSTATION

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who has successfully completed at least eighteen
                        (18) months of
                        the Apprentice Electrician training course or equivalent.
                        Work will
                        include but not be limited to changing substation meter charts
                        (including
                        fault recorders), record meter readings, record breaker,
                        regulator and
                        transformer operation counter, pressure and temperature,
                        general
                        inspection of substation for discrepancies and making sure
                        substation is
                        stocked with clearance tags, light bulbs and other miscellaneous
                        equipment. Employee will be required to work alone. Employee
                        will be
                        required to use simple instruments such as voltmeters and
                        ammeters to
                        check for proper voltage and current at various locations
                        within the
                        substation.

                    

            

            

            8890 *UTILITYWORKER,
              COMMUNICATIONS

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified to provide quality customer service
                        by
                        installing, troubleshooting, repairing, testing, maintaining
                        and verifying
                        port connections and equipment for all types of Company operated
                        telephone
                        systems, including digital and analog terminations, distribution,
                        cabling,
                        fiber optics, network interface systems, circuit protective
                        devices and
                        other terminating and distribution equipment as directed.
                        Is also required
                        to provide quality customer service by resolving radio frequency
                        interference complaints under the general supervision of
                        a qualified
                        employee. May be required to assist Journeyman Communications
                        Technicians
                        and perform other work as assigned.

                    

            

            

            	9585  	
                    *UTILITYWORKER,
                      UNIVERSAL

                  

            An
              employee who must have demonstrated, prior to the job award, proficiency
              in at
              least one of the required skills outlined in the requirements below
              and must
              attain and maintain the remaining skills while progressing timely through
              the
              six (6) month skill acquisition steps. Must successfully complete,
              to the
              company’s satisfaction, the required competencies at each step before the next
              wage step will be granted. Will be required to perform work as needed
              and as
              qualified. When assigned to a line crew, this position does not substitute
              for a
              journeyman lineman. Must have successfully completed the Clerical Battery
              Test
              prior to award. Requires DOT pre-employment Drug Test prior to job.
              Must obtain
              CDL license within 30 days from job award date.

            

            Must
              be
              proficient in the following areas to progress through the wage steps.
              Required
              proficiencies:

            	-  	
                    Customer
                      Services (system, collection, keyboard skills) (Minimum 2-3
                      day training
                      program as required)

                  

            	-  	
                    Warehousing
                      (inventory, lifting, work orders) (Minimum 2-3 day training
                      program as
                      required)

                  

            	-  	
                    Line
                      Crew Work (qualified ground help, equipment operation/certification,
                      appropriate driver’s licenses) (Minimum 40-hour training
                      program)

                  

            	-  	
                    Meter
                      Reading (meter reading training, hand-held device training,
                      dog bite
                      prevention training, etc. as required by
                      department)

                  

            

            7380 *WELDER,
              MECHANIC

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee who is qualified to perform, under general supervision,
                        all
                        phases of SMAW, GTAW, GMAW, brazing and gas welding. Welder
                        qualifications
                        will be demonstrated through administered test(s) required
                        by the
                        corporate R-Stamp program. Periodic demonstration of qualifications
                        will
                        be required and administered according to the R-Stamp program.
                        Must have
                        completed and passed the ICS portion of the Apprentice Plant
                        Mechanic
                        training program. He must be familiar with and perform repairs
                        of boilers,
                        turbine, generators and all auxiliaries and perform these
                        and other
                        related duties with skill and efficiency. He is required
                        to work from
                        drawings and sketches, do layout work for fabrications of
                        pipe and pipe
                        hangers, know proper procedures for stress relieving and
                        be thoroughly
                        familiar with the Company's electrical and mechanical tagging
                        and safety
                        rules and be able to render first
                        aid.

                    

            

            

            9250 *WORKER,
              BUILDING SERVICES, LEAD

            
              	 	
                      An
                        employee working with and directing other Building Services
                        Workers in
                        maintaining the building and surrounding areas, to which
                        he is assigned.
                        Must be familiar with all details of Building Services work
                        and shall
                        provide supervision and training to the Building Services
                        staff. Will be
                        required to maintain supplies and to see that Building Services
                        equipment
                        is kept in good working condition. Shall notify Supervisor
                        when repairs
                        are needed and when problems arise. Must have three (3) months’ experience
                        as a Building Services Worker before assignment to the job.
                        May be
                        required to keep time slips and records. May be required to have a valid
                        Health Department Work Permit.

                    

            

            
 

            
              
                
                

              

              
                
                

                
                  

                

              

              
                
                

              

            

            

              ATTACHMENT
                II

              

              EXHIBIT
                "B" (2)

              (as
                Amended 3/1/2007)

              

              DELETED/AMENDED/ADDED
                JOB CLASSIFICATIONS

              

              

              The
                following classifications shall be deleted and the incumbents shall
                be
                reclassified as indicated:

              

              1. 7628 Serviceman,
                Customer (District)

              becomes

              	8888  	
                      Utilityman,
                        Service

                    

              

              2. 9865 Specialist,
                Clerical

              becomes

              	9861  	
                      Representative,
                        Clerical

                    

              

              3. 7135 Technician,
                Communication, Class I

              becomes

              	7133  	
                      Technician,
                        Communications Systems

                    

              

              4. 7145 Technician,
                Communication, Class II and

              7147 Technician,
                Communication, Class III

              becomes

              	7146  	
                      Technician,
                        Communications

                    

              

              5. 8830 Utilityman,
                Maintenance

              becomes

              8709 Grounds
                Maintenanceman

              

              The
                following classifications shall be deleted:

              

              1. 6021 Foreman,
                Communications, Working

              2. 6396 Foreman,
                Hydro/Peaking, Working

              3. 9165 Meter
                Reader/Collector Trainee

              4. 8325 Operator,
                Hydro/Peaking

              5. 8850 Operator,
                Hydro/Peaking, Assistant

               

              The
                following classifications were amended:

              

              1. 7653 Apprentice,
                Telecommunications Technician

              2. 9730 Clerk,
                Remittance Processing, Senior

              3. 8944 Draftsman

              4. 8390 Draftsman,
                Senior

              5. 6022 Foreman,
                Communication Systems, Working

              6. 6820 Foreman,
                Support Services, Working

              7. 6020 Foreman,
                Utility Fleet, Working

              8. 6280 Foreman,
                Working, Heavy (Gas)

              9. 6395 Foreman,
                Working, Light (Gas)

              10. 7405 Inspector,
                Gas

              11. 8774 Operator,
                Equipment II

              12. 8771 Operator,
                Equipment II, Service

              13. 8773 Operator,
                Equipment III

              14. 8115 Operator,
                Gas Pressure

              15. 9777 Representative,
                Accounts Payable

              16. 9861 Representative,
                Clerical

              17. 9776 Representative,
                Customer Services

              18. 9735 Representative,
                Customer Services, Senior

              19. 7380 Welder/Mechanic

              

              The
                following classifications were added:

              

              1. 8625 Facilities
                Locator, Senior

              2. 7200 Inspector,
                Transmission (Traveling)

              3. 7510 Operator,
                Assistant Distribution System

              4. 7219 Operator,
                Distribution System

              5. 7222 Operator,
                Emergency Relief (Grid)

              6. 7221 Operator,
                Grid Reliability

              7. 7220 Operator,
                Transmission System

              8. 9725 Representative,
                Accounts Payable, Senior

            

             

             

            
              
                
                

              

              
                
                

                
                  

                

              

              
                
                

              

            

            

              ATTACHMENT
                III

              

              LETTERS
                OF UNDERSTANDING

              

              
                	
                      	
                           
                          1. 

                      	
                        CLERICAL
                          BIDDING NOTES (See Attachment IV, Exhibit "C" (1), Bidding
                          Notes)

                      

              

              

              	2.  	
                      SICK
                        LEAVE PAYOFF (See Title 15.9)

                    

              

                    
                3. COMMUNICATIONS
                TECHNICIAN, TELECOMMUNICATIONS

              DEPARTMENT
                (Deleted 3/5/07)

              

              	3  	
                      EQUIPMENT
                        OPERATOR EVALUATION COMMITTEE

                    

              (Deleted
                1/1/98 - Reinstated 1/1/03)

              	A.  	
                      A
                        committee, known as the Joint Equipment Operator Evaluation
                        Committee,
                        shall be established for the purpose of providing professional,
                        objective
                        evaluation of applicants or bidders who are being considered
                        for placement
                        or advancement to any position requiring operation of specialized
                        construction equipment.

                    

              	B.  	
                      The
                        committee shall be composed of two (2) qualified management
                        members
                        appointed by the Company and two (2) qualified bargaining
                        unit members
                        appointed by the Union.

                    

              	1.  	
                      One
                        (1) management representative from the Safety and Training
                        Department.

                    

              	2.  	
                      One
                        (1) management leader from the department into which the
                        applicant will be
                        placed.

                    

              	3.  	
                      Two
                        (2) Equipment Operator III’s or above from the department into which
                        applicant will be placed; member must have a minimum of five
                        (5) years’
                        experience in the specific type of equipment which evaluation
                        is to be
                        conducted.

                    

              	 
                      4.	
                      Departments
                        will develop a list of qualified people who shall serve on
                        the committee
                        and will be selected on an “as available” basis at the time evaluation is
                        needed.

                    

              	C.  	
                      The
                        committee will evaluate all applicants according to the requirements
                        set
                        forth by the Safety and Training Department, user department,
                        CBA and any
                        applicable laws or Department of Transportation
                        Regulations.

                    

              	D.  	
                      The
                        committee will evaluate all applicants using test forms and
                        field testing
                        procedures designed by the Safety and Training Department.
                        All evaluations
                        will either be pass or fail based on a point system and will
                        be
                        documented; all documentation will be placed in applicant
                        qualification
                        file. (Added 1/1/03)

                    

              

                     
                5. EQUIPMENT
                OPERATOR PROGRAM (Deleted 1/1/98)

              

              
                	
                      	
                          6.

                      	
                        EMERGENCY
                          RESPONSE PROGRAM (See Attachment
                          VIII)

                      

              

              

                     
                7. FAMILY
                SICK LEAVE PROGRAM (See Title 15.10)

              

                     
                8. TELEPHONE
                ALLOWANCE

              

              
                	 	
                        Employees
                          receiving the telephone allowance as of May 1, 1991 will
                          continue to
                          receive one-half (1/2) of the base rate as long as they
                          remain in a
                          classification where the Company requires them to install
                          and maintain a
                          telephone in their home.

                      

              

              

              
                	 	
                        Effective
                          May 1, 1991, no one will be added to the list of eligible
                          employees, i.e.,
                          employees bidding to classifications where the Company
                          may have previously
                          required an employee to install and maintain a telephone
                          in their home
                          will no longer be eligible for the phone
                          allowance.

                      

              

              

                      
                9. DEPARTMENTAL
                SENIORITY FOR LABORERS 

              (Deleted
                1/1/95)

              

                     10. YARD
                OPERATOR--POWER PRODUCTION

              

              
                	 	
                        All
                          incumbent employees in the Yard Operator classification
                          shall be
                          reclassified to Senior Yard Operator effective May 1,
                          1991.

                      

              

              

                     
                11. CLERICAL
                OCCUPATIONAL GROUP - CHANGING WORK HOURS (See Title 6.15)

               

                      12.
                 ACCIDENT
                PREVENTION BOARD BUSINESS REPRESENTATIVE AS MEMBER

              E-MAIL
                FOR UNION COMMUNICATIONS

              NEW
                EMPLOYEE ORIENTATION PARTICIPATION BY UNION

              (See
                Title 14.6)

              

              	13.  	
                      JOINT
                        BENEFITS COMMITTEE ESTABLISHED

                    

              OPTIONAL
                LIFE INSURANCE

              LONG-TERM
                DISABILITY BARGAINING UNIT INSURING

              PLAN

              (See
                Title 22)

              

              	14.  	
                      PART-TIME
                        EMPLOYEES TERMS AND CONDITIONS

                    

              (See
                Titles 3.5 & 22)

              

              	15.  	
                      EQUIPMENT
                        OPERATOR PROGRESSION GUIDELINES

                    

              (Added
                1/1/98)

              

              
                	 	
                        The
                          Equipment Operator I performance test will generally consist
                          of the
                          following: Monthly evaluations by the Working Foreman or
                          equivalent (a
                          form entitled “Equipment Operator Evaluation” will be used for such
                          evaluations). Additionally, the employee will be required
                          to study and
                          become knowledgeable of proper equipment safety and operating
                          techniques
                          as well as maintenance procedures for each piece of equipment
                          he operates
                          within the Equipment Operator I classification. This information
                          is
                          typically found in the equipment operator’s manual and/or in other
                          publications which deal specifically with operating
                          equipment.

                      

              

              

              
                	 	
                        Demonstration
                          of Equipment Operator II skills and Journeyman skills,
                          if applicable, will
                          generally be determined through demonstrated proficiency,
                          which will be
                          evaluated and documented on the form entitled “Equipment Operator
                          Evaluation”. These evaluation forms are to be completed at least quarterly
                          by the Working Foreman or equivalent. The Equipment Operator
                          II should
                          have these skills evaluated by at least 75% of the Working
                          Foreman in a
                          given department over the course of the progression, which
                          will help
                          ensure a representative yet thorough appraisal of the operator’s skills is
                          being achieved.

                      

              

              

              
                	 	
                        Demonstration
                          of understanding and basic proficiency in the following
                          Journeyman level
                          skills will be required in order to progress to Equipment
                          Operator
                          III:

                      

              

              

              
                	 	
                        Gas
                          Distribution Department-Polyethylene
                          pipe fusion (including certification), facility locating,
                          map and print
                          reading, use of gas tapping equipment, leak repair
                          techniques.

                      

              

              

              
                	 	
                        General
                          Construction Department-Carpentry
                          and forming techniques, reinforcing steel placement, concrete
                          finishing,
                          surveying techniques, map and print
                          reading.

                      

              

              

              	16.  	
                      WORK-AT-HOME
                        SCHEDULE FOR CSR’s (BUSINESS OFFICE)

                    

              (Added
                1/1/98)

              

              This
                letter refers to the work-at-home schedule for Customer Services
                Representative
                employees in the Business Office, Clerical Occupational Group,
                Reno.

              

              Under
                Section 6.15, the Company is proposing the following guidelines to
                provide a
                more useful and productive work environment with little impact to
                those working
                in the office. Perceived advantages that have been noted during the
                time
                employees have been working at home are; disaster recovery capabilities,
                outages, no commuting, scheduling flexibility, space in the office,
                reduced sick
                leave, and in some cases, increased call productivity. The following
                are
                stipulations that must be met in order for employees to work at
                home.

              

              
                	 	
                        1.

                      	
                        If
                          an employee falls under conditions set by the "Family & Medical Leave
                          Act", the employee will be able to work at
                          home.

                      

              

              
                	 	
                        2.
                          

                      	
                        An
                          office environment must be kept in the home during such
                          time to promote an
                          environment free from noise and outside
                          distractions.

                      

              

              
                	 	
                        3.
                          

                      	
                        The
                          Customer Service Representative must be available to come
                          into the office
                          for safety meetings, staff meetings, or any other additional
                          training that
                          might be required.

                      

              

              
                	 	
                        4.
                          

                      	
                        The
                          productivity of the Customer Service Representative must
                          remain consistent
                          or better with what has been observed in the office. All
                          monitoring and
                          call statistics will continue to ensure quality customer
                          service and
                          expected performance standards.

                      

              

              
                	 	
                        5.
                          

                      	
                        The
                          office may request at any time for the Customer Service
                          Representative to
                          return to the office to work on a permanent basis with
                          advance written
                          notice and give reasonable verbal notice for temporary
                          return for
                          equipment malfunction, technical problems, or the
                          like.

                      

              

              
                	 	
                        6.
                          

                      	
                        If
                          the Customer Service Representative chooses to use his/her
                          own personal
                          computer (not supplied by Sierra Pacific Power Company),
                          Company will not
                          be responsible for any damage to or malfunction of the
                          computer. Company
                          will maintain all equipment owned by Sierra Pacific Power
                          Company.

                      

              

              
                	 	
                        7.
                          

                      	
                        The
                          employee will be required to work at least one (1) day
                          a week in the
                          office.

                      

              

              
                	 	
                        8.
                          

                      	
                        The
                          employee will provide a "date of return" to the supervisor
                          based on the
                          length of absence.

                      

              

              
                	 	
                        9.
                          

                      	
                        The
                          employee will sign a document stating agreement of the
                          above with a listed
                          date of return.

                      

              

              

                     17. GENERATION
                WORK SCHEDULES

              

              Exhibit
                A Nine (9) Hour Work Schedule (Added 1/1/03)

              This
                section will define and outline 9-hour work schedules. (Also see
                Title
                6.2a)

              

              The
                9/80
                work schedule will be considered the employees “regular” work hours as it
                applies in all sections of the Collective Bargaining Agreement (CBA),
                unless
                otherwise stated herein

              

              1. Work
                Schedule:

               

              	a)  	
                      Change
                        to a bi-weekly work schedule consisting of eight (8) days
                        at nine (9)
                        hours per day and one (1) day at eight (8) hours per day.
                        Workweek
                        schedule will begin at 1000 (10am) on Friday and end at 0959
                        (9:59am) the
                        following Friday.

                    

              

              	b)  	
                      On
                        the scheduled eight (8) hour workday, all of the provisions
                        of the CBA
                        apply.

                    

              

              	c)  	
                      Lunch
                        will be scheduled from 1100 to 1130. Provisions of Section
                        6.4 will
                        apply.

                    

              

              2. Expenses:

              

              Overtime
                Meals

              Overtime
                meal practices will occur in accordance with Sections 17.2, 17.3,
                and 17.4 of
                the CBA. I.e. if an employee’s regular work hours are extended, a meal will be
                earned 1 hour after the end of the workday on a 9-hour workday.

              

              3. Overtime:

              

              For
                the
                purpose of the 9/80 work schedule, Title 10, section 10.1(a)(2) of
                the
                Collective Bargaining Agreement, shall have “eight (8) hours” replaced by “nine
                (9) hours”.

              

              4. Rest
                Periods:

              

              
                	 	
                        a)

                      	
                        Change
                          section 10.6(a)1. To read, “If he has worked six and one-half (6.5) hours
                          or more at overtime rates...”

                      

              

               

              
                	 	
                        b)

                      	
                        Change
                          Section 10.6(a)2. To read, “If he worked a minimum of two (2) hours at
                          overtime rates and such work extends beyond eight (8) hours
                          after his
                          regular quitting time...”

                      

              

              

              5. Holidays:

              

              It
                is
                agreed that there will be no increase to holiday hours available.
                When a Company
                holiday falls on an employee’s regularly scheduled work day, the employee will
                be given the day off and will be compensated for eight (8) hours
                of
                straight-time holiday pay for a regularly scheduled nine (9) hour
                work day. The
                extra one (1) hour can be charged to either Vacation, Floating holiday,
                or time
                off without pay.

              

              Floating
                Holidays

              

              Compensation
                for Floating Holidays can be taken in nine-hour (9) increments, but
                cannot
                exceed 24 hours total annually.

              

              Exhibit
                B Ten (10) Hour Work Schedule (Added 1/1/03)

              This
                section will outline and define the 10-hour workday agreement between
                the union
                and the company. Any sections of the Collective Bargaining Agreement
                that is not
                specifically mentioned in this section remain in force and unaltered
                with regard
                to this work group. (Also see Title 6.2a)

              

              1. Work
                Schedule:

              

              The
                work
                week will be comprised of four (4) 10 hour days during the hours
                of 0600 through
                1700 with a half hour unpaid lunch. The flexibility in hours will
                account for
                the different start and end times as required for the different headquarters
                and
                or locations. The 10-hour day with lunch will be considered the groups
“regular
                work day” as it applies in all sections of the Collective Bargaining Agreement
                unless stated otherwise herein. The company and the union agree that
                present
                work week start and end times as applicable with the 168 hour work
                week
                according to the different plant needs will be accepted.

              

              2. Expenses:

              

              Meals:
                Lunch
                will be from five (5) to five and one half (5.5) hours after the
                start time.
                Provisions of Section 6.4 will apply.

              

              Overtime
                Meals:
                If the
                company requires an employee to perform work for one-half hour or
                more beyond
                his regular work hours, then the company will provide him with a
                meal
                approximately one-half hour after regular quitting time. Except as
                noted above
                in “lunch”, normal meal practices will apply in all other
                situations.

              

              3. Overtime:

              

              For
                the
                purpose of the 10-hour shift work in this section, Title 10, section
                10.1(a)(2)
                of the collective bargaining agreement, shall have “eight (8) hours replaced by
“ten (10) hours. Overtime will be paid for all time worked in excess
                of ten (10)
                hours per day and 40 hours per week. As defined in the workweek.

              

              4. Rest
                Periods:

              

              The
                Collective Bargaining Agreement will apply as written with the following
                additions;

              Apply
                the
                following to section 10.6 (a) 1 “If he has worked six (6) hours or more at
                overtime rates...”

              Apply
                the
                following to section10.6 (a) 2 “If he has worked a minimum of two (2) hours at
                overtime rates and such work extends beyond eight (8) hours after
                his regular
                quitting time...”.

              

              5. Holidays:

              

              Holiday
                hours available to this group will not be increased beyond the present
                Collective Bargaining Agreement. The extra 2 hours may be charged
                to either
                vacation or floating holiday or at the employees choice “off without
                pay”.

              

              Floating
                Holidays

              

              Compensation
                for floating holidays can be taken in 10-hour increments, but cannot
                exceed 24
                hours total annually.

              

              Exhibit
                C Twelve (12) Hour Work Schedule (Added 1/1/03)

              This
                section will outline and define the 12-hour workday agreement between
                the union
                and the company. Any sections of the Collective Bargaining Agreement
                that is not
                specifically mentioned in this section remain in force and unaltered
                with regard
                to this work group. (Also see Title 6.2a)

              

              1. Work
                Schedule:

              

              All
                12-hour shifts shall be considered equivalent to a 3-shift, 24-hour
                schedule as
                defined by this collective bargaining agreement. The Company and
                the Union will
                remain flexible to certain situations regarding employee needs and
                company needs
                as they arise through out the life of this agreement. 

              

              Shift
                Premiums

              

              The
                shift
                premiums will be paid according to respective hours actually worked
                as first
                shift 0800 to 1600 no premium, second shift 1600 to 2400 2nd
                shift
                premium, third shift 2400 to 0800 3rd
                shift
                premium.

              

              Grievances

              

              Any
                grievances that may arise concerning the 12 hour shifts at the different
                stations shall be referred to the respective plants Union and Company
                in-house
                grievance committee’s that will consist of 2 bargaining unit employees as
                selected by the union representative, and 2 company representatives
                as selected
                by the company.

              If
                there
                is no satisfactory resolution from the respective committees then
                the grievance
                will be directed to regular channels as outlined under Title 21 of
                the
                Collective Bargaining Agreement.

              

              2. Expenses:

               

              If
                the
                company requires an employee to perform work for more than (1) hour
                beyond
                regular work hours it shall provide him with a meal, and it shall
                provide him
                with a meal approximately four (4) hours but not more than five (5)
                hours as
                long as he continues to work, insofar as it is possible for the company
                to do
                so. Time necessary to consume meals provided shall be considered
                as time worked.
                An appropriate mealtime will be paid for meals provided in this
                section.

              

              If
                an
                employee is called out to work on a regularly scheduled non-work
                day with less
                than 2 hours notice prior to the designated reporting time, he shall
                be given
                two (2) meals and one (1) mealtime. If an employee is called out
                to work with
                more than two (2) hours’ notice on a regularly scheduled non-work day he shall
                receive one meal time and one meal.

              

              3. Overtime:

              

              For
                the
                purpose of the 12-hour shift work in this section, Title 10, section
                10.1(a)(2)
                of the collective bargaining agreement, shall have “eight (8) hours” replaced by
“twelve (12) hours”.

              

              4. Rest
                Period:

              

              If
                the
                company requires an employee to perform work for more than 2 hours
                prior to or 2
                hours after regular work hours on a regularly scheduled work day
                or on an
                overtime day, he shall then be entitled to a nine and one half (9.5)
                hour rest
                period.

              

              5. Holidays:

              

              	a)  	
                      96
                        hours of scheduled holiday hours, which include floaters,
                        will be credited
                        to each employee at the beginning of the first payroll period
                        of each
                        respective year in lieu of holiday pay granted in the Collective
                        Bargaining Agreement, Title 11, sections 11.3, 11.4, 11.5,
                        and
                        11.6.

                    

              	b)  	
                      An
                        employee during his first calendar year of employment shall
                        be entitled to
                        holiday hours in accordance with the
                        following:

                    

              
                	 	
                        i)

                      	
                        If
                          an employee is hired between the first day of the pay period
                          for a given
                          year and June 30th
                          of
                          that same year, then that employee shall receive 24 floating
                          holiday hours
                          plus 8 hours for each of the recognized holidays remaining
                          for the payroll
                          year.

                      

              

              	ii)  	
                      If
                        an employee is hired after June 30th
                        and before the end of the

                    

              payroll
                year then that employee shall receive 12 floating holiday hours and
                8 hours for
                each recognized holiday remaining for the payroll year.

              	c)  	
                      Scheduled
                        holiday hours may be used to take time off from work in conjunction
                        with
                        vacation or as independent days off at the discretion of
                        the company,
                        subject to Title 12.14(c). (Amended
                        3/1/07)

                    

              	d)  	
                      All
                        scheduled holiday hours may be exchanged for regular pay
                        at any time
                        during the payroll calendar year. Shift employees will receive
                        payment at
                        straight time for all unused holiday time at the end of the
                        payroll
                        year.

                    

              	e)  	
                      24
                        of the 96 scheduled holiday hours will be considered floating
                        holiday
                        hours. Compensation for floating holiday pay may be taken
                        in 12-hour
                        increments, but cannot exceed 24 hours
                        annually.

                    

              	f)  	
                      The
                        24-hour period between 2300 of the day before the recognized
                        holiday and
                        2300 hours of the day of the recognized holiday shall be
                        considered the
                        holiday period or day.

                    

              	g)  	
                      Recognized
                        holidays remain as defined in the current Collective Bargaining
                        Agreement.

                    

              	h)  	
                      All
                        overtime actually worked on any of the recognized holidays
                        will be paid at
                        the applicable overtime rates.

                    

              	i)  	
                      Whenever
                        an employee observes a holiday as a day off he may use 12
                        scheduled
                        holiday hours. If he has no scheduled holiday hours remaining
                        he may use
                        12 hours of vacation or at his option receive no compensation
                        for the time
                        off.

                    

              	j)  	
                      Nothing
                        herein contained shall be construed to increase or decrease
                        the total
                        number of hours of total holiday pay earned under the current
                        Collective
                        Bargaining Agreement.

                    

              

              6. Training:

              

              For
                purposes of company required training that extends 4 or more days,
                the language
                of the Collective Bargaining Agreement section 6.9 will apply to
                the 12-hour
                work group.

              

              
                	
                      	
                          
                          18.

                      	
                        DEPARTMENT
                          OF TRANSPORTATION HOURS OF SERVICE

                      

              

              
                	 	
                        (Added
                          1/1/03)

                      

              

              

              
                	 	
                        Company
                          and Union agree that “Department of Transportation Hours of Service
                          Regulations” may have affect on company operations. Company and Union
                          further agree that implementation of procedures surrounding
                          this issue
                          shall not affect negotiated wages, benefits, or conditions
                          of employment
                          as outlined in the CBA or any documented agreement between
                          the parties.
                          Company and Union further agree to meet and confer to develop
                          this
                          procedure.

                      

              

              

              
                	 	
                        The
                          Company agrees to hold harmless and indemnify in any civil
                          action any
                          employee who, as a result of a Company directive, exceeds
                          the Hours of
                          Service Regulations (49 CRF, Part 395) issued by the Federal
                          Motor Carrier
                          Safety Administration, Department of Transportation. (Added
                          3/1/07)

                      

              

              

              	 19.  	
                      NEUTRALITY
                        AGREEMENT (Added 11/02/98 per Letter of
                        Agreement)

                    

              (See
                next
                four pages)

               

              

                  20.
                  HIRING HALL AGREEMENT
                  (Added 3/5/07)

                

                The
                  Company and IBEW Local 1245 recognize a need to utilize temporary
                  employees to
                  meet the interests of both parties. 

                

                Requests
                  for temporary employment

                

                When
                  the
                  Company determines it has a need for temporary Hiring Hall employees,
                  the
                  Company will request Local 1245 to refer applicants pursuant to
                  this agreement.
                  Requests shall be submitted in writing. Because of the special
                  skills and
                  abilities required for this work, the Company may request applicants
                  by
                  name.

                

                Former
                  Sierra Pacific employees who are ineligible to work at Sierra Pacific
                  and other
                  individuals deemed ineligible to work at Sierra Pacific shall be
                  precluded from
                  dispatch by the Union.

                

                Classifications,
                  Qualifications and Pay Rates

                

                The
                  hourly wages for a hiring hall Customer Service Representative,
                  Clerical
                  Representative, and Meter Reader are attached and are applicable
                  for the life of
                  this agreement. The company has the right to hire employees at
                  other than
                  entry-level wages.

                

                In
                  addition, the Company will pay a benefit substitute, which may
                  be used, for
                  purchase of any health care insurance offered to regular employees
                  (pre-tax) or
                  added to wage, dependent upon employee choice. The benefit substitute
                  shall be
                  $4.00 an hour for 2007, indexed to 82% of the cost of the current
                  HMO premium
                  for employee and spouse in 2008 and 2009. 

                

                Hiring
                  Hall employees will be eligible for STIP payment in a percentage
                  equal to that
                  paid active employees represented by Local 1245. This will be calculated
                  using
                  actual regular/straight time hours worked in the measured period.

                

                After
                  one
                  year of continuous employment, a temporary Hiring Hall employee
                  will be subject
                  to the holiday provisions set forth in Title 11 of the collective
                  bargaining
                  agreement.

                

                After
                  one
                  year of continuous employment, a temporary Hiring Hall employee
                  may take up to
                  two weeks of unpaid leave in a calendar year, longer if operational
                  needs as
                  determined by the Company permit.

                

                Candidate
                  Rejection/Referral fee

                

                The
                  Company may reject an applicant for any reason; however, a fee
                  of eight (8)
                  hours pay will be paid if the individual accepts an assignment
                  and is rejected
                  prior to reporting to work.

                

                Hiring
                  Hall Employment Conditions

                

                	1.  	
                        Employees
                          are subject to being released from work at the sole discretion
                          of the
                          Company.

                      

                

                	2.  	
                        Employees
                          shall not attain regular status or any regular status entitlements
                          unless
                          otherwise agreed to by the parties.

                      

                

                	3.  	
                        Employees
                          shall not be eligible for contractual fringe benefits except
                          as
                          specifically set forth herein.

                      

                

                	4.  	
                        If
                          subsequently hired by the Company into a regular position,
                          an employee
                          will be considered a new hire for all purposes unless otherwise
                          agreed to
                          in writing by the parties. The company will waive the contractual
                          probationary period and waiting period for eligibility
                          for benefits for
                          any temporary Hiring Hall employee who is converted to
                          regular employee
                          status.

                      

                

                	5.  	
                        An
                          employee must notify the Company directly to be considered
                          for regular
                          employment.

                      

                

                	6.  	
                        Employees
                          may not be downgraded or upgraded in pay as a temporary
                          Hiring Hall
                          employee.

                      

                

                Duration
                  of temporary employment

                

                Utilization
                  of a temporary Hiring Hall employee in accordance with this agreement
                  shall not
                  exceed three years.

                

                If,
                  due
                  to lack of work, the Company chooses to lay off, reduce staffing
                  levels, and it
                  has hiring hall employees performing the same type of work normally
                  performed by
                  bargaining unit employees, the Company will release the hiring
                  hall employees
                  prior to regular employees.

                

                The
                  Company retains discretion as to who will perform and how it will
                  staff the
                  customer service and meter reading functions, including the use
                  and hiring of
                  hiring hall Customer Service Representatives, Clerical Representatives,
                  and
                  Meter Readers.

                

                The
                  number of hiring hall employees in all “Clerical Department” classifications
                  will not exceed 40% of the aggregate number of employees in the
“Inside Clerical
                  Occupation Group” classifications.

                

                The
                  number of hiring hall Meter Readers will not exceed 40% of the
                  aggregate number
                  of all meter readers.

                

                All
                  employees will be included in the overtime agreements for the assigned
                  departments.

                

                The
                  Company will not initiate any new automated meter reading program
                  other than
                  pilot programs of limited scope and duration to test technology
                  prior to
                  December 31, 2009. 

                

                Current
                  PEPS Meter Readers will be converted to regular employee status
                  upon
                  ratification of this agreement.

                

                The
                  Company may use temporary Hiring Hall employees for any job within
                  the Clerical
                  Inside Occupational Group. During the life of this contract, the
                  Company will
                  not transfer any work normally performed by employees in the Clerical
                  Inside
                  Occupational Group to Nevada Power if the Company has used temporary
                  Hiring Hall
                  employees to perform that function. Further, the Company may transfer
                  peak work
                  to Nevada Power based on operational needs.

              

              
                 

                 

                
                  
                    
                    

                  

                  
                    
                    

                    
                      

                    

                  

                  
                    
                    

                  

                

                 

                

                  ATTACHMENT
                    IV

                  

                  EXHIBIT
                    "C" (1)

                  (As
                    Amended January 1, 2003)

                  

                  LINES
                    OF PROGRESSION FOR BIDDING AND DEMOTIONAL

                  PURPOSES
                    BY OCCUPATIONAL GROUPS

                  

                  DEFINITION
                    OF OCCUPATIONAL GROUPS

                  

                  Occupational
                    Groups shall be defined as those separate divisions of the applicable
                    Company
                    "Departments" shown above. In those "Departments" where there
                    is no such
                    division, the entire "Department" shall be considered as an Occupational
                    Group.

                  

                  "A"
                    Bid -
                    Same classification or higher than job posted using group seniority.
                    (Amended
                    1/1/95)

                  

                  "B"
                    Bid -
                    Next lower classifications in group seniority. Classifications
                    shown on chart
                    above at the reverse end of arrows shall be considered next lower
                    to those to
                    which the arrow points. (Amended 1/1/95)

                  

                  "C"
                    Bid -
                    Same classification in any other group using Company seniority.

                  

                  "D"
                    - Any
                    classification in same group as job being posted using group
                    seniority.

                  

                  "E"
                    - Any
                    classification in any group using Company seniority.

                   

                  

                  

                  Lines
                    of Progression (see FOLD-OUT)

                

                 

                
                  
                    
                    

                  

                  
                    
                    

                    
                      

                    

                  

                  
                    
                    

                  

                

                

                  BIDDING
                    NOTES

                  

                  
                    	
                            1.

                          	
                               (Deleted
                              1/1/95)

                          

                  

                   

                  2.
                      (Deleted
                    1/1/98)

                  

                  3.  
                    (Deleted
                    1/1/95)

                  

                  
                    	
                            4.

                          	
                              
                              Classifications labeled (4) shall be considered as
                              Lineman for bidding
                              purposes.

                          

                  

                  

                  4a. 
                    Any
                    bids
                    to Troubleman Electric shall be awarded by group seniority.

                  (Added
                    1/1/98)

                  

                  
                    	
                            5.

                          	
                              
                              (Deleted 1/1/95)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            6.

                          	
                              
                              (Deleted 1/1/95)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            7.

                          	
                              
                              (Deleted 1/1/95)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	8.	
                             

                          	
                            Serviceman,
                              Equipment
                              bidding to Plant Mechanic Apprentice shall not suffer
                              a wage reduction if
                              he has been in that classification for six (6) months
                              or more. His wages
                              will be red-circled until such time as his step rate
                              in his new
                              classification exceeds his red-circled wage rate. (Added
                              5/1/86)

                          

                  

                  Service
                    Utility Operators
                    and
Scrubber
                    Utility Operators
                    cross-bidding to either position may use the total amount of
                    time in both
                    positions to establish themselves in the appropriate wage step
                    but in no event
                    higher than the 24-month step. Once the employee has established
                    himself in the
                    new position he will be moved to the upgradeable wage step once
                    all the
                    upgradeable requirements have been met. (Added 6/1/99 by Letter
                    of
                    Agreement)

                  

                  
                    	
                            9.

                          	
                            (Deleted
                              3/1/07)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            10.

                          	
                            (Deleted
                              3/1/07)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            11.

                          	
                            (Deleted
                              3/1/07)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            12.

                          	
                            Classifications
                              labeled (12) need not be posted and are considered
                              non-bid
                              jobs.

                          

                  

                  

                  13. (Deleted
                    5/1/81)

                  

                  14. (Deleted
                    5/1/68)

                  

                  15. (Deleted
                    5/1/68)

                  

                  
                    	
                            16.

                          	
                             
                              Awards to these jobs shall require successful completion
                              of screening
                              examination.

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            17.

                          	
                             
                              (Deleted 1/1/95)

                          

                  

                  

                  18.
                     (Deleted
                    5/1/71)

                  

                  19.
                     (Deleted
                    5/1/71)

                  

                  20. 
                    (Deleted
                    5/1/74)

                  

                  
                    	
                            21.

                          	
                            Classifications
                              labeled (21) shall be considered as "B" bids to Working
                              Foreman subject to
                              the time limits provided in the Working Foreman job
                              description. A
                              Storekeeper who is awarded a Reno Utility Materials
                              Specialist vacancy
                              shall assume the vacancy of his present Storekeeper
                              rate of pay. Said wage
                              rate shall remain in effect until (1) such time as
                              it may be surpassed by
                              the wage schedule of the Utility Materials Specialist
                              classification as
                              the result of continuous time spent in the Utility
                              Materials Specialist
                              classification or (2) until such time as it may be
                              surpassed by the wage
                              schedule of Utility Materials Specialist classification
                              through the normal
                              process of collective bargaining between Company and
                              Union. A Utility
                              Materials Specialist who is awarded a Storekeeper vacancy
                              shall assume the
                              vacancy at the wage step of the Storekeeper wage schedule
                              which is next
                              higher to the Utility Materials Specialist's present
                              rate of pay. (Amended
                              5/1/76)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            22.

                          	
                            (Deleted
                              1/1/95)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            23.

                          	
                            The
                              successful bidder must meet the respirator fit-test
                              requirements as
                              outlined by OSHA before the job award can be made.
                              This will require the
                              employee to be clean shaven for the test. (Added
                              5/1/88)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            24.

                          	
                            If
                              a Clerical Representative in the Mail Room has progressed
                              through the wage
                              steps of that classification and is awarded a Mail
                              Inserter Operator
                              vacancy, he will start at the six-month wage step.
                              (Amended
                              3/1/07)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            25.

                          	
                            (Deleted
                              1/1/95)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            26.

                          	
                            Clarifier
                              Operator bidding to Apprentice Lab Technician shall
                              not suffer a wage
                              reduction if he has been in that classification for
                              twenty-four (24)
                              months or more. His wage will be red-circled until
                              such time as his step
                              rate in his new classification exceeds his red-circled
                              wage rate. (Added
                              1/1/95)

                          

                  

                  

                  27.
                      (Deleted
                    1/1/95)

                  

                  
                    	
                            28

                          	
                            Sr.
                              Control Technician will be red-circled when going to
                              a Substation
                              Technician. (Effective 4/11/94; Added
                              1/1/98)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            29.

                          	
                            Sr.
                              Control Technician will be a “D” bidder to Control Working Foreman and
                              Substation Technician to Control Working Foreman will
                              be a “B” bidder.
                              (Effective 4/11/94; Added 1/1/98)

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	
                            30.

                          	
                            Clerical
                              Bidding Notes

                          

                  

                  

                  
                    	 	
                            A.

                          	
                            Generally
                              speaking, Clerical employees will be hired at the minimum
                              of the range. In
                              exceptional cases, experience elsewhere will be counted
                              in determining the
                              starting rate. In no case will experience elsewhere
                              be given more weight
                              in determining the starting rate than if it had been
                              with the
                              Company.

                          

                  

                  
                    	 	
                            B.

                          	
                            When
                              a Clerical employee is in a wage progression and is
                              promoted from one (1)
                              job classification to another, his rate of pay shall
                              be the starting rate
                              for new classification or his present rate, whichever
                              is higher. In the
                              case of an employee who bids laterally to a job classification
                              with the
                              same wage progression, or an employee who bids downward
                              to a job
                              classification with a lower wage progression, his rate
                              of pay shall be the
                              starting rate for such classification, except that
                              allowance shall be made
                              by the Company for previous experience in the new classification.
                              When a
                              Clerical employee bids from one (1) Department, District
                              or Sub-District
                              to another in the same classification, his rate of
                              pay shall remain the
                              same.

                          

                  

                  C. (Deleted
                    5/1/91)

                  
                    	 	
                            D.

                          	
                            Employees
                              in the Clerical Occupational Group job classifications
                              listed below, who
                              were hired prior to the 1986 contract ratification
                              date, will be
                              red-circled in their current wage progression (at the
                              wage rate in effect
                              May 1, 1986) and will continue to receive general wage
                              increases based on
                              that wage progression.

                          

                  

                  Clerical
                    Representative

                  Clerical
                    Specialist

                  Meter
                    Reader-Collector

                  Customer
                    Services Representative

                  
                    	 	 	
                            When
                              an employee whose wage progression is red-circled becomes
                              eligible to
                              receive their final step increase under the red-circled
                              wage progression,
                              they will receive the top wage step of the red-circled
                              wage progression or
                              top wage step of the current book rate, whichever is
                              higher. (Added
                              5/1/86)

                          

                  

                  E.
                     (Deleted
                    1/1/95)

                  

                  31. (Deleted
                    3/5/07)

                  

                  	32.  	
                          Any
                            full-time, regular General Foreman, Working shall be
                            treated under the CBA
                            as if he were above the top position in his Line of Progression
                            and
                            Occupational Group. The General Foreman, Working shall
                            be paid at a rate
                            ten percent (10%) above the highest wage rate in his
                            Line of Progression
                            and Occupational Group. (Added 1/1/03)

                        

                  

                  	33.  	
                          (Deleted
                            3/1/07)

                        

                  

                  	34.  	
                          Storekeeper/Buyer/Planner
                            (Ft. Churchill) shall be treated exactly as Storekeeper
                            for bidding,
                            layoff and demotion purposes. (Added
                            1/1/03)

                        

                  

                  	35.  	
                          When
                            an Electrician and/or a Substation Inspector are awarded
                            a Control
                            Technician position, they will be paid at the six (6)
                            month wage rate.
                            (LOA 1/29/03)

                        

                  

                  	36.  	
                          When
                            bidding as a Clerical Representative, all group seniority
                            in Clerical
                            Inside, Support Services and the deleted Reprographics
                            and Distribution
                            occupational groups will be applied. A Clerical Representative
                            may use
                            this combined occupational group seniority in any group
                            where a Clerical
                            Representative exists. (Added 3/1/07)

                        

                  

                  	37.  	
                          Intent
                            of this bid is:

                        

                  9162
                    is
“B” bidder to 9745, 8888 and 6813

                  9745
                    is
“B” bidder to 6813 and 8888

                  9745
                    is
“A” bidder to 9162

                  8888
                    and
                    6183 are “A” bidders to 9745 and 9162

                  

                  "E"
                    BIDDERS

                  Clerk

                  Clerk,
                    Field

                  Coordinator,
                    Fleet Repair License

                  Driver,
                    Truck

                  Driver,
                    Truck, Heavy

                  Garageman

                  Helper

                  Janitor
                    (Power Prod)

                  Laborer

                  Messenger,
                    Outside

                  Repairman,
                    Tool

                  Utilityworker,
                    Universal

                  Worker,
                    Building, Services, Lead

                  (Amended
                    1/1/03)

                

                 

              

              
                
                  
                  

                

                
                  
                  

                  
                    

                  

                

                
                  
                  

                

              

              

                INSERT
                  M/D/V PLAN COMPARISON HERE

              

               

               

              
                
                  
                  

                

                
                  
                  

                  
                    

                  

                

                
                  
                  

                

              

              

                ATTACHMENT
                  VI

                OUT-OF-TOWN
                  WORK ASSIGNMENT GUIDELINES

                (Added
                  January 1, 1995)

                

                
                  	 	
                          A.

                        	
                          PURPOSE

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          Due
                            to growth and operational changes which have occurred
                            in our service area
                            over the last few years, it has become more common to
                            send employees away
                            from their permanent work location to work in other areas.
                            In most cases
                            these temporary assignments are beneficial to both the
                            Company and its
                            employees. As the number of out-of-town assignments increases,
                            however, so
                            does the potential for disruption of family life and
                            personal
                            inconvenience of our employees.

                        

                

                B. NOTIFICATION
                  OF WORK ASSIGNMENT

                
                  	 	 	
                          As
                            soon as a Supervisor learns that some of his employees
                            will be needed on
                            an out-of-town project or job he should make his employees
                            aware of the
                            following factors:

                        

                

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          1.

                        	
                          Number
                            of employees required in each classification from his
                            work location for
                            the job or project.

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          2.

                        	
                          Scope
                            of work of the job or project (build new line, general
                            maintenance, plant
                            overhaul, etc.).

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          3.

                        	
                          Starting
                            date and expected duration.

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          4.

                        	
                          Job
                            location and reporting place.

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          5.

                        	
                          Expected
                            working hours (overtime, if
                            expected).\

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          6.

                        	
                          Any
                            other information available and of interest to employees,
                            e.g., is there a
                            special project agreement with the Union for the
                            job?

                        

                

                

                
                  	 	
                          Keep
                            in mind that employees appreciate being kept informed
                            and effective,
                            timely communications improve morale. THE SUPERVISOR
                            SHOULD GIVE EMPLOYEES
                            ASSIGNED OUT-OT-TOWN WORK AS MUCH ADVANCE NOTICE AS
                            POSSIBLE.

                        

                

                

                C. MANNING
                  OUT-OF-TOWN WORK ASSIGNMENTS

                

                1. VOLUNTARY:

                
                  	 	
                           

                        

                

                a. If
                  possible, the Supervisor should attempt to use volunteers in each
                  job
                  classification, with the skill level required.

                b. If
                  there
                  are more volunteers than are required for the job assignment then
                  employees
                  should be selected on the basis of 1) qualifications, 2) accumulated
                  overtime,
                  3) accumulated number of nights out-of-town, 4) Occupational Group
                  Seniority
                  from top to bottom, 5) operational needs.

                c. Unless
                  otherwise agreed to, volunteers will be expected to work through
                  the entire
                  project from start to finish. Supervisors should discuss this issue
                  with
                  employees at the earliest possible date.

                

                2. NON-VOLUNTARY:

                

                a. If
                  volunteers are not available to fill the manpower requirements
                  of a project,
                  assignments will be made on a non-voluntary basis. Employees will
                  be selected on
                  the basis of 1) qualifications, 2) accumulated overtime, 3) accumulated
                  number
                  of nights out-of-town, 4) Occupational Group Seniority from bottom
                  to top, 5)
                  operational needs.

                b. On
                  the
                  next mandatory job assignment, the next employees on the Out-of-Town
                  Assignment
                  List should be selected. By assigning employees in this order,
                  all employees
                  will share equally in performance of out-of-town assignments.

                c. If
                  an
                  employee volunteers for an out-of-town assignment, he should be
                  considered as
                  doing so on his own accord, and will still be required to take
                  his turn at
                  non-voluntary assignments based on Section C (2)(a).

                d. If
                  an
                  employee is unable to work his out-of-town assignment when selected
                  due to
                  illness, personal hardship, or any other reason of a temporary
                  nature, he shall
                  be replaced on the list as the first to go when his problems are
                  resolved.

                e. Any
                  new
                  employee reporting to a work location will be placed on the Headquarters'
                  Out-of-Town Assignment List and will be assigned out-of-town work
                  when his turn
                  arrives based on Section C (2)(a).

                f. Employees
                  should be kept informed where they stand on the Out-of-Town Assignment
                  List, as
                  this will give them additional time to plan in advance for out-of-town
                  assignments.

                

                D. PERSONAL
                  HARDSHIP

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          1.

                        	
                          When
                            an employee feels that an out-of-town assignment will
                            create a personal
                            hardship he should explain all the facts to his Supervisor.
                            The Supervisor
                            should listen to the employee, evaluate the situation
                            and make a decision
                            whether to send the employee on a non-voluntary basis
                            or not. These
                            decisions will have to be made on a case-by-case basis,
                            relying on the
                            information supplied by the employee as well as other
                            facts which may be
                            known to the Supervisor.

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          2.

                        	
                          If
                            a non-voluntary job assignment lasts more than eight (8)
                            weeks the
                            Supervisor should consider rotating personnel to complete
                            that job
                            assignment. (If for example, the Supervisor knows that
                            an out-of-town work
                            assignment will last for ten (10) weeks, he might consider
                            sending two (2)
                            different groups for five (5) weeks
                            each.)

                        

                

                

                E. OTHER
                  CONSIDERATIONS

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          1.

                        	
                          Continuity
                            - Is it better to have the same group of employees do
                            the full job rather
                            than changing in the middle of the
                            project?

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          2.

                        	
                          Project
                            Length - Eight (8) weeks is not necessarily the ideal
                            maximum assignment
                            for some projects. Some might be shorter, depending on
                            the travel
                            required, working conditions, equalization of overtime,
                            etc.

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          3.

                        	
                          Job
                            Location - If the assigned job locations are so far away
                            that employees
                            cannot return home on weekends, consideration should
                            be given to making
                            shorter assignments and rotating
                            employees.

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          4.

                        	
                          Productivity
                            - Employees away from home on an involuntary basis for
                            long periods of
                            time may become less productive. Harmony and efficiency
                            in the operation
                            should be considered by
                            Supervisors.

                        

                

                
                  	 	
                          5.
                            

                        	
                          Skills
                            Required - Certain employees with special skills may
                            be required at
                            certain projects for the duration of the project, or
                            they may be required
                            to remain at their home location regardless, of the provisions
                            of these
                            guidelines. This will depend on job
                            requirements.

                        

                

                6.
                   Reporting
                  Place - When board and lodging are provided by the Company, the
                  reporting place
                  will be the Company designated lodging of the local
                  headquarters.

              

               

               

              
                
                  
                  

                

                
                  
                  

                  
                    

                  

                

                
                  
                  

                

              

              

                ATTACHMENT
                  VII

                JOB
                  SITE REPORTING

                (Added
                  1/1/98 - Cancelled by the Union on 10/24/02)

              

               

               

              
                
                  
                  

                

                
                  
                  

                  
                    

                  

                

                
                  
                  

                

              

              

                ATTACHMENT
                  VIII

                EMERGENCY
                  RESPONSE PROGRAM

                

                
                  	 	
                          Consistent
                            with the provisions and obligations of Section 2.1, Title
                            2 of the
                            Collective Bargaining Agreement between Sierra Pacific
                            Power Company and
                            Local Union No. 1245 of the International Brotherhood
                            of Electrical
                            Workers, the parties hereby agree to the
                            following:

                        

                

                

                
                  	 	
                          The
                            Company and Union recognize there may arise situations
                            in various
                            departments of the Company where availability of some
                            key classifications
                            becomes imperative in the rendering of service to the
                            customer and for the
                            safe, effective operation of facilities. To assure availability
                            of these
                            key people, the Company and Union mutually agree to the
                            following
                            conditions that will apply to both parties for Positive
                            Emergency
                            Response.

                        

                

                

                A. Conditions
                  Applicable to Company

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          1.

                        	
                          The
                            Company will provide an appropriate radio-equipped vehicle
                            to the
                            following job classifications for commute
                            purposes:

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	 	
                          Customer
                            Serviceman

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	 	
                          Gas
                            Inspector

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	 	
                          Gas
                            Pressure Operator

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	 	
                          General
                            Foreman

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	 	
                          Leak
                            Surveyor

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	 	
                          Troubleman

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	 	
                          Other
                            employees may be provided a radio-equipped vehicle at
                            the discretion of
                            the Company. (Amended 3/1/07)

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          2.

                        	
                          The
                            Company will provide a pager or hand-held radio/telephone
                            to improve the
                            employee's mobility and
                            communication.

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          3.

                        	
                          Normal
                            work hours will prevail during employee's regular work
                            days.

                        

                

                
                  	 	
                          4.

                        	
                          Availability
                            schedule will apply from the end of employee's shift
                            on Friday until the
                            beginning of employee's shift on Monday, during holidays
                            and such other
                            times when adequate emergency coverage is not available
                            (Amended
                            1/1/98)

                        

                

                
                  	 	
                          5.
                            

                        	
                          The
                            Company shall provide an option for either (1) availability
                            premium to
                            employee of:

                        

                

                $4.36/hour,
                  effective 3/1/2007 

                $4.53/hour,
                  effective 1/1/08

                $4.71/hour,
                  effective 1/1/09

                
                  	 	 	
                          for
                            every hour employee is available for duty exclusive of
                            employee's normal
                            pay for regular scheduled hours worked. (Amended 3/1/07)
                            or (2) “time in
                            lieu” at the following rates:

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          All
                            non-holiday hours will be factored at the .127/hour accrual
                            rate.
                            Example—2-day weekend -from 1530 Friday to 0700 Monday = 63.5
                            hours X .127
                            = 8 hours. 

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          Example:
                            work week from 1530 Monday through 0700 Friday = 15.5
                            hours X 4 days = 62
                            hours X .127 = 8 hours

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          All
                            holiday hours will be factored at the .334/hour accrual
                            rate.
                            

                        

                

                Example—Christmas
                  Day—from 1530 Christmas  

                Eve
                  day
                  to 0700 the day after Christmas=15.5 hours  X
                  .127
                  hours + 24 hours X .334 = 10 hours.  (Amended
                  3/1/07)

                
                  	 	 	 	
                          Note:
                            The availability premium will be adjusted each January
                            1, beginning
                            January 1, 1996. The adjustment will be made by a percentage
                            equal to the
                            general wage increase. (Added
                            1/1/95)

                        

                

                6.
                   The
                  Company shall compensate the employee at the applicable overtime
                  rate as
                  provided in Title 10 of the Agreement for any hours worked outside
                  normally
                  scheduled hours during the availability period plus the availability
                  premium for
                  all hours available.

                7.
                   In
                  any
                  payroll year, an employee may use a maximum of 200 time-in-lieu
                  hours earned via
                  pager duty.. (Amended 3/1/07)

                8. Employees
                  may cash out all, or any portion, of their accumulated time-in-lieu
                  hours at the
                  end of any pay period. (Added 3/1/07)

                9. On
                  the
                  last paycheck of the payroll year, the Company will cash out all
                  accumulated
                  time-in-lieu hours in excess of 200 hours. (Added 3/1/07)

                

                B. Conditions
                  Applicable to Employee

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          1.

                        	
                          Employee
                            must live within the sub-district boundaries and be available
                            to receive
                            communication to qualify for emergency availability
                            scheduled.

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          2.

                        	
                          Employee
                            must be in physical condition to perform assigned duties
                            when emergency
                            situations arise.

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          3.

                        	
                          The
                            employee must respond to a page within ten (10) minutes
                            of the
                            notification and report within a reasonable time
                            thereafter.

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          4.

                        	
                          Substitutions
                            of coverage may be arranged only with the approval of
                            the Supervisor in
                            charge, and the substitute employee must be qualified
                            to perform the
                            assigned duties.

                        

                

                
                  	 	 	
                          5.

                        	
                          The
                            employee on duty will have first opportunity to fill
                            availability
                            schedule. If a substitute employee is required, accumulated
                            overtime will
                            prevail. (Amended 1/1/95)

                        

                

                

                C. (Deleted
                  1/1/95)

                

                
                  	 	
                          D.
                            

                        	
                          If,
                            in the event there is no duty employee, a departmental
                            procedure to
                            administer the Emergency Response Program must be established
                            in writing
                            and agreed to by the Company and Union. (Added
                            1/1/98)

                        

                

              

            

          

        

      

    

     

     

    
      
        
        

      

      
        
        

        
          

        

      

      
        
        

      

    

    

      ATTACHMENT
        IX

      COMPANY
        STATEMENT RE: CONTINUATION OF 

      POST
        RETIREMENT MEDICAL COVERAGE

      (Amended
        3/1/07)

      

      Letter
        of
        Agreement

      Local
        1245 VEBA Trust Funding

      

      The
        Company agrees to fund the VEBA Trust over the next eight years beginning
        January 1, 2007 up to an amount that the PUCN has allowed in its most recent
        General Rate Case unless to do so would cause the Company to violate debt
        covenants, or create an unfavorable tax consequence.

      

      1.
        Confirm that under the proposal, SPR will fund 100% of the January 1, 2015
        Accumulated Projected Benefit Obligation (APBO) by January 1,
        2015.

      This
        is
        confirmed.

      

      2.
        Confirm that under the proposal, annual funding will at a minimum, be determined
        on a relatively level basis over 8 years. 

      This
        is
        confirmed.

      

      3.
        Our actuary has estimated that level annual funding of the VEBA may be in
        the
        range of $10-$15 million each year. Is this consistent with SPR’s expectations
        of the required annual funding level? 

      The
        retiree medical program is currently the subject of negotiations. The program
        that is in effect at the close of the negotiations will determine the level
        of
        annual funding that is required for the VEBA. 

      

      4.
        SPR has proposed to limit Local 1245 VEBA funding “up to an amount that the PUCN
        has allowed in its most recent General Rate case.” (a) Fully describe this
        restriction.

      Sierra
        requests recovery of post retirement medical expenses in its biennial general
        rate case filings. As described in the question, SPR would limit its annual
        cash
        funding to the Local 1245 VEBA trust to an amount equal to or less than the
        VEBA
        expense component in Sierra’s most recent general rate case. The limiting amount
        would change each time a new rate case has been concluded.

      

      Sierra’s
        general rate cases include the expense amount provided by the most current
        annual actuarial study. For example, Sierra’s 2005 GRC included the VEBA expense
        as determined by an actuarial study performed in late 2004, which specified
        expenses to be recognized in 2005. Pursuant to the described procedures and
        because the results of the 2005 GRC were known in May 2006, the cash funding
        for
        years 2006 and 2007 would be based on an actuarial study that quantified
        expenses for 2005. 

      

      (b)
        Under this restriction at the present time, what is the maximum annual amount
        SPR could fund the Local 1245 VEBA?

      Sierra’s
        2005 Nevada GRC included $5.1 million in VEBA expense.

      

      (c)
        If required VEBA contributions are in the $10-$15 million range, would this
        restriction limit the annual VEBA contribution? 

      Yes.
        If
        we cap our obligation at a specific number (such as $5.1 million) then we
        cannot
        contribute funds the VEBA trust beyond that amount. The exception to this
        are
“catch up” contributions which we carry as a liability in our accounting
        systems. 

      

      (d)
        Is it expected that this restriction will limit full funding of the VEBA
        in any
        year prior to 2015? 

      No,
        because the Company has committed to catch up funding over and above the
        amount
        allowed in the GRC. 

      

      5.
        SPR has proposed to limit Local 1245 VEBA funding so as not to “cause the
        company to violate debt covenants.” (a) Fully describe this
        restriction.

      As
        disclosed on page 61 of the Sierra Pacific Resources 2005 Form 10-k filed
        with
        the Securities and Exchange Commission, “Each of NPC’s $500 million Second
        Amended and Restated Revolving Credit Agreement and SPC’s $250 million Amended
        and Restated Revolving Credit Agreement, dated November 4, 2005, contains
        two
        financial maintenance covenants. The first requires that the Utility maintain
        a
        ratio of consolidated indebtedness to consolidated capital, determined as
        of the
        last day of each fiscal quarter, not to exceed 0.68 to 1. The second requires
        that the Utility maintain a ratio of consolidated cash flow to consolidated
        interest expense, determined as of the last day of each fiscal quarter for
        the
        period of four consecutive fiscal quarters, not to be lass than 2.0 to 1.
        As of
        December 31, 2005, both companies were in compliance with these covenants.
        

      

      In
        addition, with respect to SPR, as disclosed on page 62, “The terms of SPR’s $335
        million 8 5/8% Senior Unsecured Notes due2014, its $99.1 million 7.803% Senior
        Notes due 2012, and its 6.75% Senior Notes due 2017 restrict SPR and any
        of it’s
        Restricted Subsidiaries (NPC and SPPC) from incurring any additional
        indebtedness unless:

      	1.  	
              at
                the time the debt is incurred, the ratio of consolidated cash flow
                to
                fixed charges for SPR’s most recently ended four quarter period on a pro
                forma basis is at least 2 to 1 or

            

      	2.  	
              the
                debt incurred is specifically permitted under the terms of the applicable
                series of notes, which permit the incurrence of certain credit facility
                or
                letter of credit indebtedness, obligations incurred to finance property
                construction or improvement, indebtedness incurred to refinance existing
                indebtedness, certain intercompany indebtedness, hedging obligations,
                indebtedness incurred to support bid, performance or surety bonds,
                and
                certain letters of credit supporting SPR’s or any Restricted Subsidiary’s
                obligations to energy suppliers, or 

            

      	3.  	
              the
                indebtedness is incurred to finance capital expenditures pursuant
                to NPC’s
                2003 Integrated Resource Plan and SPPC’s 2004 Integrated Resource
                plan.

            

      If
        the
        applicable series of notes are upgraded to investment grade by both Moody’s and
        S&P, these restrictions will be suspended and will be no longer in effect so
        long as the applicable series of notes remain investment grade.”

      Based
        on
        SPR’s March 31, 2006 financial statements, assuming an interest rate of 6%,
        SPR’s indebtedness restrictions would allow SPR and utilities to issue up to
        approximately $262 million of additional indebtedness in the aggregate, unless
        the indebtedness being issued is specifically permitted under the terms of
        SPR’s
        indebtedness.

      

      (b)
        Under this restriction at the present time, what is the maximum annual amount
        SPR could fund the Local 1245 VEBA?

      Based
        upon the March 31, 2006 additional indebtedness limitation of $262 million,
        SPR
        would be capable of currently funding the annual VEBA contribution in the
        $10 to
        $15 million range as indicated in clause (c)

      (c)
        If required VEBA contributions are in the $10-$15 million range, would this
        restriction limit the annual VEBA contribution?
        Please
        refer to the response to clause (a).

      

      6.
        SPR has proposed to limit Local 1245 VEBA funding so as not to “accelerate a
        pending insolvency.” (a) fully describe this restriction. (b) Is there any
        pending insolvency or any indication that an insolvency may occur before
        January
        1, 2015?
        Based on
        the proposed annual funding amounts and the company’s current financial status,
        there are no insolvencies anticipated. Therefore the Company is willing to
        withdraw this restriction. (c)
        How can the agreement be strengthened to provide accelerated funding in advance
        of a pending insolvency? Our
        legal
        group advises us that we cannot accelerate funding to the VEBA in advance
        of any
        pending insolvency.

      

      7.
        SPR has proposed to limit Local 1245 VEBA funding so as not to “create an
        unfavorable tax consequence.” (a) fully describe this
        restriction.
        Under a
        collectively bargained VEBA, the over funding of said VEBA is essentially
        the
        only unfavorable tax consequence. Contributions to VEBA’s are fully deductible,
        however, contributions in excess of the amount required to fully fund a
        collectively bargained VEBA are not tax deductible. (b)
        Under this restriction at the present time, what is the maximum amount SPR
        could
        fund the Local 1245 VEBA?
        The
        maximum amount that could be funded cannot exceed the current unfunded APBO
        of
        the VEBA. (c)
        If required VEBA contributions are in the $10-$15 million range, would this
        restriction limit the annual VEBA contribution?
        No.

      

      Is
        it expected that this restriction will limit full funding of the VEBA in
        any
        year prior to 2015?
        No.

      

      

      IBEW
        LOCAL UNION 1245

      

      By:
        ____________________________________

      

      SIERRA
        PACIFIC POWER COMPANY

      

      By:
        ____________________________________

      

      Date:
        __________________________________INDENTURE OF THE DEPOSITORTY TRUST FOR 3.00% CONVERTIBLE SENIOR NOTES DUE MAY1,
      2027

    

      

       

      
        

        

      

      

       

       

      LINEAR
        TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION,

       

      AS
        ISSUER

       

      AND

       

      U.S.
        BANK
        NATIONAL ASSOCIATION,

       

      AS
        TRUSTEE

       

             3.00%
        CONVERTIBLE SENIOR NOTES DUE MAY 1, 2027

       

      INDENTURE

       

      DATED
        AS
        OF APRIL 24, 2007

       

      

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

          Exhibit
            4.1

        

      

      

      
        	
                 TABLE
                  OF CONTENTS

              	 
	
                ____________________________________

              	 
	 	 
	 	
                PAGE

              
	
                ARTICLE
                  1

              	 
	
                DEFINITIONS
                  AND INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

              	 
	 	 
	
                Section
                  1.01 

              	
                Definitions

              	
                1

              
	
                Section
                  1.02 

              	
                Trust
                  Indenture Act Provisions

              	
                8

              
	
                Section
                  1.03 

              	
                Rules
                  of Construction

              	
                9

              
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  2

              	 
	
                THE
                  SECURITIES

              	 
	 	 	 
	
                Section
                  2.01 

              	
                Form
                  and Dating

              	
                9

              
	
                Section
                  2.02 

              	
                Execution
                  and Authentication

              	
                11

              
	
                Section
                  2.03 

              	
                Registrar,
                  Paying Agent and Conversion Agent

              	
                11

              
	
                Section
                  2.04 

              	
                Paying
                  Agent to Hold Money and Securities in Trust

              	
                12

              
	
                Section
                  2.05 

              	
                Securityholder
                  Lists

              	
                12

              
	
                Section
                  2.06 

              	
                Transfer
                  and Exchange

              	
                12

              
	
                Section
                  2.07 

              	
                Replacement
                  Securities

              	
                13

              
	
                Section
                  2.08 

              	
                Outstanding
                  Securities

              	
                14

              
	
                Section
                  2.09 

              	
                Treasury
                  Securities

              	
                15

              
	
                Section
                  2.10 

              	
                Temporary
                  Securities

              	
                15

              
	
                Section
                  2.11 

              	
                Cancellation

              	
                15

              
	
                Section
                  2.12 

              	
                Legend;
                  Additional Transfer and Exchange Requirements

              	
                15

              
	
                Section
                  2.13 

              	
                CUSIP
                  Numbers

              	
                21

              
	
                Section
                  2.14 

              	
                Persons
                  Deemed Owners

              	
                21

              
	
                Section
                  2.15 

              	
                Defaulted
                  Interest

              	
                21

              
	
                Section
                  2.16 

              	
                Contingent
                  Debt Tax Treatment

              	
                22

              
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  3

              	 
	
                [RESERVED]

              	 
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  4

              	 
	
                [RESERVED]

              	 
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  5

              	 
	
                REDEMPTION
                  AND REPURCHASES

              	 
	 	 	 
	
                Section
                  5.01 

              	
                Company’s
                  Right to Redeem; Notices to Trustee

              	
                22

              
	
                Section
                  5.02 

              	
                Selection
                  of Securities to Be Redeemed

              	
                23

              
	
                Section
                  5.03 

              	
                Notice
                  of Redemption

              	
                23

              
	
                Section
                  5.04 

              	
                Effect
                  of Notice of Redemption

              	
                24

              
	
                Section
                  5.05 

              	
                Deposit
                  of Redemption Price

              	
                24

              
	
                Section
                  5.06 

              	
                Securities
                  Redeemed in Part

              	
                24

              
	
                Section
                  5.07 

              	
                Repurchase
                  of Securities by the Company at Option of the Holder

              	
                25

              
	
                Section
                  5.08 

              	
                Purchase
                  of Securities at Option of the Holder upon a Fundamental
                  Change

              	
                27

              
	
                Section
                  5.09 

              	
                Effect
                  of Repurchase Notice or Fundamental Change Purchase
                  Notice

              	
                31

              
	
                Section
                  5.10 

              	
                Deposit
                  of Repurchase Price or Fundamental Change Purchase
                  Price

              	
                32

              
	
                Section
                  5.11 

              	
                Securities
                  Purchased in Part

              	
                32

              
	
                Section
                  5.12 

              	
                Repayment
                  to the Company

              	
                32

              
	
                Section
                  5.13 

              	
                Compliance
                  with Securities Laws upon Purchase of Securities

              	
                32

              
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  6

              	 
	
                [RESERVED]

              	 
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  7

              	 
	
                CONVERSION

              	 
	 	 	 
	
                Section
                  7.01 

              	
                Conversion
                  Privilege

              	
                33

              
	
                Section
                  7.02 

              	
                Conversion
                  Procedure

              	
                36

              
	
                Section
                  7.03 

              	
                Taxes
                  on Conversion

              	
                37

              
	
                Section
                  7.04 

              	
                Company
                  to Provide Stock

              	
                37

              
	
                Section
                  7.05 

              	
                Adjustment
                  of Conversion Rate

              	
                37

              
	
                Section
                  7.06 

              	
                No
                  Adjustment

              	
                44

              
	
                Section
                  7.07 

              	
                Stockholder
                  Rights Plans

              	
                45

              
	
                Section
                  7.08 

              	
                Effect
                  of Reclassification, Consolidation, Merger or Sale on Conversion
                  Privilege

              	
                45

              
	
                Section
                  7.09 

              	
                Other
                  Adjustments

              	
                46

              
	
                Section
                  7.10 

              	
                Notice
                  of Adjustment

              	
                46

              
	
                Section
                  7.11 

              	
                [Reserved]

              	
                46

              
	
                Section
                  7.12 

              	
                Trustee’s
                  Disclaimer

              	
                46

              
	
                Section
                  7.13 

              	
                Settlement
                  Upon Conversion

              	
                47

              
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  8

              	 
	
                CONTINGENT
                  INTEREST

              	 
	 	 	 
	
                Section
                  8.01 

              	
                Contingent
                  Interest

              	
                48

              
	
                Section
                  8.02 

              	
                Payment
                  of Contingent Interest

              	
                49

              
	
                Section
                  8.03 

              	
                Contingent
                  Interest Notification

              	
                49

              
	
                Section
                  8.04 

              	
                Trustee
                  Contingent Interest Disclaimer

              	
                49

              
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  9

              	 
	
                COVENANTS

              	 
	 	 	 
	
                Section
                  9.01 

              	
                Payment
                  of Securities

              	
                49

              
	
                Section
                  9.02 

              	
                Reports
                  and Certain Information

              	
                50

              
	
                Section
                  9.03 

              	
                Compliance
                  Certificates

              	
                50

              
	
                Section
                  9.04 

              	
                Maintenance
                  of Corporate Existence

              	
                50

              
	
                Section
                  9.05 

              	
                Stay,
                  Extension and Usury Laws

              	
                50

              
	
                Section
                  9.06 

              	
                Maintenance
                  of Office or Agency of the Trustee, Registrar, Paying Agent and
                  

              	
                51

              
	 	
                Conversion
                  Agent

              	 
	
                Section
                  9.07 

              	
                Notice
                  of Default

              	
                51

              
	
                Section
                  9.08 

              	
                Additional
                  Interest Notice

              	
                51

              
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  10

              	 
	
                CONSOLIDATION,
                  MERGER, CONVEYANCE, TRANSFER OR LEASE

              	 
	 	 	 
	
                Section
                  10.01 

              	
                Company
                  May Consolidate, etc., Only on Certain Terms

              	
                51

              
	
                Section
                  10.02 

              	
                Successor
                  Substituted

              	
                52

              
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  11

              	 
	
                DEFAULT
                  AND REMEDIES

              	 
	 	 	 
	
                Section
                  11.01 

              	
                Events
                  of Default

              	
                52

              
	
                Section
                  11.02 

              	
                Acceleration

              	
                53

              
	
                Section
                  11.03 

              	
                Other
                  Remedies

              	
                54

              
	
                Section
                  11.04 

              	
                Waiver
                  of Defaults and Events of Default

              	
                54

              
	
                Section
                  11.05 

              	
                Control
                  by Majority

              	
                54

              
	
                Section
                  11.06 

              	
                Limitations
                  on Suits

              	
                54

              
	
                Section
                  11.07 

              	
                Rights
                  of Holders to Receive

              	
                55

              
	 	
                Payment
                  and to Convert

              	 
	
                Section
                  11.08 

              	
                Collection
                  Suit by Trustee

              	
                55

              
	
                Section
                  11.09 

              	
                Trustee
                  May File Proofs of Claim

              	
                55

              
	
                Section
                  11.10 

              	
                Priorities

              	
                56

              
	
                Section
                  11.11 

              	
                Undertaking
                  for Costs

              	
                56

              
	
                Section
                  11.12 

              	
                Delay
                  or Omission Not Waiver

              	
                56

              
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  12

              	 
	
                TRUSTEE

              	 
	 	 	 
	
                Section
                  12.01 

              	
                Certain
                  Duties and Responsibilities of Trustee

              	
                56

              
	
                Section
                  12.02 

              	
                Certain
                  Rights of Trustee

              	
                57

              
	
                Section
                  12.03 

              	
                Trustee
                  Not Responsible for Recitals or Issuance of
                  Securities

              	
                59

              
	
                Section
                  12.04 

              	
                May
                  Hold Securities

              	
                59

              
	
                Section
                  12.05 

              	
                Moneys
                  Held in Trust

              	
                59

              
	
                Section
                  12.06 

              	
                Compensation
                  and Reimbursement

              	
                59

              
	
                Section
                  12.07 

              	
                Reliance
                  on Officers’ Certificate

              	
                60

              
	
                Section
                  12.08 

              	
                Disqualification:
                  Conflicting Interests

              	
                60

              
	
                Section
                  12.09 

              	
                Corporate
                  Trustee Required; Eligibility

              	
                60

              
	
                Section
                  12.10 

              	
                Resignation
                  and Removal; Appointment of Successor

              	
                61

              
	
                Section
                  12.11 

              	
                Acceptance
                  of Appointment By Successor

              	
                62

              
	
                Section
                  12.12 

              	
                Merger,
                  Conversion, Consolidation or Succession to Business

              	
                62

              
	
                Section
                  12.13 

              	
                Preferential
                  Collection of Claims Against the Company

              	
                63

              
	
                Section
                  12.14 

              	
                Notice
                  of Defaults

              	
                63

              
	
                Section
                  12.15 

              	
                Reports
                  by Trustee

              	
                63

              
	
                Section
                  12.16 

              	
                Preferential
                  Collection of Claims

              	
                63

              
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  13

              	 
	
                AMENDMENTS,
                  SUPPLEMENTS AND WAIVERS

              	 
	 	 	 
	
                Section
                  13.01 

              	
                Without
                  Consent of Holders

              	
                63

              
	
                Section
                  13.02 

              	
                With
                  Consent of Holders

              	
                64

              
	
                Section
                  13.03 

              	
                Compliance
                  with Trust Indenture Act

              	
                65

              
	
                Section
                  13.04 

              	
                Revocation
                  and Effect of Consents

              	
                65

              
	
                Section
                  13.05 

              	
                Notation
                  on or Exchange of Securities

              	
                66

              
	
                Section
                  13.06 

              	
                Trustee
                  to Sign Amendments, Etc

              	
                66

              
	
                Section
                  13.07 

              	
                Effect
                  of Supplemental Indentures

              	
                66

              
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  14

              	 
	
                [RESERVED]

              	 
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  15

              	 
	
                SATISFACTION
                  AND DISCHARGE

              	 
	 	 	 
	
                Section
                  15.01 

              	
                Satisfaction
                  and Discharge of the Indenture

              	
                66

              
	
                Section
                  15.02 

              	
                Repayment
                  to the Company

              	
                67

              
	 	 
	
                ARTICLE
                  16

              	 
	
                MISCELLANEOUS

              	 
	 	 	 
	
                Section
                  16.01 

              	
                Trust
                  Indenture Act Controls

              	
                67

              
	
                Section
                  16.02 

              	
                Notices

              	
                67

              
	
                Section
                  16.03 

              	
                Communications
                  by Holders with Other Holders

              	
                68

              
	
                Section
                  16.04 

              	
                Certificate
                  and Opinion as to Conditions Precedent

              	
                68

              
	
                Section
                  16.05 

              	
                Record
                  Date for Vote or

              	
                69

              
	 	
                Consent
                  of Securityholders

              	 
	
                Section
                  16.06 

              	
                Rules
                  by Trustee, Paying Agent, Registrar and Conversion
                  Agent

              	
                69

              
	
                Section
                  16.07 

              	
                Legal
                  Holidays

              	
                69

              
	
                Section
                  16.08 

              	
                Governing
                  Law; Jury Trial Waiver

              	
                69

              
	
                Section
                  16.09 

              	
                No
                  Adverse Interpretation of Other Agreements

              	
                69

              
	
                Section
                  16.10 

              	
                No
                  Recourse Against Others

              	
                69

              
	
                Section
                  16.11 

              	
                Successors

              	
                70

              
	
                Section
                  16.12 

              	
                Multiple
                  Counterparts

              	
                70

              
	
                Section
                  16.13 

              	
                Separability

              	
                70

              
	
                Section
                  16.14 

              	
                Calculations
                  in Respect of the Securities

              	
                70

              
	
                Section
                  16.15 

              	
                Table
                  of Contents, Headings, Etc

              	
                70

              
	 	 	 
	
                Exhibit
                  A

              	
                Form
                  of Note:

              	 
	 	
                -
                  Assignment Form

              	 
	 	
                -
                  Form of Conversion Notice

              	 
	 	
                -
                  Form of Notice of Redemption

              	 
	 	
                -
                  Form of Notice of Repurchase

              	 
	 	
                -
                  Form of [Repurchase][Fundamental Change Repurchase] Notice

              	 
	 	
                -
                  Form of Certificate to be Delivered upon Exchange or Registration
                  of
                  Transfer of 

              	 
	 	
                Restricted
                  Securities

              	 
	 	 	 
	
                Exhibit
                  B

              	
                Table
                  showing the Increase in Conversion Rate in connection with a Makewhole
                  

              	 
	 	
                Fundamental
                  Change

              	 

      

      

      

      

      

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

          Exhibit
            4.1

        

      

      CROSS-REFERENCE
        TABLE*

       

      
        	
                TIA
                  Indenture Section

              	
                Section

              
	
                Section
                  310(a)(1)

              	
                12.09

              
	
                (a)(2)

              	
                12.09

              
	
                (a)(3)

              	
                N.A.**

              
	
                (a)(4)

              	
                N.A.

              
	
                (a)(5)

              	
                12.09

              
	
                (b)

              	
                12.08

              
	
                (c)

              	
                N.A.

              
	
                Section
                  311(a)

              	
                12.13

              
	
                (b)

              	
                12.13

              
	
                (c)

              	
                N.A.

              
	
                Section
                  312(a)

              	
                2.05

              
	
                (b)

              	
                16.03

              
	
                (c)

              	
                16.03

              
	
                Section
                  313(a)

              	
                12.15

              
	
                (b)(1)

              	
                N.A.

              
	
                (b)(2)

              	
                12.15

              
	
                (c)

              	
                12.15;
                  16.02

              
	
                (d)

              	
                12.15

              
	
                Section
                  314(a)

              	
                9.02;
                  9.03

              
	
                (b)

              	
                N.A.

              
	
                (c)(1)

              	
                16.04(a)

              
	
                (c)(2)

              	
                16.04(a)

              
	
                (c)(3)

              	
                N.A.

              
	
                (d)

              	
                N.A.

              
	
                (e)

              	
                16.04(b)

              
	
                (f)

              	
                N.A.

              
	
                Section
                  315(a)

              	
                12.01(a);
                  12.01(b)(i)

              
	
                (b)

              	
                12.14;
                  16.02

              
	
                (c)

              	
                12.01(a)

              
	
                (d)

              	
                12.01(b)

              
	
                (e)

              	
                11.11

              
	
                Section
                  316(a) (last sentence)

              	
                2.09

              
	
                (a)(1)(A)

              	
                11.05

              
	
                (a)(1)(B)

              	
                11.05

              
	
                (a)(2)

              	
                N.A.

              
	
                (b)

              	
                11.07

              
	
                (c)

              	
                16.05

              
	
                Section
                  317(a)(1)

              	
                11.08

              
	
                (a)(2)

              	
                11.09

              
	
                (b)

              	
                2.04

              
	
                Section
                  318(a)

              	
                16.01

              

      

      _________________________

       

      * Cross-Reference
        Table shall not, for any purpose, be deemed a part of this
        Indenture.

      ** N.A.
        means Not Applicable.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

          Exhibit
            4.1

        

      

      THIS
        INDENTURE, dated as of April 24, 2007, is between LINEAR TECHNOLOGY
        CORPORATION, a Delaware corporation (the “Company”),
        and
        U.S. BANK NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, a national banking association, as trustee
        (in
        such capacity and not in its individual capacity, the “Trustee”).

       

      In
        consideration of the premises and the purchase of the Securities by the Holders
        thereof, the parties hereto agree as follows for the equal and ratable benefit
        of the Holders of the Securities.

       

      ARTICLE
        1  

       

      Definitions
        And Incorporation By Reference

       

      Section
        1.01   Definitions.

       

      “Additional
        Interest”
has
        the
        meaning set forth in Section 7 of the Registration Rights Agreement. Unless
        the
        context otherwise requires, all references herein or in the Securities to
        “interest” accrued or payable as of any date shall include, without duplication,
        any Additional Interest accrued or payable as of such date as provided in
        the
        Registration Rights Agreement and any Contingent Interest payable as described
        in Section 8.

       

      “Additional
        Interest Notice”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 9.08.

       

      “Additional
        Securities”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 2.02(d).

       

      “Additional
        Shares”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.01(c).

       

      “Affiliate”
of
        any
        specified Person means any other Person directly or indirectly controlling
        or
        controlled by or under direct or indirect common control with such specified
        Person. For purposes of this definition, “control” (including, with correlative
        meanings, the terms “controlling,” “controlled by” and “under common control
        with”), as used with respect to any Person, shall mean the possession, directly
        or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management
        or policies of such Person, whether through the ownership of voting securities,
        by agreement or otherwise.

       

      “Agent”
means
        any Registrar, Paying Agent, Bid Solicitation Agent or Conversion
        Agent.

       

      “Agent
        Members”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 2.01(d).

       

      “Applicable
        Procedures”
means,
        with respect to any transfer or exchange of beneficial ownership interests
        in a
        Global Security, the rules and procedures of the Depositary, in each case
        to the
        extent applicable to such transfer or exchange.

       

      “Bankruptcy
        Law”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 11.01.

       

      “beneficial
        owner”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.08(a).

       

      “Bid
        Solicitation Agent”
means
        the agent of the Company appointed to obtain quotations for the Securities,
        which agent shall be appointed no later than the first Contingent Interest
        Period and shall at no time be an Affiliate of the Company. The Company hereby
        initially appoints the Trustee as Bid Solicitation Agent in connection with
        the
        Securities. The Company may from time to time change the Bid Solicitation
        Agent.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          1

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      “Board
        of Directors”
means
        the board of directors of the Company or, except as used in the definition
        of
        Fundamental Change and except where the context otherwise requires, any duly
        authorized committee of such board of directors.

       

      “Business
        Day”
means,
        with respect to any Security, any day, other than a Saturday or Sunday, that
        is
        neither a legal holiday nor a day on which commercial banks are authorized
        or
        obligated by law, regulation or executive order to close in The City of New
        York.

       

      “capital
        stock”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.08(a).

       

      “Cash”
means
        such coin or currency of the United States as at any time of payment is legal
        tender for the payment of public and private debts.

       

      “Cash
        Percentage”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.13(e).

       

      “Close
        of Business”
means
        5:00 p.m. New York City time.

       

      “Certificated
        Security”
means
        a
        Security that is in substantially the form attached hereto as Exhibit A and
        that
        does not include the information or the schedule called for by footnotes
        1 and 5
        thereof.

       

      “Closing
        Price”
means
        the reported last sale price per share of the Common Stock on any Trading
        Day
        (or if no last sale price is reported, the average of the bid and ask prices
        per
        share or, if there is more than one bid or ask price, the average of the
        average
        bid and the average ask prices per share) on such Trading Day as reported
        by the
        Nasdaq Global Select Market or, if the Common Stock is not listed or quoted
        on
        the Nasdaq Global Select Market, as reported by the principal national or
        regional securities exchange on which the Common Stock is listed, or, if
        the
        Common Stock is not listed on a national or regional securities exchange,
        as
        available in any over-the-counter market or, if not available on any
        over-the-counter market, the Closing Price shall be such price as the Board
        of
        Directors of the Company shall determine in good faith.

       

      “Common
        Stock”
means,
        subject to Section 7.08, shares of common stock of the Company, par value
        $0.001
        per share, at the date of this Indenture or shares of any class or classes
        resulting from any reclassification or reclassifications thereof and that
        have
        no preference in respect of dividends or of amounts payable in the event
        of any
        voluntary or involuntary liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Company
        and that are not subject to redemption by the Company; provided
        that if
        at any time there shall be more than one such resulting class, the shares
        of
        each such class then so issuable shall be substantially in the proportion
        which
        the total number of shares of such class resulting from all such
        reclassifications bears to the total number of shares of all such classes
        resulting from all such reclassifications.

       

      “Company”
means
        the party named as such in the first paragraph of this Indenture until a
        successor replaces it pursuant to the applicable provisions of this Indenture,
        and thereafter “Company” shall mean such successor Company.

       

      “Company
        Notice”
means
        a
        notice to Holders delivered pursuant to Section 5.07 or 5.08.

       

      “Company
        Order”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 2.02(d).

       

      “contingent
        debt regulations”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 2.16.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          2

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      “Contingent
        Interest”
means
        such interest payable as described in Article 8. Unless the context
        otherwise requires, all references herein or in the Securities to “interest”
accrued or payable as of any date shall include, without duplication, any
        Contingent Interest payable as described in Section 8 and any Additional
        Interest accrued or payable as of such date as provided in the Registration
        Rights Agreement.

       

      “Contingent
        Interest Period”
means
        (i) the six-month period commencing on and including May 1, 2014, and
        ending on, but excluding October 31, 2014, and (ii) each six-month
        period from May 1 to October 31 and from November 1 to April 30
        thereafter.

       

      “continuing
        director”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.08(a).

       

      “Conversion
        Agent”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 2.03.

       

      “Conversion
        Date”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.02(a).

       

      “Conversion
        Notice”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.02(a).

       

      “Conversion
        Price”
means,
        at any time, an amount equal to $1,000 divided by the Conversion Rate in
        effect
        at such time, rounded to the nearest cent.

       

      “Conversion
        Rate”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.01(a).

       

      “Conversion
        Reference Period”
means
        (a) for Securities that are converted during the 30 day period prior to the
        Maturity Date or a Redemption Date, as applicable, the 20 consecutive Trading
        Days beginning on the 22nd
        Trading
        Day prior to the Maturity Date or Redemption Date, as the case may be; and
        (b)
        in all other instances, the 20 consecutive Trading Days beginning on the
        third
        Trading Day following the Conversion Date.

       

      “Conversion
        Value”
means
        the Closing Price of the Common Stock on any date of determination multiplied
        by
        the Conversion Rate of the Securities in effect on such date.

       

      “Corporate
        Trust Office”
means
        the office of the Trustee at which at any time the trust created by this
        Indenture shall be principally administered, which office at the date of
        the
        execution of this Indenture is located at 633 West 5th
        Street,
        24th
        Floor,
        Los Angeles, CA 90071, Attention: Corporate Trust Services (Linear 3.00%
        Convertible Senior Notes due 2027), or such other office as the Trustee may
        designate by written notice to the Company.

       

      “Custodian”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 11.01.

       

      “Daily
        Conversion Value”
means,
        for each of the 20 consecutive Trading Days during the Conversion Reference
        Period, one-twentieth (1/20) of the product of (i) the Conversion Rate on
        such
        day and (ii) the Daily VWAP of the Common Stock on such day.

       

      “Daily
        Settlement Amount”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.13(b).

       

      “Daily
        Share Amount”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.13(b).

       

      “Daily
        VWAP”
means,
        for each of the 20 consecutive Trading Days during the Conversion Reference
        Period, the Volume-Weighted Average Price, provided that after the occurrence
        or
        effectiveness of a Fundamental Change described in clause (ii) of the definition
        thereof in which the holders of Common Stock receive only Cash, the Daily
        VWAP
        will be deemed to be the Cash price per share received by holders of Common
        Stock in such Fundamental Change.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          3

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      “Default”
means,
        when used with respect to the Securities, any event which is or, after notice
        or
        passage of time or both, would be an Event of Default.

       

      “Depositary”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 2.01(b).

       

      “Distributed
        Property”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.05(c).

       

      “Effective
        Date”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.01(c).

       

      “Event
        of Default”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 11.01.

       

      “Exchange
        Act”
means
        the United States Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the rules
        and
        regulations promulgated thereunder, as in effect from time to time.

       

      “Ex
        Date”
means
        (i) when used with respect to any dividend or distribution, the first date on
        which the Common Stock trades, regular way, on the relevant exchange or in
        the
        relevant market from which the sale price was obtained without the right
        to
        receive such dividend or distribution; and (ii) when used with respect to
        any
        tender offer or exchange offer, the first date on which the Common Stock
        trades,
        regular way, on the relevant exchange or in the relevant market from which
        the
        sale price was obtained after the expiration time.

       

      “Fundamental
        Change”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.08(a).

       

      “Fundamental
        Change Company Notice”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.08(b).

       

      “Fundamental
        Change Purchase Date”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.08(a).

       

      “Fundamental
        Change Purchase Notice”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.08(c).

       

      “Fundamental
        Change Purchase Price”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.08(a).

       

      “GAAP”
means
        generally accepted accounting principles in the United States as set forth
        in
        the opinions and pronouncements of the Accounting Principles Board of the
        American Institute of Certified Public Accountants and statements and
        pronouncements of the Financial Accounting Standards Board or in such other
        statements by such other entity as have been approved by a significant segment
        of the accounting profession in the United States, which are in effect from
        time
        to time and consistently applied.

       

      “Global
        Security”
means
        a
        permanent Global Security that is in substantially the form attached hereto
        as
        Exhibit A and that includes the information and schedule called for by footnotes
        1 and 5 thereof and which is deposited with the Depositary or its custodian
        and
        registered in the name of the Depositary or its nominee.

       

      “Holder”
or
        “Securityholder”
means
        the person in whose name a Security is registered in the Register.

       

      “Indenture”
means
        this Indenture as amended or supplemented from time to time pursuant to the
        terms of this Indenture, including the provisions of the TIA that are explicitly
        incorporated in this Indenture by reference to the TIA.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          4

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      “Initial
        Purchaser”
means
        Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC.

       

      “Initial
        Securities”
means
        the Securities issued on the date hereof in the aggregate principal amount
        of
        $1,000,000,000, and any Securities issued in replacement thereof.

       

      “Indebtedness”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 11.01(g).

       

      “Interest
        Payment Date”
has
        the
        meaning set forth in the Securities.

       

      “Interest
        Payment Record Date”
has
        the
        meaning set forth in the Securities.

       

      “Legal
        Holiday”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 16.07.

       

      “Makewhole
        Fundamental Change”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.08(a).

       

      “Market
        Disruption Event”
means
        (a) a failure by the primary exchange or quotation system on which the Common
        Stock trades or is quoted to open for trading during its regular trading
        session
        or (b) the occurrence or existence prior to 1:00 p.m. New York City time
        on any
        Trading Day for the Common Stock of an aggregate one half hour period, of
        any
        suspension or limitation imposed on trading (by reason of movements in price
        exceeding limits permitted by the stock exchange or otherwise) in the Common
        Stock or in any options, contracts or future contracts relating to the Common
        Stock.

       

      “Maturity
        Date”
means
        May 1, 2027.

       

      “Measurement
        Period”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.01(b).

       

      “Merger
        Event”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.08.

       

      “Nasdaq”
means
        the Nasdaq Global Market.

       

      “Notice
        of Default”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 11.01.

       

      “NYSE”
means
        the New York Stock Exchange.

       

      “Offering
        Circular”
means
        the Confidential Offering Circular dated April 18, 2007, relating to the
        Securities.

       

      “Officer”
means,
        with respect to any Person, the Chief Executive Officer, the Chief Operating
        Officer, the Chief Legal Officer, the Chief Financial Officer, the Treasurer,
        any Assistant Treasurer, the Controller, the Secretary, any Assistant Secretary
        or any Vice President of such Person.

       

      “Officers’ Certificate”
means
        a
        certificate signed by at least two Officers of the Company; provided,
        however,
        that
        for purposes of Section 7.08 and Section 9.03, “Officers’ Certificate” means a
        certificate signed by the principal executive officer, principal financial
        officer or principal accounting officer of the Company and at least one other
        Officer of the Company.

       

      “Opinion
        of Counsel”
means
        a
        written opinion from legal counsel containing, as applicable, the information
        specified in Section 16.04. The counsel may be an employee of or counsel
        to the
        Company who is reasonably satisfactory to the Trustee.

       

      “Paying
        Agent”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 2.03.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          5

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      “Person”
or
        “person”
means
        any individual, corporation, partnership, limited liability company, joint
        venture, association, joint-stock company, trust, statutory trust,
        unincorporated organization, government or any agency or political subdivision
        thereof.

       

      “Principal
        Amount”
of
        a
        Security means the principal amount as set forth on the face of the
        Security.

       

      “QIB”
means
        a
        qualified institutional buyer as defined in Rule 144A.

       

      “Record
        Date”
means
        (i) with respect to any payment of interest (including Contingent Interest
        or
        Additional Interest, if any) on the Securities, each April 15 and October
        15
        (whether or not a Business Day) and (ii) with respect to the events specified
        in
        Section 7.05, the meaning specified in Section 7.05.

       

      “Redemption

        Date”
means
        the date specified in a notice of redemption on which the Securities may
        be
        redeemed in accordance with the terms of the Securities and this
        Indenture.

       

      “Redemption
        Price”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.01.

       

      “Reference
        Property”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.08.

       

      “Register”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 2.03.

       

      “Registrar”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 2.03.

       

      “Registration
        Rights Agreement”
means
        the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of the date hereof, between the
        Company and the Initial Purchaser, relating to the Securities.

       

      “Repurchase
        Date”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.08(a).

       

      “Repurchase
        Notice”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.07(b).

       

      “Repurchase
        Price”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.07(a).

       

      “Restricted
        Certificated Security”
means
        a
        Certificated Security that is a Restricted Security.

       

      “Restricted
        Global Security”
means
        a
        Global Security that is a Restricted Security.

       

      “Restricted
        Legend”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 2.12(f).

       

      “Restricted
        Security”
means
        a
        Security required to bear the Restricted Legend called for by footnotes 2
        and 3
        to the form of Security set forth in Exhibit A of this Indenture.

       

      “Rule
        144”
means
        Rule 144 under the Securities Act or any successor to such rule, as it may
        be
        amended from time to time.

       

      “Rule
        144A”
means
        Rule 144A under the Securities Act or any successor to such rule, as it may
        be
        amended from time to time.

       

      “Rule
        144A Information”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 9.02(b).

       

      “SEC”
means
        the United States Securities and Exchange Commission, as from time to time
        constituted, created under the Exchange Act, or, if at any time after the
        execution of this Indenture the SEC is not existing and performing the duties
        now assigned to it under the TIA, then the body performing such duties at
        such
        time.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          6

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      “Security”
or
        “Securities”
means
        the Company’s 3.00% Convertible Senior Notes due May 1, 2027, as amended or
        supplemented from time to time pursuant to the terms of this Indenture, that
        are
        issued under this Indenture.

       

      “Securities
        Act”
means
        the United States Securities Act of 1933 and the rules and regulations
        promulgated thereunder, as in effect from time to time.

       

      “Securities
        Custodian”
means
        the Trustee, as custodian with respect to the Global Securities, or any
        successor thereto.

       

      “Settlement
        Amount”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.13(a).

       

      “Significant
        Subsidiary”
means
        any Subsidiary of the Company which has: (i) consolidated assets or in which
        the
        Company and its other Subsidiaries have investments equal to or greater than
        10%
        of the Company’s total consolidated assets; or (ii) consolidated gross revenue
        equal to or greater than 10% of the Company’s consolidated gross revenue,
        measured as of the end of the Company’s most recently completed fiscal year in
        the case of investments or consolidated assets or for the Company’s most
        recently completed fiscal year in the case of consolidated gross
        revenue.

       

      “Specified
        Repurchase Date”
has
        the
        meaning set forth in Section 5.07(a).

       

      “Spin-Off”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.05(c).

       

      “Spin-Off
        Securities”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.05(c).

       

      “Stock
        Price”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.01(c).

       

      “Subsidiary”
means,
        in respect of any Person, any corporation, association, partnership or other
        business entity of which more than 50% of the outstanding voting stock (as
        defined in Section 5.08) or other interests (including partnership interests)
        entitled (without regard to the occurrence of any contingency) to vote in
        the
        election of directors, managers, general partners or trustees thereof, or
        persons performing similar functions, is at the time owned or controlled,
        directly or indirectly, by (i) such Person; (ii) such Person and one or more
        Subsidiaries of such Person; or (iii) one or more Subsidiaries of such
        Person.

       

      “TIA”
means
        the United States Trust Indenture Act of 1939, as amended, and the rules
        and
        regulations thereunder as in effect on the date of this Indenture; provided,
        however,
        that in
        the event the Trust Indenture Act of 1939 is amended after such date, then
“TIA”
means, to the extent required by such amendment, the Trust Indenture Act
        of 1939
        as so amended.

       

      “Trading
        Day”
means
        a
        day during which (i) trading in the Common Stock generally occurs and (ii)
        there
        is no Market Disruption Event.

       

      “Trading
        Price”
means,
        on any date of determination, the average of the secondary market bid quotations
        obtained by the Bid Solicitation Agent for $5,000,000 aggregate principal
        amount
        of the Securities at approximately 3:30 p.m., New York City time, on such
        determination date from three independent nationally recognized securities
        dealers that the Company selects; provided,
        that if
        (i) at least three such bids cannot reasonably be obtained by the Bid
        Solicitation Agent, but two such bids are obtained, then the average of these
        two bids shall be used and (ii) only one such bid can reasonably be obtained
        by
        the Bid Solicitation Agent, this one bid shall be used;
        provided,
        further
        that, if
        no bids are received or, in the Company’s reasonable judgment, the bid
        quotations are not indicative of the secondary market value of the Securities,
        then (x) for purposes of any determination of whether Contingent Interest
        is
        payable or of the amount of any Contingent Interest, the Trading Price of
        the
        Securities as of the determination date shall equal (1) the applicable
        Conversion Rate of the Securities as of the determination date multiplied
        by (2)
        the average Closing Price of the Common Stock on the five Trading Days ending
        on
        the determination date, and (y) for purposes of any determination of whether
        the
        condition in Section 7.01(b)(ii) is satisfied, the Trading Price per $1,000
        principal amount of the Securities shall be deemed to be less than 98% of
        the
        product of the Closing Price and the Conversion Rate and, for the sole purpose
        of calculating any average Trading Price, shall be deemed to be equal to
        97.999%
        of the Conversion Value.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          7

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      “Trigger
        Event”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 7.05(c).

       

      “Trust
        Officer”
means,
        with respect to the Trustee, any officer within the Corporate Trust Services
        department (or any successor department) of the Trustee located at the Corporate
        Trust Office of the Trustee, who shall have direct responsibility for the
        administration of this Indenture, and also means, with respect to any particular
        corporate trust matter, any other officer of the Trustee to whom such corporate
        trust matter is referred because of such officer’s knowledge of and familiarity
        with the particular subject.

       

      “Trustee”
means
        U.S. Bank National Association, not in its individual capacity, but solely
        in
        its capacity as trustee hereunder, until a successor replaces it pursuant
        to the
        applicable provisions of this Indenture and, thereafter, shall mean such
        successor Trustee.

       

      “Unrestricted
        Certificated Security”
means
        a
        Certificated Security that is not a Restricted Security.

       

      “Unrestricted
        Global Security”
means
        a
        Global Security that is not a Restricted Security.

       

      “Vice
        President”
when
        used with respect to the Company or the Trustee, means any vice president,
        whether or not designated by a number or a word or words added before or
        after
        the title “vice president.”

       

      “Volume-Weighted
        Average Price,”
on
        any
        Trading Day, means the per share volume-weighted average price as displayed
        under the heading “Bloomberg VWAP” on Bloomberg page LLTC <EQUITY>VAP (or
        its equivalent successor if such page is not available) in respect of the
        period
        from 9:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., New York City time, on such Trading Day (or
        if such
        volume-weighted average price is unavailable, the market value of one share
        of
        the Common Stock on such Trading Day determined, using a volume-weighted
        average
        method, by a nationally recognized independent investment banking firm retained
        for this purpose by the Company. The volume-weighted average price shall
        be
        rounded to the nearest whole cent.

       

      “voting
        stock”
has
        the
        meaning specified in Section 5.08(a).

       

      Section
        1.02   Trust
        Indenture Act Provisions.

       

      Whenever
        this Indenture refers to a provision of the TIA, that provision is incorporated
        by reference in and made a part of this Indenture. The Indenture shall also
        include those provisions of the TIA required to be included herein by the
        provisions of the TIA. The following TIA terms used in this Indenture have
        the
        following meanings:

       

      “Commission”
means
        the SEC;

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          8

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      “Indenture
        Securities”
means
        the Securities;

       

      “Indenture
        Security Holder”
means
        a
        Securityholder;

       

      “Indenture
        to be qualified”
means
        this Indenture;

       

      “Indenture
        Trustee”
or
        “institutional trustee” means the Trustee; and

       

      “Obligor”
on
        the
        indenture securities means the Company and any successor obligor on the
        Securities.

       

      All
        other
        terms used in this Indenture that are defined in the TIA, defined by TIA
        reference to another statute or defined by any SEC rule and not otherwise
        defined herein have the meanings assigned to them therein.

       

      Section
        1.03   Rules
        of Construction.

       

      Unless
        the context otherwise requires:

       

      (a)  a
        term
        has the meaning assigned to it herein;

       

      (b)  an
        accounting term not otherwise defined has the meaning assigned to it in
        accordance with GAAP;

       

      (c)  words
        in
        the singular include the plural, and words in the plural include the
        singular;

       

      (d)  provisions
        apply to successive events and transactions;

       

      (e)  the
        term
“merger” includes a statutory share exchange and the term “merged” has a
        correlative meaning;

       

      (f)  the
        masculine gender includes the feminine and the neuter;

       

      (g)  references
        to agreements and other instruments include subsequent amendments
        thereto;

       

      (h)  references
        to “interest” include Contingent Interest and Additional Interest;

       

      (i)  “herein,”
        “hereof,” “hereunder,” “hereinafter” and other words of similar import refer to
        this Indenture as a whole and not to any particular Article, Section or other
        subdivision;

       

      (j)  unless
        context otherwise requires, any reference to an “Article” or a “Section” refers
        to an Article or Section, as the case may be, of this Indenture;

       

      (k)  “or”
is
        not exclusive; and

       

      (l)  “including”
means
        including without limitation.

       

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          9

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      ARTICLE
        2  

       

      The
        Securities

       

      Section
        2.01   Form
        and Dating.

       

      (a)
        The
        Securities and the corresponding Trustee’s certificate of authentication shall
        be substantially in the respective forms set forth in Exhibit A, which Exhibit
        is incorporated in and made part of this Indenture. The Securities may have
        notations, legends or endorsements required by law, exchange rule, Applicable
        Procedures or usage. The Company shall provide any such notations, legends
        or
        endorsements to the Trustee in writing. Each Security shall be dated the
        date of
        its authentication.

       

      The
        terms
        and provisions contained in the Securities shall constitute, and are hereby
        expressly made, a part of this Indenture and the Company and the Trustee,
        by
        their execution and delivery of this Indenture, expressly agree to such terms
        and provisions and to be bound thereby; provided,
        however,
        to the
        extent permitted by applicable law, if any provision of any Security conflicts
        with the express provisions of this Indenture, the provisions of this Indenture
        shall govern and be controlling.

       

      (b)  Restricted
        Global Securities.
        All of
        the Securities shall be issued initially in the form of one or more Restricted
        Global Securities, which shall be deposited on behalf of the purchasers of
        the
        Securities represented thereby with the Securities Custodian, as custodian
        for
        the depositary, The Depository Trust Company (such depositary, or any successor
        thereto, being hereinafter referred to as the “Depositary”),
        and
        registered in the name of its nominee, Cede & Co., or as otherwise
        instructed by the Depositary, duly executed by the Company and authenticated
        by
        the Trustee as hereinafter provided. The aggregate principal amount of the
        Restricted Global Securities may from time to time be increased or decreased
        by
        adjustments made on the records of the Securities Custodian and the Depositary
        as hereinafter provided, subject in each case to compliance with the Applicable
        Procedures and the provisions of this Indenture.

       

      (c)  Global
        Securities In General.
        Each
        Global Security shall represent such of the out-standing Securities as shall
        be
        specified therein and each shall provide that it shall represent the aggregate
        amount of outstanding Securities from time to time endorsed thereon and that
        the
        aggregate amount of outstanding Securities represented thereby may from time
        to
        time be reduced or increased, as appropriate, to reflect exchanges, purchases,
        redemptions or conversions of such Securities, in each case in accordance
        with
        this Indenture. Any adjustment of the aggregate principal amount of a Global
        Security to reflect the amount of any increase or decrease in the amount
        of
        outstanding Securities represented thereby shall be made by the Trustee in
        accordance with instructions given by the Holder thereof as required by Section
        2.12 hereof, or otherwise in accordance with this Indenture, and shall be made
        on the records of the Trustee and the Depositary.

       

      The
        Company shall issue and the Trustee shall, upon receipt of a Company Order,
        authenticate and deliver in accordance with Section 2.02, initially one or
        more
        Global Securities that (i) shall be registered in the name of Cede & Co. or
        as otherwise instructed by the Depositary, (ii) shall be delivered by the
        Trustee to the Depositary or to the Securities Custodian pursuant to the
        Depositary’s instructions and (iii) shall bear legends required for Global
        Securities as set forth in Exhibit A hereto.

       

      (d)  Book
        Entry Provisions.
        Members
        of, or participants in, the Depositary (“Agent
        Members”)
        shall
        have no rights under this Indenture with respect to any Global Security held
        on
        their behalf by the Depositary or under the Global Security, and the Depositary
        (including, for this purpose, its nominee) may be treated by the Company,
        the
        Trustee and any agent of the Company or the Trustee as the absolute owner
        and
        Holder of such Global Security for all purposes whatsoever.

       

      None
        of
        the Company, the Trustee, the Registrar, any Paying Agent or any agent of
        any of
        them shall have any responsibility or liability for any aspect of the records
        relating to or payments made on account of beneficial ownership interests
        in the
        Securities, for maintaining, supervising or reviewing any records relating
        to
        such beneficial owner interests, or for any acts or omissions of a Depositary
        or
        for any transactions between a Depositary and any beneficial owner or between
        or
        among beneficial owners. No owner of a beneficial interest in the Securities
        shall have any rights under this Indenture, and the Depositary or its nominee,
        if any, shall be deemed and treated by the Company, the Trustee, the Registrar,
        any Paying Agent or any agent of any of them as the absolute owner and holder
        of
        such Securities for all purposes whatsoever. 

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          10

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Notwithstanding
        the foregoing, nothing herein shall (A) prevent the Company, the Trustee
        or any
        agent of the Company or the Trustee from giving effect to any written
        certification, proxy or other authorization furnished by the Depositary,
        or its
        nominee, as the case may be, or (B) impair, as between the Depositary and
        its
        Agent Members, the Applicable Procedures or the operation of customary practices
        governing the exercise of the rights of a Holder of any Security.

       

      (e)  Certificated
        Securities.
        Certificated Securities shall be issued only under the circumstances provided
        in
        Section 2.12(a)(i).

       

      Section
        2.02   Execution
        and Authentication.

       

      .(a)
        A duly
        authorized Officer of the Company shall sign the Securities for the Company
        by
        manual or facsimile signature.

       

      (b)  If
        an
        Officer of the Company whose signature is on a Security no longer holds that
        office at the time the Trustee authenticates the Security, the Security shall
        be
        valid nevertheless.

       

      (c)  A
        Security shall not be valid until an authorized signatory of the Trustee
        manually signs the certificate of authentication on the Security. The signature
        shall be conclusive evidence that the Security has been authenticated under
        this
        Indenture.

       

      (d)  The
        Trustee shall initially authenticate and make available for delivery Securities
        for original issue in the
        aggregate principal amount of up to $1,000,000,000 upon receipt of a written
        order or orders of the Company signed by an Officer of the Company (a
“Company
        Order”).
        The
        Company may, without the consent of the Holders, issue additional Securities
        (the “Additional
        Securities”)
        with
        the same terms and with the same CUSIP number as the Securities in an unlimited
        aggregate principal amount; provided,
        however
        that no
        such Additional Securities may be issued unless fungible with the Securities
        for
        U.S. federal income tax purposes. The Trustee shall authenticate Additional
        Securities thereafter in unlimited aggregate principal amount (so long as
        permitted by the terms of this Indenture) for original issue upon a Company
        Order of the Company in aggregate principal amount as specified in such order
        (except as provided in Section 2.07). Each such Company Order shall specify
        the
        amount of Securities to be authenticated and the date on which the Securities
        are to be authenticated. Such Additional Securities shall have identical
        terms
        to the Initial Securities except for issuance dates and prices and with respect
        to interest accruing prior to their date of issuance, and will constitute
        the
        same series as the Initial Securities for all purposes hereunder, including,
        without limitation, waivers, amendments and offers to purchase.

       

      (e)  The
        Trustee shall act as the initial authenticating agent. Thereafter, the Trustee
        may appoint an authenticating agent acceptable to the Company to authenticate
        Securities. An authenticating agent may authenticate Securities whenever
        the
        Trustee may do so. Each reference in this Indenture to authentication by
        the
        Trustee includes authentication by such Agent. An authenticating agent shall
        have the same rights as an Agent to deal with the Company or an Affiliate
        of the
        Company.

       

      The
        Securities shall be issuable only in registered form without coupons and
        only in
        denominations of $1,000 principal amount and any integral multiple
        thereof.

      
         

      

      Section
        2.03   Registrar,
        Paying Agent and Conversion Agent.

       

      The
        Company shall maintain an office or agency where Securities may be presented
        for
        registration of transfer or for exchange (“Registrar”),
        an
        office or agency in the United States where Securities may be presented for
        purchase or payment (“Paying
        Agent”),
        an
        office or agency where Securities may be presented for conversion (“Conversion
        Agent”)
        and an
        office or agency where notices and demands to or upon the Company in respect
        of
        the Securities and this Indenture may be served. The Registrar shall keep
        a
        register of the Securities (“Register”)
        and of
        their transfer and exchange.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          11

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      The
        Company may have one or more co-registrars, one or more additional paying
        agents, and one or more additional conversion agents. The term “Registrar”
includes any co-registrar, including any named pursuant to Section 9.06.
        The
        term “Paying Agent” includes any additional paying agent, including any named
        pursuant to Section 9.06. The term “Conversion Agent” includes any additional
        conversion agent, including any named pursuant to Section 9.06.

       

      The
        Company shall enter into an appropriate agency agreement with any Agent not
        a
        party to this Indenture. The agreement shall implement the provisions of
        this
        Indenture that relate to such Agent. The Company shall notify the Trustee
        of the
        name and address of any Agent not a party to this Indenture. If the Company
        fails to maintain a Registrar, Paying Agent or Conversion Agent or agent
        for
        service of notices and demands in any place required by this Indenture, or
        fails
        to give the foregoing notice, the Trustee shall act as such. The Company
        or any
        Affiliate of the Company may act as Paying Agent.

       

      The
        Company hereby initially appoints the Trustee as Registrar, Paying Agent
        and
        Conversion Agent in connection with the Securities.

       

      Section
        2.04   Paying
        Agent to Hold Money and Securities in Trust.

       

       Prior
        to 11:00 a.m., New York City time, on each due date of payments in respect
        of,
        or delivery of Cash or shares of Common Stock, as applicable and as provided
        herein, the Company shall deposit with the Paying Agent Cash (in immediately
        available funds if deposited on the due date) or with the Conversion Agent
        such
        number of shares of Common Stock or other consideration sufficient to make
        such
        payments or deliveries when so becoming due. The Company shall require each
        Paying Agent or Conversion Agent, as applicable (other than the Trustee),
        to
        agree in writing that such Agent shall hold in trust for the benefit of
        Securityholders or the Trustee all Cash, Common Stock or other consideration,
        as
        applicable, held by such Agent for the making of payments or deliveries in
        respect of the Securities and shall notify the Trustee in writing of any
        default
        by the Company in making any such payment or delivery. If the Company or
        an
        Affiliate of the Company acts as Paying Agent or Conversion Agent, as
        applicable, it shall segregate the Cash, Common Stock and other consideration,
        as applicable, held by it as Paying Agent or Conversion Agent, as applicable,
        and hold it as a separate trust fund.

       

      The
        Company at any time may require a Paying Agent or Conversion Agent, as
        applicable, to pay all Cash, Common Stock or other consideration, as applicable,
        held by it to the Trustee, and the Trustee may at any time during the
        continuance of any Default, upon written request to the Paying Agent or the
        Conversion Agent, as applicable, require such Paying Agent or Conversion
        Agent,
        as applicable, to pay forthwith to the Trustee all Cash, Common Stock or
        other
        consideration, as applicable, so held in trust by such Paying Agent or
        Conversion Agent. Upon doing so, the Paying Agent or the Conversion Agent,
        as
        applicable, shall have no further liability for such Cash, Common Stock or
        other
        consideration, as applicable.

       

      Section
        2.05   Securityholder
        Lists.

       

      .The
        Trustee shall preserve in as current a form as is reasonably practicable
        the
        most recent list available to it of the names and addresses of the
        Securityholders. If the Trustee is not the Registrar, the Company shall furnish
        to the Trustee on or before each Interest Payment Date, and at such other
        times
        as the Trustee may request in writing, a list of the names and addresses
        of the
        Securityholders in such form and as of such date as the Trustee may reasonably
        request.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          12

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        2.06   Transfer
        and Exchange.

       

      (a)
        Subject
        to compliance with any applicable additional requirements contained in Section
        2.12, when a Security is presented to a Registrar with a request to register
        a
        transfer thereof or to exchange such Security for an equal principal amount
        of
        Securities of other authorized denominations, the Registrar shall register
        the
        transfer or make the exchange as requested; provided,
        however,
        that
        every Security presented or surrendered for registration of transfer or exchange
        shall, if such Security is a Certificated Security, be duly endorsed or
        accompanied by an assignment form, in the form included in Exhibit A attached
        hereto and, if applicable, a transfer certificate, in the form included in
        Exhibit A attached hereto, and in form reasonably satisfactory to the Registrar
        duly executed by the Holder thereof or its attorney duly authorized in writing.
        To permit registration of transfers and exchanges, upon surrender of any
        Security for registration of transfer or exchange at an office or agency
        maintained pursuant to Section 2.03, the Company shall execute and the Trustee
        shall, upon receipt of a Company Order, authenticate Securities of a like
        aggregate principal amount at the Registrar’s request. Any exchange or transfer
        shall be without charge, except that the Company or the Registrar may require
        payment of a sum sufficient to cover any tax, assessment or other governmental
        charge that may be imposed in relation thereto, other than exchanges pursuant
        to
        Section 2.10, Section 13.05, Article 5 or Article 7, in each case, not involving
        any transfer.

       

      Neither
        the Company, any Registrar nor the Trustee shall be required to exchange
        or
        register a transfer of any Securities or portions thereof selected for
        redemption (except, in the case of Securities to be redeemed in part, the
        portion thereof not to be redeemed) or any Securities in respect of which
        a
        Repurchase Notice or Fundamental Change Purchase Notice has been delivered
        and
        not validly withdrawn by the Holder thereof (except, in the case of the purchase
        of a Security in part, the portion thereof not to be purchased).

       

      All
        Securities issued upon any transfer or exchange of Securities shall be valid
        obligations of the Company, evidencing the same debt and entitled to the
        same
        benefits under this Indenture as the Securities surrendered upon such transfer
        or exchange.

       

      (b)  Any
        Registrar appointed pursuant to Section 2.03 or Section 9.06 hereof shall
        provide to the Trustee such information as the Trustee may reasonably request
        in
        connection with the delivery by such Registrar of Securities upon transfer
        or
        exchange of Securities.

       

      The
        Trustee shall have no obligation or duty to monitor, determine or inquire
        as to
        compliance with any restrictions on transfer imposed under this Indenture
        or
        under applicable law with respect to any transfer of any interest in any
        Security (including any transfers between or among Agent Members or other
        beneficial owners of interests in any Global Security) other than to require
        delivery of such opinions of counsel, certificates and other documentation
        or
        evidence as are expressly required by, and to do so if and when expressly
        required by the terms of, this Indenture (including if so requested by the
        Company exercising a right to require the delivery of such items), and to
        examine the same to determine substantial compliance as to form with the
        express
        requirements hereof.

       

      Any
        Holder of a Global Security shall, by acceptance of such Global Security,
        agree
        that transfers of beneficial interests in such Global Security may be effected
        only through a book-entry system maintained by the Depositary (or its agent),
        and that ownership of a beneficial interest in a Global Security shall be
        required to be reflected in a book-entry system.

       

      Section
        2.07   Replacement
        Securities.

       

      If
        (a)
        any mutilated Security is surrendered to the Company, a Registrar or the
        Trustee, or (b) the Company, the Registrar and the Trustee receive evidence
        to
        their satisfaction of the destruction, loss or theft of any Security, and,
        in
        either case, there is delivered to the Company, the Registrar and the Trustee
        such security or indemnity as shall be reasonably required by them to save
        each
        of them harmless, then, in the absence of notice to the Company, such Registrar
        or the Trustee that such Security has been acquired by a bona fide or protected
        purchaser, the Company shall issue, and the Trustee shall, upon receipt of
        a
        Company Order (which the Company agrees to deliver promptly), authenticate
        and
        deliver, in exchange for any such mutilated Security or in lieu of any such
        destroyed, lost or stolen Security, a new Security of like tenor and principal
        amount, bearing a number not contemporaneously outstanding.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          13

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      In
        case
        any such mutilated, destroyed, lost or stolen Security has become or is about
        to
        become due and payable, or is about to be redeemed or purchased by the Company
        pursuant to Article 5, the Company in its discretion may, instead of issuing
        a
        new Security, pay, redeem or purchase such Security, as the case may be,
        in
        accordance herewith.

       

      Upon
        the
        issuance of any new Securities under this Section 2.07, the Company may require
        the payment of a sum sufficient to cover any tax, assessment or other
        governmental charge that may be imposed in relation thereto as the result
        of any
        Securities, at the request of any Holder, being issued to a Person other
        than
        such Holder and any other reasonable expenses (including the reasonable fees
        and
        expenses of the Trustee or the Registrar) in connection therewith.

       

      Every
        new
        Security issued pursuant to this Section 2.07 in lieu of any mutilated,
        destroyed, lost or stolen Security shall constitute an original additional
        contractual obligation of the Company, whether or not the mutilated, destroyed,
        lost or stolen Security shall be at any time enforceable by anyone, and shall
        be
        entitled to all benefits of this Indenture equally and proportionately with
        any
        and all other Securities duly issued and outstanding hereunder.

       

      The
        provisions of this Section 2.07 are (to the extent lawful) exclusive and
        shall
        preclude (to the extent lawful) all other rights and remedies with respect
        to
        the replacement or payment of mutilated, destroyed, lost or stolen
        Securities.

       

      Section
        2.08   Outstanding
        Securities.

       

      Securities
        outstanding at any time are all Securities authenticated by the Trustee,
        except
        for those canceled by it, those paid, redeemed or repurchased, those delivered
        to it for cancellation and those described in this Section 2.08 as not
        outstanding.

       

      If
        a
        Security is replaced pursuant to Section 2.07 (other than a mutilated Security
        surrendered for replacement), it ceases to be outstanding unless the Trustee
        receives, subsequent to the new Security’s authentication, proof satisfactory to
        the Company that the replaced Security is held by a bona fide or protected
        purchaser. A mutilated Security ceases to be outstanding upon surrender and
        replacement thereof pursuant to Section 2.07.

       

      If
        the
        Paying Agent holds, in accordance with the terms of this Indenture, prior
        to
        11:00 a.m., New York City time, on the Maturity Date, a Redemption Date or
        Repurchase Date, as the case may be, Cash sufficient to pay all Initial
        Securities and all Additional Securities then payable, then on and after
        such
        Maturity Date, Redemption Date or Repurchase Date, as the case may be, such
        Securities shall cease to be outstanding and interest (including Contingent
        Interest or Additional Interest, if any) on such Securities shall cease to
        accrue.

       

      If
        a
        Security is converted in accordance with Article 7, then on the Conversion
        Date,
        such Security shall cease to be outstanding and interest (including Contingent
        Interest or Additional Interest, if any) on such Security shall cease to
        accrue,
        unless there shall be a default in the delivery of the consideration payable
        hereunder upon such conversion.

       

      Subject
        to the restrictions contained in Section 2.09, a Security does not cease
        to be
        outstanding solely because the Company or an Affiliate of the Company holds
        the
        Security.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          14

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        2.09   Treasury
        Securities.

       

      In
        determining whether the Holders of the required principal amount of Securities
        have given or concurred in any notice, request, demand, authorization,
        direction, waiver or consent, Securities owned by the Company or any other
        obligor on the Securities or by any Affiliate of the Company or of such other
        obligor shall be disregarded and deemed not to be outstanding for such purposes,
        except that, for purposes of determining whether the Trustee shall be protected
        in relying on any such notice, request, demand, authorization, direction,
        waiver
        or consent, only Securities which a Trust Officer actually knows are so owned
        shall be so disregarded. Securities so owned which have been pledged in good
        faith shall not be disregarded if the pledgee establishes to the satisfaction
        of
        the Trustee the pledgee’s right so to act with respect to the Securities and
        that the pledgee is not, and is not acting on the behalf of, the Company
        or any
        other obligor on the Securities or any Affiliate of the Company or of such
        other
        obligor. If requested by the Trustee, the Company agrees to notify the Trustee
        in writing of the existence of any such treasury Securities or Securities
        owned
        by the Company, any other obligor on the Securities, or, to the knowledge
        of the
        Company, any Affiliate of the Company.

       

      Section
        2.10   Temporary
        Securities.

       

      Until
        definitive Securities are ready for delivery, the Company may prepare and
        execute, and, upon receipt of a Company Order, the Trustee shall authenticate
        and deliver, temporary Securities. Temporary Securities shall be substantially
        in the form of definitive Securities but may have variations that the Company
        reasonably considers appropriate for temporary Securities. After the preparation
        of definitive Securities, the temporary Securities shall be exchangeable
        for
        definitive Securities upon surrender of the temporary Securities at the office
        or agency of the Company designated for such purpose pursuant to Section
        2.03,
        without charge to the Holder. Upon surrender for cancellation of any one
        or more
        temporary Securities, the Company shall execute and the Trustee shall, upon
        receipt of a Company Order (which the Company agrees to deliver promptly),
        authenticate and deliver in exchange therefor a like principal amount of
        definitive Securities of authorized denominations. Until so exchanged the
        temporary Securities shall in all respects be entitled to the same benefits
        under this Indenture as definitive Securities.

       

      Section
        2.11   Cancellation.

       

      The
        Company at any time may deliver Securities to the Trustee for cancellation.
        The
        Registrar, the Paying Agent and the Conversion Agent shall forward to the
        Trustee or its agent any Securities surrendered to them for transfer, exchange,
        purchase, payment, redemption or conversion. The Trustee and no one else
        shall
        cancel, in accordance with its standard procedures, all Securities surrendered
        for transfer, exchange, payment, conversion or cancellation and shall deliver
        the canceled Securities to the Company. The Company may not issue new Securities
        to replace Securities that it has paid or delivered to the Trustee for
        cancellation or that any Holder has converted pursuant to Article
        7.

       

      All
        Securities that are purchased pursuant to Article 5 or otherwise acquired
        by the
        Company shall be delivered to the Trustee for cancellation. If the Company
        shall
        acquire any of the Securities, such acquisition shall not operate as a
        repurchase or satisfaction of the indebtedness represented by such Securities
        unless and until the same are delivered to the Trustee for
        cancellation.

       

      Section
        2.12   Legend;
        Additional Transfer and Exchange Requirements.

       

      (a) Transfer
        and Exchange of Global Securities.
        (i)
        Certificated Securities (x) shall be issued in exchange for interests in
        the
        Global Securities only if the Depositary notifies the Company that it is
        unwilling or unable to continue as Depositary for the Global Securities or
        if it
        at any time ceases to be a “clearing agency” registered under the Exchange Act,
        if so required by applicable law or regulation, and a successor Depositary
        is
        not appointed by the Company within 90 days of such notice or (y) may be
        issued
        in exchange for interests in the Global Securities, at a Holder’s election, if
        an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, each of clauses (x) and
        (y)
        in accordance with the Applicable Procedures. In any such case, the Company
        shall execute, and the Trustee shall, upon receipt of a Company Order (which
        the
        Company agrees to deliver promptly), authenticate and deliver Certificated
        Securities in an aggregate principal amount equal to the principal amount
        of
        such Global Securities in exchange therefor. Only Restricted Certificated
        Securities shall be issued in exchange for beneficial interests in Restricted
        Global Securities, and only Unrestricted Certificated Securities shall be
        issued
        in exchange for beneficial interests in Unrestricted Global Securities.
        Certificated Securities issued in exchange for beneficial interests in Global
        Securities shall be registered in such names and shall be in such authorized
        denominations as the Depositary, pursuant to instructions from its Agent
        Members
        or otherwise in accordance with the Applicable Procedures, shall instruct
        the
        Trustee. The Trustee shall deliver or cause to be delivered such Certificated
        Securities to the Persons in whose name such Securities are so registered.
        Such
        exchange shall be effected in accordance with the Applicable Procedures.
        In the
        event that the Certificated Securities are not issued to each such beneficial
        owner promptly after the Registrar has received a request from the Depositary
        to
        issue such Certificated Securities, the Company expressly acknowledges, with
        respect to the right of any Holder to pursue a remedy pursuant to Section
        11.06
        or 11.07 hereof, the right of any beneficial holder of Securities to pursue
        such
        remedy with respect to the portion of the Global Security that represents
        such
        Beneficial Owner’s Securities as if such Certificated Securities had been
        issued.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          15

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (ii)  Notwithstanding
        any other provisions of this Indenture other than the provisions set forth
        in
        Section 2.12(a)(i), a Global Security may not be transferred except as a
        whole
        by the Depositary to a nominee of the Depositary or by a nominee of the
        Depositary to the Depositary or another nominee of the Depositary or by the
        Depositary or any such nominee to a successor Depositary or a nominee of
        such
        successor Depositary.

       

      (b)  Transfer
        and Exchange of Certificated Securities.
        In the
        event that Certificated Securities are issued in exchange for beneficial
        interests in Global Securities in accordance with Section 2.12(a)(i), and,
        on or
        after such event, Certificated Securities are presented by a Holder to the
        Registrar with a request:

       

      (x) to
        register the transfer of the Certificated Securities to a person who shall
        take
        delivery thereof in the form of Certificated Securities only; or

       

      (y) to
        exchange such Certificated Securities for an equal principal amount of
        Certificated Securities of other authorized denominations,

       

      such
        Registrar shall register the transfer or make the exchange as requested;
        provided,
        however,
        that
        the Certificated Securities presented or surrendered for register of transfer
        or
        exchange:

       

      (i)  shall
        be
        duly endorsed or accompanied by a written instrument of transfer in accordance
        with the proviso to the first sentence of Section 2.06(a); and

       

      (ii)  in
        the
        case of a Restricted Certificated Security, such request shall be accompanied
        by
        the following additional information and documents, as applicable:

       

      (A)  if
        such
        Restricted Certificated Security is being delivered to the Registrar by a
        Holder
        for registration in the name of such Holder, without transfer, or such
        Restricted Certificated Security is being transferred to the Company or a
        Subsidiary of the Company, a certification to that effect from such Holder
        (in
        substantially the form set forth in Exhibit A);

       

      (B)  if
        such
        Restricted Certificated Security is being transferred to a person the Holder
        reasonably believes is a QIB in accordance with Rule 144A, or pursuant to
        an
        effective registration statement under the Securities Act or in compliance
        with
        Regulation S under the Securities Act, a certification to that effect from
        such
        Holder (in substantially the form set forth in Exhibit A);

       

      (C)  if
        such
        Restricted Certificated Security is being transferred pursuant to an exemption
        from the registration requirements of the Securities Act in accordance with
        Rule
        144 or pursuant to and in compliance with another exemption from the
        registration requirements under the Securities Act, a certification to that
        effect from the Holder (in substantially the form set forth in Exhibit A)
        and,
        if the Company or the Registrar so requests, an Opinion of Counsel, certificates
        and other information reasonably acceptable to the Company to the effect
        that
        such transfer does not require registration under the Securities
        Act.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          16

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (c)  Transfer
        of a Beneficial Interest in a Restricted Global Security for a Beneficial
        Interest in an Unrestricted Global Security.
        Any
        person having a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Security may upon
        request, subject to the Applicable Procedures, transfer such beneficial interest
        to a Person who is required or permitted to take delivery thereof in the
        form of
        a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Security. Upon receipt by
        the
        Trustee of written instructions, or such other form of instructions as is
        customary for the Depositary, from the Depositary or its nominee on behalf
        of
        any Person having a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Security and
        the
        following additional information and documents in such form as is customary
        for
        the Depositary from the Depositary or its nominee on behalf of the Person
        having
        such beneficial interest in the Restricted Global Security (all of which
        may be
        submitted by facsimile or electronically):

       

      (i)  if
        such
        beneficial interest is being transferred pursuant to an effective registration
        statement under the Securities Act, a certification to that effect from the
        Holder (in substantially the form set forth in Exhibit A); or

       

      (ii)  if
        such
        beneficial interest is being transferred pursuant to an exemption from the
        registration requirements of the Securities Act in accordance with Rule 144,
        a
        certification to that effect from the Holder (in substantially the form set
        forth in Exhibit A) and, if the Company or the Trustee so requests, an Opinion
        of Counsel, certificates and other information reasonably acceptable to the
        Company to the effect that such transfer does not require registration under
        the
        Securities Act;

       

      the
        Registrar shall reduce or cause to be reduced the aggregate principal amount
        of
        the Restricted Global Security by the appropriate principal amount and shall
        increase or cause to be increased the aggregate principal amount of the
        Unrestricted Global Security by a like principal amount. Such transfer shall
        otherwise be effected in accordance with the Applicable Procedures. If no
        Unrestricted Global Security is then outstanding, the Company shall execute
        and
        the Trustee shall, upon receipt of a Company Order (which the Company agrees
        to
        deliver promptly), authenticate and deliver an Unrestricted Global
        Security.

       

      (d)  Transfer
        of a Beneficial Interest in an Unrestricted Global Security for a Beneficial
        Interest in a Restricted Global Security.
        Any
        person having a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Security may
        upon
        request, subject to the Applicable Procedures, transfer such beneficial interest
        to a person who is required or permitted to take delivery thereof in the
        form of
        a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Security. Upon receipt by the
        Trustee of written instructions, or such other form of instructions as is
        customary for the Depositary, from the Depositary or its nominee on behalf
        of
        any person having a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Security
        and
        the following additional information and documents in such form as is customary
        for the Depositary, from the Depositary or its nominee on behalf of the person
        having such beneficial interest in the Unrestricted Global Security (all
        of
        which may be submitted by facsimile or electronically):

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          17

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (i)  a
        certification from the Holder (in substantially the form set forth in Exhibit
        A)
        to the effect that such beneficial interest is being transferred to a person
        that the transferor reasonably believes is a QIB in accordance with Rule
        144A;

       

      (ii)  a
        certification from the Holder (in substantially the form set forth in Exhibit
        A)
        to the effect that such beneficial interest is being transferred in compliance
        with Regulation S under the Securities Act;

       

      (iii)  if
        such
        beneficial interest in such Unrestricted Global Security is being transferred
        in
        compliance with any other exemption from registration under the Securities
        Act,
        certification to that effect from such Holder (in substantially the form
        set
        forth in Exhibit A) and if the Company or the Trustee so requests, an Opinion
        of
        Counsel, certificates and other information reasonably acceptable to the
        Company
        to the effect that such transfer does not require registration under the
        Securities Act; or

       

      (iv)  a
        certification (in substantially the form set forth in Exhibit A) to the effect
        that such beneficial interest is being transferred to the Company or a
        Subsidiary of the Company, the Registrar shall reduce or cause to be reduced
        the
        aggregate principal amount of the Unrestricted Global Security by the
        appropriate principal amount and shall increase or cause to be increased
        the
        aggregate principal amount of the Restricted Global Security by a like principal
        amount. Such transfer shall otherwise be effected in accordance with the
        Applicable Procedures. If no Restricted Global Security is then outstanding,
        the
        Company shall execute and the Trustee shall, upon receipt of a Company Order
        (which the Company agrees to deliver promptly), authenticate and deliver
        a
        Restricted Global Security.

       

      (e)  Transfers
        of Certificated Securities for Beneficial Interest in Global
        Securities.
        In the
        event that Certificated Securities are issued in exchange for beneficial
        interests in Global Securities and, thereafter, the events or conditions
        specified in Section 2.12(a)(i) which required such exchange shall cease
        to
        exist, the Company shall mail notice to the Trustee and to the Holders
(i)
        stating
        that Holders may exchange Certificated Securities for interests in Global
        Securities by complying with the procedures set forth in this Indenture and
        (ii)
        briefly
        describing such procedures and the events or circumstances requiring that
        such
        notice be given. Thereafter, if Certificated Securities are presented by
        a
        Holder to a Registrar with a request:

       

      (x) to
        register the transfer of such Certificated Securities to a Person who will
        take
        delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in a Global Security,
        which request shall specify whether such Global Security will be a Restricted
        Global Security or an Unrestricted Global Security; or

       

      (y) to
        exchange such Certificated Securities for an equal principal amount of
        beneficial interests in a Global Security, which beneficial interests will
        be
        owned by the Holder transferring such Certificated Securities (provided that
        in
        the case of such an exchange, Restricted Certificated Securities may be
        exchanged only for Restricted Global Securities and Unrestricted Certificated
        Securities may be exchanged only for Unrestricted Global
        Securities),

       

      the
        Registrar shall register the transfer or make the exchange as requested by
        canceling such Certificated Security and causing the aggregate principal
        amount
        of the applicable Global Security to be increased accordingly and, if no
        such
        Global Security is then outstanding, the Company shall issue and the Trustee
        shall, upon receipt of a Company Order (which the Company agrees to deliver
        promptly) authenticate and deliver a new Global Security; provided,
        however,
        that
        the Certificated Securities presented or surrendered for registration of
        transfer or exchange:

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          18

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (iii)  shall
        be
        duly endorsed or accompanied by a written instrument of transfer in accordance
        with the proviso to Section 2.06(a);

       

      (iv)  in
        the
        case of a Restricted Certificated Security to be transferred for a beneficial
        interest in an Unrestricted Global Security, shall be accompanied by the
        following additional information and documents, as applicable:

       

      (A)  if
        such
        Restricted Certificated Security is being transferred pursuant to an effective
        registration statement under the Securities Act, a certification to that
        effect
        from such Holder (in substantially the form set forth in Exhibit A);
        or

       

      (B)  if
        such
        Restricted Certificated Security is being transferred pursuant to an exemption
        from the registration requirements of the Securities Act in accordance with
        Rule
        144, a certification to that effect from such Holder (in substantially the
        form
        set forth in Exhibit A) and an Opinion of Counsel, certificates and other
        information reasonably acceptable to the Company to the effect that such
        transfer does not require registration under of the Securities Act;

       

      (v)  in
        the
        case of a Restricted Certificated Security to be transferred to another person
        for a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Security, shall be accompanied
        by the following information and documents, as applicable:

       

      (A)  if
        such
        Restricted Certificated Security is being transferred to a person the Holder
        reasonably believes is a QIB in accordance with Rule 144A, a certification
        to
        that effect from such Holder (in substantially the form set forth in Exhibit
        A);
        or

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          19

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (B)  if
        such
        Restricted Certificated Security is being transferred in compliance with
        Regulation S under the Securities Act, certification to that effect from
        such
        Holder (in substantially the form set forth in Exhibit A);

       

      (vi)  in
        the
        case of an Unrestricted Certificated Security to be transferred or exchanged
        for
        a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Security, or in the case
        of a
        Restricted Certificated Security to be exchanged (and not transferred) for
        a
        beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Security, such request need not
        be
        accompanied by any additional information or documents; and

       

      (vii)  in
        the
        case of an Unrestricted Certificated Security to be transferred or exchanged
        for
        a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Security, such request shall
        be
        accompanied by the following additional information and documents, as
        applicable:

       

      (A)  if
        such
        Unrestricted Certificated Security is being transferred to a person the Holder
        reasonably believes is a QIB (which, in the case of an ex-change, shall be
        such
        Holder) in accordance with Rule 144A, a certification to that effect from
        such
        Holder (in substantially the form set forth in Exhibit A);

       

      (B)  if
        such
        Unrestricted Certificated Security is being transferred in compliance with
        Regulation S under the Securities Act, certification to that effect from
        such
        Holder (in substantially the form set forth in Exhibit A);

       

      (C)  if
        such
        Unrestricted Certificated Security is being transferred in compliance with
        any
        other exemption from registration under the Securities Act, certification
        to
        that effect from such Holder (in substantially the form set forth in Exhibit
        A)
        and an Opinion of Counsel, certificates and other information reasonably
        acceptable to the Company to the effect that such transfer does not require
        registration under the Securities Act; or

       

      (D)  if
        such
        Unrestricted Certificated Security is being transferred to the Company or
        a
        Subsidiary of the Company, a certification to that effect from such Holder
        (in
        substantially the form set forth in Exhibit A).

       

      (f)  Legends.
        (i)
        Except
        as permitted by the following paragraphs (ii), (iii) and (iv), each Global
        Security and Certificated Security (and all Securities issued in exchange
        therefor or upon registration of transfer or replacement thereof) shall bear
        a
        legend in substantially the form called for by Exhibit A attached hereto
        (the
“Restricted
        Legend”),
        for
        so long as it is required by this Indenture to bear such legend.

       

      (ii)  Upon
        any
        sale or transfer of a Restricted Security (x) after the expiration of the
        holding period applicable to sales of the Securities under Rule 144(k) of
        the
        Securities Act, (y) pursuant to Rule 144 or (z) pursuant to an effective
        registration statement under the Securities Act:

       

      (A)  in
        the
        case of any Restricted Certificated Security, each Registrar shall permit
        the
        Holder thereof to transfer such Restricted Certificated Security to a transferee
        who, unless such transferee is an Affiliate of the Company, shall take such
        Security in the form of an Unrestricted Certificated Security or (under the
        circumstances described in Section 2.12(e)) an Unrestricted Global Security,
        and
        in each case shall rescind any restriction on the transfer of such Security;
        provided,
        however,
        that
        the Holder of such Restricted Certificated Security shall, in connection
        with
        such exchange or transfer, comply with the other applicable provisions of
        this
        Section 2.12; and

       

      (B)  in
        the
        case of a Restricted Global Security, each Registrar shall permit the Holder
        thereof to transfer such beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Security
        to
        a transferee who, unless such transferee is an Affiliate of the Company,
        shall
        take such Security in the form of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted
        Global Security and shall rescind any restriction on transfer of such Security;
        provided,
        however,
        that
        such Unrestricted Global Security shall continue to be subject to the provisions
        of Section 2.12(a)(ii); and provided further,
        however,
        that
        the owner of such beneficial interest shall, in connection with such transfer,
        comply with the other applicable provisions of this Section 2.12.

       

      If
        the
        Applicable Procedures so require, prior to the removal of any restrictive
        legend
        at the end of the holding period applicable to sales of the Securities under
        Rule 144(k) of the Securities Act, such requesting Holder shall deliver an
        Opinion of Counsel in form reasonably acceptable to the Company to the effect
        that the restrictions on transfer contained herein and the restrictive legend
        are no longer required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities
        Act.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          20

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (iii)  Upon
        the
        exchange, registration of transfer or replacement of Securities not bearing
        the
        Restricted Legend, the Company shall issue, and the Trustee shall, upon receipt
        of a Company Order (which the Company agrees to deliver promptly), authenticate
        and deliver, Securities that do not bear such Restricted Legend.

       

      (iv)  After
        the
        expiration of the holding period pursuant to Rule 144(k) of the Securities
        Act,
        the Company may with the consent of any Holder of a Restricted Global Security
        or a Restricted Certificated Security that is not an Affiliate of the Company,
        remove any restriction of transfer on such Security, and the Company shall
        issue, and the Trustee shall, upon receipt of a Company Order (which the
        Company
        agrees to deliver promptly), authenticate and deliver Securities that do
        not
        bear the Restricted Legend.

       

      (v)  Until
        the
        expiration of the holding period applicable to sales of the Securities under
        Rule 144(k) of the Securities Act or a transfer pursuant to Rule 144 or pursuant
        to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act, the shares
        of
        Common Stock issued upon conversion of the Securities shall bear a legend
        substantially to the same effect as the Restricted Legend; provided
        that all
        Securities held by Affiliates of the Company shall bear the Restricted Legend
        at
        all times.

       

      (g)  Transfers
        to the Company.
        Nothing
        contained in this Indenture or in the Securities shall prohibit the sale
        or
        other transfer of any Securities (including beneficial interests in Global
        Securities) to the Company, or any of its Subsidiaries or any of its
        Affiliates.

       

      Section
        2.13   CUSIP
        Numbers.

       

      The
        Company in issuing the Securities may use one or more “CUSIP,” “ISIN” or other
        similar numbers (if then generally in use), and, if so, the Trustee shall
        use
“CUSIP,” “ISIN” or other similar numbers in notices of purchase or redemption as
        a convenience to Holders; provided,
        however,
        that
        any such notice may state that no representation is made as to the correctness
        of such numbers either as printed on the Securities or as contained in any
        notice of a purchase or redemption and that reliance may be placed only on
        the
        other identification numbers printed on the Securities, and any such purchase
        or
        redemption shall not be affected by any defect in or omission of such numbers.
        The Company shall promptly notify the Trustee of any change in the “CUSIP,”
“ISIN” or other similar numbers.

       

      Section
        2.14   Persons
        Deemed Owners.

       

      Prior
        to
        due presentment of a Security for registration of transfer, the Company,
        the
        Trustee and any agent of the Company or the Trustee may treat the person
        in
        whose name such Security is registered, which shall initially be the Depositary,
        as the owner of such Security for the purpose of receiving payment of principal
        of, the Repurchase Price, the Fundamental Change Purchase Price and interest
        (including Contingent Interest or Additional Interest, if any), on the Security,
        for the purpose of receiving Common Stock or Cash and for all other purposes,
        including without limitation, for purposes of giving notices hereunder,
        whatsoever, whether or not such Security is overdue, and none of the Company,
        the Trustee nor any agent of the Company or the Trustee shall be affected
        by
        notice to the contrary. The registered Holder of a Global Security may grant
        proxies and otherwise authorize any person, including Agent Members and persons
        that may hold interests through Agent Members, to take any action that a
        Holder
        is entitled to take under this Indenture or the Securities.

       

      Section
        2.15   Defaulted
        Interest.

       

      If
        the
        Company defaults on a payment of interest (including Contingent Interest
        or
        Additional Interest, if any) on the Securities, it shall pay the defaulted
        interest, plus (to the extent permitted by law) any interest payable on the
        defaulted interest, in accordance with the terms hereof, to the Persons who
        are
        Holders on a subsequent special record date, which date shall be at least
        five
        Business Days prior to the payment date. The Company shall fix such special
        record date and payment date in a reasonable manner. At least 10 days before
        such special record date, the Company shall mail to each Holder a notice
        that
        states the special record date, the payment date and the amount of defaulted
        interest, and interest payable on defaulted interest, if any, to be paid.
        The
        Company may make payment of any defaulted interest in any other lawful manner
        not inconsistent with the requirements (if applicable) of any securities
        exchange on which the Securities may be listed and, upon such notice as may
        be
        required by such exchange.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          21

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        2.16   Contingent
        Debt Tax Treatment.

       

      (a)  The
        Company and each Holder, by acquiring a beneficial interest in a Security,
        agree
        (in the absence of an administrative pronouncement or judicial ruling to
        the
        contrary) (i) to treat the Security as indebtedness for U.S. federal income
        tax purposes that is subject to the Treasury Regulations governing contingent
        payment debt instruments (the “contingent
        debt regulations”),
        (ii) that each Holder shall be bound by the Company’s application of the
        contingent debt regulations to the Security, including the Company’s
        determination of the “comparable yield” and “projected payment schedule” within
        the meaning of the contingent debt regulations, (iii) to treat the cash and
        the fair market value of any Common Stock received upon the conversion of
        the
        Security as a contingent payment for purposes of the contingent debt
        regulations, (iv) to accrue interest with respect to the outstanding
        Security as original issue discount according to the “noncontingent bond method”
set forth in the contingent debt regulations, using the comparable yield
        of
        7.00% compounded semi-annually and (v) that the Company and each Holder
        will not take any position on any U.S. federal tax return that is inconsistent
        with (i), (ii), (iii) or (iv) unless required by applicable law.

       

      The
        Company acknowledges and agrees, and each Holder and any beneficial holder
        of a
        Security by its purchase thereof shall be deemed to acknowledge and agree,
        that
        (i) the comparable yield means the annual yield the Company would pay, as
        of the Issue Date, on a fixed rate, nonconvertible debt security with no
        contingent payments, but with terms and conditions otherwise comparable to
        those
        of the Securities, (ii) the schedule of projected payments is determined on
        the basis of an assumption of a constant annual growth rate of the stock
        price
        and is not determined for any purpose other than for the determination of
        interest accruals and adjustments thereof in respect of the Securities for
        U.S.
        federal income tax purposes and (iii) the comparable yield and the schedule
        of projected payments do not constitute a projection or representation regarding
        the amounts payable on the Securities.

       

      A
        Holder
        may obtain the projected payment schedule for the Security, as determined
        by the
        Company pursuant to the contingent debt regulations, by submitting a written
        request to the Company at the following address: Linear Technology Corporation,
        1630 McCarthy Boulevard, Milpitas, CA 95035-7417, Attention: Chief Financial
        Officer.

       

      (b)  Each
        Security shall bear a legend relating to U.S. federal income tax matters
        in the
        form set forth in Exhibit A.

       

      ARTICLE
        3  

       

      [Reserved]

       

      ARTICLE
        4  

       

      [Reserved]

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          22

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

       

      ARTICLE
        5  

       

      Redemption
        and Repurchases

       

      Section
        5.01   Company’s
        Right to Redeem; Notices to Trustee.

       

      Prior
        to
        May 1, 2014, the Securities shall not be redeemable at the Company’s
        option. On or after May 1, 2014, the Company, at its option, may redeem the
        Securities for Cash at any time, in whole or in part, at a redemption price
        (the
“Redemption
        Price”)
        equal
        to 100% of the principal amount of the Securities being redeemed, plus any
        accrued and unpaid interest (including Contingent Interest or Additional
        Interest, if any) to, but not including, the Redemption Date; provided
        that if
        the Redemption Date falls after an Interest Payment Record Date and prior
        to the
        corresponding Interest Payment Date, accrued and unpaid interest (including
        Contingent Interest or Additional Interest, if any) shall be paid to the
        Holder
        on the relevant Interest Payment Record Date. If the Company elects to redeem
        Securities pursuant to this Section 5.01, it shall notify the Trustee in
        writing
        of such election together with the Redemption Date, the Conversion Rate,
        the
        principal amount of Securities to be redeemed and the Redemption Price.
        Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company may not redeem the Securities
        if it
        has failed to pay any interest (including Contingent Interest or Additional
        Interest, if any) on the Securities when due and such failure to pay is
        continuing.

       

      The
        Company shall give the notice to the Trustee provided for in this Section
        5.01
        by a Company Order, at least 20 days but not more than 60 days before the
        Redemption Date (unless a shorter notice shall be satisfactory to the
        Trustee).

       

      Section
        5.02   Selection
        of Securities to Be Redeemed.

       

      If
        the
        Company decides to redeem fewer than all of the Securities, unless the
        procedures of the Depositary provide otherwise, the Trustee shall select
        the
        Securities to be redeemed by lot, or in its discretion, on a pro rata basis.
        The
        Trustee may select for redemption portions of the principal amount of Securities
        that have denominations larger than $1,000.

       

      Securities
        and portions of Securities that the Trustee selects shall be in principal
        amounts of $1,000 or an integral multiple of $1,000. Provisions of this
        Indenture that apply to Securities called for redemption also apply to portions
        of Securities called for redemption. The Trustee shall notify the Company
        promptly (but in any case within seven days of the Company Order referred
        to in
        Section 5.01 unless a shorter notice is acceptable to the Company) of the
        Securities or portions of the Securities selected to be redeemed and, in
        the
        case of any Securities selected for partial redemption, the method it has
        chosen
        for the selection of the Security.

       

      Following
        a notice of redemption, Securities and portions of Securities are convertible,
        pursuant to Section 7.01(b)(iii), by the Holder until the Close of Business
        on the Business Day prior to the Redemption Date. If any Security selected
        for
        partial redemption is converted in part before termination of the conversion
        right with respect to the portion of the Security so selected, the converted
        portion of such Security shall be deemed (so far as may be) to be the portion
        selected for redemption. Securities that have been converted during a selection
        of Securities to be redeemed may be treated by the Trustee as outstanding
        for
        the purpose of such selection.

       

      Section
        5.03   Notice
        of Redemption.

       

      At
        least
        20 days but no more than 60 days before a Redemption Date, the Company shall
        mail a notice of redemption (substantially in the form set forth in Exhibit
        A)
        by first-class mail, postage prepaid, to each Holder of Securities to be
        redeemed.

       

      The
        notice shall identify the Securities to be redeemed and shall state (along
        with
        any other information the Company wishes to include):

       

      (a)  the
        Redemption Date;

       

      (b)  the
        Redemption Price;

       

      (c)  the
        Conversion Rate;

       

      (d)  the
        name
        and address of the Paying Agent and Conversion Agent;

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          23

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (e)  that
        Securities may be converted at any time before the Close of Business on the
        Business Day prior to the Redemption Date;

       

      (f)  that
        Securities called for redemption and not converted shall be redeemed on the
        Redemption Date;

       

      (g)  that
        Holders who want to convert their Securities must satisfy the requirements
        set
        forth in the Securities;

       

      (h)  that
        Securities called for redemption must be surrendered to the Paying Agent
        (by
        effecting book entry transfer of the Securities or delivering Certificated
        Securities, together with necessary endorsements, as the case may be) to
        collect
        the Redemption Price;

       

      (i)  if
        fewer
        than all of the outstanding Securities are to be redeemed, the certificate
        numbers, if any, and principal amounts of the particular Securities to be
        redeemed;

       

      (j)  that,
        unless the Company defaults in making payments of such Redemption Price,
        interest, including Contingent Interest, if any, and Additional Interest,
        if
        any, on the Securities called for redemption shall cease to accrue from and
        after the Redemption Date; and

       

      (k)  the
        CUSIP, “ISIN” or other similar number(s), as the case may be, of the Securities
        being redeemed.

       

      At
        the
        Company’s request, the Trustee shall give the notice of redemption in the
        Company’s name and at the Company’s expense, provided
        that the
        Company makes such request at least seven Business Days (or such shorter
        period
        as may be satisfactory to the Trustee) prior to the date by which such notice
        of
        redemption must be given to Holders in accordance with this
        Section 5.03.

       

      Section
        5.04   Effect
        of Notice of Redemption.

       

      Once
        notice of redemption is given, Securities called for redemption become due
        and
        payable on the Redemption Date and at the Redemption Price stated in the
        notice
        except for Securities that are converted in accordance with the terms of
        this
        Indenture. Upon surrender to the Paying Agent, such Securities shall be paid
        at
        the Redemption Price stated in the notice and from and after the Redemption
        Date
        (unless the Company shall default in the payment of the Redemption Price)
        such
        Securities shall cease to bear interest (including Contingent Interest or
        Additional Interest, if any) and the rights of the Holders therein shall
        terminate (other than the right to receive the Redemption Price).

       

      Section
        5.05   Deposit
        of Redemption Price.

       

      Prior
        to
        10:00 a.m. (New York City time), on the Redemption Date, the Company shall
        deposit with the Paying Agent (or if the Company or a Subsidiary or an Affiliate
        of either of them is the Paying Agent, shall segregate and hold in trust)
        money
        sufficient to pay the Redemption Price of all Securities to be redeemed on
        that
        date other than Securities or portions of Securities called for redemption
        which
        on or prior thereto have been delivered by the Company to the Trustee for
        cancellation or have been converted. Upon written request of the Company,
        the
        Paying Agent shall as promptly as practicable return to the Company any money
        not required for that purpose because of conversion of Securities pursuant
        to
        Article 7. If such money is then held by the Company or a Subsidiary or an
        Affiliate of either in trust and is not required for such purpose it shall
        be
        discharged from such trust.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          24

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        5.06   Securities
        Redeemed in Part.

       

      Upon
        surrender of a Security that is redeemed in part, the Company shall execute
        and
        the Trustee shall, without charge, authenticate and deliver to the Holder
        a new
        Security in an authorized denomination equal in principal amount to the
        unredeemed portion of the Security surrendered.

       

      Section
        5.07   Repurchase
        of Securities by the Company at Option of the Holder.

       

      (a)
         On each of May 1, 2014, May 1, 2017 and May 1, 2022 (each, a “Specified Repurchase
        Date”),
        each
        Holder shall have the option to require the Company to repurchase Securities
        for
        which that Holder has properly delivered and not withdrawn a written Repurchase
        Notice (as described below) at a repurchase price in cash equal to 100% of
        the principal amount of those Securities, plus accrued and unpaid interest,
        including Contingent Interest or Additional Interest, if any, on those
        Securities, to, but not including, such Specified Repurchase Date (the
“Repurchase
        Price”);
        provided
        that if
        the Specified Repurchase Date is on a date that is after an Interest Payment
        Record Date and on or prior to the corresponding Interest Payment Date, the
        Repurchase Price shall be 100% of the principal amount of the Securities
        repurchased but shall not include accrued and unpaid interest, including
        Contingent Interest or Additional Interest, if any. Instead, the Company
        shall
        pay such accrued and unpaid interest, Contingent Interest, if any, and
        Additional Amounts, if any, on the Interest Payment Date, to the Holder of
        record on the corresponding Interest Payment Record Date. Not later than
        20
        Business Days prior to any Specified Repurchase Date, the Company shall mail
        a
        Company Notice (substantially in the form set forth in Exhibit A) by first
        class mail to the Trustee and to each Holder (and to beneficial owners if
        required by applicable law). The Company Notice shall include a form of
        Repurchase Notice to be completed by a Holder and shall state:

       

      (i) 
        the
        Repurchase Price and the Conversion Rate;

       

      (ii)
        the
        name
        and address of the Paying Agent and the Conversion Agent;

       

      (iii)
        that
        Securities as to which a Repurchase Notice has been given may be converted
        if
        they are otherwise convertible only in accordance with Article 7 hereof and
        the
        terms of the Securities if the applicable Repurchase Notice has been withdrawn
        in accordance with the terms of this Indenture;

       

      (iv)
         that
        Securities must be surrendered to the Paying Agent (by effecting book entry
        transfer of the Securities or delivering Certificated Securities, together
        with
        necessary endorsements, as the case may be) to collect
        payment;

       

      (v)
        that
        the
        Repurchase Price for any security as to which a Repurchase Notice has been
        given
        and not withdrawn shall be paid promptly following the later of the Business
        Day
        immediately following the Repurchase Date and the time of surrender of such
        Security as described in clause (iv) above;

       

      (vi)
        the
        procedures the Holder must follow to exercise its right to require the Company
        to repurchase such Holder’s Securities under this Section 5.07 and a brief
        description of that right;

       

      (vii)
        briefly,
        the conversion rights, if any, that exist at the date of the Company Notice
        or
        as a result of the Company Notice with respect to the Securities;

       

      (viii)
        the
        procedures for withdrawing a Repurchase Notice;

       

      (ix) 
        that,
        unless the Company defaults in making payment on Securities for which a
        Repurchase Notice has been submitted, interest, Contingent Interest, if any,
        or
        Additional Interest, if any, on such Securities shall cease to accrue from
        and
        after the Repurchase Date;

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          25

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (x)
        the
        CUSIP, “ISIN” or other similar number(s), as the case may be, of the
        Securities;

       

      (xi)
        that
        any
        Security not properly tendered or otherwise not accepted for repurchase shall
        remain outstanding and continue to accrue interest, Contingent Interest,
        if any,
        and Additional Interest, if any;

       

      (xii)
        that,
        in
        order to withdraw any Repurchase Notice previously delivered by a Holder
        to the
        Paying Agent, the Holder must deliver to the Paying Agent, by 5:00 p.m. (New
        York time) on the day that is the second Business Day prior to the Repurchase
        Date, a written notice of withdrawal specifying (A) the certificate number,
        if
        any, of the Securities in respect of which such notice of withdrawal is being
        submitted, (B) the principal amount of Securities in respect of which such
        notice of withdrawal is being submitted (or if the Securities are not in
        definitive form, the notice of withdrawal must comply with the Applicable
        Procedures), and (C) if the Holder is not withdrawing its Repurchase Notice
        for
        all of its Securities, the principal amount of the Securities which still
        remain
        subject to the original Repurchase Notice; and

       

      (xiii)
        that
        Holders whose Securities are being repurchased only in part will be issued
        new
        Securities equal in principal amount to the portion of the Securities tendered
        (or transferred by book-entry transfer) that is not to be repurchased, which
        portion must be equal to $1,000 in principal amount or an integral multiple
        thereof.

       

      At
        the
        Company’s request, the Trustee shall give such Company Notice to each Holder in
        the Company’s name and at the Company’s expense; provided,
        however,
        that,
        in all cases, the text of such Company Notice shall be prepared by the
        Company.

       

      (b)
        A
        Holder
        may exercise its rights specified in Section 5.07(a) upon delivery to the
        Paying Agent of a written notice of repurchase substantially in the form
        set
        forth in Exhibit A (a “Repurchase
        Notice”) during
        the period beginning at any time from the opening of business on the date
        that
        is 20 Business Days prior to the relevant Repurchase Date until the Close
        of
        Business on the Business Day immediately preceding such Specified Repurchase
        Date, stating:

       

      (i)
        if
        Certificated Securities have been issued, the certificate number(s) of the
        Securities which the Holder shall deliver to be repurchased or, if Certificated
        Securities have not been issued for such Security, the Repurchase Notice
        shall
        comply with the appropriate Depositary procedures for book-entry
        transfer;

       

      (ii)
        the
        portion of the principal amount of the Security which the Holder shall deliver
        to be repurchased, which portion must be in principal amounts of $1,000 or
        an
        integral multiple of $1,000; and

       

      (iii)
        that
        such
        Security shall be repurchased by the Company as of the Repurchase Date pursuant
        to the terms and conditions specified in Section 6 of the Securities and
        in this
        Indenture.

       

      The
        delivery of such Security (together with all necessary endorsements) to the
        Paying Agent at any time after delivery of the Repurchase Notice at the offices
        of the Paying Agent shall be a condition to receipt by the Holder of the
        Specified Repurchase Price therefor; provided,
        however,
        that
        such Repurchase Price shall be so paid pursuant to this Section 5.07 only
        if the
        Security (together with all necessary endorsements) so delivered to the
        Paying Agent shall conform in all respects to the description thereof in
        the
        related Repurchase Notice.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          26

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      The
        Company shall repurchase from the Holder thereof, pursuant to this Section
        5.07,
        a portion of a Security, if the principal amount of such portion is $1,000
        or an
        integral multiple of $1,000. Provisions of this Indenture that apply to the
        repurchase of all of a Security also apply to the repurchase of such portion
        of
        such Security.

       

      Any
        repurchase by the Company contemplated pursuant to the provisions of this
        Section 5.07 shall be consummated by the delivery of the consideration to
        be
        received by the Holder promptly following the later of the Business Day
        immediately following the Specified Repurchase Date and the time of delivery
        of
        the Security (together with all necessary endorsements or notifications of
        book-entry transfer).

       

      Notwithstanding
        anything herein to the contrary, any Holder delivering to the Paying Agent
        the
        Repurchase Notice contemplated by this Section 5.07 shall have the right
        to
        withdraw such Repurchase Notice by delivery of a written notice of withdrawal
        to
        the Paying Agent in accordance with Section 5.09(b) at any time prior to
        the
        Close of Business on the second Business Day prior to the Specified Repurchase
        Date.

       

      The
        Paying Agent shall promptly notify the Company of the receipt by it of any
        Repurchase Notice or written notice of withdrawal thereof.

       

      Section
        5.08   Purchase
        of Securities at Option of the Holder upon a Fundamental
        Change.

       

      (a)  In
        the event a Fundamental Change shall occur at any time when any Securities
        remain outstanding, each Holder shall have the right, at such Holder’s option,
        to require the Company to purchase all of such Holders’ Securities not called
        for redemption or any portion of the principal amount thereof that is equal
        to
        $1,000 or an integral multiple thereof on a date specified by the Company
        (the
“Fundamental
        Change Purchase Date”,
        together with the Specified Purchase Dates, the “Repurchase
        Dates”)
        that
        is not less than 15 nor more than 45 Business Days after the date the Company
        mails the Fundamental Change Company Notice pursuant to Section 5.08(b),
        at a
        purchase price in Cash equal to 100% of the principal amount of the Securities
        tendered for purchase, plus accrued and unpaid interest (including Contingent
        Interest and Additional Interest, if any) on those Securities to, but not
        including, the Fundamental Change Purchase Date (the “Fundamental
        Change Purchase Price”),
        subject to satisfaction by or on behalf of any Holder of the requirements
        set
        forth in Section 5.08(c).

       

      A
        “Fundamental
        Change”
shall
        be deemed to have occurred upon the occurrence of any of the
        following:

       

      (i)  any
        “person” or “group” (other than the Company or its employee benefit plans)
        becomes the “beneficial owner,” directly or indirectly, of shares of the
        Company’s voting stock representing 50% or more of the total voting power of all
        outstanding classes of the Company’s voting stock or has the power, directly or
        indirectly, to elect a majority of the members of the board of directors
        of the
        Company and (a) such person or group files a Schedule 13D or Schedule TO,
        or any
        successor schedule, form or report under the Exchange Act, disclosing the
        same
        or (b) the Company otherwise becomes aware of any such person or
        group;

       

      (ii)  the
        Company consolidates with, or merges with or into, another person, or in
        a
        single transaction or a series of transactions, the Company sells, assigns,
        conveys, transfers, leases or otherwise disposes of all or substantially
        all of
        its assets, or any person consolidates with, or merges with or into, the
        Company, in any such event other than pursuant to a transaction in which
        the
        persons that “beneficially owned” directly or indirectly, the shares of the
        Company’s voting stock immediately prior to such transaction beneficially own,
        directly or indirectly, shares of voting stock representing a majority of
        the
        total voting power of all outstanding classes of voting stock of the surviving
        or transferee person in substantially the same proportion amongst themselves
        (disregarding for this purpose any shares of voting stock (a) received as
        consideration for the capital stock of any person other than the Company
        or
        (b) held prior to such transaction and issued by a person other than the
        Company) as such ownership immediately prior to such transaction;

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          27

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (iii)  the
        common stock into which the Securities are then convertible ceases to be
        listed
        on the NYSE, Nasdaq or another national securities exchange and is not then
        quoted on an established automated over-the-counter trading market in the
        United
        States and no American Depositary Shares or similar instruments for the common
        stock are so listed or quoted in the United States;

       

      (iv)  continuing
        directors cease to constitute a majority of the Company’s board of directors;
        or

       

      (v)  the
        Company’s stockholders approve any plan or proposal for the Company’s
        liquidation or dissolution.

       

      Subject
        to the next succeeding paragraph, “Makewhole
        Fundamental Change”
shall
        be deemed to have occurred upon the occurrence of a Fundamental Change described
        in clauses (i), (ii), and (v) above.

       

      Notwithstanding
        anything to the contrary set forth in this Indenture, a merger or consolidation
        described in clause (ii) above shall be deemed not to constitute a Fundamental
        Change for any purpose under the definition of Fundamental Change if at least
        90% of all the consideration (excluding Cash payments for fractional shares
        and
        Cash payments pursuant to dissenters’ appraisal rights) in the merger or
        consolidation constituting the Fundamental Change consists of common stock
        traded on the NYSE, Nasdaq or another national securities exchange (or which
        shall be so traded when issued or exchanged in connection with such merger
        or
        consolidation) and as a result of such transaction or transactions the
        Securities become convertible solely into Cash in an amount equal to the
        lesser
        of $1,000 and the Conversion Value and, if the Conversion Value is greater
        than
        $1,000, payment of the excess value in Cash, shares or a combination of Cash
        and
        shares in substantially the same manner as described herein.

       

      For
        purposes of this Section 5.08:

       

       

      	·  	
              “person”
                and “group”
                shall have the meanings given to them for purposes of Sections 13(d)
                and
                14(d) of the Exchange Act or any successor provisions, and the term
                “group” includes any group acting for the purpose of acquiring, holding or
                disposing of securities within the meaning of Rule 13d-5(b)(1) under
                the
                Exchange Act, or any successor provision;

            

       

      	·  	
              a
                “beneficial
                owner”
                shall be determined in accordance with Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange
                Act,
                as in effect on the date of this
                Indenture;

            

       

      	·  	
              “beneficially
                own”
                and “beneficially
                owned”
                have meanings correlative to that of beneficial
                owner;

            

       

      	·  	
              “board
                of directors”
                means the board of directors or other governing body charged with
                the
                ultimate management of any person;

            

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          28

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      	·  	
              “capital
                stock”
                means: (i) in the case of a corporation, corporate stock; (ii) in
                the case
                of an association or business entity, any and all shares, interests,
                participations, rights or other equivalents (however designated)
                of
                corporate stock; (iii) in the case of a partnership or limited liability
                company, partnership interests (whether general or limited) or membership
                interests; or (iv) any other interest or participation that confers
                on a
                person the right to receive a share of the profits and losses of,
                or
                distributions of assets of, the issuing
                person;

            

       

      	·  	
              “continuing
                director”
                means a director who either was a member of the Company’s board of
                directors on April 18, 2007, or who becomes a member of the board of
                directors subsequent to that date and whose election, appointment
                or
                nomination for election by the Company’s stockholders is duly approved by
                a majority of the continuing directors on the board of directors
                at the
                time of such approval, either by a specific vote or by approval of
                the
                proxy statement issued by the Company on behalf of the Company’s entire
                board of directors in which such individual is named as a nominee
                for
                director; and

            

       

      	·  	
              “voting
                stock”
                means any class or classes of capital stock or other interests then
                outstanding and normally entitled (without regard to the occurrence
                of any
                contingency) to vote in the election of the board of
                directors.

            

       

      
      

      (b)  Notice
        of Fundamental Change.
        Within
        30 Business Days after the effective date of each Fundamental Change, the
        Company shall notify the Trustee of the Fundamental Change Purchase Date
        and
        shall mail a written notice of the Fundamental Change (the “Fundamental
        Change Company Notice”)
        to
        each Holder (and to beneficial owners as required by applicable law) in
        accordance with Section 16.02. The notice shall include the form of a
        Fundamental Change Purchase Notice to be completed by the Holder and shall
        state, as applicable:

       

      (i)  the
        events causing such Fundamental Change and the date of such Fundamental
        Change;

       

      (ii)  that
        the
        Holder has a right to require the Company to purchase the Holder’s
        Securities;

       

      (iii)  the
        date
        by which the Fundamental Change Purchase Notice must be delivered to the
        Paying
        Agent in order for a Holder to exercise the Fundamental Change purchase
        right;

       

      (iv)  the
        Fundamental Change Purchase Date;

       

      (v)  the
        Fundamental Change Purchase Price;

       

      (vi)  the
        procedures that the Holder must follow to exercise its Fundamental Change
        purchase right under this Section 5.08;

       

      (vii)  the
        names
        and addresses of the Paying Agent and the Conversion Agent;

       

      (viii)  that
        the
        Securities must be surrendered to the Paying Agent to collect payment of
        the
        Fundamental Change Purchase Price;

       

      (ix)  that
        the
        Fundamental Change Purchase Price for any Security as to which a Fundamental
        Change Purchase Notice has been duly given and not withdrawn shall be paid
        promptly following the later of the Fundamental Change Purchase Date and
        the
        time of surrender of such Security;

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          29

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (x)  the
        Conversion Rate (after giving effect to any change in the Conversion Rate
        that
        resulted from the Fundamental Change) and any increase in the Conversion
        Rate
        that shall result from the Fundamental Change;

       

      (xi)  that
        the
        Securities with respect to which a Fundamental Change Purchase Notice has
        been
        given may be converted pursuant to Article 7 of this Indenture only if either
        (i) the Fundamental Change Purchase Notice has been withdrawn in accordance
        with
        the terms of this Indenture or (ii) there shall be a default in the payment
        of
        the Fundamental Change Purchase Price;

       

      (xii)  the
        procedures for withdrawing a Fundamental Change Purchase Notice;

       

      (xiii)  that,
        unless the Company defaults in making payment of such Fundamental Change
        Purchase Price, interest (including Contingent Interest or Additional Interest,
        if any) on Securities surrendered for purchase by the Company shall cease
        to
        accrue on and after the Fundamental Change Purchase Date; and

       

      (xiv)  the
        CUSIP
        number(s) of the Securities.

       

      If
        any of
        the Securities are in the form of a Global Security, then the Company shall
        modify such notice to the extent necessary to accord with the Applicable
        Procedures for repurchases.

       

      At
        the
        Company’s request, the Trustee shall give the Fundamental Change Company Notice
        on behalf of the Company and at the Company’s expense; provided,
        however,
        that
        the Company makes such request at least three Business Days (unless a shorter
        period shall be consented to by the Trustee) prior to the date by which such
        Fundamental Change Company Notice must be given to the Holders in accordance
        with this Section 5.08(b); provided further,
        however,
        that
        the text of such notice shall be prepared by the Company.

       

      (c)  Fundamental
        Change Purchase Notice.
        A
        Holder may exercise its right specified in Section 5.08(a) upon delivery
        of a
        written notice (which shall be in substantially the form included in Exhibit
        A
        hereto and which may be delivered by letter, overnight courier, hand delivery,
        facsimile transmission or in any other written form and, in the case of Global
        Securities, may be delivered electronically or by other means in accordance
        with
        the Applicable Procedures) of the exercise of such rights (a “Fundamental
        Change Purchase Notice”)
        to and
        actually received by a Paying Agent at any time prior to 5:00 p.m., New York
        City time, on the Business Day immediately preceding the Fundamental Change
        Purchase Date. The Fundamental Change Purchase Notice must state:

       

      (i)  if
        Certificated Securities are to be delivered, the certificate numbers of the
        Securities that the Holder shall deliver to be purchased;

       

      (ii)  the
        portion of the principal amount of the Securities that the Holder shall deliver
        to be purchased, which portion must be in principal amounts of $1,000 or
        an
        integral multiple thereof; and

       

      (iii)  that
        such
        Securities shall be purchased by the Company on the Fundamental Change Purchase
        Date pursuant to the terms and conditions specified in this
        Indenture.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          30

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      The
        delivery of such Security to any Paying Agent (together with all necessary
        endorsements) at the office of such Paying Agent shall be a condition to
        the
        receipt by the Holder of the Fundamental Change Purchase Price; provided,
        however,
        that
        such Fundamental Change Purchase Price shall be paid pursuant to this Section
        5.08 only if the Security so delivered to the Paying Agent shall conform
        in all
        material respects to the description thereof in the related Fundamental Change
        Purchase Notice.

       

      The
        Company shall purchase from the Holder thereof, pursuant to this Section
        5.08, a
        portion of a Security if the principal amount of such portion is $1,000 or
        an
        integral multiple of $1,000. Provisions of this Section 5.08 that apply to
        the
        purchase of all of a Security also apply to the purchase of such a portion
        of
        such Security.

       

      Notwithstanding
        anything herein to the contrary, any Holder delivering to the Paying Agent
        the
        Fundamental Change Purchase Notice contemplated by this Section 5.08(c) shall
        have the right to withdraw such Fundamental Change Purchase Notice at any
        time
        prior to 5:00 p.m., New York City time, on the Business Day immediately
        preceding the Fundamental Change Purchase Date by delivery of a written notice
        of withdrawal to the Paying Agent in accordance with Section
        5.09(b).

       

      A
        Paying
        Agent shall promptly notify the Company once each Business Day of the receipt
        by
        it of any Fundamental Change Purchase Notices or written notices of withdrawal
        thereof.

       

      (d)  Notwithstanding
        anything herein to the contrary, in the case of Global Securities, any
        Fundamental Change Purchase Notice may be delivered or withdrawn, and such
        Securities may be surrendered or delivered for purchase, in accordance with
        the
        Applicable Procedures.

       

      Section
        5.09   Effect
        of Repurchase Notice or Fundamental Change Purchase Notice.

       

      (a)
        Upon
        receipt by any Paying Agent of a Repurchase Notice or a Fundamental Change
        Purchase Notice, the Holder of the Security in respect of which such Repurchase
        Notice or Fundamental Change Purchase Notice, as the case may be, was given
        shall (unless such Repurchase Notice or Fundamental Change Purchase Notice
        is
        withdrawn as specified below) thereafter be entitled to receive the Repurchase
        Price or Fundamental Change Purchase Price, as the case may be, with respect
        to
        such Security. Such Fundamental Change Purchase Price shall be paid to such
        Holder promptly following the later of (i) the Fundamental Change Purchase
        Date
        (provided such Holder has satisfied the conditions in Section 5.08(c)) with
        respect to such Security or Repurchase Date (provided such Holder has satisfied
        the conditions of Section 5.07) with respect to such Security, as the case
        may
        be, and (ii) the time of delivery of such Security to a Paying Agent by the
        Holder thereof in the manner required by Section 5.07 or 5.08(c). A Security
        in
        respect of which a Repurchase Notice or a Fundamental Change Purchase Notice
        has
        been given by the Holder thereof may not be converted pursuant to Article
        7
        hereof on or after the date of the delivery of such Repurchase Notice or
        Fundamental Change Purchase Notice, unless either (i) such Repurchase Notice
        or
        Fundamental Change Purchase Notice has first been validly withdrawn in
        accordance with Section 5.09(b); or (ii) there shall be a default in the
        payment
        of the Repurchase Price or Fundamental Change Purchase Price, provided,
        that
        the conversion right with respect to such Security shall terminate at 5:00
        p.m.,
        New York City time, on the date such default is cured and such Security is
        purchased in accordance herewith.

       

      (b)  A
        Repurchase Notice or Fundamental Change Purchase Notice may be withdrawn
        by any
        Holder delivering such Fundamental Change Purchase Notice upon delivery of
        a
        written notice of withdrawal (which may be delivered by mail, overnight courier,
        hand delivery, facsimile transmission or in any other written form and, in
        the
        case of Global Securities, may be delivered electronically or by other means
        in
        accordance with the Applicable Procedures) to and actually received by Paying
        Agent at any time prior to 5:00 p.m., New York City time, on the second Business
        Day immediately preceding the Repurchase Date or the Business Day immediately
        preceding the Fundamental Change Purchase Date, specifying:

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          31

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (i)  if
        Certificated Securities are to be withdrawn, the certificate numbers of the
        Securities in respect of which such notice of withdrawal is being
        submitted;

       

      (ii)  the
        principal amount of the Securities in respect of which such notice of withdrawal
        is being submitted, which principal amount must be $1,000 or an integral
        multiple thereof; and

       

      (iii)  the
        principal amount, if any, of the Securities that remains subject to the original
        Repurchase Notice or Fundamental Change Purchase Notice, as the case may
        be, and
        that has been or shall be delivered for purchase by the Company.

       

      Section
        5.10   Deposit
        of Repurchase Price or Fundamental Change Purchase Price.

       

      Prior
        to
        10:00 a.m., New York City time, on a Repurchase Date, the Company shall deposit
        with the Paying Agent (or if the Company or an Affiliate of the Company is
        acting as the Paying Agent, shall segregate and hold in trust as provided
        in
        Section 2.04) an amount in Cash (in immediately available funds) sufficient
        to
        pay the aggregate Repurchase Price or Fundamental Change Purchase Price,
        as the
        case may be, of all the Securities or portions thereof that are to be purchased
        on that Repurchase Date.

       

      If
        a
        Paying Agent holds, in accordance with the terms hereof, at 10:00 a.m., New
        York
        City time, on a Repurchase Date, Cash sufficient to pay the aggregate Repurchase
        Price or Fundamental Change Purchase Price, as the case may be, of all
        Securities for which a Repurchase Notice or Fundamental Change Purchase Notice
        has been delivered and not validly withdrawn in accordance with this Indenture,
        then, on and after such Repurchase Date, such Securities shall cease to be
        outstanding and interest (including Contingent Interest or Additional Interest,
        if any) on such Securities shall cease to accrue, whether or not such Securities
        are delivered to the Paying Agent, and the rights of the Holders in respect
        thereof shall terminate (other than the right to receive the Repurchase Price
        or
        Fundamental Change Purchase Price, as applicable, upon delivery of such
        Securities by their Holders to the Paying Agent).

       

      Section
        5.11   Securities
        Purchased in Part.

       

      Any
        Certificated Security that is to be purchased only in part shall be surrendered
        at the office of a Paying Agent (with, if the Company or the Trustee so
        requires, due endorsement by, or a written instrument of transfer in form
        reasonably satisfactory to the Company and the Trustee duly executed by,
        the
        Holder thereof or such Holder’s attorney duly authorized in writing), and
        promptly after a Repurchase Date, the Company shall issue and the Trustee
        shall,
        upon receipt of a Company Order (which the Company agrees to deliver promptly),
        authenticate and deliver to the Holder of such Security, without service
        charge,
        a new Security or Securities, of such authorized denomination or denominations
        as may be requested by such Holder, in aggregate principal amount equal to,
        and
        in exchange for, the portion of the principal amount of the Security so
        surrendered that is not purchased.

       

      Section
        5.12   Repayment
        to the Company.

       

      To
        the
        extent that the aggregate amount of Cash deposited by the Company pursuant
        to
        Section 5.10 exceeds the aggregate Repurchase Price or Fundamental Change
        Purchase Price, as the case may be, of the Securities or portions thereof
        that
        the Company is obligated to purchase on the applicable Repurchase Date, then,
        within one day after the applicable Repurchase Date, the Paying Agent shall
        return any such excess Cash to the Company.

       

      Section
        5.13   Compliance
        with Securities Laws upon Purchase of Securities.

       

      When
        complying with the provisions of Article 5 hereof and subject to any exemptions
        available under applicable law, the Company shall:

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          32

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (a)  comply
        with Rule 13e-4, Rule 14e-1 and any other tender offer rules under the Exchange
        Act that may then be applicable; 

       

      (b)  file
        a
        Schedule TO or other successor or similar schedule, if required, under the
        Exchange Act; and

       

      (c)  otherwise
        comply with all federal and state securities laws so as to permit the rights
        and
        obligations in connection with any purchase pursuant to this Article 5 to
        be
        exercised in the time and in the manner specified herein.

       

       

      ARTICLE
        6  

       

      [Reserved]

       

      ARTICLE
        7  

       

      Conversion

       

      Section
        7.01   Conversion
        Privilege.

       

      (a)
        Subject
        to and upon compliance with the provisions of this Article 7, at the option
        of
        the Holder thereof, any Security, in whole or in part, may be converted into
        the
        Settlement Amount, at a rate (the “Conversion
        Rate”)
        of
        20.00 shares of Common Stock per $1,000 principal amount of Securities, subject
        to adjustment pursuant to Section 7.05, prior to the Close of Business on
        the
        Business Day immediately preceding the Maturity Date.

       

      (b)  The
        Securities shall be convertible (i) at any time on or after March 1, 2027
        and prior to the Close of Business on the Business Day immediately preceding
        the
        Maturity Date and (ii) prior to March 1, 2027, only upon the
        occurrence of one of the following events:

       

      (i)  During
        any calendar quarter after the calendar quarter ending June 30, 2007 and
        only
        during such calendar quarter, if the Closing Price of the Common Stock for
        twenty (20) or more Trading Days in a period of 30 consecutive Trading Days
        ending on the last Trading Day of the preceding calendar quarter is more
        than
        130% of the Conversion Price on such last Trading Day. Commencing July 1,
        2007
        and at the beginning of each calendar quarter thereafter, the Conversion
        Agent
        shall determine, on the Company’s behalf, whether the Securities are convertible
        as the result of the satisfaction of this condition in the preceding calendar
        quarter and shall promptly notify the Company and the Trustee accordingly.
        The
        Trustee shall, in turn, notify the Holders in each calendar quarter but in
        no
        event later than seven (7) days after the beginning of such calendar
        quarter.

       

      (ii)  During
        any five Business Day period after any five consecutive Trading Day period
        (the
“Measurement
        Period”)
        in
        which the Trading Price per $1,000 principal amount of Securities for each
        day
        of such Measurement Period was less than 98% of the product of the Closing
        Price
        on such date and the Conversion Rate on such date, all as determined by the
        Trustee. The Trustee shall have no obligation to determine the Trading Price
        of
        Securities unless requested by the Company to do so in writing, and the Company
        shall have no obligation to make such request unless a Holder provides the
        Company with reasonable evidence that the Trading Price per $1,000 principal
        amount of Securities would be less than 98% of the product of (a) the Conversion
        Rate of the Securities and (b) the Closing Price at such time, at which time
        the
        Company shall instruct the Trustee to determine the Trading Price of the
        Securities beginning on the next Trading Day and on each successive Trading
        Day
        until the Trading Price per $1,000 principal amount of Securities is greater
        than or equal to 98% of the product of (a) the Conversion Rate of the Securities
        and (b) the Closing Price on such date. If the Trading Price condition set
        forth
        in this Section 7.01(b)(ii) has been met, the Company shall so notify the
        Holders. If, at any time after the Trading Price condition set forth in this
        Section 7.01(b)(ii) has been met, the Trading Price per $1,000 principal
        amount
        of Securities is greater than or equal to 98% of the product of (a) the
        Conversion Rate of the Securities and (b) the Closing Price on such date,
        the
        Company shall so notify the Holders.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          33

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (iii)  If
        any of
        the Securities are called for redemption pursuant to Section 5.01 at any
        time
        prior to the Close of Business on the Business Day prior to the Redemption
        Date,
        even if the Securities are not otherwise convertible at such time.

       

      (iv)  If
        the
        Company elects to distribute to all holders of Common Stock:

       

      (A)  certain
        rights (including rights under a stockholder rights plan) or warrants entitling
        them to purchase, for a period expiring within 45 days of the date of issuance,
        shares of Common Stock at less than the average of the Closing Price for
        the
        five consecutive Trading Day period ending on the Trading Day preceding the
        announcement of such distribution; or

       

      (B)  cash,
        assets, debt securities or certain rights to purchase the Company’s securities,
        which distribution has a per share value exceeding 7.5% of the Closing Price
        of
        the Common Stock on the Trading Day immediately preceding the announcement
        of
        such distribution;

       

      then,
        in
        either case, the Company shall notify the Holders at least 25 Trading Days
        prior
        to the ex-dividend date for such distribution; provided
        that if
        the Company distributes rights pursuant to a stockholder rights plan, it
        shall
        notify the holders of the Securities on the Business Day after the Company
        is
        required to give notice generally to its stockholders pursuant to such
        stockholder rights plan if such date is less than 25 Trading Days prior to
        the
        date of such distribution. Once the Company has given the notice, Holders
        may
        surrender their Securities for conversion at any time until the earlier of
        the
        Close of Business on the Business Day prior to the ex-dividend date or the
        Company’s announcement that such distribution will not take place.
        Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Holder may not convert its Securities under
        this Section 7.01(b)(iv) if the Holder participates in such distribution
        due to
        the participation of Holders in such distribution.

       

      (v)  If
        the
        Company is a party to any transaction or an event occurs that constitutes
        a
        Fundamental Change, a Holder may surrender Securities for conversion at any
        time
        from and after the date which is ten (10) Trading Days prior to the anticipated
        effective date of such Fundamental Change until and including the Trading
        Day
        prior to the related Fundamental Change Repurchase Date. The Company shall
        give
        notice in writing to all Holders and the Trustee of a Fundamental Change
        no
        later than ten (10) Trading Days prior to the anticipated effective date
        of the
        Fundamental Change that the Company knows or reasonably should know will
        occur.
        If the Company does not know, and should not reasonably know, that a Fundamental
        Change will occur until a date that is within ten (10) Trading Days before
        the
        anticipated effective date of such Fundamental Change, the Company shall
        give
        notice in writing to all Holders and the Trustee of the Fundamental Change
        promptly after the Company has knowledge of such Fundamental Change. The
        Board
        of Directors shall determine in good faith the anticipated effective date
        of the
        Fundamental Change, and such determination shall be conclusive and binding
        on
        the Holders and shall be publicly announced by the Company not later than
        two
        Business Days prior to the end of such 10 Trading Day period.

       

      (c)  If
        a
        Holder elects to convert Securities in connection with a Makewhole Fundamental
        Change that has an Effective Date prior to May 1, 2014, the Company shall
        increase the Conversion Rate by an additional number of shares of Common
        Stock
        (the “Additional
        Shares”)
        set
        forth in Exhibit B. For purposes of this Section 7.01, any conversion occurring
        at a time when the Securities would be convertible in light of the expected
        or
        actual occurrence of a Makewhole Fundamental Change shall be deemed to have
        occurred “in connection” with a Makewhole Fundamental Change to the extent that
        such conversion is effected during the time period specified in Section
        7.01(b)(v) (regardless of whether the provisions of Section 7.01(b) shall
        apply
        to such conversion).

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          34

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      The
        increase in the Conversion Rate, expressed as a number of Additional Shares
        per
        $1,000 principal amount of Securities, will be determined by the Company
        by
        reference to the table attached as Exhibit B hereto, based on the date the
        Makewhole Fundamental Change occurs or becomes effective (the “Effective
        Date”)
        and the
        price paid or deemed to be paid per share of Common Stock in the transaction
        constituting the Makewhole Fundamental Change (the “Stock
        Price”);
        provided
        that if
        a Holder of the Common Stock receives only Cash in connection with a Fundamental
        Change described in clause (ii) of the definition thereof contained in Section
        5.08(a), the Stock Price shall be the Cash amount paid per share. In all
        other
        cases, the Stock Price shall be the average of the Closing Price of the Common
        Stock over the five consecutive Trading Day period ending on the Trading
        Day
        preceding the Effective Date of the Fundamental Change, provided
        that if
        the Stock Price is between two Stock Price amounts in the table or the Effective
        Date is between two Effective Dates in the table, the Company shall determine
        the increased Conversion Rate by a straight-line interpolation between the
        number of Additional Shares set forth for the next higher and next lower
        Stock
        Price amounts and the next earliest and next latest Effective Dates, based
        on a
        365 day year, as applicable. The Stock Price set forth in the first column
        of
        the table attached as Exhibit B hereto shall be adjusted as of any date on
        which
        the Conversion Rate is adjusted pursuant to Section 7.05. The adjusted Stock
        Prices shall equal the Stock Prices applicable immediately prior to such
        adjustment, multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the Conversion
        Rate immediately prior to the adjustment giving rise to the Stock Price
        adjustment and the denominator of which is the Conversion Rate as so adjusted.
        The number of Additional Shares shall be adjusted in the same manner as the
        Conversion Rate is adjusted pursuant to Section 7.05. If (1) the Stock Price
        is
        greater than $150.00 per share of Common Stock (subject to adjustment in
        the
        same manner as the Stock Price) no increase in the Conversion Rate will be
        made,
        and (2) the Stock Price is less than $36.05 per share (subject to adjustment
        in
        the same manner as the Stock Price), no increase in the Conversion Rate will
        be
        made. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in no event will the number of Additional
        Shares in connection with a Makewhole Fundamental Change exceed 7.74 per
        $1,000
        principal amount of Securities (subject to adjustment in the same manner
        as set
        forth in Section 7.05).

       

      (d)  If
        the
        Company is required to increase the Conversion Rate in connection with a
        Makewhole Fundamental Change pursuant to clause (c) above, Securities
        surrendered for conversion will be settled as follows (subject in all respects
        to the provisions set forth in Section 7.13):

       

      (i)  If
        the
        last day of the applicable Conversion Reference Period related to Securities
        surrendered for conversion is prior to the third Trading Day preceding the
        anticipated Effective Date of such Makewhole Fundamental Change, the Company
        shall settle such conversion as described in Section 7.13 by delivering the
        amount of consideration due (as described in Section 7.13, based on the
        Conversion Rate without regard to the number of Additional Shares to be added
        to
        the Conversion Rate as provided in clause (c) above) on the third Trading
        Day
        immediately following the last day of the applicable Conversion Reference
        Period. In addition, if a Makewhole Fundamental Change occurs, as soon as
        practicable following the Effective Date of such Makewhole Fundamental Change,
        the Company shall deliver the increase in such amount of Cash, shares of
        Common
        Stock or a combination of Cash and shares of Common Stock or Reference Property,
        if any, as the case may be, as if the Conversion Rate had been increased
        by such
        number of Additional Shares during the related Conversion Reference Period
        (and
        based upon the relevant Daily Conversion Value during such Conversion Reference
        Period). If such increased amount results in an increase to the amount of
        Cash
        to be paid to Holders, the Company shall pay such increase in Cash, and if
        such
        increased Settlement Amount results in an increase to the amount of Cash,
        shares
        of Common Stock or a combination of Cash and share of Common Stock, at the
        Company’s option, the Company will deliver such increase by delivering Cash,
        shares of Common Stock or a combination of Cash and shares of Common Stock
        or
        Reference Property based on such increase; and

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          35

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (ii)  If
        the
        last day of the applicable Conversion Reference Period related to the Securities
        surrendered for conversion is on or following the third Trading Day preceding
        the anticipated Effective Date of the Makewhole Fundamental Change, the Company
        shall settle such conversion as described in Section 7.13 (based on the
        Conversion Rate as increased by the Additional Shares as provided in clause
        (c)
        above) on the later to occur of (A) the Effective Date of the transaction
        and (B) the third Trading Day immediately following the last day of the
        applicable Conversion Reference Period.

       

      Section
        7.02   Conversion
        Procedure.

       

      (a)
        The
        right of conversion attaching to any Security may be exercised at any time
        during which conversion is permitted in accordance with Section 7.01 (i)
        if such
        Security is represented by a Global Security, by book-entry transfer to the
        Conversion Agent through the facilities of the Depositary in accordance with
        the
        Applicable Procedures, or (ii) if such Security is represented by a Certificated
        Security, by delivery of such Security at the specified office of the Conversion
        Agent, accompanied, in either case, by: (1) a duly signed and completed
        conversion notice, in the form as set forth on the reverse of Security attached
        hereto as Exhibit A (a “Conversion
        Notice”);
        (2)
        if such Certificated Security has been lost, stolen, destroyed or mutilated,
        a
        notice to the Conversion Agent in accordance with Section 2.07 regarding
        the
        loss, theft, destruction or mutilation of the Security; (3) appropriate
        endorsements and transfer documents if required by the Conversion Agent;
        and (4)
        payment of any tax or duty, in accordance with Section 7.03, which may be
        payable in respect of any transfer involving the issue or delivery of the
        Common
        Stock in the name of a Person other than the Holder of the Security. The
        date on
        which the Holder satisfies all of those requirements is the “Conversion
        Date.”
The
        Securities shall be deemed to be converted immediately prior to the Close
        of
        Business on the Conversion Date. The Company shall deliver to the Holder
        through
        a Conversion Agent Cash and, if applicable, a certificate for the number
        of
        whole shares of Common Stock issuable upon the conversion (and Cash in lieu
        of
        any fractional shares pursuant to Section 7.13(h)) on the applicable date
        specified for such delivery in Section 7.13(g) hereof.

       

      (b)  The
        person in whose name the Security is registered shall, if shares of Common
        Stock
        are issuable upon conversion and if the Company so elects to issue all or
        any
        portion of such shares in lieu of paying Cash, be deemed to be a stockholder
        of
        record on the Conversion Date; provided,
        however,
        that no
        surrender of a Security or satisfaction of the other conditions in Section
        7.02(a) on any date when the stock transfer books of the Company shall be
        closed
        shall be effective to constitute the person or persons entitled to receive
        the
        shares of Common Stock upon such conversion as the record holder or holders
        of
        such shares of Common Stock on such date, but such surrender shall, provided
        that all such conditions have been satisfied, be effective to constitute
        the
        person or persons entitled to receive such shares of Common Stock as the
        record
        holder or holders thereof for all purposes at the Close of Business on the
        next
        succeeding day on which such stock transfer books are open. Upon conversion
        of a
        Security, such person shall no longer be a Holder of such Security. No separate
        payment or adjustment will be made for accrued and unpaid interest (including
        Contingent Interest or Additional Interest, if any) on a converted Security
        or
        for dividends or distributions on shares of Common Stock issued upon conversion
        of a Security. By delivering to the holder the Cash, shares or combination
        of
        Cash and shares of Common Stock issuable upon conversion, together with a
        cash
        payment in lieu of any fractional shares, the Company will satisfy its
        obligation with respect to the conversion of the Securities. Accordingly,
        any
        accrued but unpaid interest (including Contingent Interest or Additional
        Interest, if any) will be deemed paid in full upon conversion, rather than
        cancelled, forfeited or extinguished.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          36

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (c)  Upon
        surrender of a Security that is converted in part, the Company shall execute,
        and the Trustee shall, upon receipt of a Company Order, authenticate and
        deliver
        to the Holder, a new Security equal in principal amount of the unconverted
        portion of the Security surrendered.

       

      Section
        7.03   Taxes
        on Conversion.

       

      If
        a
        Holder converts a Security, the Company shall pay any documentary, stamp
        or
        similar issue or transfer taxes or duties relating to the issuance or delivery
        of shares of Common Stock upon exercise of such conversion rights. However,
        the
        Holder shall pay any tax or duty which may be payable relating to any transfer
        involving the issuance or delivery of shares of Common Stock in a name other
        than the Holder’s name. The Conversion Agent may refuse to deliver the
        certificate representing shares of Common Stock being issued in a name other
        than the Holder’s name until the Conversion Agent receives a sum sufficient to
        pay any tax or duties which will be due because the shares are to be issued
        in a
        name other than the Holder’s name. Nothing herein shall preclude any tax
        withholding required by law or regulation.

       

      Section
        7.04   Company
        to Provide Stock.

       

      (a)
        The
        Company shall, prior to the issuance of any Securities hereunder, and from
        time
        to time as may be necessary, reserve at all times and keep available, free
        from
        preemptive rights, out of its authorized but unissued Common Stock, a sufficient
        number of shares of Common Stock deliverable upon conversion of all of the
        Securities.

       

      (b)  All
        shares of Common Stock that may be issued upon conversion of the Securities
        shall be newly issued shares or shares held in the treasury of the Company,
        shall be duly authorized, validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable and
        shall
        be free of any preemptive rights and free of any lien or adverse
        claim.

       

      (c)  The
        Company shall comply with all applicable securities laws regulating the offer
        and delivery of any Common Stock upon conversion of Securities and, if the
        Common Stock is then listed or quoted on the NYSE, the Nasdaq or any other
        United States national or regional securities exchange or other market, shall
        list or cause to have quoted and keep listed and quoted the shares of Common
        Stock issuable upon conversion of the Notes to the extent permitted or required
        by the rules of such exchange or market; provided,
        however,
        that,
        if the rules of such automated quotation system or exchange permit the Company
        to defer the listing of such Common Stock until the first conversion of the
        Securities into Common Stock in accordance with the provisions of this
        Indenture, the Company covenants to list such Common Stock issuable upon
        conversion of the Securities in accordance with the requirements of such
        automated quotation system or exchange at such time.

       

      Section
        7.05   Adjustment
        of Conversion Rate.

       

      The
        Conversion Rate shall be adjusted from time to time by the Company if any
        of the
        following events occur, except that the Company will not make any adjustment
        if
        Holders of Securities may participate, as a result of holding the Securities,
        in
        the transactions described without having to convert their
        Securities:

       

      (a)  If
        the
        Company, at any time or from time to time while any of the Securities are
        outstanding, issues shares of its Common Stock as a dividend or distribution
        on
        shares of Common Stock, or if the Company effects subdivisions, combinations
        or
        reclassifications in respect of the Common Stock, then the Conversion Rate
        shall
        be adjusted based on the following formula:

       

      
        	
                CR'=CR0
                  x
                  

              	
                OS'

              
	
                OS0

              

      

      

      
        
          
          

        

        
          37

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

       

      where

       

      
        	
                CR0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Conversion Rate in effect immediately prior to the Ex Date of such
                  dividend or distribution, or effective date of such subdivision,
                  combination or reclassification, as applicable;

              
	
                CR'

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Conversion Rate in effect on and after the Ex Date or effective
                  date;

              
	
                OS0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  number of shares of Common Stock outstanding immediately prior
                  the Ex Date
                  or effective date; and

              
	
                OS'

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  number of shares of Common Stock outstanding on and after the Ex
                  Date or
                  effective date.

              

      

       

      Such
        adjustment shall become effective immediately after 9:00 a.m., New York City
        time, on the Business Day following the record date for such dividend or
        distribution, or the date fixed for determination for such subdivision,
        combination or reclassification. The Company will not pay any dividend or
        make
        any distribution on shares of Common Stock held in treasury by the Company.
        If
        any dividend
        or
        distribution of the type described in this ‎Section 7.05(a) is declared but not
        so paid or made, or the outstanding shares of Common Stock are not subdivided,
        combined or reclassified, as the case may be, the Conversion Rate shall again
        be
        adjusted to
        the
        Conversion Rate which would then be in effect if such dividend, distribution,
        subdivision, combination or reclassification had not been declared.

       

      (b)  If
        the
        Company, at any time or from time to time while any of the Securities are
        outstanding, issues to all holders of its outstanding shares of Common Stock
        any
        rights or warrants entitling them for a period of not more than 45 calendar
        days
        from the issuance date thereof to subscribe for or purchase shares of Common
        Stock at a price per share less than the average of the Closing Price for
        the
        five consecutive Trading Day period ending on the Business Day immediately
        preceding the date of announcement of such issuance, the Conversion Rate
        shall
        be adjusted based on the following formula:

       

      
        	
                CR'
                  = CR0
                  x
                  

              	
                OS0
                  +
                  X

              
	
                OS0
                  +
                  Y

              

      

      where

       

      
        	
                CR0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Conversion Rate in effect immediately prior to the Ex Date for
                  such
                  issuance; 

              
	
                CR'

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Conversion Rate in effect on and after the Ex Date for such
                  issuance;

              
	
                OS0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  number of shares of Common Stock outstanding on and after the Ex
                  Date for
                  such issuance;

              
	
                X

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  total number of shares of Common Stock issuable pursuant to such
                  rights or
                  warrants; and

              
	
                Y

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  number of shares of Common Stock equal to the aggregate price payable
                  to
                  exercise such rights or warrants divided by the average of the
                  Closing
                  Price for the five consecutive Trading Day period ending on the
                  Business
                  Day immediately preceding the date of announcement of the issuance
                  of such
                  rights or warrants.

              

      

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          38

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Such
        adjustment shall be successively made whenever any such rights or warrants
        are
        issued and shall become effective immediately after 9:00 a.m., New York City
        time, on the Business Day following the record date of such issuance. To
        the
        extent that shares of Common Stock are not delivered pursuant to such rights
        or
        warrants upon the expiration or termination of such rights or warrants, the
        Conversion Rate shall be readjusted to the Conversion Rate which would then
        be
        in effect had the adjustments made upon the issuance of such rights or warrants
        been made on the basis of the delivery of only the number of shares of Common
        Stock actually delivered. In the event that such rights or warrants are not
        so
        issued, the Conversion Rate shall again be adjusted to be the Conversion
        Rate
        which would then be in effect if the announcement with respect to such rights,
        warrants or convertible securities had not been made.

       

      In
        determining whether any rights or warrants entitle the holders to subscribe
        for
        or purchase shares of Common Stock at less than the average of the Closing
        Price
        for the five consecutive Trading Day period ending on the Business Day
        immediately preceding the date of announcement of such issuance, and in
        determining the aggregate offering price of such shares of Common Stock,
        there
        shall be taken into account any consideration received by the Company for
        such
        rights or warrants and any amount payable on exercise thereof, the value
        of such
        consideration, if other than Cash, to be determined in good faith by the
        Board
        of Directors.

       

      (c)  In
        case
        the Company shall, by dividend
        or
        otherwise, distribute to all holders of its Common Stock shares of any class
        of
        capital stock of the Company (other than distributions of Common Stock covered
        by ‎Section 7.05(a)), evidences of its Indebtedness or other assets or property
        of the Company
        (including securities, but excluding (i) dividends and distributions and
        rights
        or warrants covered by Section 7.05(a), Section 7.05(b) or Section 7.05(e)
        (for
        which an adjustment is made to the Conversion Rate), (ii) to the extent provided
        in Section 7.07, rights distributed pursuant to a stockholder rights plan
        and
        (iii) cash covered by Section 7.05(d) (any of such shares of Capital Stock,
        Indebtedness, Cash or other assets or property hereinafter in this Section
        7.05(c) called the “Distributed
        Property”),
        then,
        in each such case the Conversion Rate shall be adjusted based on the following
        formula:

       

      
        	
                CR'
                  = CR0
                  x
                  

              	
                SP0

              
	
                SP0
                  -
                  FMV

              

      

      where

       

      
        	
                CR0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Conversion Rate in effect immediately prior to the Ex Date for
                  such
                  distribution;

              
	
                CR'

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Conversion Rate in effect on and after the Ex Date for such
                  distribution;

              
	
                SP0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  average of the Closing Price over the five consecutive Trading
                  Day period
                  ending on the Trading Day immediately preceding the Ex Date for
                  such
                  distribution; and

              
	
                FMV

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  fair market value (as determined by the Company’s Board of Directors) of
                  the shares of capital stock of the Company, evidences of Indebtedness,
                  assets or property distributed with respect to each outstanding
                  share of
                  Common Stock on the Ex Date for such
                  distribution.

              

      

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          39

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Such
        adjustment shall become effective immediately prior to 9:00 a.m., New York
        City
        time, on the Business Day following the date fixed for the determination
        of
        stockholders entitled to receive such distribution; provided
        that if
        the then fair market value (as so determined) of the portion of the Distributed
        Property so distributed applicable to one share of Common Stock is equal
        to or
        greater than SP0
        as set
        forth above, in lieu of the foregoing adjustment, adequate provision shall
        be
        made so that each Holder shall have the right to receive, for each $1,000
        principal amount of Securities upon conversion, the amount of Distributed
        Property such holder would have received had such holder owned a number of
        shares of Common Stock equal to the Conversion Rate on the record date. If
        such
        dividend or distribution is not so paid or made, the Conversion Rate shall
        again
        be adjusted to be the Conversion Rate that would then be in effect if such
        record date had not been fixed. If the Board of Directors determines
        the
        fair
        market value of any distribution for purposes of this ‎Section 7.05(c) by
        reference to the actual or when issued trading market for any securities,
        it
        shall in doing so consider the prices in such market over the same period
        used
        in computing the average
        of
        the Closing Price of the Common Stock.

       

      With
        respect to an adjustment pursuant to this Section 7.05(c) where there has
        been a
        payment of a dividend or other distribution on the Common Stock consisting
        of
        shares of capital stock of any class or series, or similar equity interest,
        of
        or relating to a Subsidiary or other business unit (a “Spin-Off,”
and
        any such dividend or distribution of Common Stock, shares of capital stock
        or
        equity interests being “Spin-Off
        Securities”),
        the
        Conversion Rate in effect immediately before 5:00 p.m., New York City time,
        on
        the fifteenth Trading Day immediately following, and including, the Ex Date
        for
        the distribution of the Spin-Off Securities shall be increased based on the
        following formula:

       

      
        	
                CR'
                  = CR0
                  x
                  

              	
                FMV0
                  +
                  MP0

              
	
                MP0

              

      

      where

       

      
        	
                CR0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Conversion Rate in effect immediately prior to the Close of Business
                  on
                  the fifteenth Trading Day immediately following, and including,
                  the Ex
                  Date for the distribution of the Spin-Off Securities;

              
	
                CR'

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Conversion Rate in effect from and after the Close of Business
                  on the
                  Trading Day immediately following, and including, the Ex Date for
                  the
                  distribution of the Spin-Off Securities;

              
	
                FMV0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  average of the Closing Price of the capital stock or similar equity
                  interest distributed to holders of Common Stock applicable to one
                  share of
                  Common Stock over the first 10 consecutive Trading Day period commencing
                  on, and including, the fifth Trading Day after the Ex Date for
                  such
                  distribution; and

              
	
                MP0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  average of the Closing Price of Common Stock over the first 10
                  consecutive
                  Trading Day period commencing on, and including, the fifth Trading
                  Day
                  after the Ex Date for such
                  distribution.

              

      

       

      Such
        adjustment shall occur at the Close of Business on the fifteenth Trading
        Day
        from, and including, the Ex Date for the distribution of the Spin-Off
        Securities; provided, however, that the Company may in lieu of the foregoing
        adjustment elect to make adequate provision so that each Holder of Securities
        shall have the right to receive upon conversion thereof the amount of such
        Spin-Off Securities that such Holder of Securities would have received if
        such
        Securities had been converted on the record date with respect to such
        distribution.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          40

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Rights
        or
        warrants distributed by the Company to all holders of Common Stock entitling
        the
        holders thereof to subscribe for, purchase or convert into shares of the
        Company’s capital stock (either initially or under certain circumstances), which
        rights or warrants, until the occurrence of a specified event or events
        (“Trigger
        Event”):
        (x)
        are deemed to be transferred with such shares of Common Stock; (y) are not
        exercisable; and (z) are also issued in respect of future issuances of Common
        Stock, shall be deemed not to have been distributed for purposes of this
        ‎Section 7.05(b), (and no adjustment to the Conversion Rate under this ‎‎Section
        7.05(b), will be required) until the occurrence of the earliest Trigger Event,
        whereupon such rights or warrants shall be deemed to have been distributed
        and
        an appropriate adjustment (if any is required) to the Conversion Rate shall
        be
        made under this ‎Section 7.05(b). If any such right or warrant, including any
        such existing rights or warrants distributed prior to the date of this
        Indenture, are subject to events, upon the occurrence
        of which
        such rights or warrants become exercisable to purchase different securities,
        evidences of Indebtedness or other assets, then the date of the occurrence
        of
        any and each such event shall be deemed to be the date of distribution and
        record date with respect to new rights or warrants with such rights (and
        a
        termination or expiration of the existing rights or warrants without exercise
        by
        any of the holders thereof). In addition, in the event of any distribution
        (or
        deemed distribution) of rights or warrants or any Trigger Event or other
        event
        (of the type described in the preceding sentence) with respect thereto that
        was
        counted for purposes of calculating a distribution amount for which an
        adjustment to the Conversion Rate under this Section 7.05(b) was made, (1)
        in
        the case of any such rights or warrants that shall all have been redeemed
        or
        repurchased without exercise by any holders thereof, the Conversion Rate
        shall
        be readjusted upon such final redemption or repurchase to give effect to
        such
        distribution or Trigger Event, as the case may be, as though it were a cash
        distribution, equal to the per share redemption or repurchase price received
        by
        a holder or holders of Common Stock with respect to such rights or warrants
        (assuming such holder had retained such rights or warrants), made to all
        holders
        of Common Stock as of the date of such redemption or repurchase, and (2)
        in the
        case of such rights or warrants that shall have expired or been terminated
        without exercise by any holders thereof, the Conversion Rate shall be readjusted
        as if such rights or warrants had not been issued.

       

      For
        purposes of this Section 7.05(c), Section 7.05(a) and Section 7.05(b), any
        dividend or distribution to which this Section 7.05(c) is applicable that
        also
        includes shares of Common Stock, or rights or warrants to subscribe for or
        purchase shares of Common Stock to which Section 7.05(a) or 7.05(b) applies
        (or
        both), shall be deemed instead to be (1) a dividend or distribution of the
        evidences of Indebtedness, assets or shares of capital stock other than such
        shares of Common Stock or rights or warrants to which Section 7.05(a) or
        7.05(b)
        applies (and any Conversion Rate adjustment required by this Section 7.05(c)
        with respect to such dividend or distribution shall then be made) immediately
        followed by (2) a dividend or distribution of such shares of Common Stock
        or
        such rights or warrants to which Section 7.05(a) or 7.05(b) applies (and
        any
        further Conversion Rate adjustment required by Section 7.05(a) and 7.05(b)
        with
        respect to such dividend or distribution shall then be made), except (A)
        the Ex
        Date of such dividend or distribution shall be substituted for “the Ex Date,”
“the Ex Date or effective date,” “the day following the record date for such
        dividend or distribution, or the date fixed for determination for such
        subdivision, combination or reclassification,” “the Ex Date for such issuance”
and “the date fixed for the determination of stockholders entitled to receive
        such rights and warrants” within the meaning of Section 7.05(a) and Section
        7.05(b) and (B) any shares of Common Stock included in such dividend or
        distribution shall not be deemed “outstanding immediately prior to the Ex Date
        or effective date” within the meaning of Section 7.05(a).

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          41

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (d)  If
        a cash
        dividend or distribution is made to all holders of Common Stock (other than
        (i)
        in connection with the Company’s liquidation, dissolution or winding up or (ii)
        distributions described in Section 7.05(e)), the Conversion Rate shall be
        adjusted based on the following formula:

       

      
        	
                CR'
                  = CR0
                  x
                  

              	
                SP0

              
	
                SP0
                  -
                  C

              

      

      where

       

      
        	
                CR0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Conversion Rate in effect at the Close of Business on the Business
                  Day
                  immediately prior to the Ex Date for such dividend or
                  distribution;

              
	
                CR'

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Conversion Rate in effect on and after the Ex Date for such
                  distribution;

              
	
                SP0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  average Closing Price of the Common Stock for the five consecutive
                  Trading
                  Day period ending on the Trading Day immediately preceding the
                  Ex Date for
                  such dividend or distribution; and

              
	
                C

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  amount in cash per share of Common Stock the Company dividends
                  or
                  distributes to holders of Common
                  Stock.

              

      

       

      Such
        adjustment shall become effective immediately prior to the opening of business
        on the Ex Date for such dividend or distribution; provided that if the portion
        of the cash so distributed applicable to one share of Common Stock is equal
        to
        or greater than SP0
        as set
        forth above, in lieu of the foregoing adjustment, adequate provision shall
        be
        made so that each Holder shall have the right to receive, for each $1,000
        principal amount of Securities upon conversion, the amount of cash such Holder
        would have received had such Holder owned a number of shares of Common Stock
        equal to the Conversion Rate on the record date for such dividend or
        distribution. If such dividend or distribution is not so paid or made, the
        Conversion Rate shall again be adjusted to be the Conversion Rate that would
        then be in effect if such dividend or distribution had not been
        declared.

       

      For
        the
        avoidance of doubt, for purposes of this ‎Section 7.05(d), in the event of any
        reclassification of the Common Stock, as a result of which the Securities
        become
        convertible into more than one class of Common Stock, if an adjustment to
        the
        Conversion Rate is required pursuant to this ‎Section 7.05(d), references in
        this Section to one share of Common Stock or Closing Price of one share of
        Common Stock shall be deemed to refer to a unit or to the price of a unit
        consisting of the number of shares of each
        class
        of Common Stock into which the Securities are then convertible equal to the
        numbers of shares of such class issued in respect of one share of Common
        Stock
        in such reclassification. The above provisions of this paragraph shall similarly
        apply to successive reclassifications.

       

      (e)  If
        the
        Company or any of its Subsidiaries makes a payment in respect of a tender
        offer
        or exchange offer for all or any portion of the Common Stock, to the extent
        that
        the cash and value of any other consideration included in the payment per
        share
        of Common Stock validly tendered or exchanged exceeds the Closing Price of
        the
        Common Stock on the Trading Day next succeeding the last date on which tenders
        or exchanges may be made pursuant to such tender or exchange offer (as it
        may be
        amended), the Conversion Rate shall be increased based on the following
        formula:

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          42

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      
        	
                CR'
                  = CR0
                  x
                  

              	
                AC
                  + (SP'
                  x
                  OS')

              
	
                OS0
                  x
                  SP'

              

      

      where

       

      
        	
                CR0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Conversion Rate in effect immediately before the Close of Business
                  on the
                  expiration date;

              
	
                CR'

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Conversion Rate in effect on and after the effective date of the
                  adjustment;

              
	
                AC

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  aggregate value of all cash and any other consideration (as determined
                  in
                  good faith by the Company’s Board of Directors) paid or payable for shares
                  purchased in such tender or exchange offer;

              
	
                OS0

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  number of shares of Common Stock outstanding as of the last time
                  tenders
                  or exchanges could have been made pursuant to such tender or exchange
                  offer (including any shares validly tendered and not withdrawn
                  pursuant to
                  the tender or exchange offer but excluding shares held in
                  treasury);

              
	
                OS'

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  number of shares of Common Stock outstanding as of the last time
                  tenders
                  or exchanges could have been made pursuant to such tender or exchange
                  offer (not including any shares validly tendered and not withdrawn
                  pursuant to the tender or exchange offer or shares held in treasury);
                  and

              
	
                SP'

              	
                =

              	
                the
                  Closing Price on the Trading Day such tender or exchange offer
                  expires.

              

      

       

      The
        adjustment to the Conversion Rate under this Section 7.05(e) shall occur
        on the
        Trading Day from, and including, the Trading Day next succeeding the date
        such
        tender or exchange offer expires.

       

      If
        the
        Company is obligated to repurchase shares pursuant to any such tender or
        exchange offer, but the Company is permanently prevented by applicable law
        from
        effecting any such purchases or all or any portion of such purchases are
        rescinded, the Conversion Rate shall again be adjusted to be the Conversion
        Rate
        that would then be in effect if such tender or exchange offer had not been
        made
        or had only been made in respect of the purchases that had been
        effected.

       

      (f)  For
        purposes of this Section 7.05 the term “record
        date”
shall
        mean, with respect to any dividend, distribution or other transaction or
        event
        in which the holders of Common Stock have the right to receive any cash,
        securities or other property or in which the Common Stock (or other applicable
        security) is exchanged for or converted into any combination of cash, securities
        or other property, the date fixed for determination of stockholders entitled
        to
        receive such cash, securities or other property (whether such date is fixed
        by
        the Board of Directors or by statute, contract or otherwise).

       

      (g)  If
        application of the formulas provided in Sections 7.05(a), 7.05(b), 7.05(c),
        7.05(d) or 7.05(e) would result in a decrease in the Conversion Rate, no
        adjustment to the Conversion Rate shall be made except in the case of a
        subdivision or split of the Common Stock.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          43

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (h)  In
        any
        case in which this Section 7.05 shall require that an adjustment be made
        following a record date or Expiration Date, as the case may be, established
        for
        purposes of this Section 7.05, the Company may elect to defer (but only until
        five Business Days following the filing by the Company with the Trustee of
        the
        certificate described in Section 7.10) issuing to the Holder of any Security
        converted after such record date or Expiration Date the shares of Common
        Stock
        and other capital stock of the Company, evidences of indebtedness or other
        non-Cash assets or rights or warrants issuable upon such conversion over
        and
        above Cash payable, or the shares of Common Stock and other capital stock
        of the
        Company, evidences of indebtedness or other non-Cash assets or rights or
        warrants issuable, upon such conversion only on the basis of the Conversion
        Rate
        prior to adjustment; and, in lieu of the shares, evidences of indebtedness
        or
        other non-Cash assets or rights or warrants the issuance of which, or Cash
        the
        payment of which, is so deferred, the Company shall issue or cause its transfer
        agents to issue due bills or other appropriate evidence prepared by the Company
        of the right to receive such shares or Cash, as the case may be. If any
        distribution in respect of which an adjustment to the Conversion Rate is
        required to be made as of the record date or Expiration Date therefor is
        not
        thereafter made or paid by the Company for any reason, the Conversion Rate
        shall
        be readjusted to the Conversion Rate which would then be in effect if such
        record date had not been fixed or such effective date or Expiration Date
        had not
        occurred.

       

      (i)  In
        the
        event of any adjustment to the Conversion Rate pursuant to clauses (b), (c),
        (d)
        and (e) above or as the result of or in connection with a Makewhole Fundamental
        Change pursuant to Section 7.01(c) that would or could reasonably be expected
        to
        result in the Securities, in the aggregate, becoming convertible into shares
        of
        Common Stock in excess of limits established by Nasdaq that would require
        stockholder approval of the issuances of such shares of Common Stock upon
        such
        conversion, the Company will, at its option, either obtain stockholder approval
        of such issuances or deliver cash in lieu of any shares otherwise deliverable
        upon conversions in excess of such limitations (based on the Closing Price
        of
        the Common Stock on the Trading Day immediately prior to the date when such
        shares would otherwise be required to be distributed).

       

      (j)  If
        one or
        more events occur requiring an adjustment be made to the Conversion Rate
        for a
        particular period, adjustments to the Conversion Rate shall be determined
        by the
        Company’s Board of Directors to reflect the combined impact of such Conversion
        Rate adjustments, as set out in this Section 7.05, during such
        period.

       

      Section
        7.06   No
        Adjustment.

       

      No
        adjustment in the Conversion Rate shall be required unless the adjustment
        would
        result in a change in the Conversion Rate of at least 1.00%; provided,
        however,
        that
        any adjustment which by reason of this Section 7.06 is not required to be
        made
        shall be carried forward and taken into account in subsequent adjustments
        and in
        connection with any conversion of Securities. All calculations under this
        Article 7 shall be made to the nearest one-ten thousandth (1/10,000) of a
        cent
        or to the nearest one-ten thousandth (1/10,000) of a share, as the case may
        be.

       

      No
        adjustment in the Conversion Rate need be made for (i) issuances of Common
        Stock
        pursuant to any present or future Company plan for reinvestment of dividends
        or
        interest payable on the Company’s securities or the investment of additional
        optional amounts thereunder in shares of Common Stock, (ii) upon the issuance
        of
        any shares of Common Stock or options or rights to purchase shares of Common
        Stock pursuant to any present or future employee, director or consultant
        benefit
        plan or program of or assumed by the Company or any of its subsidiaries or
        (iii)
        upon the issuance of any shares of Common Stock pursuant to any option, warrant,
        right or exercisable, exchangeable or convertible security not described
        in
        clause (i) or (ii) and outstanding as of the date the Securities were first
        issued.

       

      To
        the
        extent that the Securities become convertible into the right to receive Cash,
        interest will not accrue on such Cash.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          44

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      No
        adjustment to the Conversion Rate need be made pursuant to Section 7.05 for
        a
        transaction if Holders are permitted to participate in the transaction without
        conversion on a basis and with notice that the Board of Directors of the
        Company
        determines in good faith to be fair and appropriate in light of the basis
        and
        notice on which holders of Common Stock participate in the
        transaction.

       

      No
        adjustment to the Conversion Rate need be made for accrued and unpaid interest,
        including Contingent Interest or Additional Interest, if any.

       

      Whenever
        a provision of this Indenture requires the calculation of an average of the
        Closing Price or Volume-Weighted Average Price over a span of multiple days,
        the
        Company shall make appropriate adjustments to account for any adjustment
        to the
        Conversion Rate that becomes effective, or any event requiring an adjustment
        to
        the Conversion Rate that becomes effective, or any event requiring an adjustment
        to the Conversion Rate where the Ex Date of the event occurs, at any time
        during
        the period from which the average is to be calculated.

       

      Section
        7.07   Stockholder
        Rights Plans.

       

      Upon
        conversion of the Securities, the Holders shall receive, in addition to any
        shares of Common Stock issuable upon such conversion, any associated rights
        issued under any future stockholder rights plan the Company adopts that provides
        each share of Common Stock issued upon conversion of the Securities at any
        time
        prior to the distribution of separate rights certificates representing such
        rights will be entitled to receive such rights unless, prior to conversion,
        the
        rights have separated from the Common Stock, expired, terminated or been
        redeemed or exchanged in accordance with such rights plan, and no adjustment
        shall be made to the Conversion Rate pursuant to Section 7.05. If the rights
        have separated from the Common Stock prior to any conversion, the Conversion
        Rate shall be adjusted at the time of separation as if the Company distributed
        to all holders of Common Stock, shares of Capital Stock, evidences of
        Indebtedness or assets as described in Section 7.05(c), subject to readjustment
        in the event of the expiration, termination or redemption of such
        rights.

       

      Section
        7.08   Effect
        of Reclassification, Consolidation, Merger or Sale on Conversion
        Privilege.

       

      If
        (1)
        there shall occur (a) any reclassification of the Company’s Common Stock (other
        than a change in par value, or from par value to no par value, or from no
        par
        value to par value, or as a result of a subdivision or combination); (b)
        a
        statutory share exchange, consolidation, merger or combination involving
        the
        Company other than a merger in which the Company is the continuing corporation
        and which does not result in any reclassification of, or change (other than
        in
        par value, or from par value to no par value, or from no par value to par
        value,
        or as a result of a subdivision or combination) in, outstanding shares of
        Common
        Stock; or (c) a sale or conveyance as an entirety or substantially as an
        entirety of the property and assets of the Company, directly or indirectly,
        to
        another Person; and (2) pursuant to such reclassification, statutory share
        exchange, consolidation, merger, combination, sale or conveyance, holders
        of
        outstanding shares of Common Stock would be entitled to receive stock (other
        than Common Stock), other securities, other property, assets or Cash for
        such
        shares of Common Stock (any such event a “Merger
        Event”),
        then
        the Company, or such successor or surviving, purchasing or transferee Person,
        as
        the case may be, shall, as a condition precedent to such Merger Event, execute
        and deliver to the Trustee a supplemental indenture providing that the right
        to
        convert a Security will be changed into a right to convert it into the kind
        and
        amount of shares of stock, other securities or other property or assets
        (including Cash or any combination thereof) that a holder of a number of
        shares
        of Common Stock equal to the Conversion Rate immediately prior to such Merger
        Event would have owned or been entitled to receive (the “Reference
        Property”)
        upon
        such transaction (assuming for such purposes that such conversion were settled
        entirely in Common Stock and without giving effect to any adjustment to the
        Conversion Rate with respect to a Makewhole Fundamental Change) immediately
        prior to such Merger Event, except that such Holders shall not be entitled
        to
        receive Additional Shares with respect to such transaction constituting a
        Makewhole Fundamental Change if such Holder does not convert its Securities
“in
        connection with” the relevant Fundamental Change. Appropriate provisions shall
        be made, as determined in good faith by the Board of Directors, to preserve
        the
        net share settlement provisions of the Securities described in Section 7.13
        following such Merger Event to the extent feasible. If the Merger Event causes
        the Common Stock to be converted into the right to receive more than a single
        type of consideration (determined based in part upon any form of stockholder
        election), the Reference Property into which the Securities will be convertible
        will be deemed to be the weighted average of the types and amounts of
        consideration received by the holders of Common Stock that affirmatively
        make
        such an election. However, at and after the effective time of the Merger
        Event,
        any amount otherwise payable in Cash upon conversion of the Securities shall
        continue to be payable in Cash, and the Daily Conversion Value shall be
        calculated based on the value of the Reference Property. None of the foregoing
        provisions shall affect the right of a holder of Securities to convert its
        Securities in accordance with the provisions of this Article 7 prior to the
        effective date of such Merger Event. Such supplemental indenture shall provide
        for adjustments of the Conversion Rate which shall be as nearly equivalent
        as
        may be practicable to the adjustments of the Conversion Rate provided for
        in
        this Article 7. The provisions of this Section 7.08 shall similarly apply
        to
        successive Merger Events.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          45

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        7.09   Other
        Adjustments.

       

       Subject
        to applicable stock exchange rules and listing standards, the Company shall
        be
        entitled to increase the Conversion Rate by any amount for a period of at
        least
        20 days if the Board of Directors determines that such increase would be
        in the
        best interests in the Company, provided
        the
        Company has given to Holders at least 15 days’ prior notice, in accordance with
        Section 16.02, of any such increase in the Conversion Rate. Subject to
        applicable stock exchange rules and listing standards, the Company shall
        be
        entitled to increase the Conversion Rate, in addition to the events requiring
        an
        increase in the Conversion Rate pursuant to Section 7.05, as it in its
        discretion shall determine to be advisable in order to avoid or diminish
        any tax
        to stockholders in connection with any stock dividends, subdivisions of shares,
        distributions of rights to purchase stock or securities or distributions
        of
        securities convertible into or exchangeable for stock hereafter made by the
        Company to its stockholders.

       

      Section
        7.10   Notice
        of Adjustment.

       

      Whenever
        the Conversion Rate or conversion privilege is adjusted, the Company shall
        promptly mail to Securityholders a notice of the adjustment in accordance
        with
        Section 16.02, and file with the Trustee an Officers’ Certificate briefly
        stating the Conversion Rate, the facts requiring the adjustment and the manner
        of computing it. Unless and until the Trustee shall receive an Officers’
Certificate setting forth an adjustment of the Conversion Rate, the Trustee
        may
        assume without inquiry that the Conversion Rate has not been adjusted and
        that
        the last Conversion Rate of which it has knowledge remains in
        effect.

       

      Section
        7.11   [Reserved].

       

      Section
        7.12   Trustee’s
        Disclaimer.

       

      The
        Trustee shall have no duty to determine when an adjustment under this Article
        7
        should be made, how it should be made or what such adjustment should be,
        but may
        accept as conclusive evidence of that fact or the correctness of any such
        adjustment set forth in, and shall be protected in relying upon, an Officers’
Certificate, including the Officers’ Certificate with respect thereto which the
        Company is obligated to file with the Trustee pursuant to Section 7.10. The
        Trustee makes no representation as to the validity or value of any securities
        or
        assets issued upon conversion of Securities, and the Trustee shall not be
        responsible for the Company’s failure to comply with any provisions of this
        Article 7.

       

      The
        Trustee shall not be under any responsibility to determine the correctness
        of
        any provisions contained in any supplemental indenture executed pursuant
        to
        Section 7.08, but may accept as conclusive evidence of the correctness thereof,
        and shall be fully protected in relying upon, the Officers’ Certificate and
        Opinion of Counsel with respect thereto which the Company is obligated to
        file
        with the Trustee pursuant to Section 7.08.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          46

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        7.13   Settlement
        Upon Conversion.

       

      (a)
        Upon any
        conversion of any Security, the Company shall deliver to converting Holders,
        in
        respect of each $1,000 Principal Amount of Securities being converted, a
        “Settlement
        Amount”
equal
        to the sum of the Daily Settlement Amounts for each of the 20 Trading Days
        during the Conversion Reference Period for such Security.

       

      (b)  The
        “Daily
        Settlement Amount”
for
        each of the 20 Trading Days during the Conversion Reference Period shall
        consist
        of:

       

      (i)  Cash
        equal to the lesser of $50 and the Daily Conversion Value; and

       

      (ii)  to
        the
        extent the Daily Conversion Value exceeds $50, a number of shares of Common
        Stock (the “Daily
        Share Amount”)
        equal
        to (x) the difference between the Daily Conversion Value and $50, divided
        by (y)
        the Daily VWAP for such day.

       

      (c)  Upon
        conversion, Holders shall not receive any separate cash payment for accrued
        and
        unpaid interest (including Contingent Interest or Additional Interest, if
        any),
        unless such conversion occurs between a Record Date and the Interest Payment
        Date to which it relates and such Holder was the holder of record at the
        Close
        of Business on such Record Date.

       

      (d)  If
        Securities are converted after 5:00 p.m., New York City time, on a Record
        Date
        for the payment of interest, Holders of such Securities at 5:00 p.m., New
        York
        City time, on such Record Date will receive the interest payable on such
        Securities on the corresponding Interest Payment Date notwithstanding the
        conversion. Securities surrendered for conversion during the period from
        5:00
        p.m., New York City time, on any Record Date to 9:00 a.m., New York City
        time,
        on the immediately following Interest Payment Date, must be accompanied by
        funds
        equal to the amount of interest payable on the Securities so converted;
provided
        that no
        such payment need be made (i) if the Company has specified a Repurchase Date
        following a Fundamental Change or Redemption Date in respect of the Securities
        that is after a Record Date and on or prior to the Business Day next succeeding
        the next Interest Payment Date; (ii) in respect of any conversion which occurs
        after the Record Date for the interest payment due on May 1, 2027 or (iii)
        to
        the extent of any overdue interest, if any such amount exists at the time
        of
        conversion with respect to such Security.

       

      (e)  On
        any
        day prior to the first Trading Day of the applicable Conversion Reference
        Period, the Company may specify by notice to the Trustee and Holders, a
        percentage of the Daily Share Amount that will be settled in cash (the
“Cash
        Percentage”).
        If
        the Company elects to specify a Cash Percentage then, in lieu of all or a
        portion of the Daily Share Amount for each Trading Day in the applicable
        Conversion Reference Period, the Company shall deliver Cash equal to the
        product
        of (i) the Cash Percentage, (ii) the Daily Share Amount for such Trading
        Day and
        (iii) the Daily VWAP for such Trading Day. The number of shares of Common
        Stock
        in respect of the Daily Share Amount for each Trading Day in the applicable
        Conversion Reference Period shall equal the product of (x) the Daily Share
        Amount and (y) 100% minus the Cash Percentage. If the Company does not specify
        a
        Cash Percentage by the start of the applicable Conversion Reference Period,
        the
        Company shall settle 100% of the Daily Share Amount for each Trading Day
        in the
        applicable Conversion Reference Period with shares of Common Stock; provided,
        however,
        that
        (i) the Company shall pay cash in lieu of fractional shares otherwise issuable
        upon conversion of such Security and (ii) if conversion of the Securities
        is in
        connection
        with
        a transaction described in ‎Section 7.08 pursuant to which the Securities become
        convertible into cash and Reference Property, the Company shall settle such
        conversion in Cash and Reference Property.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          47

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (f)  The
        Company shall determine the Daily Conversion Value and the number of shares
        of
        Common Stock, if any, to be issued upon conversion of the Securities at the
        end
        of the Conversion Reference Period.

       

      (g)  Upon
        conversion of any Securities, the Company will pay the Cash and deliver the
        shares of Common Stock, as applicable, as promptly as practicable after
        expiration of the Conversion Reference Period, but in no event later than
        the
        third Business Day after such expiration.

       

      (h)  The
        Company shall not issue fractional shares of Common Stock upon conversion
        of
        Securities. If multiple Securities shall be surrendered for conversion at
        one
        time by the same Holder, the number of full shares which shall be issuable
        upon
        conversion shall be computed on the basis of the aggregate Principal Amount
        of
        the Securities (or specified portions thereof to the extent permitted hereby)
        so
        surrendered. If any fractional share of stock would be issuable upon the
        conversion of any Securities, the Company shall make payment therefor in
        cash
        equal to the fraction of a share of Common Stock otherwise issuable multiplied
        by the Daily VWAP for the final Trading Day of the applicable Conversion
        Reference Period.

       

      (i)  Except
        as
        otherwise provided in this Indenture, no payment or adjustments in respect
        of
        payments of interest (including Contingent Interest or Additional Interest,
        if
        any) on Securities surrendered for conversion or any dividends or distributions
        on the Common Stock issued upon conversion shall be made upon the conversion
        of
        any Securities.

       

      (j)  For
        the
        purposes of Section 7.13, in the event that any of Daily Settlement Amount,
        Daily Conversion Value, Daily Share Amount or Daily VWAP is not calculable
        for
        all portions of the Conversion Reference Period, the Company’s Board of
        Directors shall in good faith determine the values necessary to calculate
        the
        Daily Settlement Amount, Daily Conversion Value, Daily Share Amount and Daily
        VWAP, as applicable.

       

      ARTICLE
        8  

       

      Contingent
        Interest

       

      Section
        8.01   Contingent
        Interest.

       

      (a)
        Beginning with the six-month period commencing on May 1, 2014 and ending on
        October 31, 2014, and for each six-month period from May 1 to
        October 31 and from November 1 to April 30 thereafter, the
        Company shall pay Contingent Interest with respect to the Securities for
        any
        Contingent Interest Period if the average Trading Price per $1,000 principal
        amount of Securities during the five consecutive Trading Days ending three
        Trading Days before the applicable Contingent Interest Period equals or exceeds
        120% of the principal amount of such Securities.

       

      (b)  The
        amount of Contingent Interest payable per $1,000 principal amount of Securities
        in respect of any Contingent Interest Period shall equal 0.25% per annum
        of the
        average Trading Price of $1,000 principal amount of Securities during the
        relevant five Trading Day period used to determine whether Contingent Interest
        must be paid.

       

      (c)  The
        Company shall be responsible for calculating the amounts of Contingent Interest,
        if any, accrued on the Securities. The Company shall make any such calculations
        using the Trading Price provided by the Bid Solicitation Agent. The Bid
        Solicitation Agent or the Trustee shall be entitled in their sole discretion
        to
        consult with the Company and to request the assistance of the Company in
        connection with the Bid Solicitation Agent’s or Trustee’s duties pursuant to
        this Article 8, and the Company agrees, if requested by the Bid
        Solicitation Agent or by the Trustee, to cooperate with, and provide assistance
        to, the Trustee in carrying out its duties under this Article 8.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          48

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        8.02   Payment
        of Contingent Interest.

       

      Payments
        of Contingent Interest shall be made in the same manner, at the same time,
        and
        subject to the same restrictions, including those restrictions in respect
        of
        accrued and unpaid interest on any Securities that are submitted for conversion,
        as payments of interest.

       

      Section
        8.03   Contingent
        Interest Notification.

       

      By
        the
        first Business Day of a Contingent Interest Period for which Contingent Interest
        shall be payable, the Company shall disseminate a press release containing
        this
        information or publish the information on its Website or through such other
        public medium as it may use at that time.

       

      Section
        8.04   Trustee
        Contingent Interest Disclaimer.

       

      The
        Trustee has no duty to determine when Contingent Interest under this Article
        8
        should be paid. The Trustee shall not be accountable for and makes no
        representation as to the amount of Contingent Interest payable in respect
        of any
        Contingent Interest Period. The Trustee shall not be responsible for the
        Company’s failure to comply with this Article 8. Each Conversion Agent (other
        than the Company or an Affiliate of the Company) shall have the same protection
        under this Section 8.04 as the Trustee.

       

      ARTICLE
        9  

      Covenants

       

      Section
        9.01   Payment
        of Securities.

       

      The
        Company shall promptly make all payments in respect of the Securities on
        the
        dates and in the manner provided in the Securities and this Indenture, including
        payments of Cash and if applicable, shares of Common Stock due upon conversion.
        The principal amount, Redemption Price, Repurchase Price and Fundamental
        Change
        Purchase Price and accrued and unpaid interest (including Contingent Interest
        or
        Additional Interest, if any) shall be considered paid on the date it is due
        if
        the Paying Agent holds by 10:00 a.m., New York City time, on such date, in
        accordance with this Indenture, Cash designated and sufficient for the payment
        of all such amounts then due. The Company shall, to the fullest extent permitted
        by law, pay interest on overdue principal and overdue installments of interest
        at the rate borne by the Securities per annum. Unless explicitly excluded,
        all
        references in this Indenture or the Securities to interest shall be deemed
        to
        include Contingent Interest, if any, payable as described in Article 8, and
        Additional Interest, if any, payable pursuant to the Registration Rights
        Agreement.

       

      The
        Company shall pay interest (including post-petition interest in any proceeding
        under any Bankruptcy Law) on overdue amounts from time to time on demand
        at the
        rate then in effect; it shall pay interest (including post-petition interest
        in
        any proceeding under any Bankruptcy Law) on overdue installments of interest
        (without regard to any applicable grace periods) from time to time on demand
        at
        the same rate to the extent lawful. Interest shall be computed on the basis
        of a
        360-day year of twelve 30-day months.

       

      Each
        installment of accrued and unpaid interest (including Contingent Interest
        and
        Additional Interest, if any) on the Securities due on any Interest Payment
        Date
        may be paid by mailing checks for the amount payable to or upon the written
        order of the Securityholders entitled thereto as they shall appear on the
        registry books of the Company, provided
        that,
        with respect to any Securityholder with an aggregate principal amount of
        Securities in excess of $2,000,000, at the application of such Holder in
        writing
        to the Security Registrar not later than the relevant record date accrued
        and
        unpaid interest (including Contingent Interest and Additional Interest, if
        any)
        on such Holder’s Securities shall be paid by wire transfer in immediately
        available funds to such Holder’s account in the United States supplied by such
        Holder from time to time to the Trustee and Paying Agent (if different from
        Trustee); provided further
        that
        payment of accrued and unpaid interest (including Contingent Interest and
        Additional Interest, if any) made to the Depositary shall be paid by wire
        transfer in immediately available funds in accordance with such wire transfer
        instructions and other procedures provided by the Depositary from time to
        time.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          49

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        9.02   Reports
        and Certain Information.

       

      (a)
        The
        Company shall file with the Trustee, within 15 days after it files them with
        the
        SEC, copies of its annual report and the information, documents and other
        reports which the Company is required to file with the SEC pursuant to Section
        13 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act; provided that any such reports, information
        or
        documents filed with the SEC pursuant to its Electronic Data Gathering, Analysis
        and Retrieval (or EDGAR) system shall be deemed filed with the Trustee. The
        Company shall comply with the provisions of TIA Section 314(a), whether or
        not
        the Company is required to file reports with the SEC pursuant to Section
        13 or
        15(d) of the Exchange Act. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein,
        the
        Trustee shall have no duty to review such documents for purposes of determining
        compliance with any provisions of this Indenture or any applicable
        law.

       

      (b)  At
        any
        time when the Securities are Restricted Securities, and the Company is not
        subject to, or is not in compliance with, Section 13 or 15(d) of the Exchange
        Act, upon the request of a Holder or the holder of shares of Common Stock
        issued
        upon conversion of Securities, the Company shall promptly furnish or cause
        to be
        furnished Rule 144A Information (as defined below) to such Holder or such
        holder
        of shares of Common Stock issued upon conversion of Securities, or to a
        prospective purchaser of any such security designated by any such Holder
        or
        holder, as the case may be, to the extent required to permit compliance by
        such
        Holder or holder with Rule 144A under the Securities Act in connection with
        the
        resale of any such security. “Rule
        144A Information”
shall
        mean such information as is specified pursuant to Rule 144A(d)(4) under the
        Securities Act or any successor provision.

       

      (c)  The
        Company shall notify the Trustee of any changes to its fiscal year.

       

      Section
        9.03   Compliance
        Certificates.

       

      The
        Company shall deliver to the Trustee, within 90 days after the end of each
        fiscal year of the Company ending after the date hereof, an Officers’
Certificate signed by the principal executive officer, principal financial
        officer or principal accounting officer of the Company and at least one other
        Officer of the Company, as to his or her knowledge of the Company’s compliance
        with all terms, conditions and covenants under this Indenture (without regard
        to
        any period of grace or requirement of notice provided hereunder) and, if
        the
        Company shall be in default, specifying all such defaults and the nature
        and
        status thereof of which he or she may have knowledge.

       

      Section
        9.04   Maintenance
        of Corporate Existence.

       

      The
        Company shall do or cause to be done all things necessary to preserve and
        keep
        in full force and effect its corporate existence or, following any
        consolidation, merger, conveyance, transfer or lease in accordance with Section
        10.01, its legal existence as a Person permitted to be the resulting, surviving
        or transferee Person in accordance with Section 10.01.

       

      Section
        9.05   Stay,
        Extension and Usury Laws.

       

      The
        Company covenants, to the extent it may lawfully do so, that it shall not
        at any
        time insist upon, plead or in any manner whatsoever claim or take the benefit
        or
        advantage of any stay, extension or usury law or other law which would prohibit
        or forgive the Company from paying all or any portion of the principal amount,
        Redemption Price, Repurchase Price or Fundamental Change Purchase Price in
        respect of Securities, or any interest (including Contingent Interest and
        Additional Interest, if any) on the Securities as contemplated herein, wherever
        enacted, now or at any time hereafter in force, or which may affect the
        covenants or the performance of this Indenture, and the Company, to the extent
        it may lawfully do so, hereby expressly waives all benefit or advantage of
        any
        such law and covenants that it shall not, by resort to any such law, hinder,
        delay or impede the execution of any power herein granted to the Trustee
        or any
        Agent, but shall suffer and permit the execution of every such power as though
        no such law had been enacted.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          50

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        9.06   Maintenance
        of Office or Agency of the Trustee, Registrar, Paying Agent and Conversion
        Agent.

       

      The
        Company shall maintain an office or agency of the Trustee, Registrar, Paying
        Agent and Conversion Agent in the United States where Securities may be
        presented or surrendered for payment, where Securities may be surrendered
        for
        registration of transfer, exchange, redemption, purchase or conversion and
        where
        notices and demands to or upon the Company in respect of the Securities and
        this
        Indenture may be served. The Company hereby designates the Corporate Trust
        Office as one such office or agency for all of the aforesaid purposes. The
        Company shall give prompt written notice to the Trustee of the location,
        and of
        any change in the location, of any such office or agency (other than a change
        in
        the location of the Corporate Trust Office of the Trustee). If at any time
        the
        Company shall fail to maintain any such required office or agency or shall
        fail
        to furnish the Trustee with the address thereof, such presentations, surrenders,
        notices and demands may be made or served at the address of the Trustee set
        forth in Section 16.02.

       

      Section
        9.07   Notice
        of Default.

       

      In
        the
        event that any Default or Event of Default shall occur and be continuing,
        the
        Company shall give prompt (and in any event within thirty (30) days after
        the
        Company becomes aware of such Default or Event of Default) written notice
        by an
        Officers’ Certificate of such Default or Event of Default, and any remedial
        action proposed to be taken, to the Trustee.

       

      Section
        9.08   Additional
        Interest Notice.

       

      In
        the
        event that the Company is required to pay Additional Interest to the
        Securityholders pursuant to the Registration Rights Agreement, the Company
        shall
        provide written notice (“Additional
        Interest Notice”)
        to the
        Trustee of its obligation to pay Additional Interest no later than fifteen
        (15)
        days prior to the proposed payment date for the Additional Interest, and
        the
        Additional Interest Notice shall set forth the amount of Additional Interest
        to
        be paid by the Company on such payment date. The Trustee shall not at any
        time
        be under any duty or responsibility to any Securityholders to determine the
        Additional Interest, or with respect to the nature, extent or calculation
        of the
        amount of Additional Interest when made, or with respect to the method employed
        in such calculation of the Additional Interest.

       

      ARTICLE
        10  

       

      Consolidation,
        Merger, Conveyance, Transfer or Lease

       

      Section
        10.01   Company
        May Consolidate, etc., Only on Certain Terms.

       

      The
        Company shall not consolidate with or merge into any other Person or convey,
        transfer or lease all or substantially all of the Company’s properties and
        assets to any successor Person, unless:

       

      (a)  either:

       

      (i)  the
        resulting, surviving or transferee Person is the Company; or

       

      (ii)  the
        resulting, surviving or transferee Person is a corporation, limited liability
        company, partnership or trust organized and validly existing under the laws
        of
        the United States of America, any State thereof or the District of Columbia
        and
        shall expressly assume, by an indenture supplemental hereto, executed and
        delivered to the Trustee, in form reasonably satisfactory to the Trustee,
        all of
        the obligations of the Company under the Securities and this
        Indenture;

       

      (b)  immediately
        after giving effect to such transaction, no Default or Event of Default shall
        have occurred and be continuing; and

       

      (c)  the
        Company has delivered to the Trustee an Officers’ Certificate and an Opinion of
        Counsel (upon which the Trustee may conclusively rely), each stating that
        such
        consolidation, merger, conveyance, transfer or lease and, if a supplemental
        indenture is required in connection with such transaction, such supplemental
        indenture comply with this Article and that all conditions precedent herein
        provided for relating to such transaction have been complied with.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          51

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        10.02   Successor
        Substituted.

       

      Upon
        any
        consolidation of the Company with, or merger of the Company into, any other
        Person or any conveyance, transfer or lease of all or substantially all of
        the
        properties and assets of the Company in accordance with Section 10.01, the
        successor Person formed by such consolidation or into which the Company is
        merged or to which such conveyance, transfer or lease is made shall succeed
        to,
        and be substituted for, and may exercise every right and power of, the Company
        under this Indenture with the same effect as if such successor Person had
        been
        named as the Company herein, and thereafter, except in the case of a lease,
        the
        predecessor Person shall be relieved of all obligations and covenants under
        this
        Indenture and the Securities.

       

      ARTICLE
        11  

       

      Default
        and Remedies

       

      Section
        11.01   Events
        of Default.

       

      An
        “Event
        of Default”
shall
        occur if:

       

      (a)  the
        Company defaults in the payment when due of any principal of any of the
        Securities at maturity, upon redemption, upon exercise of a repurchase right
        or
        otherwise;

       

      (b)  the
        Company defaults in the payment of any interest (including Contingent Interest
        or Additional Interest, if any) when due under the Securities, and such default
        continues for a period of 30 days;

       

      (c)  the
        Company fails to deliver all Cash and any shares of Common Stock or other
        property when such Cash and Common Stock or other property, if any, are required
        to be delivered upon conversion of any Securities, and such default continues
        for five days;

       

      (d)  the
        Company fails to provide the Fundamental Change Company Notice when required
        by
        this Indenture;

       

      (e)  the
        Company fails to comply with Section 10.01 of this Agreement;

       

      (f)  the
        Company fails to comply with any of its other agreements contained in the
        Securities or in this Indenture (other than a covenant or warranty or default
        whose performance or breach is elsewhere in this Section 11.01 specifically
        provided for) and such failure continues for 60 days after receipt by the
        Company of a Notice of Default, provided,
        however,
        that
        the Company shall have 120 days after receipt of a Notice of Default to remedy,
        or receive a waiver for, any failure to comply with the Company’s obligation to
        file with the Trustee annual, quarterly and current reports in accordance
        with
        this Indenture or to comply with the requirements of Section 314(a)(1) of
        the
        Trust Indenture Act so long as the Company is attempting to cure such failure
        as
        promptly as reasonably practicable;

       

      (g)  (i)
        the
        Company fails to make any payment by the end of any applicable grace period
        after maturity of principal and/or accrued interest with respect to any
        obligations (other than nonrecourse obligations) of the Company for borrowed
        money or evidenced by bonds, notes or similar instruments (“Indebtedness”),
        where
        the amount of such unpaid and due principal and/or accrued interest is in
        an
        aggregate amount in excess of $100.0 million, or (ii) the acceleration of
        principal or accrued interest with respect to Indebtedness, where the amount
        of
        such accelerated principal and interest is in an amount in excess of $100.0
        million because of a default with respect to such Indebtedness, in any such
        case
        of (i) or (ii), without such Indebtedness having been paid or discharged
        or such
        acceleration having been cured, waived, rescinded or annulled within a period
        of
        30 days after receipt by the Company of a Notice of Default. However, if
        any
        such failure or acceleration referred to in (i) or (ii) of this clause (g)
        shall
        cease or be cured, waived, rescinded or annulled, then the Event of Default
        by
        reason thereof shall be deemed not to have occurred and any acceleration
        as a
        result of the related Event of Default shall be automatically
        rescinded;

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          52

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (h)  the
        Company, or any Significant Subsidiary pursuant to or within the meaning
        of any
        Bankruptcy Law: commences a voluntary case or proceeding; consents to the
        entry
        of an order for relief against it in an involuntary case or proceeding or
        the
        commencement of any case against it; consents to the appointment of a Custodian
        of it or for any substantial part of its property; or makes a general assignment
        for the benefit of its creditors; or

       

      (i)  a
        court
        of competent jurisdiction enters an order or decree under any Bankruptcy
        Law
        that: is for relief against the Company or a Significant Subsidiary in an
        involuntary case or proceeding; appoints a Custodian of the Company or a
        Significant Subsidiary for any substantial part of the property of the Company
        or such Significant Subsidiary; or orders the winding up or liquidation of
        the
        Company or a Significant Subsidiary; and in each case of this subclause (i)
        the
        order or decree remains unstayed and in effect for 60 consecutive
        days.

       

      The
        term
“Bankruptcy
        Law”
means
        Title 11 of the United States Code (or any successor thereto) or any similar
        federal, state or foreign law for the relief of debtors. The term “Custodian”
means
        any receiver, trustee, assignee, liquidator, sequestrator or similar official
        under any Bankruptcy Law.

       

      A
        default
        under clause (f) or (g) above is not an Event of Default until the Trustee
        notifies the Company, or the Holders of at least 25% in aggregate principal
        amount of the Securities then outstanding notify the Company and the Trustee,
        in
        writing, of the Default and the Company does not cure the Default (and such
        Default is not waived) within the time period specified in clauses (f) or
        (g)
        above, as applicable, after actual receipt of such notice. The notice given
        pursuant to this Section 11.01 must specify the Default, demand that it be
        remedied and state that the notice is a “Notice
        of Default.”
When
        any Default under this Section 11.01 is cured in accordance herewith, it
        shall
        cease to be a Default.

       

      The
        Trustee shall not be charged with knowledge of any Event of Default unless
        written notice thereof shall have been given to a Trust Officer at the Corporate
        Trust Office of the Trustee by the Company (including, without limitation,
        pursuant to Section 9.03), a Paying Agent, any Holder or any agent of any
        Holder, which notice references the Securities and this Indenture.

       

      Section
        11.02   Acceleration.

       

       If
        an Event of Default (other than an Event of Default with respect to the Company
        specified in clauses (h) or (i) of Section 11.01) occurs and is continuing,
        the
        Trustee may, by notice to the Company, or the Holders of at least 25% in
        aggregate principal amount of the Securities then outstanding may, by notice
        to
        the Company and the Trustee, declare all unpaid principal of, plus interest
        (including Contingent Interest and Additional Interest, if any) accrued and
        unpaid through the date of such declaration on, all the Securities then
        outstanding to be due and payable upon any such declaration, and the same
        shall
        thereupon become and be immediately due and payable.

       

      If
        an
        Event of Default with respect to the Company specified in clause (h) or (i)
        of
        Section 11.01 occurs, all unpaid principal of, plus interest (including
        Contingent Interest and Additional Interest, if any) accrued and unpaid through
        the date of such default on, all the Securities then outstanding shall ipso
        facto become and be immediately due and payable without any declaration or
        other
        act on the part of the Trustee or any Holder.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          53

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      The
        Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Securities then
        outstanding by notice to the Trustee may rescind an acceleration of Securities
        and its consequences before a judgment or decree for the payment of money
        has
        been obtained by the Trustee if (a) the rescission would not conflict with
        any
        existing order or decree, (b) all existing Events of Default, other than
        the
        nonpayment of the principal of, plus accrued and unpaid interest (including
        Contingent Interest or Additional Interest, if any) on, the Securities that
        has
        become due solely by such declaration of acceleration, have been cured or
        waived
        and (c) all payments due to the Trustee and any predecessor Trustee under
        Section 12.06 have been made. No such rescission shall affect any subsequent
        Default or impair any right consequent thereto.

       

      Section
        11.03   Other
        Remedies.

       

      If
        an
        Event of Default occurs and is continuing, the Trustee may, but shall not
        be
        obligated to, pursue any available remedy by proceeding at law or in equity
        to
        collect the payment of the principal of or accrued and unpaid interest
        (including Contingent Interest and Additional Interest, if any) on the
        Securities, the payment of Cash and, if applicable, shares of Common Stock
        upon
        conversion or to enforce the performance of any provision of the Securities
        or
        this Indenture.

       

      The
        Trustee may maintain a proceeding even if it does not possess any of the
        Securities or does not produce any of them in the proceeding. A delay or
        omission by the Trustee or any Securityholder in exercising any right or
        remedy
        accruing upon an Event of Default shall not impair the right or remedy or
        constitute a waiver of or acquiescence in the Event of Default. No remedy
        is
        exclusive of any other remedy. All available remedies are cumulative to the
        extent permitted by law.

       

      Section
        11.04   Waiver
        of Defaults and Events of Default.

       

      Subject
        to Section 11.07 and 13.02, the Holders of a majority in aggregate principal
        amount of the Securities then outstanding by notice to the Trustee may waive
        an
        existing or future Default or Event of Default and its consequences, except
        a
        Default or Event of Default in the payment of the principal of, or any interest
        (including Contingent Interest and Additional Interest, if any) on any Security
        when due at maturity or upon redemption, or the payment of any applicable
        Repurchase Price or Fundamental Change Purchase Price, or a failure by the
        Company to deliver Cash and, if applicable, shares of Common Stock upon
        conversion in accordance with Article 7 or any Default or Event of Default
        in
        respect of any provision of this Indenture or the Securities that, under
        Section
        13.02, cannot be modified or amended without the consent of the Holders of
        each
        outstanding Security. When a Default or Event of Default is waived, it is
        deemed
        cured, but no such waiver shall extend to any subsequent or other Default
        or
        impair any consequent right. This Section 11.04 shall be in lieu of Section
        316(a)(1)(B) of the TIA and such Section 316(a)(1)(B) is hereby expressly
        excluded from this Indenture, as permitted by the TIA.

       

      Section
        11.05   Control
        by Majority.

       

      The
        Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Securities then
        outstanding may direct the time, method and place of conducting any proceeding
        for any remedy available to the Trustee or exercising any trust or power
        conferred on it under this Indenture. However, the Trustee may refuse to
        follow
        any direction that conflicts with law or this Indenture, that the Trustee
        determines may be unduly prejudicial to the rights of another Holder or the
        Trustee, or that may involve the Trustee in personal liability unless the
        Trustee is offered security or indemnity reasonably satisfactory to it;
provided
        that the
        Trustee may take any other action deemed proper by the Trustee which is not
        inconsistent with such direction. This Section 11.05 shall be in lieu of
        Section
        316(a)(1)(A) of the TIA and such Section 316(a)(1)(A) is hereby expressly
        excluded from this Indenture, as permitted by the TIA.

       

      Section
        11.06   Limitations
        on Suits.

       

      Subject
        to Section 11.07, a Holder of a Security may not pursue any remedy with respect
        to this Indenture or the Securities unless:

       

      (a)  the
        Holder gives to the Trustee written notice of a continuing Event of
        Default;

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          54

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (b)  the
        Holders of at least 25% in aggregate principal amount of the then outstanding
        Securities make a written request to the Trustee to pursue the
        remedy;

       

      (c)  such
        Holder or Holders offer to the Trustee security or indemnity reasonably
        satisfactory to the Trustee against any loss, liability or expense;

       

      (d)  the
        Trustee does not comply with the request within 60 days after receipt of
        the
        notice, request and the offer of security or indemnity; and

       

      (e)  no
        direction inconsistent with such written request has been given to the Trustee
        during such 60-day period by the Holders of a majority in aggregate principal
        amount of the Securities then outstanding.

       

      Section
        11.07   Rights
        of Holders to Receive Payment and to Convert.

       

      Notwithstanding
        any other provision of this Indenture, the right of any Holder of a Security
        to
        receive payment in Cash of the principal amount, Repurchase Price, Fundamental
        Change Purchase Price or interest (including Contingent Interest and Additional
        Interest, if any) on any Security, on or after the respective due dates or
        Redemption Dates expressed in the Security and this Indenture, receive payment
        in Cash and, if applicable, shares of Common Stock or other property upon
        conversion in accordance with Article 7 or upon redemption in accordance
        with
        Article 5 and to bring suit for the enforcement of any such payment on or
        after
        such respective dates or the right to convert, is absolute and unconditional
        and
        shall not be impaired or affected without the consent of the
        Holder.

       

      Section
        11.08   Collection
        Suit by Trustee.

       

      If
        an
        Event of Default in the payment of principal or interest, Contingent Interest
        or
        Additional Interest specified in clause (a) or (b) of Section 11.01 occurs
        and
        is continuing, the Trustee may recover judgment in its own name and as trustee
        of an express trust against the Company or another obligor on the Securities
        for
        the whole amount owing with respect to the Securities and the amounts provided
        for in Section 12.06.

       

      Section
        11.09   Trustee
        May File Proofs of Claim.

       

      The
        Trustee may file such proofs of claim and other papers or documents as may
        be
        necessary or advisable in order to have the claims of the Trustee (including
        any
        claim for the reasonable compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances
        of
        the Trustee, its agents and counsel) and the Holders allowed in any judicial
        proceedings relative to the Company (or any other obligor on the Securities),
        its creditors or its property and shall be entitled and empowered to collect
        and
        receive any money or other property payable or deliverable on any such claims
        and to distribute the same, and any Custodian in any such judicial proceeding
        is
        hereby authorized by each Holder to make such payments to the Trustee and,
        in
        the event that the Trustee shall consent to the making of such payments directly
        to the Holders, to pay to the Trustee any amount due to it for the reasonable
        compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of the Trustee, its agents
        and counsel, and any other amounts due the Trustee under Section 12.06, and
        to
        the extent that such payment of the reasonable compensation, expenses,
        disbursements and advances in any such proceedings shall be denied for any
        reason, payment of the same shall be secured by a lien on, and shall be paid
        out
        of, any and all distributions, dividends, money, securities and other property
        which the Holders may be entitled to receive in such proceedings, whether
        in
        liquidation or under any plan of reorganization or arrangement or otherwise.
        Nothing herein contained shall be deemed to authorize the Trustee to authorize
        or consent to or, on behalf of any Holder, to authorize, accept or adopt
        any
        plan of reorganization, arrangement, adjustment or composition affecting
        the
        Securities or the rights of any Holder thereof, or to authorize the Trustee
        to
        vote in respect of the claim of any Holder in any such proceeding.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          55

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        11.10   Priorities.

       

      Any
        money
        or property collected by the Trustee pursuant to this Article 11, and after
        an
        Event of Default, any money or other property distributable in respect of
        the
        Company’s obligations under this Indenture shall be paid out in the following
        order:

       

      First,
        to
        the Trustee (including any predecessor Trustee) for amounts due under Section
        12.06;

       

      Second,
        to Securityholders for amounts due and unpaid on the Securities for the
        principal amount, interest (including Contingent Interest and Additional
        Interest, if any), the Fundamental Change Purchase Price, the Repurchase
        Price,
        the Redemption Price, amounts due upon conversion (including amounts resulting
        from a Makewhole Fundamental Change), as the case may be, ratably, without
        preference or priority of any kind, according to such amounts due and payable
        on
        the Securities; and

       

      Third,
        the balance, if any, to the Company.

       

      The
        Trustee may fix a record date and payment date for any payment to Holders
        pursuant to this Section 11.10. At least 15 days before such record date,
        the
        Trustee shall mail to each Holder and the Company a notice that states the
        record date, the payment date and the amount to be paid.

       

      Section
        11.11   Undertaking
        for Costs.

       

      In
        any
        suit for the enforcement of any right or remedy under this Indenture or in
        any
        suit against the Trustee for any action taken or omitted by it as Trustee,
        a
        court in its discretion may require the filing by any party litigant in the
        suit
        of an undertaking to pay the costs of the suit, and the court in its discretion
        may assess reasonable costs, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses,
        against any party litigant in the suit, having due regard to the merits and
        good
        faith of the claims or defenses made by the party litigant. This Section
        11.11
        does not apply to a suit made by the Trustee, a suit by a Holder pursuant
        to
        Section 11.07, or a suit by Holders of more than 10% in aggregate principal
        amount of the Securities then outstanding.

       

      Section
        11.12   Delay
        or Omission Not Waiver.

       

      No
        delay
        or omission of the Trustee or of any Holder of any Security to exercise any
        right or remedy accruing upon any Event of Default shall impair any such
        right
        or remedy or constitute a waiver of any such Event of Default or an acquiescence
        therein. Every right and remedy given by this Article 11 or by law to the
        Trustee or to the Holders may be exercised from time to time, and as often
        as
        may be deemed expedient, by the Trustee or by the Holders, as the case may
        be.

       

      ARTICLE
        12  

       

      Trustee

       

      Section
        12.01   Certain
        Duties and Responsibilities of Trustee.

       

      (a)  In
        case an Event of Default with respect to the Securities has occurred (that
        has
        not been cured or waived), the Trustee shall exercise with respect to the
        Securities such of the rights and powers vested in it by this Indenture,
        and use
        the same degree of care and skill in their exercise, as a prudent person
        would
        exercise or use under the circumstances in the conduct of his or her own
        affairs.

       

      (b)  Prior
        to
        the occurrence of an Event of Default with respect to the Securities and
        after
        the curing or waiving of all such Events of Default with respect to the
        Securities that may have occurred:

       

      (i)  the
        duties and obligations of the Trustee shall with respect to the Securities
        be
        determined solely by the express provisions of this Indenture, and the Trustee
        shall not be liable with respect to the Securities except for the performance
        of
        such duties and obligations as are specifically set forth in this Indenture,
        and
        no implied covenants or obligations shall be read into this Indenture against
        the Trustee; and

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          56

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (ii)  in
        the
        absence of bad faith on the part of the Trustee, the Trustee may conclusively
        rely, as to the truth of the statements and the correctness of the opinions
        expressed therein, upon any certificates or opinions furnished to the Trustee
        and conforming to the requirements of this Indenture; but in the case of
        any
        such certificates or opinions that by any provision hereof are specifically
        required to be furnished to the Trustee, the Trustee shall be under a duty
        to
        examine the same to determine whether or not they conform on their face to
        the
        requirements of this Indenture (but need not confirm or investigate the accuracy
        of any mathematical calculations or other facts stated therein).

       

      (c)  No
        provision of this Indenture shall be construed to relieve the Trustee from
        liability for its own negligent action, its own negligent failure to act,
        or its
        own willful misconduct, except that:

       

      (i)  this
        subsection shall not be construed to limit the effect of Section
        12.01(b);

       

      (ii)  the
        Trustee shall not be liable for any error of judgment made in good faith
        by a
        Trust Officer or Trust Officers, unless it shall be proved that the Trustee
        was
        negligent in ascertaining the pertinent facts;

       

      (iii)  the
        Trustee shall not be liable with respect to any action taken or omitted to
        be
        taken by it in good faith in accordance with the direction of the Holders
        of not
        less than a majority in principal amount of the Securities at the time
        outstanding (determined as provided in Section 2.08) relating to the time,
        method and place of conducting any proceeding for any remedy available to
        the
        Trustee, or exercising any trust or power conferred upon the Trustee under
        this
        Indenture with respect to the Securities; and

       

      (iv)  none
        of
        the provisions contained in this Indenture shall require the Trustee to expend
        or risk its own funds or otherwise incur personal financial liability in
        the
        performance of any of its duties or in the exercise of any of its rights
        or
        powers, if there is reasonable ground for believing that the repayment of
        such
        funds or liability is not reasonably assured to it under the terms of this
        Indenture or adequate indemnity against such risk is not reasonably assured
        to
        it.

       

      (d)  Whether
        or not expressly so provided, every provision of this Indenture relating
        to the
        conduct or affecting the liability or affording protection to the Trustee
        (in
        any capacity, including Paying Agent, Registrar or Conversion Agent) shall
        be
        subject to the provisions of this Section.

       

      Section
        12.02   Certain
        Rights of Trustee.

       

      Except
        as
        otherwise provided in Section 12.01:

       

      (a)  The
        Trustee may conclusively rely and shall be fully protected in acting or
        refraining from acting upon any resolution, certificate, statement, instrument,
        opinion, report, notice, request, consent, order, approval, bond, security
        or
        other paper or document (whether in original or facsimile form) believed
        by it
        in good faith to be genuine and to have been signed or presented by the proper
        party or parties. The Trustee need not investigate any fact or matter stated
        in
        any such document;

       

      (b)  Any
        request, direction, order or demand of the Company mentioned herein shall
        be
        sufficiently evidenced by a resolution of the Company’s Board of Directors or an
        instrument signed in the name of the Company, by one or more Officers thereof
        (unless other evidence in respect thereof is specifically prescribed
        herein);

       

      (c)  Before
        the Trustee acts or refrains from acting, it may require an Officers’
Certificate or an Opinion of Counsel or both. The Trustee shall not be liable
        for any action it takes or omits to take in good faith in reliance on such
        Officers’ Certificate or Opinion of Counsel. The Trustee may consult with
        counsel of its own selection and the advice of such counsel and Opinions
        of
        Counsel with respect to legal matters relating to this Indenture and the
        Securities shall be full and complete authorization and protection from
        liability in respect of any action taken, suffered or omitted by it hereunder
        in
        good faith and in reliance thereon;

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          57

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (d)  The
        Trustee shall be under no obligation to exercise any of the rights or powers
        vested in it by this Indenture at the request, order or direction of any
        of the
        Securityholders, pursuant to the provisions of this Indenture, unless such
        Securityholders shall have offered to the Trustee security or indemnity
        reasonably satisfactory to it against the costs, expenses and liabilities
        that
        may be incurred therein or thereby;

       

      (e)  The
        Trustee shall not be liable for any action taken or omitted to be taken by
        it in
        good faith and believed by it to be authorized or within the discretion or
        rights or powers conferred upon it by this Indenture;

       

      (f)  The
        Trustee shall not be bound to make any investigation into the facts or matters
        stated in any resolution, certificate, statement, instrument, opinion, report,
        notice, request, consent, order, approval, bond, security, or other papers
        or
        documents, but the Trustee, in its discretion, may make even further inquiry
        or
        investigation into such facts or matters as it may see fit; and, if the Trustee
        shall determine to make such further inquiry or investigation, it shall be
        entitled to examine the books, records and premises of the Company, personally
        or by agent or attorney at the sole cost of the Company and shall incur no
        liability or additional liability of any kind by reason of such inquiry or
        investigation;

       

      (g)  The
        Trustee may execute any of the trusts or powers hereunder or perform any
        duties
        hereunder either directly or by or through agents or attorneys and the Trustee
        shall not be responsible for any misconduct or negligence on the part of
        any
        agent or attorney appointed with due care by it hereunder;

       

      (h)  The
        Trustee shall not be deemed to have knowledge or be charged with knowledge
        of an
        Event of Default except (i) if the Trustee is acting as Paying Agent, any
        Default or Event of Default occurring pursuant to Sections 9.01, 11.01(a)
        or
        11.01(b) and (ii) any Default or Event of Default of which the Trustee shall
        have received written notification which references the Securities and this
        Indenture or of which a Trust Officer shall have obtained actual knowledge.
        Delivery of reports, information and documents to the Trustee under Section
        9.02
        is for informational purposes only and the Trustee’s receipt of the foregoing
        shall not constitute constructive notice of any information contained therein
        or
        determinable from information contained therein, including the Company’s
        compliance with any of its covenants hereunder (as to which the Trustee is
        entitled to rely exclusively on Officers’ Certificates, except as otherwise
        provided herein);

       

      (i)  The
        rights, privileges, protections, immunities and benefits given to the Trustee
        pursuant hereto, including, without limitation, its right to be indemnified,
        are
        extended to, and shall be enforceable by, the Trustee in each of its capacities
        hereunder, and each agent, custodian and other person employed by the Trustee
        to
        act hereunder;

       

      (j)  The
        permissive right of the Trustee to take or refrain from taking any actions
        enumerated in this Indenture shall not be construed as a duty;

       

      (k)  The
        Trustee may request that the Company deliver an Officers’ Certificate setting
        forth the names of individuals and/or titles of officers authorized at such
        time
        to take specified actions pursuant to this Indenture, which Officers’
Certificate may be signed by any person authorized to sign an Officers’
Certificate, including any person specified as so authorized in any such
        certificate previously delivered and not superseded;

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          58

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (l)  Anything
        in this Indenture notwithstanding, in no event shall the Trustee be liable
        for
        special, indirect, punitive or consequential loss or damage of any kind
        whatsoever (including but not limited to loss of profit), even if the Trustee
        has been advised as to the likelihood of such loss or damage and regardless
        of
        the form of action; and

       

      (m)  The
        Trustee shall not be responsible or liable for any failure or delay in the
        performance of its obligations under this Indenture arising out of or caused,
        directly or indirectly, by circumstances beyond its reasonable control,
        including, without limitation, acts of God; earthquakes; fire; flood; terrorism;
        wars and other military disturbances; sabotage; epidemics; riots; interruptions,
        loss or malfunctions of utilities, computer (hardware or software) or
        communication services; accidents; labor disputes; acts of civil or military
        authority and governmental action.

       

      Section
        12.03   Trustee
        Not Responsible for Recitals or Issuance of Securities.

       

      (a)
        The
        recitals contained herein and in the Securities shall be taken as the statements
        of the Company, and the Trustee assumes no responsibility for the correctness
        of
        the same.

       

      (b)  The
        Trustee makes no representations as to the validity or sufficiency of this
        Indenture or of the Securities.

       

      (c)  The
        Trustee or any Authorized Agent shall not be accountable for the use or
        application by the Company of any of the Securities or of the proceeds of
        such
        Securities, or for the use or application of any moneys paid over by the
        Trustee
        in accordance with any provision of this Indenture or established pursuant
        to
        Section 2.01, or for the use or application of any moneys received by any
        Paying
        Agent other than the Trustee.

       

      Section
        12.04   May
        Hold Securities.

       

      The
        Trustee or any Paying Agent or Security Registrar, in its individual or any
        other capacity, may become the owner or pledgee of Securities and, subject
        to
        Section 12.16, may otherwise deal with the Company with the same rights it
        would
        have if it were not Trustee, Paying Agent or Security Registrar.

       

      Section
        12.05   Moneys
        Held in Trust.

       

      Subject
        to the provisions of Section 15.02, all moneys received by the Trustee shall,
        until used or applied as herein provided, be held in trust for the purposes
        for
        which they were received, but need not be segregated from other funds except
        to
        the extent required by law. The Trustee shall be under no liability for interest
        on any moneys received by it hereunder except such as it may agree in writing
        with the Company to pay thereon.

       

      Section
        12.06   Compensation
        and Reimbursement.

       

      (a)
        The
        Company covenants and agrees to pay to the Trustee, and the Trustee shall
        be
        entitled to, such compensation (which shall not be limited by any provision
        of
        law in regard to the compensation of a trustee of an express trust), as the
        Company and the Trustee may from time to time agree in writing for all services
        rendered by it in the execution of the trusts hereby created and in the exercise
        and performance of any of the powers and duties hereunder of the Trustee,
        and,
        except as otherwise expressly provided herein, the Company shall pay or
        reimburse the Trustee upon its request for all reasonable expenses,
        disbursements and advances incurred or made by the Trustee in accordance
        with
        any of the provisions of this Indenture (including the reasonable compensation
        and the expenses and disbursements of its counsel and of all Persons not
        regularly in its employ) except any such expense, disbursement or advance
        as may
        arise from the Trustee’s gross negligence, bad faith or willful misconduct. The
        Company covenants and agrees to indemnify the Trustee (and its officers,
        agents,
        directors, stockholders and employees) for, and to hold it harmless against,
        any
        loss, liability or expense (including, without limitation, reasonable attorney’s
        fees and expenses) incurred without gross negligence or bad faith or willful
        misconduct on the part of the Trustee and arising out of or in connection
        with
        the acceptance or administration of this trust, including the reasonable
        costs
        and expenses of defending itself against any claim of liability in the
        premises.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          59

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (b)  The
        obligations of the Company under this Section to compensate and indemnify
        the
        Trustee and to pay or reimburse the Trustee for reasonable expenses,
        disbursements and advances shall constitute additional indebtedness hereunder.
        Such additional indebtedness shall be secured by a lien prior to that of
        the
        Securities upon all property and funds held or collected by the Trustee as
        such,
        except funds held in trust for the benefit of the Holders.

       

      (c)  When
        the
        Trustee incurs expenses or renders services after an Event of Default specified
        in Section 11.01(h) or (i) occurs, the expenses and the compensation for
        the
        services are intended to constitute expenses of administration under any
        Bankruptcy Law.

       

      (d)  For
        the
        purposes of this Section 12.06, the “Trustee” shall include any predecessor
        Trustee; provided,
        however,
        that
        the gross negligence, bad faith or willful misconduct of any Trustee or other
        indemnified party hereunder shall not affect the rights of any other Trustee
        hereunder.

       

      (e)  The
        provisions of this Section shall survive the discharge of this Indenture
        and
        resignation or removal of the Trustee.

       

      Section
        12.07   Reliance
        on Officers’ Certificate.

       

      Except
        as
        otherwise provided in Section 12.01, whenever in the administration of the
        provisions of this Indenture the Trustee shall deem it necessary or desirable
        that a matter be proved or established prior to taking or suffering or omitting
        to take any action hereunder, such matter (unless other evidence in respect
        thereof be herein specifically prescribed) may, in the absence of bad faith
        on
        the part of the Trustee, be deemed to be conclusively proved and established
        by
        an Officers’ Certificate or Opinion of Counsel delivered to the Trustee and such
        certificate, in the absence of bad faith on the part of the Trustee, shall
        be
        full warrant to the Trustee for any action taken, suffered or omitted to
        be
        taken by it under the provisions of this Indenture upon the faith
        thereof.

       

      Section
        12.08   Disqualification:
        Conflicting Interests.

       

      If
        the
        Trustee has or shall acquire any “conflicting interest” within the meaning of
        Section 310(b) of the TIA, the Trustee and the Company shall in all respects
        comply with the provisions of Section 310(b) of the TIA.

       

      Section
        12.09   Corporate
        Trustee Required; Eligibility.

       

      There
        shall at all times be a Trustee with respect to the Securities issued hereunder
        which shall at all times be a corporation organized and doing business under
        the
        laws of the United States of America or any State or Territory thereof or
        of the
        District of Columbia, or a corporation or other Person permitted to act as
        trustee by the SEC, authorized under such laws to exercise corporate trust
        powers, having a combined capital and surplus, or being a member of a bank
        holding company with a combined capital and surplus, of at least 50 million
        U.S.
        dollars ($50,000,000), and subject to supervision or examination by Federal,
        State, Territorial or District of Columbia authority. If such corporation
        publishes reports of condition at least annually, pursuant to law or to the
        requirements of the aforesaid supervising or examining authority, then for
        the
        purposes of this Section, the combined capital and surplus of such corporation
        shall be deemed to be its combined capital and surplus as set forth in its
        most
        recent report of condition so published. The Company may not, nor may any
        Person
        directly or indirectly controlling, controlled by, or under common control
        with
        the Company, serve as Trustee. In case at any time the Trustee shall cease
        to be
        eligible in accordance with the provisions of this Section, the Trustee shall
        resign immediately in the manner and with the effect specified in Section
        12.10.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          60

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        12.10   Resignation
        and Removal; Appointment of Successor.

       

      (a)
        The
        Trustee or any successor hereafter appointed may at any time resign as Trustee
        with respect to the Securities by giving written notice thereof to the Company
        and by transmitting notice of resignation by mail, first class postage prepaid,
        to the Securityholders, as their names and addresses appear upon the Register.
        Upon receiving such notice of resignation, the Company shall promptly appoint
        a
        successor trustee with respect to the Securities by or pursuant to a resolution
        of the Board of Directors. If no successor trustee shall have been so appointed
        and have accepted appointment within 30 days after the mailing of such notice
        of
        resignation, the resigning Trustee may petition any court of competent
        jurisdiction for the appointment of a successor trustee with respect to the
        Securities, or any Securityholder who has been a bona fide holder of a Security
        or Securities for at least six months may on behalf of himself and all others
        similarly situated, petition any such court for the appointment of a successor
        trustee, in either case at the sole cost and expense of the Company. Such
        court
        may thereupon after such notice, if any, as it may deem proper and prescribe,
        appoint a successor trustee.

       

      (b)  In
        case
        at any time any one of the following shall occur:

       

      (i)  the
        Trustee shall fail to comply with the provisions of Section 12.08 after written
        request therefor by the Company or by any Securityholder who has been a bona
        fide holder of a Security or Securities for at least six months;

       

      (ii)  the
        Trustee shall cease to be eligible in accordance with the provisions of Section
        12.09 and shall fail to resign after written request therefor by the Company
        or
        by any such Securityholder; or

       

      (iii)  the
        Trustee shall become incapable of acting, or shall be adjudged a bankrupt
        or
        insolvent, or commence a voluntary bankruptcy proceeding, or a receiver of
        the
        Trustee or of its property shall be appointed or consented to, or any public
        officer shall take charge or control of the Trustee or of its property or
        affairs for the purpose of rehabilitation, conservation or
        liquidation;

       

      then,
        in
        any such case, the Company may remove the Trustee with respect to all Securities
        and appoint a successor trustee by or pursuant to a resolution of the Board
        of
        Directors, or, unless the Trustee’s duty to resign is stayed as provided herein,
        subject to Section 11.11, any Securityholder who has been a bona fide holder
        of
        a Security or Securities for at least six months may, on behalf of that Holder
        and all others similarly situated, petition any court of competent jurisdiction
        for the removal of the Trustee and the appointment of a successor trustee.
        Such
        court may thereupon after such notice, if any, as it may deem proper and
        prescribe, remove the Trustee and appoint a successor trustee.

       

      (c)  The
        Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Securities at
        the
        time outstanding may at any time remove the Trustee by so notifying the Trustee
        and the Company and may appoint a successor Trustee with the consent of the
        Company. If no successor trustee shall have been so appointed and have accepted
        appointment within 30 days after such notification of removal by the Holders,
        the Trustee to be removed may petition any court of competent jurisdiction
        for
        the appointment of a successor trustee with respect to the Securities, or
        any
        Securityholder who has been a bona fide holder of a Security or Securities
        for
        at least six months may on behalf of himself and all others similarly situated,
        petition any such court for the appointment of a successor trustee, in either
        case at the sole cost and expense of the Company. Such court may, as it may
        deem
        proper prescribe or appoint a successor trustee.

       

      (d)  Notwithstanding
        anything herein to the contrary, any resignation or removal of the Trustee
        and
        appointment of a successor trustee with respect to the Securities pursuant
        to
        any of the provisions of this Section shall become effective upon acceptance
        of
        appointment by the successor trustee as provided in Section 12.11.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          61

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (e)  So
        long
        as no event which is, or, after notice or lapse of time, or both, would become,
        an Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, and except with
        respect to a Trustee appointed by the Holders of a majority in principal
        amount
        of the Securities at that time outstanding pursuant to subsection (c) of
        this
        Section, if the Company shall have delivered to the Trustee (i) a resolution
        of
        the Board of Directors appointing a successor Trustee, effective as of a
        date
        specified therein, and (ii) an instrument of acceptance of such appointment,
        effective as of such date, by such successor Trustee in accordance with Section
        12.11, the Trustee shall be deemed to have resigned as contemplated in
        subsection (a) of this Section, the successor Trustee shall be deemed to
        have
        been appointed by the Company pursuant to subsection (a) of this Section
        and
        such appointment shall be deemed to have been accepted as contemplated in
        Section 12.11, all as of such date, and all other provisions of this Section
        and
        Section 12.11 shall be applicable to such resignation, appointment and
        acceptance except to the extent inconsistent with this subsection
        (e).

       

      (f)  At
        any
        time there shall be only one Trustee with respect to the
        Securities.

       

      Section
        12.11   Acceptance
        of Appointment By Successor.

       

      (a)
        In case
        of the appointment hereunder of a successor trustee with respect to the
        Securities, every such successor trustee so appointed shall execute, acknowledge
        and deliver to the Company and to the retiring Trustee an instrument accepting
        such appointment, and thereupon the resignation or removal of the retiring
        Trustee shall become effective and such successor trustee, without any further
        act, deed or conveyance, shall become vested with all the rights, powers,
        trusts
        and duties of the retiring Trustee; but, on the request of the Company or
        the
        successor trustee, such retiring Trustee shall, upon payment of its charges
        and
        all other amounts payable to it hereunder, execute and deliver an instrument
        transferring to such successor trustee all the rights, powers, and trusts
        of the
        retiring Trustee and shall duly assign, transfer and deliver to such successor
        trustee all property and money held by such retiring Trustee hereunder, subject
        to the lien provided for in Section 12.06(b).

       

      (b)  Upon
        request of any such successor trustee, the Company shall execute any and
        all
        instruments for more fully and certainly vesting in and confirming to such
        successor trustee all such rights, powers and trusts referred to in subsection
        (a) of this Section.

       

      (c)  No
        successor trustee shall accept its appointment unless at the time of such
        acceptance such successor trustee shall be qualified and eligible under this
        Article 12.

       

      (d)  Upon
        acceptance of appointment by a successor trustee as provided in this Section,
        the Company shall transmit notice of the succession of such trustee hereunder
        by
        mail, first class postage prepaid, to the Securityholders, as their names
        and
        addresses appear upon the Register. If the Company fails to transmit such
        notice
        within ten days after acceptance of appointment by the successor trustee,
        the
        successor trustee shall cause such notice to be transmitted at the expense
        of
        the Company.

       

      Section
        12.12   Merger,
        Conversion, Consolidation or Succession to Business.

       

      Any
        corporation or other business entity into which the Trustee may be merged
        or
        converted or with which it may be consolidated, or any corporation or other
        business entity resulting from any merger, conversion or consolidation to
        which
        the Trustee shall be a party, or any corporation or other business entity
        succeeding to all or substantially all of the corporate trust business of
        the
        Trustee, including the administration of this Indenture, shall be the successor
        of the Trustee hereunder, provided that such corporation or other business
        entity shall be qualified under the provisions of Section 12.08 and eligible
        under the provisions of Section 12.09, without the execution or filing of
        any
        paper or any further act on the part of any of the parties hereto, anything
        herein to the contrary notwithstanding. In case any Securities shall have
        been
        authenticated, but not delivered, by the Trustee then in office, any successor
        by merger, conversion or consolidation to such authenticating Trustee may
        adopt
        such authentication and deliver the Securities so authenticated with the
        same
        effect as if such successor Trustee had itself authenticated such
        Securities.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          62

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        12.13   Preferential
        Collection of Claims Against the Company.

       

      The
        Trustee shall comply with Section 311(a) of the TIA, excluding any creditor
        relationship described in Section 311(b) of the TIA. A Trustee who has resigned
        or been removed shall be subject to Section 311(a) of the TIA to the extent
        included therein.

       

      Section
        12.14   Notice
        of Defaults.

       

      If
        a
        Default or Event of Default occurs and is continuing hereunder and if it
        is
        actually known to a Trust Officer of the Trustee, the Trustee shall mail
        to each
        Holder notice of the Default or Event of Default within 90 days after such
        Default or Event of Default. Except in the case of a default in payment of
        principal of or interest (including Contingent Interest or Additional Interest,
        if any) on any Security, the Trustee may withhold the notice if and so long
        as a
        committee of its Trust Officers in good faith determines that withholding
        the
        notice is in the interest of the Holders of such Securities.

       

      Section
        12.15   Reports
        by Trustee.

       

      (a)
        Within
        sixty (60) days after May 1 of each year commencing with the year 2007, the
        Trustee shall transmit to Securityholders such reports dated as of May 1
        of the
        year in which such report is made concerning the Trustee and its actions
        under
        this Indenture as may be required pursuant to the TIA, including, without
        limitation, Section 313(a) thereof, at the times and in the manner provided
        pursuant thereto. In the event that, on any such reporting date, no events
        have
        occurred under the applicable sections of the TIA within the 12 months preceding
        such reporting date, the Trustee shall be under no duty or obligation to
        provide
        such reports. The Trustee shall also comply with TIA Section 313(b)(2). The
        Trustee shall transmit by mail all reports as required by TIA Section
        313(c).

       

      (b)  A
        copy of
        each such report shall, at the time of such transmission to Securityholders,
        be
        delivered to the Company and filed by the Trustee with each stock exchange
        upon
        which the Securities are listed and with the SEC in accordance with TIA Section
        313(d). The Company shall notify the Trustee when the Securities are listed
        on
        any stock exchange and of any delisting thereof.

       

      Section
        12.16   Preferential
        Collection of Claims.

       

      If
        and
        when the Trustee shall be or become a creditor of the Company (or any other
        obligor upon the Securities), the Trustee shall be subject to the provisions
        of
        the TIA regarding the collection of claims against the Company (or any such
        other obligor).

       

      ARTICLE
        13  

       

      Amendments,
        Supplements and Waivers

       

      Section
        13.01   Without
        Consent of Holders.

       

      The
        Company and the Trustee may amend or supplement this Indenture or the Securities
        without notice to, or consent of, any Securityholder:

       

      (a)  to
        cure
        any ambiguity, omission, defect or inconsistency, to correct or supplement
        any
        provision herein which may be inconsistent with any other provision herein,
        or
        to make any other provisions with respect to matters or questions arising
        under
        this Indenture which shall not be inconsistent with the provisions of this
        Indenture, provided that such action pursuant to this subsection (a) shall
        not
        adversely affect the interests of the Holders in any material
        respect;

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          63

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (b)  to
        provide for uncertificated Securities in addition to or in place of Certificated
        Securities;

       

      (c)  to
        provide for the assumption of the Company’s obligations to Holders of Securities
        in the case of a share exchange, merger or consolidation or sale of all or
        substantially all of the Company’s assets;

       

      (d)  to
        make
        any change that would provide any additional rights or benefits to the Holders
        of Securities or that does not adversely affect in any material respect the
        legal rights under this Indenture of any Securityholder;

       

      (e)  to
        add a
        guarantor;

       

      (f)  to
        comply
        with requirements of the SEC in order to effect or maintain the qualification
        of
        this Indenture under the TIA;

       

      (g)  to
        secure
        the Securities;

       

      (h)  to
        comply
        with the rules of any applicable securities depositary, including the
        Depositary;

       

      (i)  to
        increase the Conversion Rate;

       

      (j)  to
        execute a supplemental indenture in accordance with Section 7.08;

       

      (k)  to
        conform the text of this Indenture or the Securities to any provision of
        the
“Description of the Notes” contained in the Offering Circular to the extent that
        the text of the “Description of the Notes” was intended by the Company and the
        Initial Purchaser to be a recitation of the text of this Indenture or the
        Securities as represented by the Company to the Trustee in an Officers’
Certificate;

       

      (l)  to
        provide for a successor Trustee in accordance with the terms of this Indenture
        or to otherwise comply with any requirement of this Indenture;

       

      (m)  to
        provide for the issuance of Additional Securities, to the extent that the
        Company and the Trustee deem such amendment or supplement necessary or advisable
        in connection with such issuance; provided
        that no
        such amendment or supplement shall impair the rights or interests of any
        Holder
        of Initial Securities;

       

      (n)  to
        add to
        the Company’s covenants for the benefit of the Holders or surrender any right or
        power conferred on the Company; or

       

      (o)  to
        modify
        the restrictions and procedures for resale and other transfers of Securities
        or
        Common Stock pursuant to law, regulation or practice relating to the resale
        or
        transfer of restricted securities generally.

       

      Section
        13.02   With
        Consent of Holders.

       

      The
        Company and the Trustee may amend or supplement the Securities or this Indenture
        with the consent of the Holders of at least a majority in aggregate principal
        amount of the Securities then outstanding. Subject to Section 11.04 and Section
        11.07, the Holders of at least a majority in aggregate principal amount of
        the
        Securities then outstanding may waive compliance in any instance by the Company
        with any provision of the Securities or this Indenture or waive any past
        default
        under this Indenture and its consequences, except a default in the payment
        of
        any amount due, or in the obligation to deliver Common Stock, with respect
        to
        any Security or in respect of any provision which under this Indenture cannot
        be
        modified or amended, in each case without notice to any Securityholder. However,
        notwithstanding the foregoing but subject to Section 13.04, without the consent
        of the Holders of each Security then outstanding, an amendment, supplement
        or
        waiver may not:

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          64

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (a)  change
        the stated maturity of the principal of or the payment date of any installment
        of interest (including Contingent Interest or Additional Interest, if any)
        on or
        with respect to any Security;

       

      (b)  reduce
        the principal amount, the Redemption Price, Repurchase Price or Fundamental
        Change Purchase Price, or the Conversion Rate (except as provided in this
        Indenture) of any Security or rate of interest, Contingent Interest or
        Additional Interest on, any Security;

       

      (c)  reduce
        the amount of principal payable upon acceleration of the maturity of any
        Security;

       

      (d)  change
        the currency in which payment of principal, the Redemption Price, Repurchase
        Price or Fundamental Change Purchase Price, or interest (including Contingent
        Interest or Additional Interest, if any) with respect to, the Securities
        is
        payable;

       

      (e)  impair
        the right to institute suit for the enforcement of any payment on, or with
        respect to, any Security;

       

      (f)  modify
        the provisions with respect to the repurchase rights of Holders as provided
        in
        Article 5 in a manner adverse to Holders;

       

      (g)  adversely
        affect the right of Holders to convert Securities other than as provided
        in this
        Indenture;

       

      (h)  reduce
        the percentage in principal amount of the outstanding Securities, the consent
        of
        whose Holders is required to take specific actions including, but not limited
        to, the waiver of past defaults or the modification or amendment of this
        Indenture; or

       

      (i)  alter
        the
        manner of calculation or rate of accrual of interest (including Contingent
        Interest or Additional Interest, if any), the Redemption Price, Repurchase
        Price, Fundamental Change Purchase Price or the Conversion Rate (except as
        permitted under this Indenture) on any Security or extend the time for payment
        of any such amount or shorten the time for redemption.

       

      It
        shall
        not be necessary for the consent of the Holders under this Section 13.02
        to
        approve the particular form of any proposed amendment, supplement or waiver,
        but
        it shall be sufficient if such consent approves the substance
        thereof.

       

      After
        an
        amendment, supplement or waiver under Section 13.01 or this Section 13.02
        becomes effective, the Company shall mail to the Holders affected thereby
        a
        notice briefly describing the amendment, supplement or waiver. Any failure
        of
        the Company to mail such notice, or any defect therein, shall not, however,
        in
        any way impair or affect the validity of any such amendment, supplement or
        waiver.

       

      Section
        13.03   Compliance
        with Trust Indenture Act.

       

      Every
        amendment to or supplement of this Indenture or the Securities shall comply
        with
        the TIA as in effect at the date of such amendment or supplement.

       

      Section
        13.04   Revocation
        and Effect of Consents.

       

      Until
        an
        amendment, supplement or waiver becomes effective, a consent to it by a Holder
        is a continuing consent by the Holder and every subsequent Holder of a Security
        or portion of a Security that evidences the same debt as the consenting Holder’s
        Security, even if notation of the consent is not made on any Security. However,
        any such Holder or subsequent Holder may revoke the consent as to its Security
        or portion of a Security if the Trustee receives the notice of revocation
        before
        the date the amendment, supplement or waiver becomes effective.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          65

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      After
        an
        amendment, supplement or waiver becomes effective, it shall bind every
        applicable Securityholder.

       

      Section
        13.05   Notation
        on or Exchange of Securities.

       

      If
        an
        amendment, supplement or waiver changes the terms of a Security, the Trustee
        may
        require the Holder of the Security to deliver it to the Trustee. The Trustee
        may
        place an appropriate notation on the Security about the changed terms and
        return
        it to the Holder. Alternatively, if the Company or the Trustee so determines,
        the Company in exchange for the Security shall issue and the Trustee shall
        authenticate a new Security that reflects the changed terms.

       

      Section
        13.06   Trustee
        to Sign Amendments, Etc.

       

      The
        Trustee shall sign any amendment or supplemental indenture authorized pursuant
        to this Article 13 if the amendment or supplemental indenture does not adversely
        affect the rights, duties, liabilities or immunities of the Trustee in any
        material respect. If it does adversely affect the rights, duties, liabilities
        or
        immunities of the Trustee in any material respect, the Trustee may, in its
        sole
        discretion, but need not sign it. In signing or refusing to sign such amendment
        or supplemental indenture, the Trustee shall be provided with and, subject
        to
        Section 12.01, shall be fully protected in relying upon, an Officers’
Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel stating that such amendment or
        supplemental indenture is authorized or permitted by this Indenture and that
        all
        conditions precedent to the effectiveness of such amendment or supplement
        have
        been satisfied or duly waived.

       

      Section
        13.07   Effect
        of Supplemental Indentures.

       

      Upon
        the
        execution of any supplemental indenture under this Article, this Indenture
        shall
        be modified in accordance therewith, and such supplemental indenture shall
        form
        a part of this Indenture for all purposes; and every Holder of Securities
        theretofore or thereafter authenticated and delivered hereunder shall be
        bound
        thereby.

       

       

      ARTICLE
        14  

       

      [Reserved]

       

      ARTICLE
        15  

       

      Satisfaction
        and Discharge

       

      Section
        15.01   Satisfaction
        and Discharge of the Indenture.

       

      This
        Indenture shall cease to be of further effect (except as to any surviving
        rights
        of registration of transfer or exchange of Securities herein expressly provided
        for), and the Trustee, on demand of and at the expense of the Company, shall
        execute proper instruments acknowledging satisfaction and discharge of this
        Indenture, when

       

      (a)  either

       

      (i)  all
        Securities theretofore authenticated and delivered (other than Securities
        that
        have been destroyed, lost or stolen and which have been replaced or paid
        as
        provided in Section 2.07) have been delivered to the Trustee for cancellation;
        or

       

      (ii)  all
        such
        Securities not theretofore delivered to the Trustee for cancellation have
        become
        due and payable whether at the Maturity Date, any Redemption Date or Repurchase
        Date, upon acceleration, upon conversion or otherwise and the Company deposits
        with the Paying Agent or Conversion Agent, as the case may be, Cash, Common
        Stock or other consideration, or a combination thereof, as applicable hereunder,
        sufficient to pay on such date all amounts due and owing on all outstanding
        Securities (other than Securities replaced pursuant to Section 2.07) on such
        date;

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          66

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (b)  the
        Company has paid or caused to be paid all other sums payable hereunder by
        the
        Company; and

       

      (c)  the
        Company has delivered to the Trustee an Officers’ Certificate and an Opinion of
        Counsel, each stating that all conditions precedent herein provided for relating
        to the satisfaction and discharge of this Indenture have been complied
        with.

       

      Notwithstanding
        the satisfaction and discharge of this Indenture, the obligations of the
        Company
        to the Trustee under Section 12.06 and, if money shall have been deposited
        with
        the Trustee pursuant to Section 15.01(a)(ii), the obligations of the Trustee
        under Section 15.02 shall survive such satisfaction and discharge.

       

      Notwithstanding
        anything herein to the contrary, Article 7, Article 15, and Section 2.04,
        Section 2.06, Section 2.07, Section 2.08, Section 2.15, Section 2.16, Section
        9.01, Section 9.05, Section 9.06 and Section 12.06 shall survive any discharge
        of this Indenture until such time as there are no Securities
        outstanding.

       

      Section
        15.02   Repayment
        to the Company.

       

      The
        Trustee, the Paying Agent and the Conversion Agent shall return to the Company
        upon written request any Cash or securities held by them for the payment
        of any
        amount with respect to the Securities that remains unclaimed for two years,
        subject to applicable unclaimed property law. After return to the Company,
        Holders entitled to the Cash or securities must look to the Company for payment
        as general creditors unless an applicable abandoned property law designates
        another person and the Trustee, the Paying Agent and the Conversion Agent
        shall
        have no further liability to the Securityholders with respect to such Cash
        or
        securities for that period commencing after the return thereof.

       

       

      ARTICLE
        16  

       

      Miscellaneous

       

      Section
        16.01   Trust
        Indenture Act Controls.

       

      If
        any
        provision of this Indenture limits, qualifies or conflicts with another
        provision which is required to be included in this Indenture by the TIA,
        including, without limitation, the duties imposed by TIA Section 318(c),
        the
        required provision of the TIA shall control.

       

      Section
        16.02   Notices.

       

      .
        Any
        demand, authorization, notice, request, consent or communication shall be
        given
        in writing and delivered in person, sent by overnight courier or mailed by
        first-class mail, postage prepaid, addressed as follows or transmitted by
        facsimile transmission (confirmed by delivery in person or mail by first-class
        mail, postage prepaid, or by guaranteed overnight courier) to the parties
        hereto
        as follows:

       

      If
        to the
        Company, to:

       

      Linear
        Technology Corporation

       

      1630
        McCarthy Boulevard

       

      Milpitas,
        CA 95035-7417

       

      Attention:
        Chief Financial Officer

       

      Facsimile
        No.: (408) 434-0507

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          67

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      if
        to the
        Trustee, to:

       

      U.S.
        Bank
        National Association

       

      633
        West
        5th Street, 24th Floor

       

      Los
        Angeles, CA 90071

       

      Attention:
        Corporate Trust Services

       

      (Linear
        3.00% Convertible Senior Notes due 2027)

       

      Fax:
        (213) 615-6197

       

      Such
        notices or communications to the Trustee shall be effective when
        received.

       

      The
        Company or the Trustee by notice to the other in the manner prescribed above
        may
        designate additional or different addresses or facsimile numbers for subsequent
        notices or communications.

       

      Any
        notice or communication mailed to a Securityholder shall be mailed by
        first-class mail, postage prepaid, or delivered by hand or by an overnight
        delivery service to it at its address shown on the Register and shall be
        sufficiently given if so mailed or delivered within the time prescribed.
        Any
        notice or communication shall also be mailed to any Person described in TIA
        Section 313(c), to the extent required by the TIA.

       

      Failure
        to mail a notice or communication to a Securityholder or any defect in it
        shall
        not affect its sufficiency with respect to other Securityholders. Except
        as set
        forth above as to the Trustee, if a notice or communication is mailed in
        the
        manner provided above, it is duly given, whether or not the addressee receives
        it.

       

      Section
        16.03   Communications
        by Holders with Other Holders.

       

      Securityholders
        may communicate pursuant to TIA Section 312(b) with other Securityholders
        with
        respect to their rights under this Indenture or the Securities. The Company,
        the
        Trustee, the Registrar, the Paying Agent, the Conversion Agent and any other
        Person shall have the protection of TIA Section 312(c).

       

      Section
        16.04   Certificate
        and Opinion as to Conditions Precedent.

       

      (a)
        Upon any
        request or application by the Company to the Trustee to take any action under
        this Indenture, the Company shall furnish to the Trustee at the request of
        the
        Trustee:

       

      (i)  an
        Officers’ Certificate stating that, in the opinion of the signers, all
        conditions precedent (including any covenants, compliance with which constitutes
        a condition precedent), if any, provided for in this Indenture relating to
        the
        proposed action have been complied with; and

       

      (ii)  an
        Opinion of Counsel stating that, in the opinion of such counsel, all such
        conditions precedent (including any covenants, compliance with which constitutes
        a condition precedent) have been complied with.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          68

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (b)  Each
        Officers’ Certificate and Opinion of Counsel with respect to compliance with a
        condition or covenant provided for in this Indenture (other than an Officers’
Certificate provided pursuant to Section 9.03) shall include:

       

      (i)  a
        statement that the person making such certificate or opinion has read such
        covenant or condition;

       

      (ii)  a
        brief
        statement as to the nature and scope of the examination or investigation
        upon
        which the statements or opinions contained in such certificate or opinion
        are
        based;

       

      (iii)  a
        statement that, in the opinion of such person, he or she has made such
        examination or investigation as is necessary to enable him or her to express
        an
        informed opinion as to whether or not such covenant or condition has been
        complied with; and

       

      (iv)  a
        statement as to whether or not, in the opinion of such person, such condition
        or
        covenant has been complied with;

       

      provided
        that
        with respect to matters of fact an Opinion of Counsel may rely on an Officers’
Certificate or certificates of public officials.

       

      Section
        16.05   Record
        Date for Vote or Consent of Securityholders.

       

      The
        Company may set a record date for purposes of determining the identity of
        Holders entitled to vote or consent to any action by vote or consent authorized
        or permitted under this Indenture, which record date shall not be more than
        30
        days prior to the date of the commencement of solicitation of such action.
        Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 13.04, if a record date is fixed,
        those persons who were Holders of Securities at the Close of Business on
        such
        record date (or their duly designated proxies), and only those persons, shall
        be
        entitled to take such action by vote or consent or to revoke any vote or
        consent
        previously given, whether or not such persons continue to be Holders after
        such
        record date.

       

      Section
        16.06   Rules
        by Trustee, Paying Agent, Registrar and Conversion Agent.

       

      The
        Trustee may make reasonable rules (not inconsistent with the terms of this
        Indenture) for action by or at a meeting of Holders. Any Registrar, Paying
        Agent
        or Conversion Agent may make reasonable rules for its functions.

       

      Section
        16.07   Legal
        Holidays.

       

      A
        “Legal
        Holiday”
is
        a
        Saturday, Sunday or a day on which state or federally chartered banking
        institutions in New York, New York are not required to be open. If a payment
        date is a Legal Holiday, payment shall be made on the next succeeding day
        that
        is not a Legal Holiday, and no interest shall accrue for the intervening
        period.
        If an Interest Payment Record Date or other record date is a Legal Holiday,
        the
        record date shall not be affected.

       

      Section
        16.08   Governing
        Law; Jury Trial Waiver.

       

      This
        Indenture and the Securities shall be governed by, and construed in accordance
        with, the laws of the State of New York.

       

      EACH
        OF
        THE COMPANY AND THE TRUSTEE HERETO HEREBY WAIVES, TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
        PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY RIGHT IT MAY HAVE TO A TRIAL BY JURY IN
        RESPECT
        OF ANY LITIGATION DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY ARISING OUT OF, UNDER OR IN CONNECTION
        WITH THIS INDENTURE.

       

      Section
        16.09   No
        Adverse Interpretation of Other Agreements.

       

      This
        Indenture may not be used to interpret another indenture, loan or debt agreement
        of the Company or a Subsidiary of the Company. Any such indenture, loan or
        debt
        agreement may not be used to interpret this Indenture.

       

      Section
        16.10   No
        Recourse Against Others.

       

      No
        recourse for the payment of the principal of, or accrued and unpaid interest
        (including Contingent Interest or Additional Interest, if any), on, any
        Security, or for any claim based thereon or otherwise in respect thereof,
        and no
        recourse under or upon any obligation, covenant or agreement of the Company
        in
        this Indenture or in any supplemental indenture or in any Security, or because
        of the creation of any Indebtedness represented thereby, shall be had against
        any past, present or future incorporator, stockholder, employee, agent, officer
        or director or Subsidiary of the Company as such or of any successor
        corporation, either directly or through the Company or any successor
        corporation, whether by virtue of any constitution, statute or rule of law,
        or
        by the enforcement of any assessment or penalty or otherwise; it being expressly
        understood that, to the extent permitted by law, all such liability is hereby
        expressly waived and released as a condition of, and as a consideration for,
        the
        execution of this Indenture and the issue of the Securities.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          69

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Section
        16.11   Successors.

       

      All
        agreements of the Company in this Indenture and the Securities shall bind
        its
        successors. All agreements of the Trustee in this Indenture shall bind its
        successor.

       

      Section
        16.12   Multiple
        Counterparts.

       

      The
        parties may sign multiple counterparts of this Indenture. Each signed
        counterpart shall be deemed an original, but all of them together shall
        represent the same agreement.

       

      Section
        16.13   Separability.

       

      In
        case
        any provisions in this Indenture or in the Securities shall be invalid, illegal
        or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining
        provisions shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby.

       

      Section
        16.14   Calculations
        in Respect of the Securities.

       

      The
        Company or its agents shall make all calculations under this Indenture and
        the
        Securities in good faith. In the absence of manifest error, such calculations
        shall be final and binding on all Holders. The Company or its agents shall
        provide a copy of such calculations to the Trustee as required hereunder,
        and
        the Trustee shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of any such calculation
        without independent verification.

       

      Section
        16.15   Table
        of Contents, Headings, Etc.

       

      The
        table
        of contents, cross-reference sheet and headings of the Articles and Sections
        of
        this Indenture have been inserted for convenience of reference only, are
        not to
        be considered a part hereof, and shall in no way modify or restrict any of
        the
        terms or provisions hereof.

       

      [SIGNATURE
        PAGE FOLLOWS]

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          70

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

          Exhibit
            4.1

        

      

      IN
        WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have hereunto set their hands as of the
        date
        and year first above written.

       

      LINEAR
        TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION

       

      
        	
                By:
                  

              	 
	 	 
	 	
                Name:

              
	 	
                Title:

              

      

      

       

      U.S.
        BANK
        NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, not in its individual capacity, but solely as
        Trustee,

       

      
        	
                By:
                  

              	 
	 	 
	 	
                Name:

              
	 	
                Title:

              

      

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          71

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

       

      EXHIBIT
        A

       

      [FORM
        OF FACE OF SECURITY]

       

      UNLESS
        THIS CERTIFICATE IS PRESENTED BY AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE DEPOSITORY
        TRUST COMPANY, A NEW YORK CORPORATION (“DTC”), TO THE COMPANY OR ITS AGENT FOR
        REGISTRATION OF TRANSFER, EXCHANGE, OR PAYMENT, AND ANY CERTIFICATE ISSUED
        IS
        REGISTERED IN THE NAME OF CEDE & CO. OR IN SUCH OTHER NAME AS IS REQUESTED
        BY AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF DTC (AND ANY PAYMENT IS MADE TO CEDE &
CO. OR TO SUCH OTHER ENTITY AS IS REQUESTED BY AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
        OF
        DTC), ANY TRANSFER, PLEDGE OR OTHER USE HEREOF FOR VALUE OR OTHERWISE BY
        OR TO
        ANY PERSON IS WRONGFUL INASMUCH AS THE REGISTERED OWNER HEREOF, CEDE & CO.,
        HAS AN INTEREST HEREIN. THIS SECURITY IS A GLOBAL SECURITY WITHIN THE MEANING
        OF
        THE INDENTURE HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO AND IS REGISTERED IN THE NAME OF A
        DEPOSITARY OR A NOMINEE THEREOF. THIS SECURITY IS EXCHANGEABLE FOR SECURITIES
        REGISTERED IN THE NAME OF A PERSON OTHER THAN THE DEPOSITARY OR ITS NOMINEE
        ONLY
        IN THE LIMITED CIRCUMSTANCES DESCRIBED IN THE INDENTURE AND, UNLESS AND UNTIL
        IT
        IS EXCHANGED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR SECURITIES IN DEFINITIVE FORM, THIS
        SECURITY MAY NOT BE TRANSFERRED EXCEPT AS A WHOLE BY THE DEPOSITARY TO A
        NOMINEE
        OF THE DEPOSITARY OR BY A NOMINEE OF THE DEPOSITARY TO THE DEPOSITARY OR
        ANOTHER
        NOMINEE OF THE DEPOSITARY OR BY THE DEPOSITARY OR ANY SUCH NOMINEE TO A
        SUCCESSOR DEPOSITARY OR A NOMINEE OF SUCH SUCCESSOR DEPOSITARY. 1 

       

      THIS
        SECURITY (OR ITS PREDECESSOR) WAS ORIGINALLY ISSUED IN A TRANSACTION EXEMPT
        FROM
        REGISTRATION UNDER THE UNITED STATES SECURITIES ACT OF 1933, AS AMENDED (THE
        “SECURITIES ACT”), AND THIS SECURITY AND ANY COMMON STOCK ISSUABLE UPON
        CONVERSION HEREOF MAY NOT BE OFFERED, SOLD OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERRED IN THE
        ABSENCE OF SUCH REGISTRATION OR AN APPLICABLE EXEMPTION THEREFROM. EACH
        PURCHASER OF THIS SECURITY IS HEREBY NOTIFIED THAT THE SELLER OF THIS SECURITY
        MAY BE RELYING ON THE EXEMPTION FROM THE PROVISIONS OF SECTION 5 OF THE
        SECURITIES ACT PROVIDED BY RULE 144A THEREUNDER. 2 

       

      THE
        HOLDER OF THIS SECURITY AGREES FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE COMPANY THAT (A) THIS
        SECURITY AND THE COMMON STOCK ISSUABLE UPON CONVERSION HEREOF MAY BE OFFERED,
        RESOLD, PLEDGED OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERRED, ONLY (I) IN THE UNITED STATES TO
        A
        PERSON WHOM THE SELLER REASONABLY BELIEVES IS A QUALIFIED INSTITUTIONAL BUYER
        (AS DEFINED IN RULE 144A UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT) IN A TRANSACTION MEETING
        THE
        REQUIREMENTS OF RULE 144A, (II) OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATE IN AN OFFSHORE
        TRANSACTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH REGULATION S UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT, (III)
        PURSUANT TO AN EXEMPTION FROM REGISTRATION UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT PROVIDED
        BY
        RULE 144 THEREUNDER (IF AVAILABLE) OR (IV) PURSUANT TO AN EFFECTIVE REGISTRATION
        STATEMENT UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT, IN EACH OF CASES (I) THROUGH (IV) IN
        ACCORDANCE WITH ANY APPLICABLE SECURITIES LAWS OF ANY STATE OF THE UNITED
        STATES, AND (B) THE HOLDER WILL,
        AND
        EACH SUBSEQUENT HOLDER IS REQUIRED TO, NOTIFY ANY PURCHASER OF THIS SECURITY
        FROM IT OF THE RESALE RESTRICTIONS REFERRED TO IN (A) ABOVE. 3 

       

      THIS
        SECURITY IS BEING ISSUED WITH ORIGINAL ISSUE DISCOUNT FOR UNITED STATES FEDERAL
        INCOME TAX PURPOSES. THE ISSUE PRICE FOR THIS SECURITY IS $1,000 PER $1,000
        OF
        PRINCIPAL AMOUNT AND THE ISSUE DATE FOR THIS SECURITY IS APRIL 24, 2007.
        THIS
        SECURITY IS SUBJECT TO UNITED STATES FEDERAL INCOME TAX REGULATIONS GOVERNING
        CONTINGENT PAYMENT DEBT INSTRUMENTS. THE COMPARABLE YIELD FOR THIS SECURITY
        IS
        7.00% PER ANNUM, COMPOUNDED SEMI-ANNUALLY (WHICH WILL BE TREATED AS THE YIELD
        TO
        MATURITY FOR UNITED STATES FEDERAL INCOME TAX PURPOSES). FOR INFORMATION
        REGARDING THE PROJECTED PAYMENT SCHEDULE FOR THIS SECURITY, HOLDERS SHOULD
        CONTACT THE CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER OF LINEAR TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION AT 1630
        MCCARTHY BOULEVARD, MILPITAS, CA 95035-7417.

       

      Pursuant
        to Section 2.16 of the Indenture, the foregoing legend is required for U.S.
        federal income tax purposes. 

       

      
        
          

            1
              This
              legend to be included only if the Security is a Global Security.

            2 This
              legend to be included only if the Security is a Restricted
              Security.

            3
              This
              legend to be included only if the Security if a Restricted
              Security.

             

          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

          Exhibit
            4.1

        

      

      LINEAR
        TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION

       

      3.00%
        Convertible Senior Note due May 1, 2027

       

      No.
        ___ CUSIP:
        535678AA4 U.S.
        $_________

      ISIN:
        US535678AA46

       

      Linear
        Technology Corporation, a Delaware corporation (the “Company,”
which
        term shall include any successor Person under the Indenture (as hereinafter
        defined)), promises to pay to Cede & Co., or registered assigns, the
        principal amount of ($ ) on May 1, 2027, and to pay interest thereon, in
        arrears, from and including the most recent Interest Payment Date to which
        interest has been paid or duly provided for (or if no interest has been paid,
        from, and including April 24, 2007), to, but excluding, May 1 and November
        1 of
        each year (each, an “Interest
        Payment Date”),
        beginning on November 1, 2007, at a rate of 3.00% per annum until the principal
        hereof is paid or made available for payment at May 1, 2027, or upon
        acceleration, or until such date on which this Security is converted, redeemed
        or purchased as provided herein. The interest so payable and punctually paid
        or
        duly provided for on any Interest Payment Date shall, as provided in the
        Indenture (as hereinafter defined), be paid to the Person in whose name this
        Security is registered at the Close of Business on the regular record date
        for
        such interest, which shall be the April 15 or October 15 (whether or not
        a
        Business Day), as the case may be, immediately preceding the relevant Interest
        Payment Date (each, an “Interest
        Payment Record Date”);
        provided,
        however,
        that
        interest shall be paid to a Person other than the Person in whose name this
        Security is registered at the Close of Business on the Interest Payment Record
        Date as provided herein. The Company will also pay contingent interest to
        the
        Holder during any six-month period from May 1 to October 31 and from November
        1
        to April 30 commencing with period beginning May 1, 2014, if the average
        trading
        price of the Security, for five consecutive trading days ending three trading
        days before the relevant six-month period equals 120% or more of the principal
        amount of the Security. The amount of contingent interest payable per $1,000
        principal amount of the Security with respect to any six-month period will
        equal
        0.25% per year of the average trading price of the Security for the five
        trading
        day period referred to above.

       

      Additional
        provisions of this Security are set forth on the reverse of this
        Security.

       

      [Signature
        page follows]

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

          Exhibit
            4.1

        

      

      IN
        WITNESS WHEREOF, the Company has caused this instrument to be duly
        executed.

       

      Dated:
        April 24, 2007

       

      LINEAR
        TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION

       

      
        	
                By:
                  

              	 
	 	 
	 	
                Name:

              
	 	
                Title:

              

      

      

       

      Trustee’s
        Certificate of Authentication: This is one of the Securities referred to
        in the
        within-mentioned Indenture.

       

       

      
        U.S.
          BANK
          NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, not in its individual capacity, but solely as
          Trustee,

         

      

       

      
        	
                By:
                  

              	 
	 	 
	 	
                Name:

              
	 	
                Title:

              

      

      

       

      

       

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

          Exhibit
            4.1

        

      

      [FORM
        OF REVERSE OF SECURITY]

       

      LINEAR
        TECHONOLOGY CORPORATION

       

      3.00%
        CONVERTIBLE SENIOR NOTE DUE MAY 1, 2027

       

      This
        Security is one of a duly authorized issue of 3.00% Convertible Senior Notes
        due
        May 1, 2027 (the “Securities”)
        of the
        Company issued under an Indenture, dated as of April 24, 2007 (the “Indenture”),
        between the Company and U.S. Bank National Association, as trustee (the
“Trustee”).
        The
        terms of this Security include those stated in the Indenture, those made
        part of
        the Indenture by reference to the Trust Indenture Act of 1939, as amended
        (the
“TIA”),
        and
        those set forth in this Security. This Security is subject to all such terms,
        and Holders are referred to the Indenture and the TIA for a statement of
        all
        such terms. To the extent permitted by applicable law, if any provision of
        this
        Security conflicts with the express provisions of the Indenture, the provisions
        of the Indenture shall govern and be controlling. Capitalized terms used
        but not
        defined herein have the meanings assigned to them in the Indenture unless
        otherwise indicated.

       

      
        	
                1.

              	
                Interest.

              

      

       

      Linear
        Technology Corporation, a Delaware corporation (the “Company”),
        promises to pay interest on the principal amount of this Security at the
        rate
        per annum shown above. 

       

      The
        Company will pay interest, payable semi-annually in arrears, on May 1 and
        November 1 of each year, with the first payment to be made on November 1,
        2007.
        Interest on this Security will accrue on the principal amount from, and
        including, the most recent date to which interest has been paid or provided
        for
        or, if no interest has been paid, from, and including, April 24, 2007, in
        each
        case to, but excluding, the next interest payment date or Maturity Date,
        as the
        case may be. Interest will be computed on the basis of a 360-day year of
        twelve
        30-day months. The Company will also pay contingent interest to the Holder
        during any six-month period from May 1 to October 31 and from November 1
        to
        April 30 commencing with period beginning May 1, 2014, if the average Trading
        Price per $1,000 principal amount of the Security, during the five consecutive
        Trading Days ending three Trading Days before the relevant six-month period
        equals or exceeds 120% of the principal amount of the Security. The amount
        of
        contingent interest payable per $1,000 principal amount of the Security with
        respect to any six-month period will equal 0.25% per year of the average
        Trading
        Price of the Security for the five Trading Day period referred to
        above.

       

      
        	
                2.

              	
                Method
                  of Payment.

              

      

       

      Payment
        of the principal of, and interest on, this Security shall be made at the
        office
        of the Paying Agent in such coin or currency of the United States of America
        as
        at the time of payment is legal tender for payment of public and private
        debts.
        The Holder must surrender this Security to a Paying Agent to collect payment
        of
        principal. Payment of interest on Certificated Securities shall be made by
        check
        mailed to the address of the Person entitled thereto as such address appears
        in
        the Register; provided,
        however,
        that
        Holders with Securities in an aggregate principal amount in excess of $2.0
        million shall be paid, at their written election, by wire transfer of
        immediately available funds. Notwithstanding the foregoing, so long as the
        Securities are registered in the name of a Depositary or its nominee, all
        payments with respect to the Securities shall be made by wire transfer of
        immediately available funds to the account of the Depositary or its
        nominee.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      
        	
                3.

              	
                Paying
                  Agent, Registrar, Conversion Agent.

              

      

       

      Initially,
        the Trustee shall act as Paying Agent, Registrar and Conversion Agent. The
        Company or any Affiliate of the Company may act as Paying Agent, Registrar
        or
        Conversion Agent, subject to the terms of the Indenture.

       

      
        	
                4.

              	
                Indenture.

              

      

       

      The
        Securities are general unsubordinated unsecured obligations of the Company
        initially limited to $1,000,000,000 aggregate principal amount. The Company
        may,
        without consent of the Holders, issue additional Securities under the Indenture
        with the same terms as the Securities in an unlimited aggregate principal
        amount; provided
        that
        no such
        Additional Securities may be issued unless fungible with the Securities for
        U.S.
        federal income tax purposes. The Indenture does not limit other debt of the
        Company, secured or unsecured.

       

      
        	
                5.

              	
                Redemption
                  at the Option of the Company.

              

      

       

      The
        Securities are redeemable for cash at the option of the Company, in whole
        or in
        part, at any time and from time to time on or after May 1, 2014 upon not
        less
        than 20 nor more than 60 days notice by mail for a redemption price equal
        to the
        principal amount of those Securities plus accrued and unpaid interest, including
        Contingent Interest and Additional Interest, if any, on those Securities
        up to,
        but not including, the Redemption Date.

       

      
        	
                6.
                  

              	
                Purchase
                  by the Company at the Option of the
                  Holder.

              

      

       

      Subject
        to the terms and conditions in Article 5 of the Indenture, the Company shall
        be
        obligated to repurchase for cash, at the option of the Holder, all or any
        portion of the Securities held by such Holder on May 1, 2014, May 1, 2017
        and
        May 1, 2022 in integral multiples of $1,000 at a Repurchase Price equal to
        100%
        of the principal amount of those Securities submitted for repurchase, plus
        accrued and unpaid interest, including Contingent Interest and Additional
        Interest, if any, on those Securities to, but not including the Specified
        Repurchase Date. 

       

      
        	
                7.

              	
                Purchase
                  by the Company Upon a Fundamental
                  Change.

              

      

       

      Subject
        to the terms and conditions set forth in Article 5 of the Indenture, each
        Holder
        shall have the option to require the Company to repurchase its Securities
        upon
        the occurrence of a Fundamental Change.

       

      
        	
                8.

              	
                Conversion.

              

      

       

      Subject
        to the terms and conditions set forth in Article 7 of the Indenture, the
        Securities shall be convertible into cash, and, if applicable, cash, shares
        of
        Common Stock or a combination thereof at the Company's election. In addition,
        subject to the terms and conditions set forth in Section 7.01 of the Indenture,
        upon the occurrence of a Makewhole Fundamental Change, we may increase the
        Conversion Rate for Securities converted in connection with a Makewhole
        Fundamental Change.

       

      
        	
                9.

              	
                Denominations;
                  Transfer; Exchange.

              

      

       

      The
        Securities are in registered form, without coupons, in denominations of $1,000
        and integral multiples of $1,000. A Holder may register the transfer of or
        exchange Securities in accordance with the Indenture. The Registrar may require
        a Holder, among other things, to furnish appropriate endorsements and transfer
        documents and to pay certain taxes, assessments or other governmental charges
        that may be imposed in relation thereto by law or permitted by the
        Indenture.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      
        	
                10.

              	
                Persons
                  Deemed Owners.

              

      

       

      The
        registered Holder of a Security may be treated as the owner of such Security
        for
        all purposes.

       

      
        	
                11.

              	
                Unclaimed
                  Money or Securities.

              

      

       

      The
        Trustee and the Paying Agent shall return to the Company upon written request
        any Cash or securities held by them for the payment of any amount with respect
        to the Securities that remains unclaimed for two years, subject to applicable
        unclaimed property law. After return to the Company, Holders entitled to
        the
        Cash or securities must look to the Company for payment as general creditors
        unless an applicable abandoned property law designates another
        person.

       

      
        	
                12.

              	
                Amendment,
                  Supplement and Waiver.

              

      

       

      Subject
        to certain exceptions, the Securities or the Indenture may be amended or
        supplemented with the consent of the Holders of at least a majority in aggregate
        principal amount of the Securities then outstanding, and, subject to certain
        exceptions, an existing or future Default or Event of Default with respect
        to
        the Securities and its consequences or compliance with any provision of the
        Securities or the Indenture may be waived with the consent of the Holders
        of at
        least a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Securities then
        outstanding. Subject to the terms of the Indenture, without the consent of
        or
        notice to any Holder, the Company and the Trustee may amend or supplement
        the
        Indenture or the Securities to, among other things, cure any ambiguity, defect,
        omission or inconsistency.

       

      
        	
                13.
                  

              	
                Defaults
                  and Remedies.

              

      

       

      Subject
        to certain exceptions set forth in the Indenture, if an Event of Default
        (excluding an Event of Default specified in Sections 11.01(h) or 11.01(i)
        of the
        Indenture with respect to the Company) occurs and is continuing, the Trustee
        by
        notice to the Company or the Holders of at least twenty five percent (25%)
        in
        principal amount of the Securities then outstanding by notice to the Company
        and
        the Trustee may declare the Securities to be due and payable. Upon such
        declaration, the principal of, and accrued and unpaid interest on, all
        Securities shall be due and payable immediately. If an Event of Default
        specified in Sections 11.01(h) or 11.01(i) of the Indenture with respect
        to the
        Company occurs, the principal of, and accrued and unpaid interest on, all
        the
        Securities shall ipso facto
        become
        and be immediately due and payable without any declaration or other act on
        the
        part of the Trustee or any Holder.

       

      
        	
                14.

              	
                Trustee
                  Dealings with the Company.

              

      

       

      Subject
        to certain limitations imposed by the TIA, the Trustee under the Indenture,
        in
        its individual or any other capacity, may become the owner or pledgee of
        Securities and may otherwise deal with and collect obligations owed to it
        by the
        Company or its Affiliates and may otherwise deal with the Company or its
        Affiliates with the same rights it would have if it were not the
        Trustee.

       

      
        	
                15.

              	
                No
                  Recourse Against Others.

              

      

       

      No
        recourse under or upon any obligation, covenant or agreement of the Company
        contained in the Indenture, or in this Security, or because of any indebtedness
        evidenced thereby or hereby, shall be had against any incorporator, as such,
        or
        against any past, present or future employee, stockholder, officer or director,
        as such, of the Company or of any successor, either directly or through the
        Company or any successor, under any rule of law, statute or constitutional
        provision or by the enforcement of any assessment or by any legal or equitable
        proceeding or otherwise, all such liability being expressly waived and released,
        to the extent permitted by law, by the acceptance of the Securities by the
        Holders and as part of the consideration for the issuance of the
        Securities.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      
        	
                16.
                  

              	
                U.S.
                  Federal income Tax Treatment.

              

      

       

      This
        Security is being issued with original issue discount for U.S. federal income
        tax purposes. The issue price for this Security is $1,000 per $1,000 principal
        amount and the issue date for this Security is April 24, 2007. The comparable
        yield for this Security is 7.00% per annum, compounded semi-annually (which
        will
        be treated as the yield to maturity for U.S. federal income tax purposes).
        For
        information regarding the projected payment schedule for the Securities,
        holders
        should contact the general counsel of Linear Technology Corporation at 1630
        McCarthy Boulevard, Milpitas, California 95035-7417.

       

      The
        Company agrees, and by acceptance of a Security, each holder hereof is deemed
        to
        have agreed, with respect to each of the matters set forth below, as
        follows:

       

      (a)  Tax
        Treatment:

       

      (i) to
        treat
        the Securities as indebtedness for U.S. federal income tax purposes that
        is
        subject to the Treasury Regulations governing contingent payment debt
        instruments (the “contingent debt regulations”); and

       

      (ii) to
        treat
        any payment to and receipt by a Holder of cash and Common Stock upon conversion
        of a Security as a contingent payment under the contingent debt
        regulations.

       

      (b) Comparable
        Yield and Projected Payment Schedule. Solely for purposes of applying the
        contingent debt regulations:

       

      (i) for
        United States federal income tax purposes, to accrue interest with respect
        to
        outstanding Securities as original issue discount according to the
“noncontingent bond method,” as set forth in the contingent debt regulations,
        using the comparable yield of 7.00% compounded semi-annually; and

       

      (ii) the
        Company acknowledges and agrees, and each Holder and any beneficial owner
        of a
        Security, by its purchase of a Security shall be deemed to acknowledge and
        agree, that (A) the projected payment schedule is determined on the basis
        of an assumption of constant annual growth rate of the stock price, (B) the
        comparable yield and the projected payment schedule are not determined for
        any
        other purpose other than for the determination of interest accruals and
        adjustments thereof in respect of the Securities for U.S. federal income
        tax
        purposes and (C) the comparable yield and the projected payment schedule
        for not constitute a projection or representation regarding the actual amounts
        payable on the Securities.

       

      
        	
                17.

              	
                Authentication.

              

      

       

      This
        Security shall not be valid until the Trustee or an authenticating agent
        manually signs the certificate of authentication on the other side of this
        Security.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      
        	
                18.

              	
                Abbreviations.

              

      

       

      Customary
        abbreviations may be used in the name of the Holder or an assignee, such
        as: TEN
        COM (= tenants in common), TEN ENT (= tenants by the entireties), JT TEN
        (=
        joint tenants with right of survivorship and not as tenants in common), CUST
        (=
        Custodian) and UGMA (= Uniform Gifts to Minors Act).

       

      
        	
                19.

              	
                Indenture
                  to Control; Governing Law.

              

      

       

      To
        the
        extent permitted by applicable law, if any provision of this Security conflicts
        with the express provisions of the Indenture, the provisions of the Indenture
        shall govern and be controlling. This Security shall be governed by, and
        construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of New York.

       

      
        	
                20.

              	
                Copies
                  of Indenture.

              

      

       

      The
        Company shall furnish to any Holder, upon written request and without charge,
        a
        copy of the Indenture. Requests may be made to: Linear Technology Corporation,
        1630 McCarthy Boulevard, Milpitas, CA 95035-7417, Fax No.: (408) 434-0507,
        Attention: Chief Financial Officer.

       

      21.
        [Registration Rights.

       

      The
        Holders of the Securities are entitled to the benefits of a Registration
        Rights
        Agreement, dated as of April 24, 2007, between the Company and the Initial
        Purchaser, including, in certain circumstances, the receipt of Additional
        Interest upon a registration default (as defined in such agreement).]

       

      
        
          4 
            Included only if the Security is a Restricted
            Security.

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

          Exhibit
            4.1

        

      

      

        SCHEDULE
          OF EXCHANGES OF SECURITIES
          5

         

      

      The
        following exchanges, redemptions, purchases or conversions of a part of this
        Global Security have been made:

       

      
        	
                DATE
                  OF DECREASE OR INCREASE

              	
                AUTHORIZED
                  SIGNATORY OF SECURITIES

              	
                DECREASE
                  IN PRINCIPAL AMOUNT OF THIS GLOBAL SECURITY

              	
                INCREASE
                  IN PRINCIPAL AMOUNT OF THIS GLOBAL SECURITY

              	
                PRINCIPAL
                  AMOUNT OF THIS GLOBAL SECURITY FOLLOWING SUCH DECREASE
                  OR
                  INCREASE

              
	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 	 	 

      

      

       

       

       

      
        
          5 
            This schedule to be included only if the Security is a Global
            Security.

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

          Exhibit
            4.1

        

      

      

        ASSIGNMENT
          FORM6

         

         

      

      To
        assign
        this Security, fill in the form below:

       

      I
        or we
        assign and transfer this Security to

       

      __________________________________________________________________

      (Insert
        assignee’s soc. sec. or tax ID no.)

       

      __________________________________________________________________

      (Print
        or type assignee’s name, address and zip code)

       

      and
        irrevocably appoint the agent to transfer this Security on the books of the
        Company. The agent may substitute another to act for him.

       

      Dated: ________________________

       

      Your
        Signature:_______________________________________________________

      (Sign
        exactly as your name appears on the other side of this Security)

       

      Signature
        guaranteed by a qualified

      guarantor
        institution with membership in

      an
        approved guarantee program pursuant to 

      Rule
        17Ad-15 under the Securities Exchange

      Act
        of
        1934

      

      

      By:
        _________________

      Authorized
        Signatory

       

       

       

      
        
          This
            Form and the following Forms to be included only if the
            Security is a Certified Security.

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

          Exhibit
            4.1

        

      

      FORM
        OF CONVERSION NOTICE

       

      To
        convert this Security into Cash or a combination of Cash and shares of Common
        Stock, as applicable and as provided in the Indenture check the box £

       

      To
        convert only part of this Security, state the principal amount to be converted
        (which must be $1,000 or a multiple of $1,000):
        ____________________________

       

      If
        you
        want the stock certificate made out in another person’s name, fill in the form
        below:

       

      ____________________________________

      (Insert
        assignee’s soc. sec. or tax ID no.)

       

      _______________________________________

      (Print
        or type assignee’s name, address and zip code)

       

      The
        undersigned (the “Applicant”) hereby makes application for the issuance of
        record to the name of the Applicant of shares of Common Stock.

       

      Dated: ________________________

       

      

       

      

        Your
          Signature: _____________________________________

        (Sign
          exactly as your name appears on the other side of this Security)

         

      

       

      Signature
        guaranteed by a qualified

      guarantor
        institution with membership in

      an
        approved guarantee program pursuant to 

      Rule
        17Ad-15 under the Securities Exchange

      Act
        of
        1934

       

      

      

      By:
        __________________

      Authorized
        Signatory

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

          Exhibit
            4.1

        

      

      

       

      FORM
        OF NOTICE OF REDEMPTION

       

      [DATE]

       

      To
        the
        Holders of the 3.00% Convertible Senior Notes due May 1, 2027 issued by Linear
        Technology Corporation:

       

      Linear
        Technology Corporation (the “Issuer”) by this written notice hereby
        exercises, pursuant to Section 5.01 of that certain Indenture (the
“Indenture”), dated as of April 24, 2007, between the Issuer and U.S. Bank
        National Association, its right to redeem $[_________] of its 3.00% Convertible
        Senior Notes due May 1, 2027 (the “Securities”). All capitalized terms used
        herein and not otherwise defined herein shall have the meanings assigned
        to such
        terms in the Indenture.

       

      1.  Redemption
        Date: [_______ __, ____]

       

      2.  Redemption
        Price: $[______]

       

      3.  Conversion
        Rate: Each $1,000 principal amount of the Securities is convertible into
        the
        Settlement Amount, at a rate of 20.00 shares of the Issuer’s common stock, par
        value $0.001 per share (the “Common Stock”), subject to adjustment, during the
        period described below.

       

      4.  Paying
        Agent and Conversion Agent: [NAME] [ADDRESS]

       

      5.  The
        Securities called for redemption may be converted at your option at any time
        from the date of this Notice of Redemption until 5:00 p.m. (New York City
        time) on the Business Day immediately prior to the Redemption Date set forth
        above.

       

      6.  The
        Securities called for redemption and not converted at your election prior
        to
        5:00 p.m. (New York City time) on the Business Day immediately prior to
        Redemption Date set forth above shall be redeemed on the Redemption
        Date.

       

      7.  If
        you
        elect to convert your Securities, you must satisfy the requirements for
        conversion set forth in your Securities.

       

      8.  Your
        Securities called for redemption must be surrendered by you (by effecting
        book
        entry transfer of the Securities or delivering Certificated Securities, together
        with necessary endorsements, as the case may be) to [Name of Paying Agent]
        at [insert address] in order for you to collect the Redemption
        Price.

       

      9.  [The
        Securities bearing the following Certificate Number(s) in the principal amount
        set forth below opposite such Certificate Number(s) are being
        redeemed:

       

      Certificate
        Number(s)  Principal
        Amount]

       

      10.  Unless
        the Issuer defaults in making the payment of the Redemption Price owed to
        you,
        Interest, Contingent Interest, if any, and Additional Interest, if any, on
        your
        Securities called for redemption shall cease to accrue on and after the
        Redemption Date.

       

      11.  CUSIP
        Number: 535678AA4

      LINEAR
        TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

          Exhibit
            4.1

        

      

      FORM
        OF NOTICE OF REPURCHASE

      [DATE]

       

      To
        the
        Beneficial Owners of the 3.00% Convertible Senior Notes due May 1, 2027 (the
        “Securities”) issued by Linear Technology Corporation:

       

      Linear
        Technology Corporation (the “Issuer”) by this written notice hereby
        notifies you, pursuant to Section [5.07] [5.08] of that certain Indenture
        (the “Indenture”), dated as of April 24, 2007, between the Issuer and U.S. Bank
        National Association, that you may request the Issuer to repurchase your
        Securities by delivery of a Repurchase Notice. Included herewith is the form
        of
        Repurchase Notice to be completed by you if you wish to have your Securities
        repurchased by the Issuer. All capitalized terms used herein and not otherwise
        defined herein shall have the meanings assigned to such terms in the
        Indenture.

       

      1.  Repurchase
        Date: [ ]

       

      2.  Repurchase
        Price: [ ]

       

      3.  Conversion
        Rate: To the extent described in Item 5 below, each $1,000 principal amount
        of the Securities is convertible into the Settlement Amount, at a rate of
        20.00
        shares of the Issuer’s common stock, par value $0.001 per share (the “Common
        Stock”), subject to adjustment.

       

      4.  Paying
        Agent and Conversion Agent: [NAME] [ADDRESS]

       

      5.  The
        Securities as to which you have delivered a Repurchase Notice to the Paying
        Agent may be converted if they are otherwise convertible pursuant to Article
        7
        of the Indenture and the terms of the Securities only if you withdraw such
        Repurchase Notice pursuant to the terms of the Indenture. You may be entitled
        to
        have your Securities converted into cash or a combination of cash and shares
        of
        the Issuer’s common stock (i) at any time on or after March 1, 2027 and prior to
        the Close of Business on the Business Day immediately preceding May 1, 2027
        and
        (ii) prior to March 1, 2027, only upon the occurrence of the following
        events:

       

      (i)  during
        any calendar quarter commencing after the calendar quarter ending June 30,
        2007
        and only during such calendar quarter, if the Closing Price of the Issuer’s
        Common Stock for twenty (20) or more Trading Days in a period of period of
        30
        consecutive trading days ending on the last Trading Day of the preceding
        calendar quarter is more than 130% of the Conversion Price on such last Trading
        Day;

       

      (ii)  during
        the five Business Day period after any five consecutive Trading Day period
        in
        which the Trading Price per $1,000 principal amount of the Securities for
        each
        day of such Measurement Period was less than 98% of the product of the Closing
        Price of the Common Stock and the Conversion Rate of the Securities on each
        such
        day;

       

      (iii)  if
        the
        Issuer has called the Securities for redemption, at any time prior to the
        Close
        of Business on the Business Day prior to the Redemption Date, even if the
        Securities are not otherwise convertible at such time;

       

      (iv)  if
        the
        Issuer elects to make specified distributions to holders of Common Stock
        as
        described in the Indenture;

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      (v)  upon
        the
        occurrence of certain specified corporate transactions described in the
        Indenture.

       

      6.  The
        Securities as to which you have delivered a Repurchase Notice must be
        surrendered by you (by effecting book entry transfer of the Securities or
        delivering Certificated Securities, together with necessary endorsements,
        as the
        case may be) to [Name of Paying Agent] at [insert address] in order for you
        to
        collect the Repurchase Price.

       

      7.  The
        Repurchase Price for the Securities as to which you have delivered a Repurchase
        Notice and not withdrawn such Repurchase Notice shall be paid promptly following
        the later of the Business Day immediately following such Repurchase Date
        and the
        date you deliver such Securities to [Name of Paying Agent].

       

      8.  In
        order
        to exercise your option to have the Issuer repurchase your Securities, you
        must
        deliver the Repurchase Notice, duly completed by you with the information
        required by such Repurchase Notice (as specified in Section [5.07] [5.08]
        of the Indenture) and deliver such Repurchase Notice to the Paying Agent at
        any time from 9:00 a.m. (New York City time) on [insert day that is 20
        Business Days prior to Repurchase Date] until 5:00 p.m. (New York City
        time) on the [insert the Business Day immediately preceding the Repurchase
        Date].

       

      9.  In
        order
        to withdraw any Repurchase Notice previously delivered by you to the Paying
        Agent, you must deliver to the Paying Agent, by 5:00 p.m. (New York
        time) on [insert day that is the second Business Day prior to the
        Repurchase Date], a written notice of withdrawal specifying (i) the
        certificate number, if any, of the Securities in respect of which such notice
        of
        withdrawal is being submitted, (ii) the principal amount of the Securities
        in respect of which such notice of withdrawal is being submitted (or if the
        Securities are not in definitive form, the notice of withdrawal must comply
        with
        the Applicable Procedures), and (iii) if you are not withdrawing your
        Repurchase Notice for all of your Securities, the principal amount of the
        Securities which still remain subject to the original Repurchase
        Notice.

       

      10.  Unless
        the Issuer defaults in making the payment of the Repurchase Price owed to
        you,
        Interest, Contingent Interest, if any, and Additional Amounts, if any, on
        your
        Securities as to which you have delivered a Repurchase Notice shall cease
        to
        accrue on and after the Repurchase Date.

       

      11.  CUSIP
        Number: 535678AA4

       

      12.  Any
        Security not properly tendered or not otherwise accepted for repurchase shall
        remain outstanding and continue to accrue interest, Contingent Interest,
        if any,
        and Additional Interest, if any.

       

      13.  Holders
        whose Securities are being repurchased only in part will be issued new
        Securities equal in principal amount to that portion of the Securities tendered
        (or transferred by book-entry) that is not to be repurchased, which portion
        must
        be equal to $1,000 in principal amount or an integral multiple
        thereof.

      

      

      LINEAR
        TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION

       

      

       

      

        
          

            
              
                
                

                
                

              

              
                
                

                
                  

                

              

              
                
                

                
                  Exhibit
                    4.1

                

              

            

        

      

      FORM
        OF [REPURCHASE][FUNDAMENTAL CHANGE REPURCHASE] NOTICE

       

      

       

      To:
        [Name
        of Paying Agent]

       

      

       

      The
        undersigned registered owner of this Security hereby acknowledges receipt
        of a
        notice from Linear Technology Corporation (the “Company”) pursuant to Section
        [5.07][5.08] of that certain Indenture (the “Indenture”), dated as of April 24,
        2007, between the Company and U.S. Bank National Association, and requests
        and
        instructs the Company to purchase the entire principal amount of this Security,
        or the portion thereof (which is $1,000 or an integral multiple thereof)
        below
        designated, in accordance with the terms of the Security and the Indenture
        at
        the [Repurchase][Fundamental Change Purchase] Price, together with accrued
        and
        unpaid interest (including Contingent Interest and Additional Interest, if
        any),
        to, but not including, the [Specified Repurchase][Fundamental Change Purchase]
        Date, to the registered Holder hereof.

       

      

       

      Date:
        ____________________    _______________________________________

      Signature
        (s)

      

      Signatures
        must be guaranteed by a qualified guarantor institution with membership in
        an
        approved 

      signature
        guarantee program pursuant to Rule 17Ad-15 under the Securities Exchange
        Act of
        1934.

      

      

      _______________________________________

      Signature
        Guaranty

      

      

      Principal
        amount to be redeemed (in an integral

      Multiple
        of $1,000, if less than all):

      

      

      _____________________

      

      

      Certificate
        number (if applicable):

      

      _____________________

      

      

      NOTICE:
        The signature to the foregoing election must correspond to the name as written
        upon the face of this Security in every particular, without any alteration
        or
        change whatsoever.

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      CERTIFICATE
        TO BE DELIVERED UPON EXCHANGE OR

       

      REGISTRATION
        OF TRANSFER OF RESTRICTED SECURITIES

       

      
        	 	
                Re:

              	
                3.00%
                  Convertible Senior Notes due May 1,
                  2027

              

      

       

      (the
        “Securities”)
        of
        Linear Technology Corporation

       

      This
        certificate relates to $ principal amount of Securities owned in (check
        applicable box):

       

      £
        book-entry or £
        definitive form by  (the
        “Transferor”).

       

      The
        Transferor has requested a Registrar or the Trustee to exchange or register
        the
        transfer of such Securities. In connection with such request and in respect
        of
        each such Security, the Transferor does hereby certify that the Transferor
        is
        familiar with transfer restrictions relating to the Securities as provided
        in
        Section 2.12 of the Indenture, dated as of April 24, 2007, between Linear
        Technology Corporation and U.S. Bank National Association, as trustee (the
        “Indenture”),
        and
        either the transfer of such Security is being made pursuant to an effective
        registration statement under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the
        “Securities Act”) (check applicable box) or the transfer or exchange, as the
        case may be, of such Security does not require registration under the Securities
        Act because (check applicable box):

       

      £ Such
        Security is being transferred pursuant to an effective registration statement
        under the Securities Act.

       

      £ Such
        Security is being acquired for the Transferor’s own account, without
        transfer.

       

      £ Such
        Security is being transferred to the Company or a Subsidiary (as defined
        in the
        Indenture) of the Company.

       

      £ Such
        Security is being transferred to a person the Transferor reasonably believes
        is
        a “qualified institutional buyer” (as defined in Rule 144A or any successor
        provision thereto (“Rule 144A”) under the Securities Act) to whom notice has
        been given that the transfer is being made in reliance on such Rule 144A,
        in
        reliance on Rule 144A.

       

      £ Such
        Security is being transferred pursuant to and in compliance with an exemption
        from the registration requirements under the Securities Act in accordance
        with
        Rule 144 (or any successor thereto) (“Rule 144”) under the Securities
        Act.

       

      £ Such
        Security is being transferred to a non-U.S. Person in an offshore transaction
        in
        compliance with Regulation S under the Securities Act (or any successor
        thereto).

       

      £ Such
        Security is being transferred pursuant to and in compliance with an exemption
        from the registration requirements of the Securities Act (other than an
        exemption referred to above).

       

      The
        Transferor acknowledges and agrees that, if the transferee will hold any
        such
        Securities in the form of beneficial interests in a Global Security that
        is a
“restricted security” within the meaning of Rule 144 under the Securities Act,
        then such transfer can be made only (x) pursuant to Rule 144A under the
        Securities Act to a transferee that the transferor reasonably believes is
        a
“qualified institutional buyer,” as defined in Rule 144A, or (y) pursuant to
        Regulation S under the Securities Act.

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      Dated: ________________________

       

      

       

      Your
        Signature:  _______________________________________________    

       

      (Sign
        exactly as your name appears on  the
        other
        side of this Security)

       

      

      Signature
        guaranteed by a qualified

      guarantor
        institution with membership in

      an
        approved guarantee program pursuant to 

      Rule
        17Ad-15 under the Securities Exchange

      Act
        of
        1934

       

      

      

      

      By:
        _________________

      Authorized
        Signatory

       

      

       

       

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      IN
        WITNESS WHEREOF,

       

      [                                                                                                        
        ]

       

      By:
        ___________________________________________

      Name:

      Title:

       

      
        
          
          

        

        
          
          

          
            

          

        

        
          
          

        

      

      EXHIBIT
        B

       

      The
        following table sets forth the increase in the Conversion Rate, expressed
        as a
        number of Additional Shares per $1,000 principal amount of
        Securities:

       

      
        	 	 	
                Effective
                  Date

              
	 	 	
                April
                  24,

              	
                May
                  1,

              	
                May
                  1,

              	
                May
                  1,

              	
                May
                  1,

              	
                May
                  1,

              	
                May
                  1,

              	
                May
                  1,

              
	
                Stock
                  Price

              	 	
                2007

              	
                2008

              	
                2009

              	
                2010

              	
                2011

              	
                2012

              	
                2013

              	
                2014

              
	
                $36.05

              	 	
                7.74

              	
                7.74

              	
                7.74

              	
                7.74

              	
                7.74

              	
                7.74

              	
                7.74

              	
                7.74

              
	
                $40.00

              	 	
                6.37

              	
                6.16

              	
                5.93

              	
                5.68

              	
                5.40

              	
                5.09

              	
                4.78

              	
                5.00

              
	
                $45.00

              	 	
                5.11

              	
                4.86

              	
                4.58

              	
                4.25

              	
                3.87

              	
                3.40

              	
                2.81

              	
                2.22

              
	
                $50.00

              	 	
                4.21

              	
                3.94

              	
                3.63

              	
                3.27

              	
                2.85

              	
                2.32

              	
                1.61

              	
                0.17

              
	
                $55.00

              	 	
                3.54

              	
                3.27

              	
                2.96

              	
                2.59

              	
                2.16

              	
                1.63

              	
                0.92

              	
                0.00

              
	
                $60.00

              	 	
                3.04

              	
                2.77

              	
                2.46

              	
                2.11

              	
                1.70

              	
                1.19

              	
                0.54

              	
                0.00

              
	
                $65.00

              	 	
                2.65

              	
                2.39

              	
                2.10

              	
                1.76

              	
                1.37

              	
                0.91

              	
                0.35

              	
                0.00

              
	
                $70.00

              	 	
                2.34

              	
                2.09

              	
                1.82

              	
                1.50

              	
                1.14

              	
                0.73

              	
                0.24

              	
                0.00

              
	
                $75.00

              	 	
                2.09

              	
                1.86

              	
                1.60

              	
                1.31

              	
                0.98

              	
                0.60

              	
                0.19

              	
                0.00

              
	
                $80.00

              	 	
                1.88

              	
                1.67

              	
                1.43

              	
                1.16

              	
                0.86

              	
                0.52

              	
                0.16

              	
                0.00

              
	
                $90.00

              	 	
                1.57

              	
                1.38

              	
                1.17

              	
                0.94

              	
                0.69

              	
                0.42

              	
                0.13

              	
                0.00

              
	
                $100.00

              	 	
                1.34

              	
                1.17

              	
                0.99

              	
                0.80

              	
                0.58

              	
                0.35

              	
                0.12

              	
                0.00

              
	
                $110.00

              	 	
                1.16

              	
                1.02

              	
                0.86

              	
                0.69

              	
                0.50

              	
                0.31

              	
                0.10

              	
                0.00

              
	
                $120.00

              	 	
                1.02

              	
                0.90

              	
                0.76

              	
                0.61

              	
                0.45

              	
                0.28

              	
                0.09

              	
                0.00

              
	
                $130.00

              	 	
                0.91

              	
                0.80

              	
                0.67

              	
                0.54

              	
                0.40

              	
                0.25

              	
                0.08

              	
                0.00

              
	
                $140.00

              	 	
                0.81

              	
                0.71

              	
                0.61

              	
                0.49

              	
                0.36

              	
                0.22

              	
                0.08

              	
                0.00

              
	
                $150.00

              	 	
                0.73

              	
                0.65

              	
                0.55

              	
                0.44

              	
                0.33

              	
                0.20

              	
                0.07

              	
                0.00

Source: [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00122-of-00352.parquet"}, [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00122-of-00352.parquet"}]]